Home

DCS800 Firmware Manual

1. FaultStopMode Mi TorgProvTime M2TorgProvTime Cho ComLossCtrl Ch2 ComLossCtrl H TorgRef2 Torque selector i 2 09 gt j ZOT SS ee Tab TorgRefExt 2510 TorgRefA Sel 224 Filter 206 Torque 2 TorqRef3 2501 TorgRefA2501 Ga x TorgRef1 Ain AIR i 25 024 TorgReia Fro Lo2dShare TorgRefB Torque ramp TorqMaxTref TorgMinTref TorgMaxAll lt TorgMinAll 25 06 26 05 Loch 26 04 TorqMuxMode 2 i 21 02 OfftMode INotUsed TorgSel 2601 4TorgSel2601 0 6 H StopMode Din Dn Speed Torg 1 or 2 21 04 LIE StopMode MCW Bit 11 MCW Bitt5 Speed Min 1 or 3 Od Ss lLocalLoossCti ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 Ge L Speed Limit 1 or 6 Eu ESCH Master parameter Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 210 sends the torque value to the follower Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 101 Follower Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 Follower activates write pointer Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 Ch2 FolSig2 70 19 and Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Follower parameter Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 2501 gets the torque value from the master Torque reference and torque selection 3 3 ms TorgRet2 Torque selector eg gt i
2. V ZrO En dwogsuew lt p i l daten H wer 49 J021UO09 pua ung yuaung Uogemu P P pame GER th 7 pasning D Lore DEEG jagapoyedo 60 26 J CED euovioasuew asjnd z 0 l UTISOG 4 saysew opd EELER EIDA Jeune giv Liv vgeuing Lgeumnz 07 vee eemplsiouxnis L D I Mma u o XBW w sge P pued ooo Bueos mem sw EE jo uo9 juano aneuwuy 104LNO9 LNAYYND JYNLYNWHY Appendix A Firmware structure diagram 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 454 ysp 6 sex wezbetp eznqjonz4s maz 008520 xaJ uZN xaJdzw PFSF eene Jager puotesrpuen a quowanseow Mam peu anopla non COE Furen ZIO wou EM ENEE ANOPISWONZN H S0 EE Eep pay ZW Eugen ZET uawainseaw Ee z Vo l reuingpiziow CET ppo be a5pua wo ooo as Guten ue naea einseeu Neue Du Z 1010W edfixespesn iw HET 66 anopiawon un HT 66 BIE pay LIN ez eum play Zoon usodi N Sne ELG seoeueu un Si be lesieeHPia Dror esueyoieg Ee AIX
3. User constants Constanti constant 1 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant2 constant 2 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Constant3 constant 3 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant4 constant 4 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant5 constant 5 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant6 constant 6 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant7 constant 7 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program 2767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 358 85 08 85 09 Signal Parameter name Constants constant 8 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Constant9 constant 9 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Constant10 constant 10 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N String1 string 1 Sets a string for the Ad
4. Parameter group 51 Direction ABB Parameter group 90 and 92 l iname iset value PLC lt gt Drive Datasets name def value 51 08 Output Opari Il gt E 90 01 DsetxValt 701 51 09 Output Opar2 z E 90 02 Dsetxval2 2301 51 10 Output upper 3 gt 1 3 90 03 DsetXVal3 2501 51 11 Output I O par 4 2 A 3 1 90 04 DsetXplus2Val1 702 51 12 Input Opari Al lt lt 2 1 92 01 DsetXplus1Val1 801 51 13 Input I O par 2 2 2 92 02 DsetXplus1Val2 104 51 14 Input I O par 3 6 23 92 03 DsetXplus1Val3 209 51 15 Input I O par 4 10 4 1 92 04 DsetXplus3Val1 802 51 16 Output I O par 5 IER e 3 2 90 05 DsetXplus2Val2 703 51 17 Output I O par 6 7 3 3 90 06 DsetXplus2Val3 51 18 Output I O par 7 i 43 gt 5 1 90 07 DsetXplus4valt 51 19 Output I O par8 144 gt 52 90 08 DsetXplus4Val2 51 20 Output I O par 9 145 gt 5 3 90 09 DsetXplus4val3 51 21 Input I O par 5 l 11 4 2 92 05 DsetXplus3Val2 E 101 51 22 Input I O par 6 2 12 4 3 92 06 DsetXplus3Val3 108 51 23 Input I O par 7 16 Kee 6 1 92 07 DsetXplus5Val1 901 51 24 Input Opar8 17 lt 6 2 92 08 DsetXplus5Val2 902 For proper communication shown values have to be used Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words Further information Output and input parameters 51 08 51 25 can
5. 1 CDP DW2 MF O Control gt gt OIL MIT 312 tool ke a a22 aZZ zos 255 G 9 GVO SDCS CON 4 TERMINAL ALLOCATION X3 Tacho and Al X4 Al and AO X5 Encoder X6 DI X7 DO lan act DCS800 terminal alloc_a ds T23 45678 910 12 345678 910 12 345678 910123 45678 910123 4567 8 e Toi ken 2222 2ANAF gt IFIMANNOOLVHLMXANDYNOORDMYS KCNODTOORS SeoortrNVanla YYSSSSGOOSS Freer te gt gt NS OOOO0O00S KRP LILIT lt q Y IIS SR HDD aoagaaa 38 8 E E Q 50 N 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation Manual e f 456 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters Index of signals and parameters alphabetic order T2P MOC rarata anA ces 325 12P BevfimeOut 326 432 12P Glahode riiin 94 370 432 12P TIMEOUT seeen 94 370 432 LEE cscs ee e see 224 KEIER 225 AcctComptier me 277 ele e Hi 277 ACCTING WEE 268 ACCTIING2 EE 270 ACAD PIGS AYA ces deccetatesesctnivihe gd erreenreaisused 354 AdapbrogCmd 147 352 446 449 e lee 379 PACU RRE 382 AhCounter ccceceecceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeanaees 179 Al Mondm 293 409 435 445 ANNE 194 AH Haha 77 246 AVL AIR 77 246 NI Mee ege eege 194 ARH RE 247 AL owyal 247 ALON al See siete ccd aces ate a ea ee ta cay 194 PSIG Va EE 247 AIBEOW Vallis uerge eher dh Safer eege 248 AIAN EE 194 E el 248 AI4LOWVAL ccicccccistcccsicaceivesstvedvevecscueseenteves 248 AS Va 194 AI5HighVal cd csincs ees dstnssteaceca
6. StartStop a ee ee EE by bo o 2 e Attention It is not possible to write on the used main control word by means of Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y Bito On Off1N Biti Off2N Coast Stop Bit2 Off3N E stop Bit3 Run Bit4 RampOutZero Bits RampHold Bit RampInZero Bit7 Reset Bit8 Inching1 Bit9 Inching2 Bit10 RemoteCmd Bit11 Bit15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name DO CirlWord digital output control word DOCW The DO control word 1 can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control To connect bits of the DO CtrlWord 7 05 with DO1 to DO8 use the parameters in group 14 Digital outputs DO9 to DO12 are directly send to the extension I O s Thus they are only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name BO DO B1 DO2 DO3 reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Comment this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digit
7. step reference S C i part too long d optimal curve d iM W Wun Maand Ki Y narenn p part too h igh EMF controller step responses DriveWindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 File Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help Je Haex Slee alel Kalad sl ranj aK Hee Xx amp ocs 800 D1 0H1 A Application amp Control E Datalogger g Event logger Faut logger Memory 7 Bae 01 Phys Act Values 02 SPC Signals 03 Reffact Values a 1 01 17 EMF YoltActRel O 1 Par 1 17 2 03 26 VoltRef2 0H1 Par 3 26 el 20 02 MiSpeedMax rpm O 1 Par 20 2 44 01 FidctriMode O 1 Par 44 1 Zi 44 07 EMF CtriPostim 0H1 Par 44 7 Zi 44 08 EMF CtriNegLim 0 1 Par 44 8 44 09 KpEMF 0 1 Par 44 9 44 10 TIEMF ms 0 1 Par 44 10 Zi 44 25 voltCorr 0 1 Par 44 25 EI amp 99 04 MiBaseSpeed rpm 0 1 Par 99 4 Monitor etting Value Mode Normal 110 Interval ms 10 KG History Buffer s 3600 000 Klx Axis Length s 10 000 T Y axis Maximum 110 00 BY Axis Minimum 80 00 104 1 01 17 EMF voltActRel 0 00 100 00 2 03 26 VoltRef2 0 00 100 00 3 Channel 3 0 00 100 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 Chanel 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 92 864 Monitor 10 00 EI W cs 800 D1 mn ai 2 in E ze Go ei DriveWindow manual tuning E
8. voan HSH esc LN Daer juanma play LION WNJEHNOPIA sp dn 0E jesiana1 Det TS rtleussnnaun De Sgr spontan O6xN 5iN OPIS ozxn4inopi4 Opxnsungpls 4 DEN Levy anbio uo eZUBaUI au wing YE MPIH YXNA ES NEES vee K SCHTE 1 rm wnwxew 0 18S S wr eNO aW H BUER wpsodgo awa HD EE EI Je anadi H G0rE A DEEN mme og jadosyeunion H92 ty u gyeaMPl HOT Pr peedsesea i H p066 o ett aq ueo Ir U paedSioy uay Fues o ge lesq4peeds LW H peedsion HOAWONLIN 0 66 uN UA He ee sajjonuco 4na uoneoyipow KOZE FPUIOVIOASUEN PIA HHUA levy uiBieMon ey edixeszpesn iw H zCee angpigwontw H TF 66 WOASUEWWON HOF 66 peadseseaiw H 0 66 ANQUON IW H e066 HOAWON LW H 2066 sper ue H 1066 HV AWA YUL ue 4unsod I Step oe GE GER yuawansesw ynog OFL X Wem Jeune leuroyingauoa CSL Tour POP H zuowainseow wvIonsuEW ETT gt aBeyjon reuroyiionsuew CELE Y tai
9. giv LW Pesto SLS bao xeW unpasnbio Ezz 90 02 BUOe HETOZ zopigwins k E Iesel xenu gbio ZU em onbo xewpesnbioy dweybio Leag DS uu bio eag bouge uogesuadwoo ysepjoeq jee Houbuot INO LW EZE patioun Haro 6pgwituno iw 8L 0Z dwogpeo7 HEA mossoqwog Zuo S L OZ mossoqwoo our 90 024 Su l t OF EE Aw LAOIADIOL lU EE apowdoysyne4 OF mossoqwwoo Be DE DESEN es apowdois 3j PO be apowdois EU L apon moj 20 L Joy99 s ab Ueubat Weuiabo iyxenbioL 910 4 wwiypeeds p 10 4 xeyypseds 40 1 umpescel z 40 1 bsoyjpaadg 4 9 0 Logziesbio 1 Ia ube ube Jet Setbuet Sia Mov Zi Ya MOY SHA M N LE a MONI tia Hal TOS jasbioy pasmion E ER ER SS d due enbo LISS oeupat areugpeo DU SEESCH SS D Sa e x ESZ Loszviewbo1 ose Joys Cree DU xapyboL zjeybioy ec O
10. DEET pue quswieunseaus eum einjewsy Itzig joyyonuuy ARIS jenas asind Z 0 1 Jesu jenas oand zt Verstoe Aug opwnOaua0 quewieinseou quauino ampewy oler wou pw omg 07 SOA La uweydyuny xepeydywiy MISE JagepoywedoQ D yew MO u rg NM Guyeos uerg wapundangima US Er DEI Omg LN anguuydy LW Boer Z0 EE ES eegenen SOCE jesepoyiedo JOER 2 zo AWI peadsion speedguimunguny ppaadswrnouny gpaodgwrunouuy zpaodswunouuy Ipeedguinunguuy peadsuiunoxeyy ZER o z epogedhy 4 10 26 28piguTNO LN V ZrO 0 e ame BIg Pome era coy Gin ZP Su Sengen Iueurm Det ees sw g joujuoo xny pue Au SJOLOXO Dia Om OH INOC LNAYYNSD OI Z JO L 00N nels jayesed ELO DEE H KS Jeiomueg puen Seu ZU ER jeseponiedo gm dwogsurew JOASUEN pesmieuing DEI em Verst pp IOCE F sponteo EEN 1 4ursog 4 saysew opd agind z ETH Jeune giv Liv xaeyng Lbeyuing 7 er Lesung ass H
11. Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 129 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control 40005 lt data word 2 2 DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 209 default TorgRef2 2 09 input data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from drive to overriding control 40006 lt data word 2 3 up to DsetXplus7Val3 92 12 907 default Alarmword2 9 07 input data word 12 alarm word 2 12 data word from drive to overriding control 40024 lt data word 8 3 DCS800 parameter setting using a Modbus monitoring the drive Note New settings of group 52 take effect only after the next power up of the adapter Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 130 Setting of PLC parameter groups 90 and 92 Parameter group 90 and 92 PLC lt gt Drive Datasets name i DsetXVal3 DsetXplus1Val1 DsetXplus1Val2 2 DsetXplus1Val3 DsetXplus2Val1 DsetXplus2Val2 DsetXplus2Val3 DsetXplus3Val1 DsetXplus3Val2 DsetXplus3Val3 DsetXplus4Val1 DsetXplus4Val2 DsetXplus4Val3 DsetXplus5Val1 DsetXplus5Val2 DsetXplus5Val3 DsetXplus6Val1 DsetX
12. Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 325 Signal Parameter name 12 pulse operation 12P Mode 12 pulse mode The setting of OperModeSel 43 01 determines the reaction of 12P Mode 47 01 OperModeSel 43 01 12PParMaster respectively 12PParSlave 0 Normal 12 pulse parallel master and 12 pulse parallel slave use their own current controller independently default 1 Difference the 12 pulse parallel slave calculates the difference between the 12 pulse parallel master actual current and its own actual current and controls this difference to zero by means of its current controller not implemented yet 2 Sequential not used for 12 pulse parallel mode 3 DiodeBridge not used for 12 pulse parallel mode OperModeSel 43 01 12PSerMaster respectively 12PSerSlave 0 Normal 12 pulse serial master and 12 pulse serial slave are controlled by the same firing angle default 1 Difference not used for 12 pulse serial mode 2 Sequential Sequential control of the firing angles Only one unit changes its firing angle while the other unit s firing angle is fixed at the minimum or maximum firing angle See diagram below 3 DiodeBridge the 12 pulse serial slave converter is a diode bridge ArmAlphaMin 20 15 Firing l angleof J slave y i Firing angle of master ArmAlphaMax 20 14 output voltage of system UDC master UDC slave minimum maximum DC voltage DC voltage 12P Mode 47
13. Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus 120 ohm 1 1 4 W In the above example termination is mandatory at the master and the 10 follower SDCS DSL 4 jumper S1 1 2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 87 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the master and all followers Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the masters node ID number to 1 and add one for each follower Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 follower DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 2 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 11 BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s Activate the mailboxes The master follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes for data transfer Thus data transfer to any device node in the system is possible Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data negative only receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs e g 5 and 5 are needed Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 follower
14. N Co e A a oa OD ak N Configuration numbers of each data word and its corresponding pointer Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 140 Adaptive Program AP Chapter overview This chapter describes the basics of the Adaptive Program and instructs how to build a program What is the Adaptive Program Conventionally the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range The parameters make the programming easy but the choices are limited you cannot customize the operation any further The Adaptive Program makes customizing possible without the need of a special programming tool or language The program is built of function blocks The DCS800 Control Panel is the programming tool The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template sheets The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 16 function blocks The program may consist of several separate functions Features The Adaptive Program of DCS800 provides the following features 16 function blocks more than 20 block types password protection 4 different cycle times selectable shift functions for function blocks debug functions e output forcing e breakpoint e single step e single cycle additional output write pointer parameter for each block group 86 10 additional user constants gro
15. Note1 FidRefHyst 45 10 is only effective for FidCtrlMode 44 01 Fix Rev or EMF Rev Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N FidRefHyst field torque reference hysteresis To prevent the field reversal from continuous toggling due to a too small torque reference a TorqRefUsed 2 13 hysteresis in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 is available The hysteresis NotUsed min ExtReverse NotUsed det Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name FidRefGain field current reference gain Optitorque calculates the field current reference depending on TorqRefUsed 2 13 Thus the field current is reduced to a smaller value if TorqRefUsed 2 13 is accordingly low This speeds up the field reversal assuming TorqRefUsed 2 13 is low during field reversal Optitorque is activated by means of FldCtriMode 44 01 and like field reversal only available for motor 1 field exciter The relation between TorqRefUsed 2 13 and FldCurRefM1 3 30 is linear and without offset It is defined by means of the FidRefGain 45 11 The gain is related to M1NomFidCur 99 11 as well as to MotNomTorque 4 23 I 100 A gt TorgRefUsed 2 13 L FidRefGain 45 11 Example With FldRefGain 45 11 20 100 field current is generated at TorqRefUsed 2 13 20 Note1 FidRefGain 45 11 is only effective for FidCtrlMode 44 01 Fix Opti EMF Opti Fix Rev Op
16. Unlocking of parameters is only possible if the proper pass code the value which was present during locking is used To open parameters set SysPassCode 16 03 to the proper value and change ParLock 16 02 from Locked to Open After the parameters are locked or opened the value in SysPassCode 16 03 is automatically changed to 0 0 Open parameter change possible default 1 Locked parameter change not possible Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N SysPassCode system pass code The SysPassCode 16 03 is a number between 1 and 30 000 to lock all parameters by means of ParLock 16 02 After using Open or Locked SysPassCode 16 03 is automatically set back to Attention Do not forget the pass code Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 256 Signal Parameter name LocLock local lock Local control can be disabled by setting LocLock 16 04 to True If LocLock 16 04 is released in local control it becomes valid after the next changeover to remote control No pass code is required to change LocLock 16 04 0 False local control released default 1 True local control blocked Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N MacroChangeMode macro change mode The choice to release Motor1 2 shared motion or macros User1 2 is defined by means of MacroChangeMode 16 05 0 User1 2 change between parameter sets User1 and User2 default 1 Motor1 2
17. 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and a trip of level 4 is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note1 FaultStopMode 30 30 doesn t apply to communication faults Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N RampStop det RampStop ExtFaultSel external fault selector The drive trips with F526 ExternalDI Fau tWord2 9 02 bit 9 if a binary input for an external fault is selected and 0 0 NotUsed no reaction default 1 Dl1 0 no fault 1 fault 2 DI2 0 no fault 1 fault 3 DIS 0 no fault 1 fault 4 Dl4 0 no fault 1 fault 5 DI5 0 no fault 1 fault 6 DI6 0 no fault 1 fault 7 DI7 0 no fault 1 fault 8 DI8 0 no fault 1 fault 9 DI9 0 no fault 1 fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 no fault 1 fault Only available with d
18. 315 Signal Parameter name FldWeakDyn dynamic field weakening If the motor speed passes the field weakening point base speed quickly voltage overshoot may occur To solve this problem the field weakening point can be lowered by means of FldWeakDyn 44 15 FldWeakDyn 44 15 is set in percent of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Note1 The lowered field weakening point is compensated by the EMF controller in case of constant speed or slow speed change EMF CirlPosLim 44 07 has to be set high enough to allow the EMF E C min 100 max unit et pT controller to compensate Field current FldWeakDyn 44 15 IN Speed FidweakDyn dsf Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N 44 17 FidBoostSel field boost selector Selector for FidBoostSel 44 17 0 NotUsed field boost is blocked default 1 Run field boost starts with Run 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 2 DI 1 field boost 0 no field boost 3 DI2 1 field boost 0 no field boost 4 DIS 1 field boost 0 no field boost 5 D 1 field boost 0 no field boost 6 DI5 1 field boost 0 no field boost 7 DI6 1 field boost 0 no field boost 8 DI7 1 field boost 0 no field boost 9 DI8 1 field boost 0 no field boost 10 DI9 1 field boost 0 no field boost Only available with digital extension board 11 DI10 1 field boost 0 no field boost Only available with digital extension board 12 DI11 1
19. Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 7 03 AuxCtriWord2 auxiliary control word 2 ACW2 The auxiliary control word 2 can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name Value Comment DO reserved B1 reserved reserved reserved OO ch OO ch OO zk OO ch DisableBridge1 bridge 1 blocked bridge 1 released DisableBridge2 bridge 2 blocked bridge 2 released reserved reserved DriveDirection drive direction reverse see note 1 drive direction forward see note 1 reserved DirectSpeedRef speed ramp output is overwritten and forced to DirectSpeedRef 23 15 speed ramp is active TorqProvOK 1 Selected motor torque proving is OK This bit to be set by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control see also M1TorgProvTime 42 10 Selected motor torque proving is inactive This bit is to be set by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control ForceBrake selected motor the brake remains closed applied see note 2 selected motor the brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 Brake control reserved B14 reserved B15 ResetPIDCtrl reset and freeze P D controller release PID controller Note1 Changes of DriveDirection become active only in drive state RdyRun Changing the speed direction of a running drive RdyRef state by mean
20. Overriding control Ir DCS800 DCS800 DCF505 armature excitation DCF506 Communication in field exciter mode Large field exciters are fully controlled via the DCSLink DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 default M1FexNode 94 08 21 default M2FexNode 94 09 30 default Single drive with one or two large field exciters 15 excitation single drive P94 01 21 P94 01 1 ee F 2 excitation P94 01 30 In the large field exciters set OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv and CommandSel 10 01 FexLink as source for the control word OnOff1 StartStop and Reset The reference is selected by CurSel 43 02 FexCurRef In the armature converter the field current is set by means of M1NominalFldCur 99 11 and in the large field exciter the current is set by means of M1NomCur 99 03 Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 58 Parameters to be set in the DCS800 armature converter Parameter Master Comments M1FIdMinTrip 30 12 XXX sets level for F541 M1FexLowCur FidCtriMode 44 01 1 EMF EMF controller released field weakening active depending on the application FidMinTripDly 45 18 2000 ms def delays F541 M1FexLowCur DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 FexTimeOut 94 07 100 ms def causes F516 MiFexCom M1FexNode 94 08 21 def Use the same node number as in DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 of the field exciter MiNomFldCur 99 11
21. PosCount2Low position counter low value encoder 2 Position counter low word pulse encoder 2 PosCount2lnitLo 50 21 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 Rollover 0 0 and 65536 360 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y PosCount2High position counter high value encoder 2 Position counter high word pulse encoder 2 PosCount2InitHi 50 22 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 65536 pulse edges Scaled 1 1 revolution Rollover always 0 Int Scaling 1 SI Volatile Y 183 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal and parameter list 184 Signal Parameter name 3 07 PosCountLow position counter low value encoder 1 Position counter low word pulse encoder 1 PosCountlnitLo 50 08 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 Rollover 0 0 and 65536 360 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y PosCountHigh position counter high value encoder 1 Position counter high word pulse encoder 1 PosCountinitHi 50 09 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 65536 pulse edges Scaled 1 revolution Rollover always 0 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y PID Out output PID controller PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input see gro
22. RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 is automatically set back to DONE after the refreshing is finished 0 DONE default 1 RESET refresh the parameters of the fieldbus adapter Note1 This service is only available for Rxxx fieldbus adapters Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N Fieldbus36 fieldbus parameter 36 Fieldbus parameter 36 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the Modbus adapter RMBA xx see also Modbus adapter manual Note1 If a Modbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon the next power up of the Modbus adapter StationNumber station number Defines the address of the station Two stations with the same station number are not allowed online Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N BaudRate baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the Modbus link 0 reserved 1 600 600 Baud 2 1200 1200 Baud 3 2400 2400 Baud 4 4800 4800 Baud 5 9600 9600 Baud default 6 19200 19200 Baud Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N Parity parity Defines the use of parity and stop bit s The same setting must be used in all online stations 0 reserved 1 None1Stopbit no parity bit one stop bit 2 None2Stopbits no parity bit two stop bits 3 Odd odd parity indication bit one st
23. TorqRefA 25 01 and TorqRefA Sel 25 10 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile Y TorqLimAct actual used torque limit Shows parameter number of the actual active torque limit 0 no limitation active 2 19 TorqMaxAll 2 19 is active includes current limits and field weakening 2 20 TorqMinAll 2 20 is active includes current limits and field weakening 2 22 TorqUsedMax 2 22 selected torque limit is active 2 23 TorqUseadMin 2 23 selected torque limit is active 20 07 TorqMaxSPC 20 07 speed controller limit is active 20 08 TorqMinSPC 20 08 speed controller limit is active 20 09 TorqMaxTref 20 09 external reference limit is active 20 10 TorqMinTref 20 10 external reference limit is active 20 22 TorqGenMax 20 22 regenerating limit is active 2 08 TorgRef1 2 08 limits TorqRef2 2 09 see also TorqSel 26 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y SpeedScaleAct actual used speed scaling The value of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 equals 20 000 speed units Currently used speed scaling in rom for MotSel 8 09 Motor 20 000 speed units M1SpeedScale 50 01 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 lt 10 or mathematically If 50 01 10 then 20 000 50 07 in rpm If 50 01 lt 10 then 20 000 Max 1 20 07 I 1 20 02 I in rpm M1SpeedScale 50 01 gt 10 M1SpeedScale 50 01 SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1Sp
24. pass filtering with 200 ms CurRippleFilt 1 10 is generated and compared against CurRippleLim 30 19 CurRipple 1 09 CurRippleFilt 1 10 F517 ArmCurRipple i A117 ArmCurRipple CurRippleLim 30 19 I CurRippleSel 30 18 l 5 6 DCS800 FW curr rip mon calc dsf Current ripple monitor calculation Note The load influences the error signal CurRippleFilt 1 10 Current near discontinuous level will create values of about 300 Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f ConvCurActRel 1 15 if a thyristor is not fired High inductive loads will create values of about 90 ConvCurActRel 1 15 if a thyristor is not fired Commissioning hint It is not possible to pre calculate clear levels The current control reacts to unstable current feedback 417 The load is continuously driving the current if a thyristor is not fired Speed feedback monitor The speed feedback monitor supervises an attached analog tacho or encoder for proper function by means of measured speed and measured EMF Above a certain EMF the measured speed feedback must be above a certain threshold The sign of the speed measurement must be correct as well SpeedActEnc 1 03 SpeedActEnc2 1 40 or SpeedActTach 1 05 D I SpeedFbMonLey 30 1 4 AND a H Field direction 6 03 bit 4 EMF VoltActRel 1 17 EMF FbMonLev
25. 02 1500 04 S01 0090 04 01 3300 04 02 1500 05 N oO Or BR a Po O 01 0090 05 01 3300 05 02 1500 06 01 0125 04 01 3300 06 02 1500 07 01 0125 05 01 3300 07 02 1900 08 S01 0180 04 01 3300 08 02 2000 04 S 01 0180 05 01 3300 12 02 2000 05 S01 0230 04 01 4000 04 02 2050 05 01 0230 05 01 4000 05 02 2050 06 01 0315 04 01 4000 06 02 2050 07 01 0315 05 01 4000 07 02 2500 04 01 0290 06 01 4000 08 02 2500 05 S01 0405 04 01 3300 10 02 2050 10 S01 0405 05 01 4000 10 02 2600 10 01 0470 04 S01 4800 06 02 2600 12 01 0470 05 01 4800 07 02 3000 04 01 0590 06 S01 0610 04 01 4800 08 01 5200 04 02 3000 05 02 2500 06 S01 0610 05 01 5200 05 02 2500 07 S01 0740 04 02 0025 04 02 3000 06 S 01 0740 05 02 0025 05 02 3000 07 S01 0900 04 02 0050 04 02 2500 08 01 0900 05 02 0050 05 02 3000 08 S01 0900 06 02 0075 04 02 3300 04 S01 0900 07 02 0075 05 02 3300 05 01 1200 04 02 0100 04 02 3300 06 01 1200 05 02 0100 05 02 3300 07 S01 1500 04 02 0140 04 02 3300 08 01 1500 05 02 0140 05 02 3300 12 S01 1500 06 02 0200 04 02 4000 04 S 01 1500 07 02 0200 05 02 4000 05 S01 1900 08
26. 2 125 kBit s 125 kBit s total cable length max 500 m 3 250 kBit s 250 kBit s total cable length max 250 m 4 500 kBit s 500 kBit s total cable length max 100 m default 5 800 kBit s 800 kBit s total cable length max 50 m 6 888 kBit s 888 kBit s total cable length max 35 m 20 kBit s 500 kBit s 7 1 MBit s 1 MBit s total cable length approximately 25 m Note1 Maximum total cable length should not exceed 100 m Maximum amount of connected stations is 50 e g 25 drives including one external field exciter each Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N 12P TimeOut 12 pulse timeout Time delay before a 12 pulse communication break is declared and F535 12PulseCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 2 is set 12P TimeOut 94 03 is only active in the 12 pulse master The communication fault is inactive if 12P TimeOut 94 03 is set to 0 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms_ Type l Volatile N 94 04 12P SlaNode 12 pulse slave node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of the 12 pulse slave drive in the 12 pulse master drive See also examples 2 and 4 above The 12 pulse node ID is inactive if 12P SlaNode 94 04 is set to 0 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N 94 06 94 07 FexTimeOut field exciter timeout Time delay before a field exciter communication break is declared Depending on the fex with the communication break either F516 M1iFexCom FaultWord1 9 01 bit 15 or F519 M2FexCom FaultWorad2 9 02 bit 2 is set FexTimeOut 94 0
27. 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 152 Parameter value as a boolean input How the block handles the input e The block reads the selected value as an integer e The block uses the bit defined by the bit field as the boolean input Bit value 1 is boolean value true and 0 is boolean value false Example The figure below shows the value of input BlockxIn1 selection parameter when the input is connected to a bit indicating the status of digital input D12 The digital input states are internally stored in D StatWord 8 05 Bit 1 corresponds to DI2 bit O to DI1 Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8407 Block1In3 Connection to 805 a 80 5 output of DI s CANCEL group x 100 index Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8408 Block Attrib Setti f bit 1 of Setting of bi 1 o 0100 hex CANCEL How to select the input See the section Parameter value as an integer input above Note The parameter selected as an input should have a packed boolean value binary data word Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 153 Constant as a boolean input String input How to set and connect the input e Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode Enter e Give the constant If boolean value true is needed set the constant to 1 If boolean value false is needed set to 0 e Accept by Enter e Scroll to attribute parameter BlockxAttrib e S
28. Converter current tripping level This signal is set during initialization of the drive new values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling 1 1A Type l Volatile Y MaxBridgeTemp maximum bridge temperature Maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 0 Read from S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 if S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 0 The drive trips with F504 ConvOverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 3 when MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 is reached A104 ConvOverTemp AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 3 is set when the actual converter temperature is approximately 5 C below MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 Int Scaling 1 1 C Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 190 Signal Parameter name DCSLinkStat1 DCSLink status 1 of field exciter nodes Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 1 to 16 Bit Name Value Comment BO Node1 DCSLink node1 active and OK DCSLink node1 not active or faulty B1 Node2 DCSLink node2 active and OK DCSLink node2 not active or faulty Node3 DCSLink node3 active and OK DCSLink node3 not active or faulty DCSLink node4 active and OK DCSLink node4 not active or faulty DCSLink node5 active and OK DCSLink node5 not active or faulty DCSLink node6 active and OK DCSLink node6 not active or faulty DCSLink node7 active and OK DCSLink node7 not active or faulty DCSLink n
29. Data set 2 word 2 TX PDO21 3rdObj 51 22 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Actual Value 2 see page 63 Data set 2 word 3 TX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 23 6 Hex 6 Actual Value 2 see page 63 Data set 2 word 3 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 111 TX PDO21 4thObj 51 24 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Actual Value 3 see page 63 Data set 4 word 1 0 A Hex 10 Actual Value 3 see page 63 Data set 4 word 1 1 Transparent TX PDO21 4thSubj 51 25 TransparentIProfil 51 26 FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by CANopen adapter The values can be automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCAN 01 DCS800 parameter setting using groups 90 and 92 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 112 ControlNet communication with fieldbus adapter RCNA 01 Gen
30. EMF Thus the main idea of the flux linearization is to find field currents which produces desired EMF voltage at a certain speed The flux linearization is done by means of a function block defined by 3 values field current at 40 flux FldCurFlux40 44 12 field current at 70 flux FldCurFlux70 44 13 field current at 90 flux FldCurFlux90 44 14 The intermediate values are interpolated During commissioning all 3 parameters must be set if the flux linearization is needed DriveWindow information Y OCS 800 01 gn 2 E HS Ei 9 9 i 9 Si Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 44 Manual tuning Manual tuning of the flux linearization connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode make sure the speed feedback device is either encoder or analog tacho M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Encoder or Tacho and not EMF monitor MotSpeed 1 04 ArmVoltAct 1 14 and Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 set M1FidMinTrip 30 12 10 set FldCtriMode 44 01 EMF set EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 0 set EMF CtriNegLim 44 08 0 set FldCurFlux40 44 12 FldCurFlux70 44 13 and FldCurFlux90 44 14 to default give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to run the motor at e g half base speed make sure that the motor is running without load read ArmVoltAct 1 14 e g the measured value is 220 V reduce the flux with FluxC
31. Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block14Out block 14 output The value of function block 14 output Block1 Output 84 87 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block150ut block 15 output The value of function block 15 output Block1Output 84 93 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block16Out block 16 output The value of function block 16 output Block16Output 84 99 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 This parameter group contains internal variables and should not be changed by the user 88 25 M1TachMaxSpeed motor 1 tacho maximum speed Internally used tacho maximum speed for motor 1 This value is depending on the analog tacho output voltage e g 60 V at 1000 rpm and the maximum speed of the drive system which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 This value should o
32. MailBoxCycle3 cycle time mailbox 3 The function of MailBoxCycle3 94 25 is depending on the setting of MailBox3 94 24 If MailBox3 94 24 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle3 94 25 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals values from 1 4 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle3 94 25 is set to 0 ms If MailBox3 94 24 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle3 94 25 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle3 94 25 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 1 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 2 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 3 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 3 tra
33. Mot1FexSwVer 4 08 and Mot2FexSwVer 4 09 Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 47 Start and stop sequences General The drive is controlled by control words MainCtrlWord 7 01 or UsedMCW 7 04 respectively The MainStatWord 8 01 provides the hand shake and interlocking for the overriding control The overriding control uses the MainCtrlWord 7 01 or hardware signals to command the drive The actual status of the drive is displayed in the MainStatWord 8 01 The marks e g describe the order of the commands according to Profibus standard The overriding control can be AC 800M via DDCS communication serial communication e g Profibus hardware signals see CommandSel 10 01 Local I O master follower communication Adaptive Program or application program Switch on sequence RemoteCmd 2 Inching2 SS Inching1 RamplnZero amp RampHold Q RampOutZerd CH CH JI Reset Off before On On main cont On Run with reference E Stop Start inhibit Examples for the MainCtrlWord 7 01 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 48 Start the drive The start sequence given below is only valid for MainContCtriMode 21 16 On Attention All signals have to be maintained On and Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 0 and 1 commands are only taken over with their rising edges Overriding Co
34. Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name FaultWord4 fault word 4 Fault word 4 Bit Fault text Fault code Comment and trip level BO ParComp F549 1 parameter compatibility the parameter causing the fault can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 ParMemRead F550 1 reading the actual parameter set or a user parameter set from either parameter flash or Memory Card failed checksum fault AlRange analog input range AI Mon4mA 30 29 MechBrake selected motor mechanical brake M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 M1BrakeFitTime 42 05 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 TachPolarity selected motor tacho respectively pulse encoder polarity TachoRange Overflow of AlTacho input reserved reserved for PID controller TorqProving selected motor torque proving M1TorqProvTime 42 10 the Adaptive Program application program or overriding control providing the acknowledge signal TorqProvOK AuxCtriWord2 7 03 bit 11 ReversalTime reversal time ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 RevDly 43 14 reserved no action reserved no action APFault1 Adaptive Program fault 1 APFault2 Adaptive Program fault 2 APFault3 Adaptive Program fault 3 APFault4 Adaptive Program fault 4 APFault5 Adaptive Program fault 4 Int Scaling 1 S Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 216 Signal Parameter name UserFaultWord user defined fault word 1 U
35. Start stop seq_a dsf Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 52 Field excitation General Depending on the application the DCS800 has the capability to use several different kinds of field exciters or combinations of them The differences of the field exciters and their functions are explained here Field Reversal Changing the field current direction is needed when the armature converter has only one bridge 2 quadrant Field reversal is changing the direction of the field current Thus the direction of the speed is changing and it is possible to regenerate energy back into the mains For example to decelerate a large inertia To initiate the field reversal the sign of TorqRefUsed 2 13 is taken and defines the desired direction of the field current Armature converters with two anti parallel bridges 4 quadrant do not require field reversal FluxRefsum Flux linearization FidCurFlux40 FidCurFlux70 FidCurFlux90 Optitorque Sign Field reversal TorqRefUsed FidCtriMode FidRefHyst ParChange FidHeatSel 21 18 18 ES M1FIdRefMode ForceFldDir Becca M1FidRefext 45 06 O TorqRefUsed FidCtriMode FidRefGain Overview field reversal and optitorque Field reversal is activated by means of parameter FidCtrlMode 44 01 Field control Mode Functionality Armature converter Fix co
36. Start up procedure The Safety Instructions at the beginning of this manual have to be observed with extreme care during the start up procedure The start up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician Check the mechanical and electrical installation the drive according to the DCS800 Hardware Manual 3ADW000194 Checking with the power switched off Check the settings of the main breaker e g overcurrent 1 6 short circuit current 10 l time for thermal tripping 10 s time overcurrent thermal and voltage relays the earth fault protection e g Bender relay Check the insulation of the mains voltage cables or busbars between the secondary side of the dedicated transformer and the drive disconnect the dedicated transformer from its incoming voltage check that all circuits between the mains and the drive e g control auxiliary voltage are disconnected measure the insulation resistance between L1 L2 L1 L3 L2 L3 L1 PE L2 PE L3 PE the result should be MQs Check the installation crosscheck the wiring with the drawings check the mechanical mounting of the motor and pulse encoder or analog tacho make sure that the motor is connected in a correct way armature field serial windings cable shields check the connections of the motor fan if existing make sure that the converter fan is connected correctly especially in modules size D6 and D7 were star or delta co
37. The speed adaptation is valid for positive and negative speeds Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 278 24 17 24 27 Signal Parameter name KpSTiSMinSpeed minimum speed for p i part speed controller The speed limit below which the proportional gain and the integral time are defined by KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 and TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 PL rpm 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N KpSTiSMaxSpeed maximum speed for p i part speed controller The speed limit above which the proportional gain and the integral time become constant and are defined by KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 SE rpm 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N KpSValMinSpeed p part speed controller value at minimum speed KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 determines the proportional gain percentage at the speed defined by parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed 24 17 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N TiSValMinSpeed i part speed controller value at minimum speed TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 determines the integral time percentage at the speed defined by parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed 24 17 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N ZeroFreqRFE zero frequency resonance frequency eliminator Frequency of zero The filter is located at the input of the speed controller Int Scaling 10 1 Hz Type l Volatile N ZeroDampRFE
38. Torque limitation 3 3 ms TorqRef4 TorqRefUsed Gear backlash Torque limiter compensation GearStartTorq isade GearTorqTime oadCom S GearTorqRamp TorqUsedMax R TorqGenMax El een 20 18 HTorqUsedMaxSel 2 22 A TorqMaxAll 20 05 H TorqMax20 05 TorqMinAll AH Ai TorgLimAct M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 xX FluxRefFldWeak C 2 248 TorqCorrect NotUsed TorqCorr Alt Al6 x TorqUsedMin M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 H 20 19 HTorqUsedMinSel 20 06 _HTorqMin20 06 Alt AI6 2 23 2 22 1 M1SpeedMin motor 1 minimum speed Motor 1 negative speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedRef2 2 01 SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Internally limited from 2 29 22161 rpm to 2 29 32767 rpm 20000 l 20000 Note1 M1SpeedMin 20 01 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note2 M1SpeedMin 20 01 is also applied to SpoeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SoeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0
39. ossesssssseeeeserrrrrrereersrrrnn 46 Mot2Fex Type ianei ae 188 Mot2 a 0 O10 oer 179 Mot2FIACurRell 00ccceccceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 179 Mot TempCale eerren reren 178 Mot2TempMeas n e 178 dee 176 442 MotFanAck 58 60 70 229 407 430 Moiott own 70 244 MotPotMin nnenennooennnnennnnorennrnsnrrrresnrene 70 245 MotPOtUP iccsd aie teaedieeccaiae 70 243 MOtSe l isi a o Eeer 211 MotSpeed 39 44 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 176 432 MotSpeedFilt Au 176 Motto 2 ed geseet eg 172 177 le ek te EE 136 176 MotTorgNom lt iccce tsa iets Petar 193 MUItiFeOXCOunt cee eeeeececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 324 MultiFexOff 200 eeceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 324 MulttevOn ah 324 Node address 134 Node E 106 108 NomMainsVolt 27 58 60 393 407 427 441 Off Mode ege ee 49 264 8 EE 70 230 440 EIS Delega eee 379 OPSCHUD Geo ccd ened dives eessen ere 382 ONO Mics dos cde teva eves sotee Gaede tect ued tages 70 233 OperModeSel nnnnnnnnnnnnneeeeee 58 60 307 Q tp t T ernn 120 131 OUP A ee ees 120 131 O tp t Ieee a s TN 120 131 OUTPUT Aueren a 120 131 Output I O par 112 114 116 118 Output instance 112 114 116 118 OvrVoltProt c 58 60 70 233 443 Par2S leCtiic ceveccer egene Seege 70 279 ParApplSave An 256 443 447 ParChan Qe E 70 232 FEU 126 128 346 Bertogne eege eege den 255 PassGOd nan alanina 353 449 Ke
40. 1 1ms Type l Volatile N DerivFiltTime filter time for d part speed controller Derivation filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N AccCompDerTime acceleration compensation derivation time AccCompDerTime 24 14 compensates the inertia by adding the derived and weighted SpeedRef4 2 18 to the speed controller output The acceleration compensation is inactive if AccCompDerTime 24 14 is set to zero Example AccCompDerTime 24 14 equals the time required to accelerate the drive to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 with motor nominal torque Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N AccCompFiltTime filter time acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N Speed adaptive proportional gain and integral time p part p part i part i part KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 KpS 24 03 TiS 24 09 TiS 24 09 KpS 24 03 TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 KpSTiSMinSpeed KpSTiSMaxSpeed KpSTiSMinSpeed KpSTiSMaxSpeed 24 17 24 18 24 17 24 18 In certain applications it is useful to increase decrease the proportional gain KpS 24 03 and decrease increase the integral time TiS 24 09 at low speeds to improve the performance of the speed control The linear increase and decrease of these parameters starts at KoSTiSMaxSpeed 24 18 and ends at KpSTiSMinSpeed 24 17 by means of KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 and TiSValMinSpeed 24 20
41. 1 1 Check bit 2 M2UsedFexType 49 07 FexTimeOut 94 07 flat cable connections between SDCS CON 4 and SDCS PIN 4 auxiliary voltage for integrated and external field exciter DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination set dip switch S1100 1 ON DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodeID 94 01 M2FexNode 94 09 respectively switches S800 and S801 on DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 521 FieldAck Selected motor field acknowledge missing 9 02 RdyRun 1 1 Check bit 4 M1UsedFexType 99 12 if selection matches the field exciter type Mot1FexStatus 6 12 Mot2FexStatus 6 13 fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 522 SpeedFb 523 ExtFanAck 524 MainContAck 525 TypeCode 526 ExternalDl Definition Action Selected motor speed feedback The comparison of the speed feedback from pulse encoder or analog tacho has failed Check M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 SoeedFbFitMode 30 36 SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 EMF FbMonLev 30 15 SoeedFbMonLev 30 14 pulse encoder encoder itself alignment cabling coupling power supply feedback might be too low mechanical disturbances jumper S4 on SDCS CON 4 analog tacho tacho itself tacho polarity and voltage alig
42. 14 Min 15 MulDiv 16 OR 17 ParRead 18 ParWrite 19 Pl 20 PI Bal 21 Ramp 22 SqWav 23 SR 24 Switch B 25 Switch l 26 TOFF 27 TON 28 Trigg 29 XOR 30 Sqrt function block is not used absolute value sum AND bit compare bit set compare counter ramp event filter limit mask set maximum minimum multiplication and division OR parameter read parameter write Pl controller initialization for Pl controller ramp square wave SR flip flop switch Boolean switch integer timer off timer on trigger exclusive OR square root NotUsed NotUsed Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N 84 05 Block1In1 function block 1 input 1 Selects the source for input 1 of function block 1 BPS1 There are 2 types of inputs signals parameters and constants Signals parameters are all signals and parameters available in the drive The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Example To connect negated SpeedRef 23 01 set Block1In1 84 05 2301 and Block1Attrib 84 08 Oh To get only a certain bit e g RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord 8 01 set Block1In1 84 05 801 and Block 1Attrib 84 08 3h Constants are feed directly into the function block input and have to be declared by means of Block1Attrib 84 08 Example To connect the constant value of 12345 set Block1In1 84 05 12345 and Block1Attrib 84 08 1000h Int Scaling 1 Type SI
43. 30 15 MUL A4 OR2 z1 F522 SpeedFb O AND H amp Speed measurement supervision The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 when 1 the measured EMF is greater than EMF FbMonLev 30 15 and 2 the measured speed feedback SpeedActEnc 1 03 SpeedActTach 1 05 or SpeedActEnc2 1 42 is lower than SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 Example SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 15 rpm EMF FbMonLev 30 15 50 V The drive trips when the EMF is greater than 50 V while the speed feedback is lt 15 rpm Motor voltage EMF FbMonLev 30 15 t i Motor SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 speed Speed feedback monitor DCS800 doculfig 33 ds4 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Fault tracing 418 SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 selects the reaction to a speed feedback problem 1 the drive is immediately tripped with F522 SpeedFb 2 the speed feedback is switched to EMF and the drive is stopped according to E StopRamp 22 11 then F522 SpeedFb is set 3 the speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFh is set 4 This selection is only valid if 2 pulse encoders are connected Depending on the setting of M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 the speed feedback is switched from pulse encoder 1 to pulse encoder 2 or vice versa in case of a problem and A125 SpeedFb AlarmWora2 9 07 bit 8 is set In case the field is weakened the
44. 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FluxRefFldWeak flux reference for field weakening Relative flux reference at speeds above the field weakening point base speed in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y VoltRef1 EMF voltage reference 1 Selected relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 EMF RefSel 46 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y VoltRef2 EMF voltage reference 2 Relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 after ramp and limitation input to EMF controller VoltRefSlope 46 06 VoltPosLim 46 07 VoltNegLim 46 08 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FluxRefEMF flux reference after EMF controller Relative EMF flux reference in percent of nominal flux after EMF controller Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FluxRefSum sum of flux reference FluxRefSum 3 28 FluxRefEMF 3 27 FluxRefFldWeak 3 24 in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FidCurRefM1 motor 1 field current reference Relative motor 1 field current reference in percent of M1NomFldCur 99 11 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FidCurRefM2 motor 2 field current reference Relative motor 2 field current reference in percent of M2NomFidCur 49 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f
45. Di4 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 5 DI5 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 6 DI6 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 7 DI7 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 8 DI8 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 9 DI9 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 230 Signal Parameter name E C 10 07 HandAuto Hand Auto command Binary signal to switch between Hand Local I O and Auto MainCtrlWord control Thus the selection made by CommandSel 10 01 is overwritten 0 NotUsed default 1 DH 1 Auto 0 Hand 2 DI2 1 Auto 0 Hand 3 DI3 1 Auto 0 Hand 4 DA 1 Auto 0 Hand 5 DI5 1 Auto 0 Hand 6 DI6 1 Auto 0 Hand 7 DI7 1 Auto 0 Hand 8 DI8 1 Auto 0 Hand 9 DIO 1 Auto 0 Hand only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 Auto 0 Hand only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 Auto 0 Hand only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 Auto 0 Hand MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 Auto 0 Hand MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord
46. HPI Teri Spom AOWoQureW Tore Aques forte vaskl H ortz apowdoys af pote apodos Ter CG apow LO H LO L paedsiow 0D SUEY Siva LE tt pwoejowey onig Me 0 z6uyou 64g gt 0 6uiyou gug z Hexoeseu yesey zua lt Oezuidu og t pioHdwey sug Sech olazinodwey ptg 9101 doses uny eld dois 3 osa 60 0 do s 3 neyo zrah m g0 01 2 O dois mo Neyo ug 7 FE So HHOUO NEHO UO oug oor Jespuewwog Zo orjony puey fora MOW joquoo mp ug We pwgaow y ong z6u you eg Buryou gug josey Aug oszujdwey oug pioHdwey sug oezinodwey pig uny ug doe 2 Neno Za doig 1se09 NZHO Ha N1O YO Oa Lok Moaidlesey Siig pemasel pg pemesel CUg ayesgenio4 ZG pemasel pg yaupeedsyaiig 0 ug p mv s 6a uonoaigenug 8Ha p m s 11g p mv s 94g z 6pug qes q sud LeBpugeiqesiq pig Daags CH penese zg peniesel pug Daags og EOL 104 U09 XNE GU 1o uoo xne ppg loquo xne pug 1o uo9 xne Z pyou s4 s y LL qes q u s opg puewwogou s 64g Wopeedsieg og LIOMOPUIM 248 mop dspoH gua pamasa g tjaypaadsw pig inodweyreg gua ssedAgdwey zig Boqeegbuy Boqeyequelsay 0 ZOZ 10u09 aloud auq gay ogbo paspyeybioy
47. Illustration Operation OUT is the sum of the inputs OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign AND Type Logical function Illustration Operation OUT is true if all connected inputs are true Otherwise the OUT is false Truth table Connections IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 False All bits 0 0 0 0 1 False All bits 0 0 0 1 0 False All bits 0 0 0 1 1 False All bits 0 0 1 0 0 False All bits 0 0 1 0 1 False All bits 0 0 1 1 0 False All bits 0 0 1 1 1 True All bits 1 1 Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean values Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 156 Bitwise Type Logical function Illustration IN1 IN2 OUT Operation The block compares bits of three 16 bit word inputs and forms the output bits as follows OUT ONT OR IN2 AND INS Example operation shown with only one bit IN3 OUT Z a Z N 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 A o o o o ks Edel Ed Lal te a O O O O O Example operation shown with whole word bits 0101 0 0 0 0 0 o o 1 0 0 1 1 0 o o 01 0 011 000 0 0000 010 ojo 11 ojlo 011 010 0 o 1 0 0 0 01 ojo 01 0 0 1 0 O gt OUT 16932 we D I Connections Input IN1 IN2 a
48. MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 DCSLink cable connections DCS_Link termination DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodeID 94 01 SDCS COM 8 communication loss overriding 9 06 always control and master follower bit 12 Check Ch0ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 fiber optic cables to overriding control channel 0 overriding control adapters fiber optic cables between master and followers channel 2 Armature Current Deviation 9 06 RdyRef 1 Is shown if the current reference CurRefUsed 3 12 bit 13 differs from current actual MotCur 1 06 for longer than 5 sec by more than 20 of nominal motor current In other words if the current controller cannot match the given reference the alarm signal is created Normally the reason is a too small incoming voltage compared to the motor EMF Check DC fuses blown ratio between mains voltage and EMF _ArmAlphaMin 20 15 is set too high Selected motor tacho range 9 06 always If A115 TachoRange comes up for longer than 10 bit 14 seconds there is an overflow of the AlTacho input Check Tor the right connections X3 1 to X3 4 on the SDCS CON 4 If A115 TachoRange comes up for 10 seconds and vanishes again M1OvrSpeed 30 16 or M2OvrSpeed 49 21 has been changed In this case a new tacho fine tuning has to be done ServiceMode 99 06
49. Mailbox 94 12 5 MailBox1 94 12 5 MailBox1 94 12 5 Attention Positive mailbox node ID numbers must be unique Negative mailbox node ID numbers can be used by several mailboxes The master mailbox one for example is set to 5 and thus transmitting data Mailbox one of the followers is set to 5 and thus receiving data Activate the communication supervision The communication supervision is activated by means of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 The function of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is depending on the setting of Mai Box1 94 12 If MailBox1 94 12 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if Mai BoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms If MailBox1 94 12 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has t
50. MainCtrlWord 7 01 SpeedRef 23 01 TorqRefA 25 01 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 90 Drive to drive communication Set the DCSLink hardware Cable connection 1st drive SDCS DSL 4 G X8 24 V 200 mA ra 24 V 200 mA Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus 120 ohm 1 1 4 W In the above example termination is mandatory at drive 1 and drive 2 SDCS DSL 4 jumper S1 1 2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 91 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the master and all followers Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the 1 drives node ID number to 1 and the 2 drives node ID number to 2 Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware 1 drive Firmware 2 drive DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 2 BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s Activate the mailboxes The drive to drive communication utilizes 4 mailboxes for data transfer Thus data transfer to any device node in the system is possible Positive mailbox node I
51. N NotUsed min NotUsed def M2BrakeFltTime motor 2 brake fault time Brake open lift acknowledge monitor During this time the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M2BrakeAckSel 49 29 can be different without causing A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 or F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2TorqProvTime motor 2 torque proving time Brake torque proving acknowledge The drive trips with F556 TorqProv FaultWord4 9 04 bit 7 if the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is set and the acknowledge TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 is not set before M2TorgProvTime 49 40 is elapsed The torque proving is inactive if M2TorqProvTime 49 40 is set to 0 Note1 The acknowledge signal TorqProvOK has to be provided by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control and is set by means of a rising edge 0 1 The torque reference might be set by means of Ba Ref 24 11 or TorqSel 26 01 and BalSpeedCtrl AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 8 or TorqRefA 25 01 The reaction of the drive might be taken from MotCur 1 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2BrakeLiftDly motor 2 brake lift delay Brake open lift delay This function delays the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 until M2BrakeLiftDly 49 41 is elapsed Int Scaling
52. Only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board Note1 It is possible to connect several klixons in series Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed def NotUsed DispParam1Sel 34 01 DispParam2Sel 34 08 DispParam3Sel 34 15 Setting a display parameter to 0 results in no signal or parameter displayed Setting a display parameter from 101 to 9999 displays the belonging signal or parameter If a signal or parameter does not exist the display shows n a DispParam1Sel select signal parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row 1 Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel first display row e g 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 299 Signal Parameter name 34 08 DispParam2Sel select signal parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row 2 Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel second display row e g 114 equals ArmVoltAct 1 14 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DispParam3Sel select signal parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row 3 Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel third display row e g 116 equals ConvCurAct 1 16 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N PID control Overview of the PID controller Ref
53. The DC breaker US style K1 1 is a special designed DC breaker with one normally closed contact for the dynamic braking resistor R and two normally open contacts for C1 and D1 The DC breaker should be controlled by CurCtrlStart1 6 03 bit 10 The acknowledge signal can be connected to either MainContAck 10 21 or DCBreakAck 10 23 Main contactor 6 03 b 7 VW DCS800 i Dyn Brake 6 03 b 8 Converter Hon board field exciter module i DC Contact US 6 03 b 10 gt DC cont us dsf nv max Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name FidHeatSel field heat selector FidHeatSel 21 18 releases the field heating for motor 1 and motor 2 0 NotUsed field heating is off default field heating is on as long as On 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 Off2N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 and Off3N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 2 OnRun field heating is on as long as On 1 Run 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Off2N 1 and Off3N 1 3 ACW Bit12 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit12 1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 and Run 0 4 ACW Bit13 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit13 1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 and Run 0 5 ACW Bit14 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit14 1 AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 14 and Run 0 6 ACW Bit15 field
54. The drive sets A108 M2OverTemp AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 8 if M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas 1 23 Note1 The unit depends on M2TempSel 49 35 Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Type Sl Volatile N M2FaultLimTemp motor 2 fault limit temperature The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 8 if M2FaultLimTemp 49 37 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas 1 23 Note1 The unit depends on M2TempSel 49 35 Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Type Sl Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 336 Signal Parameter name 49 38 M2KlixonSel motor 2 klixon selector The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 8 if a digital input selected and the klixon is open 0 NotUsed no reaction default 1 Dl1 0 fault 1 no fault 2 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 3 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 4 Di4 0 fault 1 no fault 5 DI5 0 fault 1 no fault 6 DI6 0 fault 1 no fault 7 DI7 0 fault 1 no fault 8 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 9 DI9 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board Note1 It is possible to connect several klixons in series Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile
55. The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord 7 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 MasSig2 channel 2 master signal 2 Master signal 2 broadcasts via channel 2 as 2 value of data set 41 to all followers The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 MasSig3 channel 2 master signal 3 Master signal 3 broadcasts via channel 2 as 3 value of data set 41 to all followers The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 210 equals TorqRef3 2 10 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 LinkControl channel 2 link control DDCS channel 2 intensity control for transmission LEDs This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance of the link Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N def House 1l 10 349 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 350 Signal Parameter name min 70 14 Ch2 TimeOut channel 2 timeout Time delay before a communication loss with channel 2 is declared Depending on the setting of Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 either F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 or A113 COM8Com AlarmWorad1 9 06 bit 12 is set The communication fault and alarm are inactive if Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 is set to 0 ms Note1 The supervision is activated after the re
56. The type code of the drive is write protected and has to be set manually by means of ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode and TypeCode 97 01 The parameter backup mode has following functions UPLOAD TO PANEL Copies all parameters from the drive into the DCS800 Control Panel This includes both user sets User1 and User2 if defined and internal parameters such as those created by tacho fine tuning The DCS800 Control Panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on its battery Can only be done in drive state Off and local from DCS800 Control Panel DOWNLOAD FULL SET Restores the full parameter set from the DCS800 Control Panel into the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives Can only be done in drive state Off and local from DCS800 Control Panel Note This download does not include the user sets DOWNLOAD APPLICATION Currently not used The general procedure for parameter backup operations is 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight PAR BACKUP in the MAIN MENU then press DCS800 panel operation 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Maintenance 403 ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the desired option then press SEL 3 Wait until the service is finished then press OK 4 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU UO settings mode Currently not used Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the DCS800 Control Panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display wind
57. To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO 01 boards with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery VO configuration 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 70 Configuration All DI s can be read from DI StatWord 8 05 bit DI configurable default setting 0 1 yes ConvFanAck 10 20 1 2 yes MotFanAck 10 06 2 3 yes MainContAck 10 21 3 4 yes Off2 10 08 4 5 yes E Stop 10 09 5 6 yes Reset 10 03 6 7 yes OnOff1 10 15 7 8 yes StartStop 10 16 8 9 yes 9 10 yes 10 11 yes 11 12 no not selectable 12 13 no not selectable 13 14 no not selectable Configurable yes The DI s can be connected to several converter functions and it is possible to invert the Dl s D 1Invert 10 25 to DI11Invert 10 35 In addition the DI s can be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Configurable no The DI s can only be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Configurable Dis are defined by means of following parameters Direction 10 02 Reset 10 03 SyncCommand 10 04 MotFanAck 10 06 HandAuto 10 07 Off2 10 08 E Stop 10 09 ParChange 10 10 OvrVoltProt 10 13 OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 Jog 10 17 Jog2 10 18 ConvFanAck 10 20 MainContAck 10 21 DynBrakeAck 10 22 DC BreakAck 10 23 Following restrictions appl
58. With a 6 pulse converter the bridge reversal is initiated by changing the polarity of the current reference command to change direction Upon zero current detection the bridge reversal is started Depending on the moment involved the new bridge may be fired either in the same or in the next current cycle The switchover can be delayed by RevDly 43 14 The delay starts after zero current has been detected Thus RevDly 43 14 is the length of the forced current gap during a bridge changeover After the reversal delay is elapsed the system changes to the selected bridge without any further consideration This feature may prove useful when operating with large inductances Also the time needed to change the current direction can be longer when changing from motoring mode to regenerative mode at high motor voltages because the motor voltage must be reduced before switching to regenerative mode see also RevVoltMargin 44 21 After a command to change current direction the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 CtriStatMas 6 09 bit 13 is set CtrIStatMas 6 09 Zero current bit 12 is set detection RevDly 43 14 ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 Bridge reversal Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 409 Analog input monitor In case the analog input is set to 2 V to 10 V respectively
59. Xxx A ly XXX A rated field current M1UsedFexType 99 12 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 Parameters to be set in large field exciters Before starting with the commissioning set all parameters to default by means of ApplMacro 99 08 Factory and App Restore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 Parameter Excitation Comments CommandSel 10 01 4 FexLink MotFanAck 10 06 0 NotUsed OvrVoltProt 10 13 2 DI2 depending on hardware connection to DCF506 ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 500 to suppress F503 ArmOverVolt if this does not help increase M1NomVolt 99 02 OperModeSel 43 01 1 FieldConv CurSel 43 02 8 FexCurRef M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 0 RevDly 43 14 50 ms FldCtriMode 44 01 0 Fix def DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 21 def Use the same node number as in M1FexNode 94 08 of the armature module DevLimPLL 97 13 20 to suppress F514 MainsNotSync M1NomVolt 99 02 Xxx V U y Xxx V rated field voltage M1NomCur 99 03 Xxx A ly XXX A rated field current NomMains Volt 99 10 Xxx V Usen XXX V nominal supply voltage AC M1UsedFexType 99 12 0 NotUsed Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 59 Field current autotuning for large field exciters The field current autotuning has to be started directly in the large field exciter Parameter Excitation
60. ccccceseceeecessceeeceseeeeenanes 106 108 BaudRate 83 87 91 94 126 128 346 370 Glen 359 ET Le 359 lee EE 360 BIOCKISOUT eege Ee 360 Block 4OUt ioeie aeina 360 Geen KEE 360 BIOCK IS OU eegend eege 360 BIOCK TA UID innra ae 356 Ge alle NEE 355 BIOCK ln EE 356 Block tind nue ated ei ee Aree ae 356 Block OUT costar ste a 358 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Block Qutp t EE 356 Block Type rieni 355 Block2 ut EERE Se e es 359 Ellelet ee EE 359 3 ele CO ee 359 BO KS OU a a 359 Block cCut 359 Block Outs ieicihdsty det Eed de 359 Elle e 359 Block cOut 359 BrakeEStopMode AA 306 BrakeFaultFunc 306 435 443 444 BreakPoint aen risien 354 BridgGeTemMp xiiicisccceiteumiiiaiioned 178 404 ChO BaudRate aeneeseenenneeeenrrrrrerennnna 96 347 ChO ComLossCtrl 96 348 434 442 ChO DriveBuS ssesoeoesininseseererrrrrrereenens 96 352 ChO DeeibBasehddr ees 351 CHO DsetBaseAddr eeoeneenennnereereerrrrreree 96 ChO HW Config EE 96 EI Ee EE 348 ChO UnkCopntrol 96 347 Ch ONode ddr 96 347 ChO TimeOut 96 348 434 442 Ch UnkCopntrol es 349 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 102 350 434 442 Ch2 FONSI KE 99 350 EI EE Le KEE 99 350 C2 FOSIG Sk wins dete Eeer 99 351 Ch2 UnkCopntrol 349 Ch2 MatohMode 99 349 IKEA E NEE 99 349 Ch2 MaSSIG2 tegen eer gegesrbeeregge 99 349 ENEE Le KE 99 349 Ch Node
61. converter fan circuit converter fan klixon converter fan components converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter door open converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet D6 an D7 pressure switch setting should be 2 mbar used digital inputs and outputs group 14 Fieldbus communication loss 9 02 always if FB F528 FieldBusCom is only activated after the first bit 11 TimeOut data set from the overriding control is received by the 30 35 0 drive Before the first data set is received only A128 FieldBusComm is active The reason is to suppress control is usually slower than the one of the drive unnecessary faults the start up of the overriding Check CommandSel 10 01 ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 CommModule 98 02 parameter settings of group 51 fieldbus fieldbus cable fieldbus termination fieldbus adapter Motor 1 field exciter not okay 9 02 always A fault was found during self diagnosis of field exciter bit 12 or power failure in field exciter 1 Check field exciter operation and change the field exciter if necessary fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Motor 2 field exciter not okay 9 02 always A fault was found during self diagnosis of field exciter bit 13 or power failure in field exciter 2 Check field exciter operation and change the field exciter if necessary fault message
62. ddr 349 Ch2 TimeOut 0005 102 350 434 442 Ch3 HW Config cceeeeeeeeteeereees 103 351 Ch3 UnkCopntrol 351 Ch Node ddr 27 103 351 Com8Swversion 00 46 105 188 447 ComLossCtrl 87 91 293 407 431 434 442 445 COMM rate 120 131 CommandSel 47 58 60 88 96 99 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 126 131 134 227 397 431 434 CommModule 96 106 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 384 426 431 445 Keel teste eebe 379 GONStAnNTT ed Sev deieee sete ease 357 Constant O eirese eraa beeen 358 CONSTANT EE 357 CONSTANTS ies Waves ccs ceeds Pesto cuss dee eegen 357 CONStAM EE 357 Constant EE 357 Constant6 EE 357 CONSTANT tive sees ee ee a oe tee oe 357 Constant 358 Constant 358 ConstS peed AAA 245 ConstSpeed2 evesteics setae accnsieeedeusudendeevutanee 245 Ree KEE 246 Constzpeed ENEE 246 ConmCur ct a a a aiai 57 177 ConmvCur Achhel 177 416 ConvFanAck n se 70 236 407 431 440 ConvModeAl1 ccccccceceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeees 77 247 CGopnvhModeAl 247 CONVMOCEAIS eei a a 248 ConvModeAl4 ececcccccecceeeeeseeceeeeeeteeeeeaens 248 CONVMOCEAID ccecccccceceeeeeseeceeeeeeteeeeenens 250 ConvModeAl6 ccccccecsseseeseeeeeeeeeeees 77 251 CONVMOdCAO 1 eccccccceceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 81 253 CONVMOdCAO 1 eee ccccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaees 254 CONVMOdCAOS cccccccceeeeeeseeceeeeeeteeeeeaees 254 CONVMOdCAO4 1 eccccccceccess
63. l Volatile N M1ZeroSpeedDly motor 1 zero speed delay This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 to actual speed 0 Until M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 is elapsed the brake is kept open lifted Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1BrakeFltTime motor 1 brake fault time Brake open lift acknowledge monitor During this time the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 can be different without causing A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 or F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name BrakeFaultFunc brake fault function Selected motor BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 determines the reaction to an invalid brake acknowledge the drive sets A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 as reaction to an invalid brake open lift or brake close apply acknowledge 1 Fault the drive trips with F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 as reaction to an invalid brake open lift or brake close apply acknowledge default The drive trips with F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 as reaction to an invalid brake open lift acknowledge A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 is set as reaction to an invalid brake close apply
64. or death and or damage to the equipment WARNING e Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the base speed e Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting mains instead use the control panel keys 0 and or commands via the I O board of the drive e Mains connection You can use a disconnect switch with fuses to disconnect the electrical components of the drive from the mains for installation and maintenance work The type of disconnect switch used must be as per EN 60947 3 Class B so as to comply with EU regulations or a circuit breaker type which switches off the load circuit by means of an auxiliary contact causing the breaker s main contacts to open The mains disconnect must be locked in its OPEN position during any installation and maintenance work e EMERGENCY STOP buttons must be installed at each control desk and at all other control panels requiring an emergency stop function Pressing the STOP button on the control panel of the drive will neither cause an emergency stop of the motor nor will the drive be disconnected from any dangerous potential To avoid unintentional operating states or to shut the unit down in case of any imminent danger according to the standards in t
65. terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al2 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al3 NotUsed min def NotUsed 19 ExFex Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 21 reserved 22 Exc Appl 1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADW00031 1 If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N M2FldMinTrip motor 2 minimum field trip The drive trips with F542 M2FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 9 if M2FIdMinTrip 49 08 in percent of M2NomFlidCur 49 05 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M2FldOvrCurLev motor 2 field overcurrent level The drive trips with F
66. urr fixed not selectable Configurable yes The AO s can be connected to any integer or signed integer of the drive by means of group 15 It is possible to invert the AO s by simply negate IndexAO7 15 01 to IndexAO4 15 16 In addition the AO s can be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if the corresponding IndexAOx 15 xx is set to zero see CtrlWordAO1 15 02 to CtrlWordAO4 15 17 Configurable temperature The AO s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement see M1TempSel 31 05 and M2TempSel 49 35 VO configuration 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 81 Structure of AO s Scaling Output voltage Output voltage Output voltage Bipolar signal 4 Unipolar signal 4 A Unipolar signal 10V Bi Blees cans 0 10V Uni 5V Offset 10V fF y 2 10V Uni BV Offset P1505 p 7 r P1503 5V Offset i Firmware Firmware i Firmware signal signal ov 1 i signal P1503 0 10V Uni 0 100 Jost 0 100 P1503 10VBi DWL assistant dsf It is possible to scale AO1 to AO4 with 2 parameters each the range of each AO is set by means of ConvModeAO1 15 03 to ConvModeAO4 15 18 if the range is set to bipolar or unipolar signals with offset 100 of th
67. 0 7 DI7 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 8 DI8 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 9 DI9 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch
68. 01 must have the same setting for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave In case of DiodeBridge the setting is only possible in the 12 pulse master Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N DiffCurLim current difference level Permitted current difference between the converters in 12 pulse parallel configuration in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 The drive trips with F534 12PCurDiff FaultWord3 9 03 bit 1 if DiffCurLim 47 02 is still exceeded when DiffCurDly 47 03 is elapsed DiffCurLim 47 02 is only active in the 12 pulse parallel master Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 326 ga Signal Parameter name 47 03 DiffCurDly current difference delay DiffCurDly 47 03 delays F534 12PCurDiff FaultWord3 9 03 bit 1 If the current difference becomes smaller than DiffCurLim 47 02 before the delay is elapsed F534 will be disregarded DiffCurLim 47 02 DiffCurDly 47 03 is only active in the 12 pulse parallel master Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N 47 05 12P RevTimeOut 12 pulse reversal timeout In 12 pulse mode the current direction of both master and slave bridges is monitored The drive trips with F533 12PRevTime Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 0 if the 2 converters have different bridges fired for more than 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 The reversal fault for 12 pulse is inactive if 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 is set to 999 ms or 1000 ms 12P Re
69. 02 0260 04 02 4000 06 S01 2000 04 02 0260 05 02 4000 07 01 2000 05 02 0350 04 02 4000 08 S01 2000 06 02 0350 05 02 3300 10 S01 2000 07 02 0320 06 02 4000 10 S 01 2050 05 02 0450 04 02 4800 06 S01 2050 06 02 0450 05 S 02 4800 07 S01 2050 07 02 0520 04 02 4800 08 S 01 2500 04 02 0520 05 02 5200 04 01 2500 05 02 0650 06 02 5200 05 01 2500 06 S 02 0680 04 01 4000 12 S01 2500 07 02 0680 05 02 4000 12 01 2500 08 02 0820 04 01 2050 10 02 0820 05 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal and parameter list 378 fag Signal Parameter name 97 02 S ConvScaleCur set converter DC current scaling Adjustment of DC current measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 S ConvScaleCur 97 02 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode 0A take value from TypeCode 97 01 1 A to 30000 A take value from S ConvScaleCur 97 02 This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in ConvNomCur 4 05 ServiceMode 99 06 has to be set back to NormalMode by the user Attention When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Int Scaling 1 1A Type l Volatile N 97 03 S ConvScaleVolt set converter AC voltage scaling Adjustment of A
70. 1 Type l Volatile N Ch3 HW Config channel 3 hardware configuration CH3 HW Config 70 21 is used to enable disable the regeneration of the Channel 3 optotransmitters Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back 0 Ring Regeneration is enabled Used with ring type bus topology 1 Star Regeneration is disabled Used with star type topology Typically with configurations using the NDBU x5 branching units default Note1 This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode Ch0 DriveBus 71 01 Yes Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Ch3 NodeAddr channel 3 node address Channel 3 is used for communication with start up and maintenance tools e g DriveWindow If several drives are connected together via channel 3 each of them must be set to a unique node address Node address channel 3 0 75 valid node address for SDCS COM 8 76 124 reserved node address for NDBU x5 branching units 125 254 valid node address for SDCS COM 8 Attention A new node address becomes only valid after the next SDCS COM 8 power up Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch3 LinkControl channel 3 link control DDCS channel 3 intensity control for transmission LEDs This value is adjusted by the link including each device on the link This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance of the link Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N ChO DsetBaseAddr channel 0 data set base address Data s
71. 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2BrakeLongTime motor 2 brake long time Brake close apply acknowledge monitor During this time the brake close apply command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M2BrakeAckSel 49 29 can be different without causing either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling A armWord1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2BrakeStopDly motor 2 brake stop delay Brake close apply delay This function starts after the brake acknowledge if selected with M2BrakeAckSel 49 29 is zero and compensates for the mechanical close apply delay of the brake During the stop Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 0 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller stays active until M2BrakeStopDly 49 43 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def 49 44 M2StrtTorqRefSel motor 2 start torque reference selector Motor 2 start torque selector 0 NotUsed start torque function is blocked and the start torque reference is fixed zero default 1 Memory torque memory released the minimum value equals the absolute value of SirtTorqRef 42 08 2 StriTorqRef SirtTorqRef 42 08 3 Al1 analog inpu
72. 107 MotTorgFilt 1 07 After changing parameters in group 51 please don t forget to reset the RPBA 01 adapter by means of FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET Now the corresponding parameters in group 90 and group 92 are disabled Attention Make sure that the used parameters like TorqRefA 25 01 are removed from groups 90 and 91 PROFIBUS DP Eet WEE DCS800 Parameter Signals PZD3 out PZD10 out 51 05 51 19 Parameter Signals i PZD1 in PZD3 in PZD10 in PB setting data words dsf Setting of data words using only group 51 or using group 90 and group 92 Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 137 Communication via group 90 and group 92 The other possibility perhaps more familiar is to connect via group 90 and group 92 Again the 3 data word from overriding control to drive should be the torque reference and the 3 data word from the drive to the overriding control should be the actual motor torque Therefore following settings have to be made values see table below PZD3 OUT 51 05 3 and PZD3 IN 51 06 6 After changing parameters in group 51 please don t forget to reset the RPBA 01 adapter by means of FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET Now the corresponding parameters in group 90 and group 92 are enabled Following sett
73. 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal3 90 03 2501 default TorgRefA 25 01 output data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus2Val1 90 04 702 default AuxCtrlWord 7 02 output data word 4 auxiliary control word 4 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 209 default TorgRef2 2 09 input data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus3Val1 92 04 802 default AuxStatWord 8 02 input data word 4 auxiliary status word A data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 CANopen Node ID 51 02 T set node address as required Baudrate 51 03 8 8 1 MBits s PDO21 Cfg 51 04 1 0 Configuration via CANopen objects 1 Configuration via RCAN 0O1 adapter parameters RX PDO21 Enable 51 05 769 This value has to be calculated with 300 Hex 768 Node ID 51 02 Here 768 1 769 RX PDO21 TxType 51 06 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 Communicatio
74. 20 01 Start up 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 30 M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1FldMinTrip 30 12 FldCtriMode 44 01 M1NomvVolt 99 02 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 and M1NomFidCur 99 1 1 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 EMF FluxAuto and set On and Run via within 20 s During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 The EMF controller data are calculated the flux linearization is tuned by means of a constant speed while decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux linearization parameters are set When the autotuning is finished successfully check KoDEMF 44 09 TIEMF 44 10 FldCurFlux40 44 12 FldCurFlux70 44 13 and FldCurFlux90 44 14 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning before opening the workspaces the drive has to be connected to DriveWindow Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 31 Manual tuning Field current controller Manual tuning of the field current controller connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor Mot1FldCurRef 1 29 and FildCurRefM1 3 30 set M1FldMinTrip 30 1
75. 23 after limiter TorqMaxSPC 20 07 TorqMinSPC 20 08 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRef3 torque reference 3 Relative torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after torque selector TorqSel 26 01 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRef4 torque reference 4 TorqRef3 2 10 LoadComp 26 02 in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 181 Signal Parameter name TorqRefUsed used torque reference Relative final torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after torque limiter TorqMax 20 05 TorqMin 20 06 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqCorr torque correction Relative additional torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 TorqCorrect 26 15 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y dv_dt dv dt Acceleration deceleration speed reference change at the output of the speed reference ramp Int Scaling 2 29 s Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefUsed used speed reference Used speed reference selected with RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRef4 speed reference 4 SpeedRef3 2 02 SpeedCorr 23 04 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y TorqMaxAll torque maximum all Relative calcula
76. 269 SpeedActEMP aeecueei eenias 176 GpeedAchEnc 176 417 GpeedAchEnc eee 179 417 GpeedActT ach 29 176 417 DEE BCEE geess 39 272 463 GpeedEtit 29 39 272 GpeedErtit 29 39 273 SpeedErrNeg AAA 180 SpeedErrorScale AAA 278 SpeedFbFltMode 295 404 421 430 444 GpeedbtlGel 289 417 430 444 GpeedbMonl ey 287 417 SEI FUNG steieren Seege weekdays 29 SpeedFilt Time 39 SpeedFilt Time 340 SPOCO LO Vives deeg gerRdedee 343 GpeedhiampCut EEN 183 SpeedRef 88 95 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 175 271 SCOR ret cic aint Wer conde teal eae eae 180 SHCCUREMS ege lara Seege 180 SpeedRef4 ccceccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 39 181 Dpeedhiertwt AAA 183 Dpeedhiertwt AAA 183 SpeedRefScale AAA 274 SpeedRefUsed eee 88 172 181 SpeedScaleAct 95 96 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 126 128 131 134 172 175 182 424 432 Dpeedhare AAA 272 SpeedStep uk n 273 SqrWavelndex Akku 394 Goraveberod reene 394 e UE 183 StallSpeed ceeeeeseecteeeeeeees 286 418 432 StallTime axis cee ened 285 418 432 Stall TOR EE 286 418 432 StamStOp sseccesc ape art 70 234 StationNumbet ccc cceeeees 126 128 346 Stop function 112 114 116 118 120 131 ll e 49 264 SNOT E 159 358 DUNN ee ee 159 358 EIN 159 358 SUING A sed Soe n a 159 358 Elle 159 358 Strt TorqRef keen 306 444 Subnet Mask e 120 131 Subnet Mask 3 120 131
77. 29 Manual TUNG EE 31 Field current Controller E 31 Armature current controller eccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeneaes 32 CONTRO principle de cue ceceet e a Ge bauutt atte ai E S ak 32 Meurer te cease eet nee ae eh ke eae Se ae eee aehale 33 Speed COMMONS EE 38 BASICS ee Eege 38 Manual TUT deeg degen Eeer 39 EMF COMMON EE 41 Ee 41 Manua Bt peter ees 41 elt linearization EE 43 BASICS Eeer 43 Manual AIAG E 44 Table of contents 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 10 Firmware description 46 KEE dee 46 Identification of the firmware revisions 00 0 cee ee eeeeeeeeee eter eeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeees 46 Start and stop Sequences seek cecsiceczevacgssticenns caehineevactechizeael eockiavaetavwans vats EES 47 EE geen Eeer 47 WITCH on Un 47 ER TEE 48 STOP The Tu 49 PICID OX CIA ON EE 52 GAGS Mall EE 52 Field REVersal critieria a deeg Eege anes 52 Field CONtOl EE 52 Field reference bwvestereele REENEN 53 Force field current direction E 53 R versal Umesao A aAA r a eaaa ap teenies D eg 53 Ree te TE 53 Field current reference gain cccccccceeceeeseeeeeceeeeeseeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeees 53 ele Kelte n ee el EE 54 Field mMiNiImMUMm le BEE 54 Flux reversal EE 54 Field reversal hysteresis ccccccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeees 54 Field reversal active ccecccecccecccececeeeceeeeeeeee
78. 3 Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light F507 507 M1OverLoad 508 I OBoardLoss 509 M2OverTemp Definition Action Motor 1 calculated overload Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is calculated down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 _M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 UO board not found or faulty Check Diagnosis 9 11 Ext IO Status 4 20 flat cable connections between SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 2 3 SDCD COM 8 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 Encoder2Module 98 01 CommModule 98 02 DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 AIO ExtModule 98 06 AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 IO BoardConfig 98 15 Motor 2 measured overtemperature Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check M2FaultLimTemp 49 37 M2KlixonSel 49 38 M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 motor temperature let motor cool down and restart motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for te
79. 373 434 442 MaiIBOx4 AA 374 434 442 MailBoxCycle1 87 91 372 434 442 MailBoxCycle2 ccccccceeeee 373 434 442 MailBoxCycle ccccccceeeee 374 434 442 MailBoxCycle4 ccccccceeeee 375 434 442 MainContAck ssennne 62 70 236 407 430 MainContCilMode 48 267 MainCtrlWord 47 88 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 200 MainsComp Time 379 MAINS E e EE 179 MainStatWord 47 104 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 206 MainsvohtAct 177 MainsVoItActRell cccccsssceeeceseeeeerenes 177 MaxBridgeTemp 26 189 404 425 440 MaxCurLimSpeed c ccceeeeeeeeeeeesteeees 311 MaxvEncoder f me 340 MG ConfigWord EE 318 Modbus Umeout 120 131 Mod usModule 126 128 387 Module baud rate 112 114 116 118 Module macid aaannnoanen 112 114 116 118 ModuleType 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 131 134 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 462 Mot FexStatuS n 198 407 429 Mot Fexv wyer 188 Mot FexSwVersion asessssseseeeserrrrrereersrrrnne 46 Mot FexType soeces 85 187 Mot a 0 O10 oer 179 Mot FIACurRe cccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 31 Mot1FldCurRel c ccccsseeeeeeees 44 54 178 Mot TempC alc 178 414 Mott TempMeas AAA 178 410 Mot2FexStatus n 199 429 Mot ev wyer 188 Mot2FexSwVersion
80. 4 mA to 20 mA it is possible to check for wire breakage by means of AI Mon4mA 30 29 In case the threshold is undershoot one of the following actions will take place 1 the drive stops according to FaultStopMode 30 30 and trips with F551 AlRange 2 the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AlRange 3 the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 and sets A127 AlRange Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 410 Motor protection Armature overvoltage The nominal value of the armature voltage is set with M1NomVolt 99 02 The overvoltage level is set by means of ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 Exceeding this level causes F503 ArmOverVolt Residual current detection The residual current detection earth fault is based on asum current transformer at the AC side of the converter or an external device e g Bender relays If a current transformer is used its secondary winding is connected to Al4 X3 11 and X3 12 on the SDCS IOB 3 board The sum current of all three phases has to be zero otherwise a residual current is detected and F505 ResCurDetect is set ResCurDetectSel 30 05 activates the residual current detection and selects the choice of connected hardware transformer or external device The residual current detection tripping level is set with ResCurDetectLim 30 06 if a sum current transformer is used In case an external device is used ResCurDetectLim 30 06 is d
81. 45 09 is needed Field rev rsal While the field reversal is in progress see CurCtrlStat2 6 04 bit 11 E the current controller is blocked the l part of the speed controller frozen the output of the speed ramp is updated by means of the actual speed Field Heating Ovaniaw Field heating also referred to as field warming and field economy is used for a couple of reasons Previous generations of DC drives used voltage controlled field supplies meaning that the only thing the field supply could directly control was the field voltage For DC motors to maintain optimal torque it is important to maintain the field current Ohm s law U R 1 tells us that voltage equals resistance multiplied by current So as long as resistance remains constant current is proportional to voltage But field resistance increases with temperature Therefore a cold motor would have a higher field current than a warm motor even though voltage remained unchanged To keep the resistance and thus the current constant the field was left on to keep Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Modes of operation 55 it warm Then the voltage controlled field supply works just fine The new generation of drives including all field supplies used with the DCS800 are current controlled Thus the field supply directly controls field current This means that field heating may no longer be necessary when the DCS800 is
82. 5 Al4 6 AIS 7 Al6 CurRefExt 43 03 XXX e g written to by overriding control M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 0 RevDly 43 14 50 ms FldCtrlMode 44 01 0 Fix def DevLimPLL 97 13 20 to suppress F514 MainsNotSync M1NomVolt 99 02 Xxx V U y Xxx V rated field voltage M1NomCur 99 03 Xxx A l 4 XXX A rated field current NomMains Volt 99 10 Xxx V U sen XXX V nominal supply voltage AC M1UsedFexType 99 12 0 NotUsed Field current autotuning for stand alone field exciter The field current autotuning has to be started directly in the stand alone field exciter Parameter Excitation Comments ServiceMode 99 06 2 FieldCurAuto Give the On and Run command within 20 s Firmware description 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 62 DC breaker General The DC breaker is used to protect the DC motor or in case of too low mains voltage or voltage dips the generating bridge of the drive from overcurrent In case of an overcurrent the DC breaker is forced open by its own tripping spring DC breakers have different control inputs and trip devices anOn Off coil with a typical time delay of 100 to 200 ms ahigh speed tripping coil e g Secheron CID to trip the DC breaker within 2 ms from e g the drive an internal tripping spring which is released by overcurrent and set mechanically There are differen
83. 50 09 Pulse encoder 1 pulses ADD E scares a sn teers EY 67 SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 Pulse encoder 1 position counter logic PosCountLow 3 07 PosCountHigh 3 08 DCS800 FW pos count dsf 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Firmware description DI m gt 1 Mux O t amp Le 2 o amp t S o forward Hea 3 i direction reverse amp 4 direction q gt 5 Fault DCS800 OR amp e 6 forward Tle 7 Se Cyclic Single reverse amp 8 direction PosSyncMode 50 15 4 Pulse encoder 2 S 90 197 9 zero channel SyncCommand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 10 Sel SyncCommand2 10 05 l SyncDisable AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit10 ResetSyncRdy AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 11 PosCouni2InitLo 50 21 PosCount2InitHi 50 22 Pulse encoder 2 pulses ADD E scares a sn teers EY SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 Pulse encoder 2 position counter logic PosCount2Low33 04 PosCount2High 3 05 DCS800 FW pos count dsf Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 69 UO configuration Chapter overview This chap
84. 51 CHE 513 MainsOvrVolt for more than 10 s and RdyRun 1 Check if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance if the mains voltage scaling is correct NomMains Volt 99 10 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 428 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 514 MainsNotSync Mains not in synchronism AC 9 01 RdyRun 1 The synchronization with the mains frequency has bit 13 been lost Check DevLimPLL 97 13 mains supply fuses etc mains frequency 50Hz 5Hz 60Hz 5Hz and stability df dt 17 s PLLOut 3 20 515 Motor 1 field exciter overcurrent 9 01 RdyRun 1 M1FexOverCur Check bit 14 in case this fault happens during field exciter autotuning deactivate the supervision by setting M1FidOvrCurLev 30 13 135 M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning connections of field exciter insulation of cables and field winding resistance of field winding fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 516 M1FexCom Motor 1 field exciter communication loss 9 01 RdyRun 1 Check bit 15 M1UsedFexType 99 12 FexTimeOut 94 07 flat cable connections between SDCS CON 4 and SDC
85. 60 79 390 404 M1NomFldCutr 27 58 393 416 418 M1INomVolt eee 27 58 60 389 410 MiOperMocdetexd 85 323 MiOvrG peed 27 288 418 432 442 Miboel mn 27 53 318 M1SpeedFbSel28 44 66 339 400 418 430 436 444 447 M1SpeedMax 27 96 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 126 128 131 134 261 444 M1SpeedMin 27 96 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 126 128 131 134 260 444 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f M1SpeedScale 96 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 126 128 131 134 338 444 MiGtrtTorobierGel 77 306 444 M1TachMaxSpeed e 360 M1 TachoAdjuSt AAA 29 343 MiTachotGain 361 MiTachotfune ccc ccceeeeceeeeesseeeeteneeeeenes 361 M1 TachoVolt1000 ccceeseeeeeeeeee 28 343 MiTemptel 77 80 297 410 MITArMOUT ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 33 309 MUER 27 31 313 Mi Torobrov Tume 307 436 M1UsedFexType 27 33 58 83 393 428 429 M1 Zerot peedt hy ssnsesseneeeeeeeeerreseren 305 M1 Zerot peedl mm 261 447 M Alarnl ml oad 334 427 441 M Alaml mTemp 335 426 441 Ou du VE 330 M Amb nnnnnnnnnennnnsnnnnnsnnnnsnrrrnesnrrrenrnrresnrnne 330 M basepoeed e 327 444 M b rakehckzel 333 M2BrakeCttl ccccceseececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 333 M b raketitiime 336 M f rake mmh 336 M frakel ong me 336 M ibrokebietiht exier5ed ussgeeegEee ge eRES Aen 334 M2BrakeStopDly ssssnn
86. 7 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO7BitNo 14 14 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO7BitNo digital output 7 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DOZIndex 14 13 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DOB8lndex digital output 8 index Digital output 8 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO8BitNo 14 16 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Digital output 8 default setting is command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DOB8BitNo digital output 8 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO8Index 14 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 9999 999 o 999 o 99 o 99 o 9 ol 603 pe ggg o e REES gs ge a Gt a a EE Fe DE DR EE a Keele eet ee ee ee ee Ee Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Analog outputs IndexAOQ1 analog output 1 index Analog output 1 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO1 15 01 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N CtriWordAO1 co
87. B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation Appendix C Index of signal and parameters Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 21 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Introduction to this manual 22 Start up Chapter overview General This chapter describes the basic start up procedure of the drive A more detailed description of the signals and parameters involved in the procedure can be found in section Signal and parameter list The drive can be operated locally from DriveWindow DriveWindow Light or DCS800 Control Panel respectively remote from local I O or overriding control The following start up procedure uses DriveWindow for further information about DriveWindow consult its online help However parameters can also be changed with DriveWindow Light or the DCS800 Control Panel The start up procedure includes actions that need only be taken when powering up the drive for the first time in a new installation e g entering the motor data After the start up the drive can be powered up without using these start up functions again The start up procedure can be repeated later if the start up data needs to be altered Refer to section Fault tracing in case problems should arise In case of a major problem disconnect mains and wait for 5 minutes before attempting any work on the drive the motor or the motor cables Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 23
88. Bridge bridge 1 selected motoring bridge Bridge2 bridge 2 selected generating bridge Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y CtriStatMas 12 pulse master control status 12 pulse master control status Bit Value Comment BO command On to 12 pulse slave no action B1 command Off2N Emergency Off Coast Stop to 12 pulse slave low active no action motor heating function active motor heating function not active command Run to 12 pulse slave no action command field exciter On command field exciter Off dynamic braking no action 12 pulse serial operation see OperModeSel 43 01 12 pulse parallel operation see OperModeSel 43 01 command Reset to 12 pulse slave no action waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage see RevVoltMargin 44 21 no action autotuning armature current controller active no action zero current detected RevDly 43 14 is elapsed no action command to change direction of current bridge change over active no action CurCtrlStat2 6 04 gt O current controller is blocked no action CurRefUsed 3 12 negative CurRefUsed 3 12 positive The control bits B3 to B6 Reset On Run and Off2N are only valid in the 12 pulse slave if in the 12 pulse slave CommandSel 10 01 12P Link Valid in 12 pulse master and slave Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y OO ch OO eh OO ch OO ch Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Paramete
89. CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 12 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M1ArmL motor 1 armature inductance Inductance of the armature circuit in mH Used for the EMF compensation dI EMF U R 1 L dt Int Scaling 100 1 mH Type Volatile N e ka O key O re We x O 0 D M1ArmR motor 1 armature resistance Resistance of the armature circuit in mQ Used for the EMF compensation se al EMF U R 1 L 4 dt Int Scaling 1 1 mQ Type Volatile N PropFbSel p part current feedback selection PropFbSel 43 13 chooses the armature current feedback type for the p part of the armature current controller 0 PeakCur peak current measurement is used default 1 AverageCur average current measurement is used Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N x E i Ee Uk relative short circuit impedance For more information contact Your ABB representative Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N QO X bei ab D Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 310 Signal Parameter name FiringLimMode firing limit mode FiringLimMode 43 13 selects the strategy for ArmAlphaMax 20 14 0 Fix the firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax 20 14 1 FixSingle The firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax 20 14 When ArmAlphaMax 20 14 is reached single firing pulses are fired default 2 Calculated the firing limit is reduced from 165 to ArmAlp
90. DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean values 169 Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign XOR Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function OUT is true if one input is true otherwise OUT is false Truth table IN IN2 IN3_ OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 False All bits 0 0 0 0 1 True Al bits 1 1 0 1 0 True All bits 1 1 0 1 1 False All bits 0 0 1 0 0 True All bits 1 1 1 0 1 False All bits 0 0 1 1 0 False All bits 0 0 1 1 1 True All bits 1 1 No IN2 Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean values Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Adaptive Program 170 Diagram Kai Be D 2 EC D E el be Kei Ei a c o O E o D bi e A OO SJBUIO E Ge S d 9199 lt G1 98 o E y1 98 lt 1 98 O Z Z 4 98 ISCH c O 01 98 o 60 98 S 80 98 E 10 98 90 98 D o G0 98 5 x 70 98 8 0 98 a 20 98 x C 10 98 amp Jaqulog jndino T 1Nd1NO weN Auedwo9 uoneoddy Jg EN DR LO CN LIN edAt ON 49018 ON 49018 ON 49014 JPY H EN LNO ZNI Ti IN edit ON 49018 ON 490
91. E speed sealing S f gt 600Hz 49 25 49 23 2 29 8 60s E g the speed scaling must be 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A B evaluation Encoder 2 parameters not consistent Check SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Enc2MeasMode 50 18 Enc2PulseNo 50 19 At scaling speed see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula x H F f 2600 Hz ppr speed scaling S f gt 600Hz 50 19 50 18 2 29 7 60s E g the speed scaling must be 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A B evaluation Autotuning speed does not reach setpoint EMF control motor is not accelerating or wrong tacho polarity tacho encoder not enough load too low inertia for the detection of speed controller parameters drive not in speed control mode see TorqSel 26 01 TorqSelMod 26 03 TorqMuxMode 26 04 reserved Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Thyristor diagnosis 102 103 104 shortcut caused by V1 shortcut caused by V2 shortcut caused by V3 shortcut caused by V4 shortcut caused by V5 shortcut caused by V6 thyristor block test failed shortcut caused by V15 or V22 shortcut caused by V16 or V23 shortcut caused by V11 or V24 shortcut caused by V12 or V25 shortcut caused by V13 or V26 shortcut caused by V14 or V21 motor connected to ground armature winding
92. EE 162 OR DEE 162 POLO AG D 162 PAE GU sia ener etal geeiet E dade e tas a laa E EEE A 163 BEE SO aM edn Range a ete ee 163 PBA eeri ee Eegeregie exch R E A E ET 164 SE le EEN 164 LEE 165 VV eee ee Eege 165 SA WEE 166 e EE 166 Ei DEE 167 IO sce e ee ene E 167 TON EE 168 TING Le DEE a N 168 POF WE 169 DORAN EE 170 Signal and parameter list 171 Signals and Garameters AAA 171 ils 171 PAL AIMIGUGIS obs d sen eege eege ege eege 173 EIER 176 Physical e EE 176 Ee 180 Speed controller Le 180 GOUD 3 WER 183 Reference actual values ccccccecsesesseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesessseeeeeseeeeeeeees 183 GOUD EE 186 Je teg LL EE 186 GrOUp D emp a a a sd eeedend stmt naan aiag E E aS 194 PUNO M VLO E 194 Grop EE 195 Drive IOGIC SIGNALS E 195 GrP EE 199 Control WOrdS esie a a tee S Ed 199 CAVOU PS EEA EEE E dec accruv ee aecansant EO AT 206 E ene WONG EE 206 Grop EE 212 Fault alarm WOrdS EE 212 OUD Meet ee ee 227 Stait stop EE EE 227 EI TI EE 238 Speed reference input sisiccesicviesssdce ins ERR ER EA EEEEEEN EEEEC ENER 238 EI 245 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Table of contents 16 Constant Speeds EE 245 Group 1S E 246 ADAlOG lei e 246 Group eege at ae ree ese oe A A eee S ON 251 Digital SOUL TI 251 Gro p EE 253 Analog ef E 253 EI EI 255 System control Mile DEE 255 MRO UID EE EE 258 Data SIOFAGC E 258 OU 2 O EEEE cet Re tate ees 260 LIMIS eege Geer 260 Grop 2N irana
93. FB TimeOut 30 35 F528 FieldBusCom A128 FieldBusCom DCSLink MailBoxCycle1 94 13 F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 GE 94 31 e VZP TimeOut 94 03 F535 12PulseCom _ Bee F519 M2FexCom SDCS COM 8 ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 F543 COM8Com A113 COM8Com Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 30 27 LocalLossCtrl local loss control LocalLossCtrl 30 27 determines the reaction to a local loss DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow DriveWindow Light F546 LocalCmdLoss FaultWord3 9 03 bit 13 is set with 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and local loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod
94. Firmware Manual e f Drive Window ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 File Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help WW DCS 800 D1 041 F Application amp Control Gi Data logger gq Event logger DI Fault logger Memory alelx eles alel lole el relais aK Dime x a 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 43 02 Cursel Zi 43 06 MIKpArmCur 43 07 M1TiArmCur ms e 43 08 MiDiscontCurLim amp 43 09 M1ArmL mH G 43 10 M1ArmR mOhm 99 12 MiUsedFexType O 1 Par 1 17 O 1 Par 3 12 O 1 Par 43 2 0H1 Par 43 6 O 1 Par 43 7 0H1 Par 43 8 0H1 Par 43 9 0H1 Par 43 10 0H1 Par 99 12 Interval ms Sutor Buffer s ix Axis Length s T Y Axis Maximum Y Axis Minimum 1 01 17 EMF volt ctRel 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 3 Channel 3 4 Channel 4 5 channelS 6 Channel Normal 10 3600 000 15 000 20 00 10 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 eeen J alt d a JS WW DCS 800 Di O 1 After tuning of M1ArmR 46 10 tune M1ArmL 43 09 until the EMF is not oscillating spikes at the beginning or end of the current step Sais 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Start up 36 Drive Window ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 E J5 aj xi Eile Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger
95. Help Halex aee Ble Kaole ed Henx aK a x 7 W I bcs 800 Di 0H1 a A Application amp Control 9 T 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0H1 Par 1 17 Data logger 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 0H1 Par 3 12 I Event logger 43 02 Cursel O 1 Par 43 2 D I Fault logger EE F Gier 43 07 M1TiArmCur Ims O 1 Par 43 7 Ze amp Memory 43 08 MiDiscontCurLim O 1 Par 43 8 E amp Parameters 43 09 MiArmL mH 0 1 Par 43 9 01 Phys Act Values amp 43 10 MiarmR mOhm OH 1 Par 43 10 1 02 SPC Signals xl amp 99 12 M1UsedFexType 0H1 Par 99 12 Monitor 20 History Buffer s 3600 000 Kx Axis Length s 15 000 T Y Axis Maximum 20 00 Y Axis Minimum 10 00 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0 00 100 00 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 0 00 100 00 3 Channel3 0 00 100 00 104 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 channelS 0 00 100 00 6 Channel6 0 00 100 00 lt 1 6 00 9 00 12 00 15 00 107 Time s Wi Dream D1 mn 8 ai H Sel mjo el WI pcs 800 D1 0H1 D a a After tuning of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 46 10 remove On and Run via DriveWindow set CurSel 43 02 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 back to their original settings Part 2 determine discontinuous current limit of the motor connect an oscilloscope to the fixed AO I act X4 9 10 on the SDCS CON 4 or X4 5 6 on the SDCS IOB 3 connect DriveWindow to
96. IEN 309 UNetMin1 290 405 427 441 UNetMin2 ee 291 405 427 441 USCUMCW 0 ccccceceeeeeeeeeseteeneeeees 47 88 204 UserAlarmWord enennonennononnenoeennnnne 220 419 LsertaulWord 216 419 LR 174 257 VarSlopeRate siisciecicciercsiasecocarencenceeasstocenecdae 269 VoltActRel aieeenernernrerrnerrrerrrerrrerrrerrens 178 VOIRG EE 41 318 VORRE 0 Renn a E 185 Volet aaneen beer 41 185 Votbeftvt n 317 VoltRefSlope e 318 VSA I O eize eee 112 114 116 118 WINCtrIMOde 1 cece ceecccceeeececeseeeeeeseaeeeeenes 273 WinderScalle cccccccccecececsseeeeeseseaeeeeenes 344 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 465 WinlntegOn EE 273 ZerotCurfimeOut 381 408 436 WinWidthNeg E 273 ZeroDaInpR FE csxccitissctiostaeer ciate 278 ek le e 273 ZOTOPFEQRF Bivcccti snc asec estee e ee 278 ZerotCurfieiect 70 380 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f DCSs00 family DCS800 S modules a The versatile drive for any Em application E 20 5 200A O 1 160 Voe 230 1 000 Me E IPOO DCS800 A enclosed D converters E Complete drive solutions E 20 20 000A QO 1 500 Voe E 230 1 200V E IP21 IP54 E DCS800 E series D Pre assembled drive kits 20 2 000A E O se 700 Voo 230 600 Vie E IPOO DCS800 R Rebuild Kit Digital control kit for existing powerstacks 8 2
97. Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 96 Ch0 communication to overriding control ABB overriding control The communication between the overriding control and the SDCS COM 8 via ChO uses data sets The data sets are connected to the firmware by read and write pointers see sections Received data set table and Transmitted data set table Received and transmitted values are set according to groups 90 to 93 Received data sets are typically connected to MainCtrlWord 7 01 and SpeedRef 23 01 whereas transmitted data sets are connected to MainStatWord 8 01 and MotSpeed 1 04 Parameter setting example The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up the communication between the drive and ABB overriding control Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 Ch NodeAdar 70 01 0 254 ChO node address ChO LinkControl 70 02 10 ChO LED light intensity ChO BaudRate 70 03 4 Mbits s for ABB overriding control ChO TimeOut 70 04 100 Time delay for communication loss detection ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 RampStop Reaction to communication loss detection Ch0O HW Config 70 06 Rin
98. N M1KpArmCur motor 1 p part armature current controller Proportional gain of the current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M1NomCur 99 03 with M1KpArmCur 43 06 3 if the current error is 5 of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N WEEN Standard 02 325 e a Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 309 Signal Parameter name 43 07 M1TiArmCur motor 1 i part armature current controller Integral time of the current controller M1TiArmCur 43 07 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M1NomCur 99 03 with M1KpArmCur 43 06 3 if the current error is 5 of M1NomCur 99 03 On that condition and with M1TiArmCur 43 07 50 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal current if the current error is constant after 50 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M1TiArmCur 43 07 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N 50 min ms unit M1DiscontCurLim motor 1 discontinuous current limit Threshold continuous discontinuous current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 The actual continuous discontinuous current state can be read from
99. Note2 M1SpeedScale 50 01 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 because the maximum amount of speed units is 32 000 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Commissioning hint set M1SpeedScale 50 01 to maximum speed set M1BaseSpeed 99 04 to base speed set M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1SpeedMin 20 01 to maximum speed Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1EncMeasMode motor 1 encoder 1 measuring mode M1EncMeasMode 50 02 selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 1 0 A B Dir channel A rising edges for speed channel A not not used channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 1 1 A channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channels B and B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 2 A B Dir channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 3 A B channels A A not and B B not rising and falling edges for speed and direction speed evaluation factor 4 default Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N M1SpeedFbSel motor 1speed feedback selector Motor 1 speed feedback selection 0 EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF default 1 Encoder speed is measured by means of
100. PT100 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 2 2PT100 Al3 two PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS IOB 3 3 3PT100 AI3 three PT100 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 4 4PT100 AI3 2 four PT100 3 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 5 5PT100 Al3 2 five PT100 3 connected to A and 2 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 6 6PT100 AI3 2 six PT100 3 connected to AI3 and 3 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 7 1PT100 Al8s one PT100 connected to Al8 on RAIO2 8 2PT100 Al8 two PT100 connected to Al8 on RAIO2 9 3PT100 AIS three PT100 connected to Al8 on RAIO2 10 4PT100 AI8 7 four PT100 3 connected to Al8 and 1 connected to AI7 on RAIO2 11 5PT100 Al8 7 five PT100 3 connected to Al8 and 2 connected to AI7 on RAIO2 12 6PT100 Al8 7 six PT100 3 connected to Al8 and 3 connected to AI7 on RAIO2 13 1PTC AIS one PTC connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 14 2PTC AI3 2 two PTC 1 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 15 1PTC Al2 Con one PTC connected to Al2 on SDCS CON 4 For more information see section Motor protection Note1 Al7 and Al8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule 98 06 Note2 In case only one PT100 is connected to an Al of the SDCS IOB 3 the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10 Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see Hardware manual Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed min 1PTC Atten max def M2AlarmLimTemp motor 2 alarm limit temperature
101. Signal Parameter name FirmwareVer firmware version Name of the loaded firmware version The format is yyy or yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version and yyy single phase firmware for demo units Int Scaling Type Volatile Y ApplicName name of application program Name of the running application program NoMemCard no Memory Card plugged in Inactive A Memory Card is plugged in but the application program is inactive Use ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl to activate the application program NoApplic the Memory Card is empty no application program available lt application name gt name of the running application program Int Scaling Type Cc Volatile Y ConvNomVolt converter nominal AC voltage measurement circuit Adjustment of AC voltage measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 0 Read from S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 if S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 0 Int Scaling 1 1V Type l Volatile Y ConvNomCur converter nominal DC current measurement circuit Adjustment of DC current measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S ConvScaleCur 97 02 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S ConvScaleCur 97 02 0 Read from S ConvScaleCur 97 02 if S ConvScaleCur 97 02 0 Int Scaling 1 1A Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW
102. Subnet mask 3 120 131 Subnet mask A 120 131 SyncCommand sssssseeessseeeeeee eea 66 70 228 ALS Un KEE 229 SysFaultWord 2 eedueuetredelEue de ECeegee 220 SysPassCode AEN 255 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 464 SystemTime os coitensiacisctecaidesetcienssianttieaetecens 195 Elei el TEE 249 TaGnOLOw V all cccccssiueateceecccenciseceexteteni 249 TachoTerminal seeen 193 TAFPID eisin eee ere eres 300 TOP ID E 300 LB eae hes dasa snes eects 379 iis ae re sr 29 41 314 TimeLevSel aoeneeseenneseeesrrrrrrereerserns 353 446 TIP ID renees a REER 300 RE 29 39 276 Boe reer err ee ee eee er 278 RRE MA TT 276 TGvalMmfzpeed ek 278 TOOILINKCONFIG 00 2 2 eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 257 TorohcctCompbtef 180 POR AC ld ln 381 TOPCON oecon eae E 181 TOM GOMe Clix ca cas cetiteinsseeree cscs eaten 77 285 Ugen cicaticeairdiceieieetecticnendalctentenaee 180 TorqGenMaXx eee ene eee eee 263 TorqlntegRef E 180 sel lee 182 TOTO MAM wccsdeonctcdicunndstancrencacesieausdeateoee 28 261 Tr AM lessee eerie eccccateee he beer 181 TOT MaxSP C siivcceineieisnioreaccesivne 95 175 261 TORQ MOK A E 262 PONG lesten 28 261 Ka elle TEE 181 ToraMiNS PO visicateccocenriirerzeiantinzessunnnntieantcie 262 stelle 2 E 262 etc E 70 101 283 TorgMuxMoqe sic exists ce tinectenrtetiescoe 101 282 site ele 180 TorgqRampDown seeen 49 280 Usel ul E 280 RK el 180 TorqRef2 n
103. SyncCommand 10 04 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 343 Signal Parameter name PosCountlnitHi Position counter encoder 1 high initial value Position counter initial high word for pulse encoder 1 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 65536 pulse edges Scaled 1 1 revolution Rollover always 0 See also SyncCommand 10 04 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N SpeedLev speed level When MotSpeed 1 04 reaches SpeedLev 50 10 the bit AboveLimit MainStatWord 8 01 bit 10 is set 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type Volatile N rpm DynBrakeDly dynamic braking delay In case of dynamic braking with EMF feedback M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 EMF or a speed feedback fault there is no valid information about the motor speed and thus no zero speed information To prevent an interlocking of the drive after dynamic braking the speed is assumed zero after DynBrakeDly 50 11 is elapsed WEE the motor voltage is measured directly at the motor terminals and is thus valid during dynamic braking Os no zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated 1 s to 3000 s zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated after the programmed time is elapsed Int Scaling 1 1s Type l Volatile N M1TachoAdjust motor 1 tacho adjust Fine tuning of an
104. This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Data5 data container 5 Data container 5 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data6 data container 6 Data container 6 see group description above Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Data7 data container 7 Data container 7 see group description above Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Data8 data container 8 Data container 8 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data9 data container 9 Data container 9 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data10 data container 10 Data container 10 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data11 data container 11 Data container 11 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data12 data container 12 Data container 12 see group description above Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile min x S E N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI N O N NI 259 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name This parameter group consists of all user settable limits
105. Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 356 Signal Parameter name 84 06 Block1In2 function block 1 input 2 Selects the source for input 2 of function block 1 BPS1 Description see Block1In1 84 05 except To get only a certain bit e g RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord 8 01 set Block1In2 84 06 801 and Block 1Attrib 84 08 30h Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Block1In3 function block 1 input 3 Selects the source for input 3 of function block 1 BPS1 Description see Block1In1 84 05 except To get only a certain bit e g RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord 8 01 set Block1In3 84 07 801 and Block 1Attrib 84 08 300h Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N Block1 Attrib function block 1 attribute Defines the attributes of function block 1 for all three inputs Block1In1 84 05 Block1In2 84 06 and Block1In3 84 07 BPS1 Block 1Attrib 84 08 is divided into 4 parts Bit number 0 3 for input 1 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word Bit number 4 7 for input 2 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word Bit number 8 11 for input 3 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word Bit number 12 14 for input 1 3 to feed a constant directly into the input EE E STTTS fn Boolean Function block Function block Function block To use an input input 3 bit input 2 bit input 1 bit as a constant selection selection selection v
106. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string name with a maximum of 12 characters This name will override the numbers and is shown as well in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Note1 With a SDCS COM 8 parameter 99 09 is named DeviceNumber otherwise DeviceName Int Scaling 1 Type I C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name NomMainsVolt nominal AC mains voltage Nominal mains voltage AC of the supply The default and maximum values are preset automatically according to TypeCode 97 01 respectively S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 97 01 97 03 Absolute max is 1200 V Int Scaling 1 1V Type Volatile N M1NomFldCur motor 1 nominal field current Motor 1 nominal field current from the motor rating plate Note1 In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M1NomCur 99 03 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 100 1A Type l Volatile N M1UsedFexType motor 1 used field exciter type Motor 1 used field exciter type 0 NotUsed no or foreign field exciter connected 1 OnBoard integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default 2 FEX 425 Int internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 3 DCF803 0035 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 4 DCF803 00
107. Za The values for the resistance R and the inductance L of the motor have to be determent during the commissioning Voltage measurement Ua HA la La dla dt Current controller p part i part L Discontinuous current EMF adaptation Discontinuous current limit l ref Control principle armature current controller Thus the manual tuning of the armature current controller has to be splitted into Manual three parts 1 determine resistance and inductance of the motor 2 determine discontinuous current limit of the motor 3 manual tuning of the armature current controller p and i part tuning DriveWindow information VW DCS 800 01 mm al af JE E lei mjo ei a i signal Run On DriveWindow information Part 1 determine resistance and inductance of the motor connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor EMF VoltActRel 1 17 and CurRefUsed 3 12 set CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt Start up 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 34 set M1KpArmCur 43 06 M1TiArmCur 46 07 M1DiscontCurLim 46 08 M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 46 10 to default set M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to step the armature current controller and watch the EMF make sure the motor is not turning Attention let the drive run only for a short time i orivewindow seg cocs soo DECOM SSS TS ST TE Eile
108. a plus sign and the disappearing alarm with a minus sign An appearing user defined alarm has a three as first digit A disappearing user defined alarm has a four as first digit The alarm handling must provides 4 alarm levels Alarm level 1 the main contactor cannot be switched on again after the drive stopped no re start possible Alarm level 2 fan contactor stays on as long as the alarm is pending ifthe alarm disappears FanDly 21 14 will start Alarm level 3 AutoReclosing auto re start is AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 15 active RdyRun MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 is disabled but the drive is automatically restarted when the alarm condition vanishes ais set to 150 single firing pulses Alarm level 4 drive keeps on running and the alarm is indicated In case an alarm occurs it stays active until the cause is eliminated Then the alarm will automatically disappear thus a Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 is not needed and will have no effect Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Alarm name Alarm number Alarm name Alarm number AlRange A127 M2OverTemp A109 AppIDiff A119 MainsLowVolt A111 ArmCurDev A114 MechBrake A122 ArmCurRipple A117 MemCardFail A143 AutotuneFail A121 MemCardMiss A142 BrakeLongFalling A116 NoAPTaskTime A136 COM8Com A113 Off2FieldBus A138 COM8FwVer A141 Off2ViaDI A101 Con
109. acknowledge In case of A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 the speed reference is set to zero and the speed controller is kept active until the drive is stopped by either On 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 or Off2N 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 Emergency Off Coast Stop Note1 If the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 are different for a longer time than set in M1BrakeFitTime 42 05 either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 or F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 is set depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Note2 If the brake close apply command BrakeCmd AuxSiatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 are different for a longer time than set in M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 either A122 MechBrake AlarmWorda2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 is set depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N M1StrtTorqRefSel motor 1 start torque reference selector Motor 1 start torque selector 0 NotUsed start torque function is blocked and the start torque reference is fixed zero default 1 Memory torque memory released the minimum value equals the absolute value of StrtTorqRef 42 08 2 StrtTorqRef StrtTorqRef 42 08 3 A analog input Al1 4 Al2 analog input Al2 5 Al3 analog input Al3 6 Al4 analog
110. also be connected directly to the desired DCS800 parameters In this case please take care that the RDNA 01 adapter gets the changed values and also take care that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 to prevent data trouble Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 120 Ethernet IP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Ethernet adapter RETA 01 together with the DCS800 RETA 01 DCS800 The Ethernet IP communication with the drive requires the option RETA 01 Related documentation User s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module RETA 01 SAFE 64539736 REV D The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual EDS file The EDS file for RETA 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RETA 01 into slot 1 of the drive Drive configuration The Ethernet adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances 102 103 if Protocol 51 16 is set to 2 Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile The instances 100 101 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since firmware version 2 x if Protocol 51 16 is set to 1 Ethernet IP AC DC communication profile With these instances i
111. and OK DCSLink node24 not active or faulty Node25 DCSLink node25 active and OK DCSLink node25 not active or faulty Node26 DCSLink node26 active and OK DCSLink node26 not active or faulty Node27 DCSLink node27 active and OK DCSLink node27 not active or faulty Node28 DCSLink node28 active and OK DCSLink node28 not active or faulty Node29 DCSLink node29 active and OK DCSLink node29 not active or faulty DCSLink node30 active and OK DCSLink node30 not active or faulty DCSLink node31 active and OK DCSLink node31 not active or faulty DCSLink node32 active and OK DCSLink node32 not active or faulty Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Node30 Node31 Node32 OO ch OO ck OO zk OO ch Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Ext IO Status external IO status Status of external I O Value Comment first RAIO xx detected see AIO ExtModule 98 06 first RAIO xx not existing or faulty second RAIO xx detected see AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 second RAIO xx not existing or faulty RTAC xx detected RTAC xx not existing or faulty first RDIO xx detected see DIO ExtModule1 98 03 first RDIO xx not existing or faulty second RDIO xx detected see DIO ExtModule2 98 04 second RDIO xx not existing or faulty SDCS DSL 4 detected see DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 SDCS DSL 4 not existing or faulty SDCS IOB 2x detected see IO BoardConfig 98 15 SDCS IOB 2x not existing or faulty SDC
112. armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking A113 COM8Com AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 12 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note1 The time out for Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 is set by Ch2 Timeout 70 14 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N le roa7 unwed SSS 70 18 Ch2 FolSig1 channel 2 follower signal 1 Follower signal 1 receives via channel 2 the 1 value of data set 41 from the master The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord 7 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 70 19 Ch2 FolSig2 channel 2 follower signal 2 Follower signal 2 receives via channel 2 the 2 value of data set 41 from the master The format is RampStop RampStop 0o xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Ch2 FolSig3 channel 2 follower signal 3 Follower signal 3 receives via channel 2 the 3 value of data set 41 from the master The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA 25 01 Int Scaling
113. be connected to SpeedRefUsed 2 17 via RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Internally limited from 2 29 E rpm to 2 29 220l rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y FixedSpeed1 fixed speed 1 FixedSpeed1 23 02 is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 2 01 at the speed ramp s input It can be released by Jog 10 17 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 8 The ramp times are set with JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 Internally limited from 2 29 sale o 2 29 SE 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N FixedSpeed2 fixed speed 2 FixedSpeed2 23 03 is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 2 01 at the speed ramp s input It can be released by Jog2 10 18 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 9 The ramp times are set with JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 Internally limited from 2 29 sale rpm to 2 29 E rp 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name SpeedCorr speed correction The SpeedCorr 23 04 is added to the ramped reference SpeedRef3 2 02 Internally limited from 2 29 32767 rpm to 2 29 32767 rpm 20000 20000 Note1 Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp it must be set to zero prior t
114. bit sign Input IN3 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 165 Sort Type Arithmetic function Illustration Operation OUT is the result of the square root calculation With IN3 true 1 negative values at IN1 and IN2 are read as absolute numbers Out j IN1 1 IN2 With IN3 false 0 OUT is set to zero if a square rood should be taken from a negative IN1 IN2 Out VIN1 IN2 when IN1 IN2 gt Qand Out 0 when IN1 IN2 lt 0 Connections Input IN1 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Input IN3 boolean value Output OUT 16 bit integer value SqWav Type Arithmetic function Illustration Operation OUT alternates between the value of IN3 and zero 0 if the block is enabled with IN1 Connections true 1 The period is set with IN2 with 1 1 ms Input IN1 boolean value Input IN2 16 bit integer value Input IN3 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 166 SR Type Logical function Illustration Operation Set reset block IN1 S input sets and IN2 R input or IN3 R input reset OUT e fIN1 IN2 and INS are false the current value remains at OUT e f IN1 is true and IN2 and INS are false OUT is true e f IN2 o
115. can be done by e g the overriding control using TorqSel 26 01 See also TorqMux 26 05 and TorqMuxMode 26 04 Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 102 Follower diagnostics All the followers receive the torque reference via TorqRefA 25 01 All followers are able to detect communication breaks after the first valid message is received The action due to a communication break is defined by Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 and Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Feedback for all alarms and faults from the followers must be handled by the overriding control through the ChO on the SDCS COM 8 board Master follower link specification Size of the link One master and maximum ten followers are allowed If more than ten followers are required a local ABB agent should be consulted Configuration Link is configurable by the overriding control using Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 This makes possible to change between master and follower by the overriding control without changes in the hardware Transmission rate 4 Mbit s Total performance of the link 2 ms between master and followers Protocol Distributed Drives Communication System DDCS Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 103 Ch3 commissioning and maintenance tools DriveWindow DriveWindow can be connected to Ch in either ring max 5 drives or star connection using NDBU xx branching units see Ch3 HW Config 70 21 The node numbers Ch3 NodeA
116. change between Motor1 and Motor2 shared motion parameters for motor 2 see group 49 ParChange 10 10 selects the binary signal to release either Motor1 User1 or Motor2 User2 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N ParApplSave save load parameters and enable disable application programs If parameters are written to cyclic e g from an overriding control they are only stored in the RAM and not in the flash By means of ParAppiSave 16 06 all parameter values are saved from the RAM into the flash ParApplSave 16 06 is also used to save load a parameter set on from the memory card and to enable disable application programs 0 Done parameters are saved or all other actions are finished default 1 Save saves the actual used parameters into the flash 3 SaveToMemC saves a complete parameter set actual used parameters User1 and User2 from control board to memory card 4 LoadFromMemC loads a complete parameter set actual used parameters User1 and User2 from memory card to control board 4 EableAppl enables the application program 5 DisableAppl disables the application program 6 DeleteAppl To un protect DeleteAppl set ServiceMode 99 06 DeleteAppl Deletes the application and the complete parameter set actual used parameters User1 and User stored on the memory card Also all user defined parameters will be erased from the actual parameter set Parameter sets User1 or User stored in the drive itself will not be influe
117. control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 ETHERNET TCP Comm rate 51 02 0 Auto negotiate Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 132 automatic set baud rate as required DHCP 51 03 0 DHCP disabled IP address setting from following parameters IP address 1 51 04 192 e g IP address 192 168 0 1 IP address 2 51 05 168 IP address 3 51 06 0 IP address 4 51 07 Pe Subnet mask 1 51 08 255 e g subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 2 51 09 255 Subnet mask 3 51 10 255 Subnet mask 4 51 11 0 GW address 1 51 12 0 e g gateway address 0 0 0 0 GW address 2 51 13 0 GW address 3 51 14 0 GW address 4 51 15 0 Protocol 51 16 0 0 Modbus TCP Modbus timeout 51 17 22 0 no monitoring 1 100 ms 22 2200 ms Stop function 51 18 NA not applicable when using Modbus TCP Output 1 51 19 1 data word 1 setting via parameter 90 01 Output 2 51 20 2 data word 2
118. detects the kind of speed feedback EMF pulse encoder 1 pulse encoder 2 or analog tacho the drive is using During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed MW1BaseSpeed 99 04 During the whole procedure the drive will be in EMF speed control despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Analog tacho fine tune procedure 29 When the autotuning is finished successfully check M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 parameter set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning In case an analog tacho is detected M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Tacho it is recommended to fine tune the analog tacho Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune and set On and Run within 20 s Measure the motor speed with a hand held tacho and write the value into M1TachoAdjust 50 12 Check SpeedActTach 1 05 against SpoeedRef4 2 18 Stop the autotuning by removing Run and On via the DriveWindow control panel 06 Autotuning speed controller 1 2 Open the workspace 06 DCS800 Autotuning speed controller dww Enter the basic speed torque and current limits the speed filter times and the motor base spee
119. drive to drive respectively master follower communication Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N Al Mon4mA analog input 4 mA fault selector Al Mon4mA 30 29 determines the reaction to an undershoot of one of the analog inputs under 4 mA 2 V if it is configured to this mode 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 Fault the drive stops according to FaultStopMode 30 30 and trips with F551 AlRange FaultWord4 9 04 bit 2 default 2 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AlRange AlarmWorad2 9 07 bit 10 3 FixedSpeed1 the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 and sets A127 AlRange AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 10 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed RampStop RampStop def Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 294 Signal Parameter name E C FaultStopMode fault stop mode FaultStopMode 30 30 determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 4 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and a trip of level 4 is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default
120. e Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when main power is applied Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that 1 Voltage between drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the frame is close to 0 V 2 Voltage between terminals C and D and the frame is close to 0 V e Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may cause dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is switched off e Do not make any insulation resistance or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive modules e Isolate the motor cables from the drive when testing the insulation resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the motor e When reconnecting the motor cable always check that the C and D cables are connected with the proper terminal Note e The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when the main power is on regardless of whether the motor is running or not e Depending on the external wiring dangerous voltages 115 V 220 V or 230 V may be present on the relay outputs of the drive system e g SDCS IOB 2 and RDIO e DCS800 with enclosure extension Before working on the drive isolate the whole drive system from the supply Safety instructions 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Grounding These instructions are intended
121. eer eie 224 LimvMord 208 LOA GOMP DE 281 LO AO KE EE 280 LocalLossCtrl a se 292 407 434 445 LocationCounter ccccccceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 354 Reie Eet 256 M1AlarmLimLoad 296 414 426 441 MiAlarmLimTemp 297 410 425 441 MA ANIM ees te civiedicpiecere tele ot 33 309 MiAmml Im 28 MAAR ae e 28 33 309 M1BaseSpeed snennnnenen 27 390 400 444 MiBrakehckGel 70 305 435 443 MiBrakeCn 304 M1BrakeFltTime o nnnoonennooennnnsnerrnnena 305 435 M1BrakeLiftDly eeh egene cacttelscdchenincneans 307 M1BrakeLongTime ssssesseenen 307 435 443 MiBrakeRefDly ceceessseeeeneeeeeeees 305 MiBraketopthy AA 307 M1CurLimBrdg1 eege 28 262 M1 CurbimBrd EE 28 262 M1DiscontCurLim 28 33 58 60 309 MiEncheachMode 28 66 339 M1EncPulseNo oeonnesonnnnneennnnennenennnn 28 339 Miau ml oad 296 414 426 Miau mTemp 297 410 425 MiFex larmmWord 225 M1FexFaultWord nneonnnennnnssnnrenenrrrsrnne 225 MiFexchode 58 83 94 370 428 MiEldleattet 54 314 M1FIidMinTrip 29 31 44 54 58 287 418 433 M1FidOvrCurLev nossen 287 416 428 Mildbiertvt cee eececceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31 319 M1FIdRefModeEe ssiieceererneersrrrnn 31 319 MiFreewbll eu 318 Mikltvonzel 70 298 413 425 MAK DAMNCU eet ggegeeeee EEN 33 MikpohrmtCur 28 308 429 443 MITA DF OX ege eege 27 31 313 MiModel Time 296 414 MihNomCur ooiaaciinennnn 27 58
122. field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 539 FastCurRise Fast current rise 9 03 RdyRef 1 1 Actual current di dt too fast bit6 and Check generating 540 COM8Faulty SDCS COM 8 faulty 9 03 RdyOn 1 1 Check bit 7 Change SDCS COM 8 and or SDCS CON 4 ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 541 Motor 1 field exciter low under current 9 03 always 1 M1FexLowCur Check bit 8 M1FlIdMinTrip 30 12 FldMinTripDly 45 18 parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning EMF controller tuning flux linearization motor name plate for minimum current at maximum field weakening maximum speed field circuit fuses if the field current oscillates if the motor has a high armature reaction fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s ERC CECR Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 434 o gt 2 a lt Ee 5 1 DriveWindow Light 542 Motor 2 field exciter low under current 9 03 always M2FexLowCur Check bit 9 M2FlIdMinTrip 49 08 FldMinTripDly 45 18 parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning EMF controller tuning flux linearization motor name plate for minimum current at maximum field weakening maximum speed field circuit fuses if the field current oscillates if the motor has a high armature reaction fault message at field exciter 7 segment
123. for PTC max 1 PTC for motor 1 or max 1 PTC for motor 2 Only Al2 can be used for the temperature measurement with PTC Jumper settings see Hardware Manual SDCS CON 4 X3 S3 78 eZ gt eu PTC 4 10 4K75 1 gt x lt fo DCS800 FW PTC and CON4 dsf PTC and SDCS CON 4 The temperature of motor 1 and motor 2 can be supervised by means of klixons The klixon is a thermal switch opening its contact at a defined temperature This can be used for supervision of the temperature by means of connecting the switch to a digital input of the drive The digital input for the klixon s is selected with M1KlixonSel 31 08 The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp when the klixon opens The motor fan will continue to work until the klixon is closed again Note It is possible to connect several klixons in series Motor thermal model General The drive includes two thermal models one for motor 1 and one for motor 2 The models can be used at the same time Two models are needed in case one converter is shared by two motors e g shared motion During normal operation only one thermal model is needed It is recommended to use the thermal model of the motor if a direct motor temperature measurement isn t available and the current limits of the drive are set higher than the motor nominal current The thermal model is based on the actual motor current related to motor nominal current and rated ambient tempera
124. for all who are responsible for the grounding of the drive Incorrect grounding can cause physical injury death and or equipment malfunction and increase electromagnetic interference WARNING e Ground the drive motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in all circumstances and to reduce electromagnetic emission and pick up e Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized and marked as required by safety regulations e Ina multiple drive installation connect each drive separately to protective earth PE e Minimize EMC emission and make a 360 high frequency grounding e g conductive sleeves of screened cable entries at the cabinet lead through plate e Do not install a drive equipped with an EMC filter to an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system Note e Power cable shields are suitable as equipment grounding conductors only when adequately sized to meet safety regulations e As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3 5 mA AC or 10 mA DC stated by EN 50178 5 2 11 1 a fixed protective earth connection is required Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Printed circuit boards and fiber optic cables These instructions are intended for all who handle the circuit boards and fiber optic cables Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the equipment WARNING The print
125. heating is on as long as ACW Bit15 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 and Run 0 NotUsed def NotUsed ACW Biti Note1 The field heating references are set with M1FidHeatRef 44 04 and M2FidHeatRef 49 06 Field heating for the individual motor can be disabled when the belonging reference is set to zero Field nominal currents are set with M1NomFidCur 99 11 and M2NomFidCur 49 05 Note2 In case the field exciter is not connected via a separate field contactor following settings apply for field heating MainContCtriMode 21 16 On FidHeatSel 21 18 OnRun Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Speed ramp AccTime1 acceleration time 1 The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 AccTime1 22 01 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N DecTime1 deceleration time 1 The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 DecTime1 22 02 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N RampTimeScale ramp time scaling Multiplier for AccTime1 22 01 AccTime2 22 09 and DecTime1 22 02 DecTime2 22 10 to expand the ramp time Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N E StopRamp emergency stop ramp The time within the drive will decelerate from Speed
126. index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N CtriWordAO2 control word analog output 2 Analog output 2 can be written to via CtrlWordAO2 15 07 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if IndexAO2 15 06 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name ConvModeAO2 convert mode analog output 2 Analog output 2 signal offset 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V bipolar output default 1 0V 10V Uni OV to 10 V unipolar output 2 2V 10V Uni 2 V to 10 V unipolar output 3 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range O V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N FilterAO2 filter analog output 2 Analog output 2 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO2 scaling analog output 2 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO2 15 06 is scaled to the voltage in ScaleAO2 15 10 Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N IndexAO3 analog output 3 index Analog output 3 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO3 15 11 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI V
127. invert digital input A Inversion selection for digital input 4 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Did5invert invert digital input 5 Inversion selection for digital input 5 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Di6Invert invert digital input 6 Inversion selection for digital input 6 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Di7Invert invert digital input 7 Inversion selection for digital input 7 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Greet Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Dlsinvert invert digital input 8 Inversion selection for digital input 8 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N Dli9invert invert digital input 9 Inversion selection for digital input 9 0 Direct only available with digital extension board 1 Inverted only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Dl10lnvert invert digital input 10 Inversion selection for digital input 10 0 Direct only available with digital extension board 1 Inverted only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Dl11Invert invert digital input 11 Inversion selection for digital input 11 0 Direct only a
128. is the master in the communication link Each device has an individual address set with switches on the I O device Before use each I O device must be activated by means of a parameter in group 98 See also UO Module Adapter AIMA 01 User s Manual 3AFE64661442 Ch2 Master follower link General The master follower link is designed for applications in which the system is operated by several drives and the shafts are coupled to each other via gearing chains belts etc The master controls all followers via a fiber optic serial communication link Pulse encoders are recommended for the master and all followers The master is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow the masters torque or speed reference In general torque control or window control of the followers should be used when the motor shafts of the master and the followers drives are fixed coupled to each other via gearing chains belts etc and no speed differences between the drives is possible Link configuration Master Followers Ch2 on the SDCS COM 8 board is used for the master follower link between the drives Ch2 is configurable by Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 either to be master or follower in the communication in broadcast mode Typically the speed controlled process master drive is configured also to be the communication master The master mode is selected by Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 The torque reference source address is defined in the master by Ch2 MasSig
129. level BO B1 B2 12PRevTime 12PCurDiff 12PulseCom 12PSlaveFail M1FexRdyLost M2FexRdyLost FastCurRise COM8Faulty MiFexLowCur M2FexLowCur COM8Com P2PandMFCom ApplLoadFail LocalCmdLoss HwFailure FwFailure Int Scaling 1 F533 F534 F535 3 3 3 12 pulse reversal timeout 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 12 pulse current difference DiffCurLim 47 02 DiffCurDly 47 03 12 pulse communication loss 12P TimeOut 94 03 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 12P SlaNode 94 04 12 pulse slave failure this fault message trips the 12 pulse master and appears only in the 12 pulse motor 1 field exciter lost ready for operation message while working motor 2 field exciter lost ready for operation message while working fast current rise ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 SDCS COM 8 faulty motor 1 field exciter low under current M1FldMinTrip 30 12 FldMinTripDly 45 18 motor 2 field exciter low under current M2FidMinTrip 49 08 FldMinTripDly 45 18 SDCS COM 8 communication loss ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 Peer to peer and master follower communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 application load failure see Diagnosis 9 11 local command loss LocalLossCtrl 30 27 hardware failure see Diagnosis 9 11 firmware failure see Diagnosis 9 11 Volatile Y
130. locked loop filter Filter of firing unit s phase lock loop Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N 97 16 AdjIDC adjust DC current AdjIDC 97 16 is used to cover drives with different current measuring circuits for bridge 1 and bridge 2 It rescales the measured armature current if bridge2 is active Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N 97 17 OffsetIDC offset DC current measurement Offset value in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 added to the armature current measurement OffsetIDC 97 17 adjusts ConvCurAct 1 16 and the real armature current Setting OffsetIDC 97 17 to 0 disables the manual offset Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 380 Signal Parameter name 97 18 ZeroCurDetect zero current detection Selects the zero current detection method Use a binary signal if the zero current detection is done by another converter 0 Current 1 Voltage 2 CurAndVolt 3 DI1 4 DI2 5 DI3 6 DA 7 DI5 8 DI6 9 DI7 10 DI8 11 DI9 12 DI10 13 DI11 14 MCW Bit11 15 MCW Bit12 16 MCW Bit13 17 MCW Bit14 18 MCW Bit15 19 ACW Bit12 20 ACW Bit13 21 ACW Bit14 22 ACW Bit15 Note1 based on the converter s own zero current detection resistors default based on the converter s own thyristor voltages not valid when galvanic isolation is used based on discontinuous current and thyristo
131. no action or macro change completed default 1 Yes macro selected with App Macro 99 08 will be loaded into the drive Note1 Macro changes are only accepted in Off state MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 0 Note2 It takes about 2 s until the new parameter values are active Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 392 Signal Parameter name 99 08 AppiMacro application macro App Macro 99 08 selects the macro preset parameter sets to be loaded stored into the RAM and flash In addition to the preset macros two user defined macros User1 and User2 are available The operation selected by App iMacro 99 08 is started immediately by setting App Restore 99 07 Yes AppiMacro 99 08 is automatically set back to NotUsed after the chosen action is finished The selected macro is shown in MacroSel 8 10 0 NotUsed default 1 Factory load macro factory default parameter set into RAM and flash User1 and User2 will not be influenced 2 UsertLoad load macro User1 into RAM and flash 3 User1Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User1 4 User2Load load macro User2 into RAM and flash 5 User2Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User2 6 Standard load macro standard into RAM and flash 7 Man Const load macro manual constant speed into RAM and flash 8 Hand Auto load macro hand manual automatic into RAM and flash 9 Ha
132. not triggered 4 DA 1 triggered 0 not triggered 5 DI5 1 triggered 0 not triggered 6 DI6 1 triggered 0 not triggered 7 DI7 1 triggered 0 not triggered 8 DI8 1 triggered 0 not triggered 9 DIO 1 triggered 0 not triggered 10 DI10 1 triggered 0 not triggered 11 DI11 1 triggered 0 not triggered OvrVoltProt 10 13 is only released when drive is in field exciter mode OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N OnOff1 On Off1 command Binary signal for OnOff1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 0 NotUsed 1 DH On by rising edge 0 gt 1 2 DI2 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 3 DIS On by rising edge 0 gt 1 4 Di4 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 5 DIS On by rising edge 0 gt 1 6 DI6 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 7 DI7 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 8 DIS On by rising edge 0 gt 1 9 DI9 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 board 10 DI10 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bn
133. on macro DO6lndex 14 11 0 and DO6BitNo 14 12 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DO7Index 14 13 0 and DO7BitNo 14 14 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DO8Index 14 15 603 and DO8BitNo 14 16 7 MainContactorOn actual setting depends on macro DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 8 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 9 DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 10 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 11 reserved B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 8 08 DriveStat drive status Drive status OnInhibited drive is in OnInhibit state ChangeToOff drive is changing to Off Off drive is Off RdyOn drive is ready on RdyRun drive is ready run Running drive is Running Stopping drive is Stopping Off3 drive is in Off3 state E stop Off2 drive is in Off2 state Emergency Off or Coast Stop Tripped drive is Tripped Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 8 09 MotSel selected motor Select motor and field exciter Motor1 motor 1 and field exciter 1 are selected Motor2 motor 2 and field exciter 2 are selected See ParChange 10 10 Int Scaling 1 Type C
134. parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 5 DIS 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 6 DI4 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 DI5 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 8 DI6 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 9 DI7 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 10 DIS 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 11 DI9 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 12 DI10 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 13 DI11 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 14 MCW Bit11 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 15 MCW Bit12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 16 MCW Bit13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 17 MCW Bit14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 14 18 MCW Bit15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 19 ACW Bit12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 12 20 ACW Bit13 0
135. parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 21 ACW Bit14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 22 ACW Bit15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Acte of o ACW Bit1 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name JogAccTime acceleration time jogging The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 in case of Jogging When using jog command Jog1 10 17 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 8 speed is set by FixedSpeed 23 02 When using jog command Jog2 10 18 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 9 speed is set by FixedSpeed 2 23 03 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N JogDecTime deceleration time jogging The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed in case of jogging When using jog command Jog1 10 17 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 8 speed is set by FixedSpeed 23 02 When using jog command Jog2 10 18 or MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 9 speed is set by FixedSpeed 2 23 03 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N Speed reference SpeedRef speed reference Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive Can
136. parameters index E g with AuxCtrlWord 7 02 follows 2 see page 64 TX PDO21 Enable 51 15 641 This value has to be calculated with 280 Hex 640 Node ID 51 02 Here 640 1 641 TX PDO21 TxType 51 16 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 TX PDO21 EvTime 51 17 10 10 10ms TX PDO21 1stObj 51 18 8199 2007 Hex 8199 Transparent Status Word see page 62 TX PDO21 1stSubj 51 19 0 TX PDO21 2ndObj 51 20 8200 2008 Hex 8200 Transparent Actual Speed see page 62 TX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 21 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 108 TX PDO21 3rdObj 51 22 16386 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with TorgRef2 2 09 follows 16384 2 16386 see page 64 TX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 23 9 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with TorqRef2 2 09 follows 9 see page 64 TX PDO21 4thObj 51 24 16392 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with AuxStatWord 8 02 follows 16384 8 16392 see page 64 TX PDO21 4thSubj 51 25 2 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with AuxStatWord 8 02 follows 2 see page 64 TransparentIProfil 51 26 k 1 Transparent FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new
137. phase field exciter use M1NomCur 99 03 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 1 1A Type l Volatile N M1BaseSpeed motor 1 base speed Motor 1 base speed from the rating plate usually the field weak point M1BaseSpeed 99 04 is must be set in the range of 0 2 to 1 6 times of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 99 06 ServiceMode service mode ServiceMode 99 06 contains several test modes auto and manual tuning procedures The drive mode is automatically set to NormalMode after an autotuning procedure or after the thyristor diagnosis is finished or failed In case errors occur during the selected procedure A121 AutotuneFail AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 4 is generated The reason of the error can be seen in Diagnosis 9 11 SetTypeCode is automatically set to NormalMode after the next power up 0 NormalMode normal operating mode depending on OperModeSel 43 01 default 1 ArmCurAuto autotuning armature current controller 2 FieldCurAuto autotuning field current controller 3 EMF FluxAuto autotuning EMF controller and flux linearization 4 SpdCtrlAuto autotuning speed controller 5 SpdFbAssist test speed feedback see M1EncMeasMode 50 02 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 M1EncPulseNo 50 04 and M1TachoVolt1000
138. possibilities PTC max 1 PTC for motor 1 and max 1 PTC for motor 2 or upto 2 PTC for motor 1 only 0 NotUsed motor 1 temperature measurement is blocked default 1 1PT100 Al2 one PT100 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 2 2PT100 Al2 two PT100 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 3 3PT100 Al2 three PT100 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 4 4PT100 AIS four PT100 3 connected to Al2 and 1 connected to Al on SDCS IOB 3 5 5PT100 Al2 3 five PT100 3 connected to Al2 and 2 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 6 6PT100 Al2 3_ six PT100 3 connected to Al2 and 3 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 7 1PT100 Al7 one PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO 8 2PT100 AI7 two PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO 9 3PT100 AI7 three PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO 10 4PT100 AI7 8 four PT100 3 connected to AI7 and 1 connected to Al8 on second RAIO 11 5PT100 AI7 8 five PT100 3 connected to AI7 and 2 connected to Al8 on second RAIO 12 6PT100 AI7 8 six PT100 3 connected to AI7 and 3 connected to Al8 on second RAIO 13 1PTC Al2 one PTC connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 14 2PTC Al2 3 two PTC 1 connected to Al2 and 1 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 15 1PTC Al2 Con one PTC connected to Al2 on SDCS CON 4 For more information see section Motor protection Note1 Al7 and Al8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule 98 06 Note2 In case only one PT100 is connected to an Al of the SDCS IOB 3 the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 1
139. restored The parameters found in the flash were invalid at power up checksum fault All parameters were restored from the parameter backup Local command loss Connection fault with DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light Check LocalLossCtrl 30 27 if control DCS800 Control Panel is disconnected connection adapter cables Parameter added A new firmware with a different amount of parameters was downloaded The new parameters are set to their default values The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Check new parameters and set them to the desired values Parameter setting conflict Is triggered by parameter settings conflicting with other parameters The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 9 07 always bit 10 9 07 always if FB bit 11 TimeOut 30 35 0 9 07 always bit 12 9 07 local bit 13 9 07 bit 14 after download of firmware for max 10s 9 07 bit 15 445 Alarm Alarm is active word when Sf Alarmtover 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Fault tracing Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 133 Retaininv 134 ParComp 135 ParUpDwnLoad 136 NoAPTaskTime Definition Action Alarm word Retain data invalid 9 08 directly after Set when the retain data in the flash are invalid during bitO energizing of power up In this case the backup dat
140. set X 9 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 9 Default setting of 803 equals LimWord 8 03 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus9Val3 data set X 9 value 3 Data set X 9 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 9 Default setting of 805 equals D StatWord 8 05 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus11Val1 data set X 11 value 1 Data set X 11 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 11 Default setting of 806 equals DO StatWord 8 06 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus11Val2 data set x 11 value 2 Data set X 11 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 11 Default setting of 124 equals BridgeTemp 1 24 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus11Val3 data set X 11 value 3 Data set X 11 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 11 Default setting of 112 equals Mot1 TempMeas 1 22 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 12 aa s p05 sel ooa 907 ol al ol oe e a a E a a EE IR ee a EE ENEE Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 367 Signal Parameter name Transmit data sets addresses 2 DsetXplus13Val1 data set X 13 value 1 Data set X 13 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 13 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus13
141. set base address is set in ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table Signals and parameters gt Dataset Value e g data storage group 19 DDCS link via ChO of SDCS COM 8 Address assignment of dataset Serial communication via Group Index X 2 gt slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 90 02 X 4 X see Cho DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr dsf DsetXVal1 data set X value 1 Data set X value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdoar 70 24 Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord 7 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXVal2 data set X value 2 Data set X value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXVal3 data set X value 3 Data set X value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA 25 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus2Val1 data set X 2 value 1 Data set X 2 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 2 Default setting of 702 equals AuxCtrlWord 7 02 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus2Val2 data set X 2 value 2 Data set X 2 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 2 Default setting of
142. setting via parameter 90 02 Output 3 51 21 3 data word 3 setting via parameter 90 03 Output 4 51 22 7 data word 4 setting via parameter 90 04 Input 1 51 23 4 data word 1 setting via parameter 92 01 Input 2 51 24 5 data word 2 setting via parameter 92 02 Input 3 51 25 6 data word 3 setting via parameter 92 03 Input 4 51 26 10 data word 4 setting via parameter 92 04 FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by Ethernet adapter If all DIP switches S1 are OFF the IP address is set according to parameters Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 133 51 04 51 07 In case at least one DIP switch is on the last byte of the IP address P address 4 51 07 is set according to the DIP switches see page 42 DCS800 parameter setting using Modbus TCP protocol Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e
143. speed ramp output is forced to value of speed ramp input no action speed ramp output is forced to BalRampRef 22 08 no action SpeedRef4 2 18 is not limited SpeedRef4 2 18 is limited by M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1SpeedMin 20 01 respectively by M2SpeedMax 49 19 M2SpeedMin 49 20 force dynamic braking independent from Off1Mode 21 02 StopMode 21 03 or E StopMode 21 04 no action freeze hold the I part of the speed controller no action release window control block window control speed controller output is forced to Ba Ref 24 11 no action positioning synchronizing command from overriding control for pulse encoder 1 or pulse encoder 2 or both pulse encoders depending if SyncCommand 10 04 and or SyncCommand2 10 05 is set to SyncCommand no action positioning block synchronizing command no action positioning reset SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 no action used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters The data logger contains six channels with 1024 samples each
144. sw g g uopoajas anbio pue mmer anbs0 1 NIVHOD TOWLNOD ANDYOL Appendix A Firmware structure diagram 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 453 ep E Aar werbetp eaznjonz3s ma 008520 adh xe4pesnii Eep een LIN ANOPIAWONLN cl 66 Lee Jemen CEET lewnopisnion EZD sue mee quauino peu wou mun Buyjeos euetg ES ep mu pue waw anseaw eum Du L 100W MOWITsed LW KIT EU FE HEEN ZDF r EE SF aaen Au p0p leogoneuumn L DEG Sr spottep2 un Bite rass SCT s uei ue gp dn eme pat pue anbioydo Sw g loquo Veure Piety uogezueau au OMPLAIOUXN 4 vee x14 rel POWIMOPIS 4 Xn winwiyxew 0 Jas st OGXNIANOPIS Dummong Opxnisinopls wiBeNI0 awah ER wpsodgo awa fiLO tt EI e anad epes EE u gyeaMPl HL br peodsesea i Lee oi uayum aq ueo p0 paadsioyy uay puapa 0 0S 1 Sq4Peeds LW II A Levy KIK VEER Jajjonuoo 4na wingyeuxnis X14 ger spot 41 0102 0 198 S peedsiow HOAWONLN adojsyounion op 20 66 ce FE e uW
145. text Alarm code Comment and alarm level A133 A134 RetainInv ParComp ParUpDwnLoad A135 NoAPTaskTime SpeedNotZero Off2FieldBus Off3FieldBus lllgFieldBus COM8FwVer MemCardMiss MemCardFail APAlarm1 APAlarm2 APAlarm3 APAlarm4 APAlarm5 Int Scaling 1 4 retain data invalid parameter compatibility the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 The checksum verification failed during up or download of parameters Please try again Adaptive Program task for not set in TimeLevSel Re start of drive is not possible Speed zero see M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 or M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 has not been reached only in case FlyStart 21 10 StartFrom0 In case of a trip set On Run 0 to reset the alarm Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop pending via fieldbus Off2 10 08 Off3 E stop pending via fieldbus E Stop 10 09 the fieldbus parameters in group 51 fieldbus are not set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has not been selected invalid combination of SDCS CON 4 firmware and SDCS COM 8 firmware Memory Card missing checksum failure or wrong Memory Card Adaptive Program alarm 1 Adaptive Program alarm 2 Adaptive Program alarm 3 Adaptive Program alarm 4 Adaptive Program alarm 5 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 220 Signal Parameter name UserAlarmWord user defined alarm word 1 User
146. that condition and with M1TiFex 44 03 200 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal field current if the current error is constant after 200 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M1TiFex 44 03 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 314 ei Signal Parameter name 44 04 M1FidHeatRef motor 1 field heating reference Field current reference in percent of M1NomFieldCur 99 11 for field heating and field reducing Field heating Field heating is released according to FidHeatSel 21 18 Field reducing Field reducing is only available when 2 motors with 2 independent field exciters are connected to the drive Field reducing for motor 1 is released by means of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 lt 100 and activated if Run 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 for longer than 10 s and the other motor is selected via ParChange 10 10 and can be seen in MotSel 8 09 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N ES 44 07 EMF CtriPosLim positive limit EMF controller Positive limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 44 08 EMF CtriNegLim negative limit EMF controller Negative limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 1 1 Ty
147. the drive and choose local mode set CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt set M1DiscontCurLim 46 08 to default set M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to increase the armature current reference make sure the motor is not turning Attention let the drive run only for a short time watch the current bubbles and increase the current reference until the current is continuous Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 37 Actual current waveform Current is discontinuous Discontinuous current Actual current waveform Current is continuous Continuous current remove On and Run via DriveWindow set CurSel 43 02 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 back to their original settings copy the current reference used in DriveWindow and paste it into M1DiscontCurLim 46 08 Part 3 manual tuning of the armature current controller connect an oscilloscope to the fixed AO I act X4 9 10 on the SDCS CON 4 or X4 5 6 on the SDCS IOB 3 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode set CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt set M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to step the armature current controller make sure the motor is not turning Attention let the drive run only for a short time tune the armature current controller by means of M1KpArmCu
148. the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqgSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Depending on the type of communication loss either A128 FieldBusCom AlarmWord2 9 02 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 01 bit 11 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note1 The time out for ComLossCtrl 30 28 is set by FB TimeOut 30 35 for all fieldbusses Rxxx and MailBoxCycle1 94 13 to MailBoxCycle4 94 31 for the DCSLink
149. the manual tuning functions see App Macro 99 08 and the square wave generator Note1 The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave e g SqrWavelndex 99 18 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 100 voltage 10 000 100 current 10 000 100 torque 10 000 100 speed SpeedScaleAct 2 29 20 000 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Pot2 potentiometer 2 Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning functions see ApplMacro 99 08 and the square wave generator Note1 The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave e g SqrWavelndex 99 18 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 100 voltage 10 000 100 current 10 000 100 torque 10 000 100 speed SpeedScaleAct 2 29 20 000 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N SqrWavePeriod square wave period The time period of the square wave generator Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N SqrWavelndex square wave index Index pointer to the source signal parameter of the square wave signal e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Note1 After a power up SqrWavelndex 99 18 is set back to 0 and thus disables the square wave function Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 395 DCS8s00 Control Panel operation Chapter overview This chapter describes the handling of the DCS800 Control
150. the state RdyRef is removed RayRef 0 bit 2 The overriding control can keep the On command if the drive has to be started up again The overriding control removes On On 0 bito gt All contactors are opened the fan contactors stay in according to FanDly 21 14 and the state RdyRun is removed RdyRun 0 bit 1 Besides in MainStatWord 8 01 the drive s state is shown in DriveStat 8 08 Firmware description 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 50 START On Run STOP Run is taken away A AuxSupplyOn J FieldCurrent Torque SpeedRefUsed 2 17 SpeedLev 50 10 ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 MCW 7 01 Bit On Off1N Off2N Off3N Run RampOuitZero RampHold RamplnZero Reset Inching1 Inching2 RemoteCmd MSW 8 01 Bit RdyOn 0 RdyRun RdyRef Tripped Off2NStatus Off8NStatus OnInhibited Alarm AtSetpoint Remote AboveLimit r OO NI Od aAa wN O O O 00 Ni Od 1 B Go Po n ZeroSpeed 8 02 Bit 11 BrakeCmd 8 02 Bit 8 Speed ramp output clamped CmdFansOn __ 6 03 Bit 0 CmdMainContactorOn 6 03 Bit 7 we M1BrakeDly 42 03 M1BrakeCloseDly 42 04 5 Behaviour depends on Off1Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 6 Behavi
151. this chapter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 116 DeviceNet communication with fieldbus adapter RDNA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the DeviceNet adapter RDNA 01 together with the DCS800 RDNA 01 DCS800 The DeviceNet communication with the drive requires the option RDNA 01 Related documentation Users Manual DeviceNet Adapter Module RDNA 01 83AFE64504223 Rev C The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Supported assemblies with DCS800 are ABB Drives assembly Output instance 100 Input instance 101 and User specific assembly Output instance 102 Input instance 103 see page 35 The assemblies Basic speed control and Extended speed control 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since DCS800 firmware version 2 x EDS file The EDS file for RDNA 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RDNA 01 into slot 1 of the drive see page 21 Drive configuration The DeviceNet adapter is activated by means of CommMoadule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances ABB Drives assembly and User specific assembly The instances Basic speed control and Extended speed control 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since firmware version 2 x With these instances it is no
152. to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 X NotUsed det NotUsed ACW Bit1 Note1 The macro User1 User2 selection made by ParChange 10 10 overrides the selection made with App Macro 99 08 It takes about 2 s until the new parameter values are active Note2 If User is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 3 is set If User2 is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 4 is set Note3 The motor Motor1 Motor2 selection can be made in drive state RdyOn and RdyRun It takes about 20 ms to switch between values Note4 ParChange 10 10 itself is not overwritten int Scating t 4 Type e Votatite N Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 233 Signal Parameter name OvrVoltProt over voltage protection triggered As soon as the overvoltage protection unit is triggered A120 OverVoltProt AlarmWord2 9 07 bit NotUsed min 0 NotUsed default 1 DH 1 triggered 0 not triggered 2 DI2 1 triggered 0 not triggered 3 DIS 1 triggered 0
153. to the maximum absolute value of M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 and M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed2 armature current at speed limit 2 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at speed 43 17 7 na 43 17 with Nn Max I 20 01 20 02 l Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name ArmCurLimSpeed3 armature current at speed limit 3 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at speed 43 17 gt Ion 43 17 with pn Max I 20 07 I 20 02 l Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed4 armature current at speed limit 4 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at speed 43 17 Ion 43 17 with Nn Max I 2
154. unit of a parameter if applicable The unit is displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel and PC tools E C By means of US Sel 16 09 it is possible to change between compact C and extended E signal and parameter list This influences parameter display of DCS800 Control Panel The compact list contains only signals and parameters used for a typical commissioning Group Index Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 175 Integer Scaling Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to change the value of the parameter properly Example1 If TorqMaxSPC 20 07 is written to from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 Example2 If SpeedRef 23 01 is written to from the overriding control 20 000 equals the speed in rpm shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Type The data type is given with a short code 16 bit integer value 0 65536 SI 16 bit signed integer value 32768 32767 C text string ENUM Volatile Y values are NOT stored in the flash they will be lost when the drive is de energized N values are stored in the flash they will remain when the drive is de energized Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 1
155. up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Manual tuning the drive 39 DriveWindow information VW OCS 800 pm al af JE E lei mjo ei Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Manual tuning of the speed controller connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor MotSpeed 1 04 and SpeedRef4 2 18 give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference use SpeedCorr 23 04 to step the speed controller tune the speed controller by means of KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 O OD oo O steps size 2 of maximum speed do not hit any limits during the step and the step response e g torque or current limits disable the i part by setting TiS 24 09 0 ms increase KpS 24 03 until the step response shows an overshoot decrease KpS 24 03 about 30 adjust TiS 24 09 in such a way that there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot depending on the application the function of the i part is to reduce as quickly as possible the difference between speed reference and speed actual step response time 100 ms count only from 10 to 90 in cold mills and 60 ms in rod and bar mills where to step 25 30 of maximum speed step has to be in base speed range and 80 of maximum speed step has to be in field weakening area filter time en e g 5 ms 10 ms see SpeedErrFilt 23 06 and SpeedErrFilt2 23 11 or filter tim
156. will switch the drive off completely or partly depending on its trip level Trip level 1 main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor is switched off immediately fan contactor is switched off immediately Trip level 2 main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor is switched off immediately fan contactor stays on as long as the fault is pending or as long as FanDly 21 14 is running Trip level 3 The drive is stopping via SoeedFbFitMode 30 36 thus the main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor is switched off immediately in case of SoeedFbFitMode 30 36 CoastStop but it stays on in case of field heating or SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 DynBraking fan contactor stays on At standstill the main contactor cannot be switched on again field contactor stays on in case of field heating fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly 21 14 is running Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 422 Trip level 4 As long as the drive is stopping via FaultStopMode 30 30 the main contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 CoastStop or DynBraking but it stays on in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop or TorqueLimit field contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 CoastStop but it stays on in case of field heating or FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop TorqueLimit or Dy
157. zero damping resonance frequency eliminator Damping of zero Int Scaling 1000 Type l Volatile N PoleFreqRFE pole frequency resonance frequency eliminator Frequency of pole The filter is located at the input of the speed controller Int Scaling 10 1 Hz Type l Volatile N PoleDampRFE pole damping resonance frequency eliminator Damping of pole Int Scaling 1000 1 Type l Volatile N SpeedErrorScale An scaling Scaling factor speed error An Int Scaling 10 1 Type Volatile N KpS2 2 p part speed controller 2 proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N TiS2 2 i part speed controller 2 integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Par2Select selector for 2 set of speed controller parameters Select active speed controller parameters 0 ParSet1 1 ParSet2 2 SpeedLevel 3 SpeedError A DI 5 DI 6 DI3 7 D14 8 DI5 9 DI6 10 DI7 11 DI8 12 DI9 13 DI10 14 DI11 15 MCW Bit11 16 MCW Bit12 17 MCW Bit13 18 MCW Bit14 19 MCW Bit15 20 ACW Bit12 21 ACW Bit13 22 ACW Bit14 23 ACW Bit15 Note1 parameter set 1 KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 is active defaul
158. 0 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f HampTmmezcele NEE 268 RO ACCUM iari e a E 184 Petter Eege 70 239 Hei Gel 77 96 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 126 131 134 240 REI2MUX n a eebe Ces eebe ges eden 70 242 Reflets ees nesses een es 77 241 ResCurDetectDel 212 286 410 425 ResCurDetectLim 212 286 410 425 ResCurDetectSel 70 77 212 286 410 425 RESO EE 70 228 Heset bCoumter 70 382 EI 58 60 310 408 436 Rev e EE 311 RevVoltMargin A 317 408 RFE CirlWord 205 RFE StatWord ccccccccesseseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 211 DN PDO3T 1etObt 106 108 RX PDO21 1StSubj c cece 106 108 DN PDO31 2ndGubt 106 108 DN PDO31 2ndtCpt 106 108 RX PDO21 3rdObj 00ccccceeeeeees 106 108 DN PDC 2rd ubt 106 108 DN PDC Ann 106 108 DN PDC A0nGubt 106 108 RX PDO21 Enable soeces 106 108 DN PDO31 Txvivpe 106 108 S BlockBrdg2 ies ence dted neler itaaa a eiee 26 S ee tee EE 378 S ConvScaleCur 00 26 378 424 430 S ConvScaleVolt aaaiienneeeeennnn 26 378 430 S MI FldScale erireisid dudni san 323 S M2FldSc lE mienie edidorinnnas 323 S Maxvb rdgT emp AAA 378 404 S MaxBrdgTemp AAA 26 S Maxvb ndge T emp 425 e E NEE 81 253 ScaleA 2 EE 254 e E EE 254 SCaleAO4 EE 81 255 rie e EE 197 ServiceMode 27 59 60 61 391 402 442 443 SetSystemTime uk 257 Shape Hi EE
159. 0 20 000 A E O ag 1160 Vie E 230 1 200 Vs E IPOO E AA EDER PADDED ABB Automation Products Wallstadter StraBe 59 68526 Ladenburg e Germany Tel 49 0 6203 71 0 Fax 49 0 6203 71 76 09 www abb com motors amp drives Compact Highest power ability Simple operation Comfortable assistants e g for commissioning or fault tracing Scalable to all applications Free programmable by means of integrated EC61131 PLC ndividually adaptable to customer requirements User defined accessories like external PLC or auto mation systems can be included High power solutions in 6 and 12 pulse up to 20 000 A 1 500 V n accordance to usual standards ndividually factory load tested Detailed documentation DCS800 module with all necessary accessories mounted and fully cabled on a panel Very fast installation and commissioning Squeezes shut down times in revamp projects to a minimum Fits into Rittal cabinets Compact version up to 450 A and Vario version up to 2 000 A Proven long life components are re used such as power stacks main contactors cabinets and cabling busbars cooling systems Use of up to date communication facilities Increase of production and quality Very cost effective solution Open Rebuild Kits for nearly all existing DC drives tailor made solutions for BBC PxD BBC SZxD ASEA TYRAK other manufacturers 193R0601A8320000 Ident No 3ADW000193 R0601 Rev F 0_2008 be
160. 0 Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see Hardware manual Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed min 1PTC Atten max def M1AlarmLimTemp motor 1 alarm limit temperature The drive sets A106 M1OverTemp AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 5 if M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot1 TempMeas 1 22 Note1 The units depends on M1TempSel 31 05 Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Type Sl Volatile N M1FaultLimTemp motor 1 fault limit temperature The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 5 if M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot TempMeas 1 22 Note1 The units depends on M1TempSel 31 05 Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Type Sl Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1KlixonSel motor 1 klixon selector The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 5 if a digital input selected and the klixon is open 0 NotUsed no reaction default 1 DH 0 fault 1 no fault 2 DI2 0 fault 1 no fault 3 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 4 Di4 0 fault 1 no fault 5 DI5 0 fault 1 no fault 6 DI6 0 fault 1 no fault 7 DI7 0 fault 1 no fault 8 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 9 DI9 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 fault 1 no fault
161. 0 01 l 1 20 02 l Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed5 armature current at speed limit 5 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at n Max 20 07 I 1 20 02 I Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N PwrSupplyRefExt external reference power supply External power supply voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Note1 PwrSupplyRefExt 43 24 is only valid if ControlModeSel 43 05 PowerSupply2 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 313 Signal Parameter name Field excitation FidCtriMode field control mode Motor 1 field control mode selection 0 Fix constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal blocked optitorque blocked default 1 EMF field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal blocked optitorque blocked 2 Fix Rev constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal active optitorque blocked 3 EMF Rev field weakening
162. 0 actual speed is inside the defined window B2 E StopCoast E stop function has failed see E StopDecMin 21 05 E StopDecMax 21 06 and DecMonDly 21 07 no action macro User1 active see App Macro 99 08 macro User1 not active macro User active see App Macro 99 08 macro User2 not active SyncRdy positioning synchronization is done either for pulse encoder 1 or pulse encoder 2 or both pulse encoders depending on the setting of SyncCommand 10 04 and SyncCommand2 10 05 enabled only if PosSyncMode 50 15 Single positioning synchronizing not done Fex1Ack motor 1 field exciter acknowledged no action Fex2Ack motor 2 field exciter acknowledged no action BrakeCmd selected motor command to open lift the brake is given see group 42 Brake control selected motor command to close apply the brake is given Limiting drive is in a limit see LimWord 8 03 drive is not in a limit TorqCtrl drive is torque controlled no action ZeroSpeed actual motor speed is in the zero speed limit defined by M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 or M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 actual motor speed is out of the zero speed limit EMFSpeed M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 EMF no action FaultOrAlarm fault or alarm indication no fault or alarm indication DriveDirectionNeg negative drive direction active controlled by bit 8 of AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 positive drive direction active controlled by bit 8 of AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 AutoReclosing auto reclosing logic is active n
163. 00 Firmware Manual e f 149 Block input attributes Block inputs gets the parameter of signal source or user constants e g 85 01 Depending on the used block function and depending on the desired function the attributes of all three inputs are to be set as integer constant or as selection of a bit of a 16 bit word source Therefore it is used a 16 bit word which is defined as following Bit number packed Function block Function block Function block input 3 bit input 2 bit input 1 bit selection selection selection To use an input as a constant value the bit belonging to the input must be set high This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word It is used to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit ofa packed Boolean word With Bit 0 0000 0h Bit 1 0001 1h Bit 15 1111 Fh BlockParamSet_ovw_a dsf this type of constant defines a Block Constant which can only be modified in EDIT mode Example DR HEX Example of attribute parameter with BlockxIn1 as boolean bit 10 BlockxIn2 as constant BlockxIn3 as integer gt Bits converted into hex the value 200A H is to be set into parameter BlockxAttrib Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 150 Parameter value as an integer input How the block handles the input The block reads the s
164. 000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 187 Signal Parameter name MotiFexType motor 1 type of field exciter Motor 1 field exciter type Read from M1UsedFexType 99 12 0 NotUsed 1 OnBoard 2 FEX 425 Int 3 DCF803 0035 4 DCF803 0050 5 DCF804 0050 6 DCF803 0060 7 DCF804 0060 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 10 DCF803 0016 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 17 ExFex Al2 18 ExFex Al3 19 ExFex Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A 21 VariFexType 22 Exc Appl 1 Int Scaling 1 1 no or foreign field exciter connected integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al2 third party field exc
165. 00M adapter Chi I O extensions via AIMA board 5 Mb 5 Mb Ch2 Master follower link 10 Mb 10 Mb Ch3 DriveWindow or NETA 01 10 Mb 10 Mb connection The communication protocol of ChO to Ch3 is DDCS Distributed Drives Communication System The ChO of the SDCS COM 8 supports either DDCS or DriveBus see ChO DriveBus 71 01 Both the DDCS and DriveBus link between the overriding control and the drive using data sets for information exchange Each data set is a package of three words signals or parameters If a data set is received by the drive the corresponding data set is automatically transmitted to the overriding control as response Drive Received data Transmitted data gt gt gt data set 10 data set 11 gt gt gt gt gt gt data set 12 data set 13 gt gt gt The data received from the overriding control affects only the RAM not FPROM memory in the drive Integer scaling on the DDCS link Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to be able to change values of parameters properly Example1 If TorqMaxSPC 20 07 is written to from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 torque Example2 If SoeedRef 23 01 is written to from the overriding control 20 000 equals the speed in rpm shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 MotTorq motor torque
166. 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N rere e rer ar Tr a M1BrakeRefDly motor 1 brake reference delay Brake open lift delay This function compensates for the mechanical open lift delay of the brake During the start Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 1 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller output is set to start torque see M1SitrtTorqRefSel 42 07 until M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type
167. 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 only available with digital extension board 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 only available with digital extension board 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 only available with digital extension board 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 AuxCitrlWord 7 02 bit 12 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 13 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 14 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type Volatile N ACW Di Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 284 Signal Parameter name 26 08 GearStartTorq gearbox starting torque Gear backlash compensation GearStartTorg 26 08 is the reduced torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 used after a torque direction change The torque limit is reduced for th
168. 1 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW BA 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed ACW Bit1 et k C 5 SG SESCH Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name E Stop emergency stop command Binary signal for E Stop UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 0 NotUsed 1 DI 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 2 DI2 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 3 DIS 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 4 DA 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 5 DI5 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active default 6 DI6 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 7 DI7 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 8 DI8 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 9 DI9 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW B
169. 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCitr Word 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCitrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Note1 The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel 11 03 MotPot respectively Ref2Sel 11 06 MotPot Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N X NotUsed det NotUsed ACW Bit1 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name MotPotMin motor pot minimum The motor pot minimum function releases the minimum speed level The minimum speed level is defined by FixedSpeed1 23 02 When the drive is started the motor accelerates to FixedSpeed1 23 02 It is not possible to set the speed below FixedSpeed1 23 02 by means of the motor pot function 0 NotUsed default 1 DH 1 released 0 blocked 2 DI2 1 released 0 blocked 3 DIS 1 released 0 blocked 4 DA 1 released 0 blocked 5 DI5 1 released 0 blocked 6 DI6 1 released 0 blocked 7 DI7 1 released 0 blocked 8 DI8 1 released 0 blocked 9 DI9 1 released 0 blocked only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 released 0 blocked only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 released 0 blocked only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrl
170. 1 2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 94 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the 12 pulse master 12 pulse slave and the excitation Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the 12 pulse master node ID number to 1 the 12 pulse slave node ID number to 31 and the excitation node ID number to 21 The 12 pulse and excitation communication supervision is activated in the 12 pulse master Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware 12 pulse master Firmware 12 pulse slave Firmware excitation DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 31 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 21 BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s 12P TimeOut 94 03 100 ms 12P SlaNode 94 04 31 z FexTimeOut 94 07 100 ms M1FexNode 94 08 21 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 95 DDCS channels with SDCS COM 8 General The following table describes the usage of the DDCS channels of the SDCS COM 8 board Channel Standard usage SDCS COM 81 SDCS COM 82 Cho Overriding control or NETA 01 10 Mb e g FCI 5 Mb fieldbus connection AC 8
171. 14 0 9600 9600 Baud 1 19200 19200 Baud 2 38400 38400 Baud default 3 57600 57600 Baud 4 115200 115200 Baud 5 Auto not active jet 6 reserved If ToolLinkConfig 16 14 is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N Compact def Compact Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 258 Signal Parameter name i Data storage This parameter group consists of unused parameters for linking testing and commissioning purposes Example1 A value can be send from the overriding control to the drive via groups 90 or 91 to individual parameters in group 19 The parameters of group 19 can be read with the DCS800 Control Panel the commissioning tools the Adaptive Program and application program Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table DDCS link via ChO e g DriveWindow D Val of SDCS COM 8 EE woe Ai Address assignment of dataset 19 01 Serial communication via Group Index gt 19 02 slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 90 02 19 03 19 04 CS 19 12 X see ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr dsf Example2 A value can be send from the drive to the overriding control from individual parameters in group 19 via groups 92 or 93 The parameters of group 19 ca
172. 18 ON 49018 Sien 01 S8 Hu AV Di 60 S8 erg EM EM EN 80 98 LNO ZNI LNO ZNI CN L0 S8 IN IN LNI ad adh adh 90 98 ON MOO ON MOO ON MOO G0 S8 y0 S8 ED GH ony an EM 10 S8 SS Altre ZNI s ue suog LIN ed 40 8 ON 00 9 ON OO ON OO JONUOD dY LONI Adaptive Program 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 171 Signal and parameter list Signals and parameters This chapter contains all signals and parameters Signals Signals are measured and calculated actual values of the drive This includes the control status limit fault and alarm words The drive s signals can be found in groups 1 to 9 None of the values inside these groups is stored in the flash and thus volatile Note All signals in group 7 can be written to by means of DWL DCS800 Control Panel Adaptive Program application program or overriding control The following table gives an overview of all signal groups Group Description Comment 1 Physical actual values self identification Analog VO Drive logic signals Control words command words detection on operation and limits Fault alarm words diagnosis information Signal Parameter name gq x o g A o 5 a MotTorq motor torque 39 UI Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period Int Scaling 100 1 Typ
173. 1BrakeAckSel 42 02 is zero and compensates for the mechanical close apply delay of the brake During the stop Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 0 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller stays active until M1BrakeStopDly 42 13 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1s Type I Volatile N Current control OperModeSel operation mode selector Converter mode selection 0 ArmConv 6 pulse single armature converter default 1 FieldConv field exciter mode Attention The digital input for the external overvoltage protection is assigned by means of OvrVoltProt 10 13 2 12PParMaster 12 pulse parallel master 3 12PParSlave 12 pulse parallel slave 4 12PSerMaster 12 pulse serial master 5 12PSerSlave 12 pulse serial slave This parameter is write protected while Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 1 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Amo _ ArmConv E Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name E C CurSel current reference selector CurSel 43 02 selector 0 CurRef311 CurRef 3 11 calculated from torque reference default 1 CurRefExt CurRefExt 43 03 external current reference 2 Al1 analog input Al1 3 Al2 analog input Al2 4 Al3 analog input Al3 5 AM analog input Al4 6 AIS analog input AIS 7 Al6 analog input Al6 8 FexCurRef FidCurRefM1 3 30 field current reference from armature converter via DCSL
174. 2 0 set M1FidRefMode 45 05 M1FldRefExt give On via DriveWindow use M1FidRefExt 45 06 to step the field current controller tune the field current controller by means of M1KpFex 44 02 and M1 TiFex 44 03 o steps size about 2 5 of nominal field current do not hit any limits during the step and the step response e g max field current or supply voltage o step response time 50 ms 60 ms count only from 10 to 90 o where to step 30 60 and 80 of nominal field current step reference optimal curve p part too low p part too high i part too short Field current controller step responses Start up 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 32 DriveWindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 15 lol x Eile Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help Sex ai zsl olel Kole e rmn ok ell x CW ocs 800 D1 0 1 a A Application amp Control bed 2 01 29 Mot1FldCurRel 0H1 Par 1 29 Data logger 1 03 30 FldcurRefmt O 1 Par 3 30 Ab Event logger 30 12 MiFidMinTrip 2 0H1 Par 30 12 Fault logger Zi 44 02 M1KpFex Eleng i OH1 Par 44 3 E Memory O 1 Par 45 5 E amp Parameters SEN Aire se Datalogger Monitor Normal 100 Interval ms 10 History Buffer s 3600 000 Kx Axis Length s 15 000 T Y Axis Maximum 100 00 ER Axis Minimum 0 00 80
175. 2 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal2 1 94 20 TrmtRecVal2 2 94 21 TrmtRecVal2 3 94 22 and TrmtRecVal2 4 94 23 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox2 94 18 is set to 0 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 373 Signal Parameter name MailBoxCycle2 cycle time mailbox 2 The function of MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is depending on the setting of MailBox2 94 18 If MailBox2 94 18 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle2 94 19 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is set to 0 ms If MailBox2 94 18 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle2 94 19 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle2 9
176. 20 03 42 04 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Following functions are included Mechanical open lift close apply and zero speed delays Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 gt Brake open lift command f AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 gt M1BrakeStopDly 42 13 gt Torque proving Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 i ji F556 TorqProv MotCur 1 06 Adaptive Program M1TorgProvTime 42 10 Brake Lk application program logic FaultWord4 9 04 bit 7 or overriding control Tor ProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 BalRef 24 11 or gt TorqSel 26 01 BalSpeedCtrl AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 8 or TorqRefA 25 01 Adjustable start torque Run WE UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Brake StrtTorqRetSel 42 07 logic Brake open lift command AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 StrtTorqRef 42 08 gt Brake faults alarms and E stop BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 _ A122 MechBrake M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 gt gt AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 ack Brake open lift command AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 M1BrakeFitTime 42 05 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 gt A166 BrakeLongFalling BrakeEStopMode 42 09 m gt Al
177. 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Input range Al3 and Al4 set by parameter 10V 0Vto10V 2Vto10V 5 V offset 6 V offset Resolution 15 bits sign Scan time for Al1 and Al2 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency Scan time for Al3 and Al4 5ms Additional functions motor temperature measurement for a PTC connected to Al2 see section Motor protection SDCS IOB 3 Hardware setting switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S1 the hardware gain for Al2 and Al3 can be increased by 10 with jumpers S2 and S3 thus the input range changes e g from 10 V to 1 V for more details see Hardware Manual Input range Ali to Al4 set by parameter 10V 0Vto10V 2Vto10V 5 V offset 6 V offset 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Resolution 15 bits sign Scan time for Al1 and Al2 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency Scan time for Al3 and Al4 VO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 76 1 RAIO 01 2 RAIO 01 Sms Additional functions motor temperature measurement for PT100 or PTC connected to Al2 and AlI3 see section Motor protection residual current detection monitor input via Al4 see section Motor protection Hardware setting input range and switching from voltage to current by means of a DIP switch for more details see RA O 01 User s Manu
178. 23 TorqRefB 25 04 is ramped by TorqRampUp 25 05 and TorqgRampDown 25 06 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRampUp torque ramp up Ramp time from 0 to 100 of MotNomTorque 4 23 for TorqRefB 25 04 Int Scaling 100 1 s Type l Volatile N TorqRampDown torque ramp down Ramp time from 100 to 0 of MotNomTorque 4 23 for TorqRefB 25 04 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N toraRefazsor of of 325 o of 325 Tomreta25s01 of of of wot of o BEE D G e e eee BA COE E EET R N E E TorqRefA Sel torque reference A selector Selector for TorqRefExt 2 24 0 TorqRefA2501 TorqRefA 25 01 default 1 Al1 analog input Al1 2 Al2 analog input Al2 3 Al3 analog input Al3 4 Al4 analog input Al4 5 AIS analog input AIS 6 Al6 analog input Al6 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 281 Signal Parameter name Torque reference handling TorqSel torque selector Torque reference selector 0 Zero zero control torque reference 0 1 Speed speed control default 2 Torque torque control 3 Minimum minimum control min TorqRef1 2 08 TorqRef2 2 09 4 Maximum maximum control max TorqRef1 2 08 TorqRef2 2 09 5 Add add control TorqRef1 2 08 TorqRef2 2 09 used for window control 6 Limitation limitation control TorqRef1 2 08 limits TorqRef2 2 0
179. 26 03 Auto and local loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking A130 LocalCmdLoss AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 13 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note1 The time out for Loca LossCtrl 30 27 is fixed to 10 s Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N Rampton Pet uit J E Q 2 op Q E be D Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name ComLossCirl communication loss control ComLossCtrl 30 28 determines the reaction to a communication control loss fieldbusses Rxxx DCS_Link drive to drive respectively master follower see also CommandSel 10 01 Depending on the type of communication loss either F528 FieldBusCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 11 or F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 is set with 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero
180. 3 70 12 to be sent via broadcast to the followers Also two other signals can be sent through the link if required Their addresses are defined by Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 and Ch2 MasSig2 70 11 Typical default addresses are 2ms MainCtrlWord 7 01 or UsedMCW 7 04 Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 2ms SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Ch2 MasSig2 70 11 2ms TorqRef3 2 10 Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 Above parameters are not valid in the follower The master cyclically sends Ch2 MasSig1 3 in one DDCS message as broadcast every 2 ms The follower mode is selected by Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 To control start and stop from the master set CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord The connections Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 100 are selected by Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 Ch2 FolSig2 70 19 and Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 according to the following table MainCtrlWord 7 01 Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 SpeedRef 23 01 Ch2 FolSig2 70 19 TorgRefA 25 01 Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Above parameters are not valid in the master The follower cyclically reads Ch2 FolSig1 3 every 2 ms Note In default setting master signal TorgRef3 2 10 is send via master parameter Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 to follower signal TorqRefA 25 01 via follower parameter Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Firmware structure Master Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 Master activates read pointer Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 Ch2 MasSig2 70 11 and Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 Torque reference and torque selection 3 3 ms
181. 305 TotqRef2 TorqRefExt i Speen 25 10 _ TorgRefA Sel 2 24 Filter i Torque 2 TorgRef3 VE x o E50 TorgRefA2501 25 03 i Alt Al6 LoadShare 25 02 HTorgReiA FTC TorgRet8 2504 Torque ramp ra 25 05 j TorqgRampUp 25 06 H TorqRampDown TorqSelMod GT Mode StopMode 26 05 TorqMux 26 04 ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 INotUsed TorgSel 260 DH DIN MCW Bit 11 MCW Bit15 E StopMode LocalLoossCtrl CommLossCtrl FaultStopMode Mi TorgProvTime M2TorgProvTime Cho ComLossCtrl Ch2 ComLossCtrl oi OVO hol ES LEE A RN RE Masier follower firmware structure SDCS COM 8x SDCS COM 8x D200 pve SDCS COM 8x com8_bus conn a dsf plastic optic fibre So m SDCS COM 8 Rev D and higher Master follower fiber optic cable connection see also DCS800 Hardware Manual Toggle between speed and torque control In some application both speed and torque control of the followers are required e g if it is necessary to accelerate all drives along the same speed ramp up to a certain speed before the torque control can be started In those cases a flying switch over between speed and torque controls is required The switch over
182. 4 1 03 30 FldCurRefM1 0 00 100 00 2 01 29 Mot1FldCurRel 0 00 100 00 3 Channel 3 0 00 100 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 ChannelS 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 60 a Je N ee ie 404 207 0 S A 4 i 0 65 3 65 6 65 9 65 12 65 15 65 Time ei rosen EE Ee 2 cmon S 2 ee E oe Gol ei DriveWindow manual tuning field current controller set M1FidRefExt 45 06 0 remove On via DriveWindow set M1FIidMinTrip 30 12 and M1FldRefMode 45 05 back to their original settings Armature current controller To keep a Pl controller as fast as possible idealistically the integral part should Soe kick stay at zero The worst case is that the integral part is running into the limits and principle f f thus needs a long time to recover To prevent this and to achieve an integral part as small as possible two feed forwards are used for the current controller 1 During discontinuous current the signal from the current controller is boosted by means of the discontinuous current adaptation depending on discontinuous current limit current reference and EMF The discontinuous current limit has to be determent during the commissioning 2 Additionally the EMF itself is used as feed forward Unfortunately it is not possible to measure the EMF directly It has to be calculated by means of following formula Start up 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 33 EMF U R 1 L
183. 4 19 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 1 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 2 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 3 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 4 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N MailBox3 mailbox 3 node ID Mailbox 3 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal3 1 94 26 TrmtRecVal3 2 94 27 TrmtRecVal3 3 94 28 and TrmtRecVal3 4 94 29 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox3 94 24 is set to 0 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name
184. 5 P94 13 200 10th follower drive 41st excitation P94 01 11 P94 01 31 P94 07 100 P94 08 31 P94 12 5 P94 13 200 Example 4 Two 12 pulse drives in master follower configuration and communication supervision Master 12 pulse master drive P94 01 1 P94 03 100 P94 04 31 P94 07 100 P94 08 21 12 pulse slave drive P94 01 31 1 excitation P94 01 21 Follower 12 pulse master drive P94 01 2 P94 03 100 P94 04 32 P94 07 100 P94 08 22 12 pulse slave drive P94 01 32 1 excitation P94 01 22 Example 5 Drive to drive configuration 1st drive 2d drive 3 drive P94 01 1 P94 01 2 P94 01 3 DCSLinkNodelD DCSLink node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of the station Two stations with the same node ID are not allowed Maximum allowed station count is 50 See also examples 1 to 5 above The DCSLink node ID is inactive if DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 is set to 0 The drive trips with F508 I OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the SDCS DSL 4 board is chosen but not connected or faulty Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 370 Signal Parameter name BaudRate baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the DCSLink The transfer rate decreases with the total length of the DCSLink cable 0 20 kBit s 20 kBit s total cable length max 500 m 1 50 kBit s 50 kBit s total cable length max 500 m
185. 50 13 6 ArmCurMan manual tuning of armature current controller 7 FieldCurMan manual tuning of field current controller 8 ThyDiagnosis thyristor diagnosis 9 FldRevAssist test field reversal 10 SetTypeCode set type code releases following parameters TypeCode 97 01 S ConvScaleCur 97 02 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 S M1FidScale 45 20 S M2FlidScale 45 21 11 SpdCtriMan manual tuning of speed controller 12 EMF Man manual tuning of EMF controller not implemented yet 13 Simulation testing the thyristor diagnosis without mains voltage connected 14 TachFineTune tacho fine tuning see M1 TachoAdjust 50 12 15 LD FB Config reserved for future use load fieldbus configuration file 16 DeleteAppl releases ParApp Save 16 06 DeleteAppl Note1 The reference chain is blocked while ServiceMode 99 06 NormalMode Note1 Depending on MotSel 8 09 the field current of motor 1 or motor 2 is tuned Note2 A standard DCS800 converter used as field exciter cannot be tuned by means of its armature converter Tune it by setting ServiceMode 99 06 FieldCurAuto in the field exciter itself Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile Y NormalMode min def NormalMode ApplRestore application restore Setting App Restore 99 07 Yes starts the loading storing of the macro preset parameter set selected by means of AppiMacro 99 08 AppiRestore 99 07 is automatically set back to Done after the chosen action is finished 0 Done_
186. 50 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 5 DCF804 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 6 DCF803 0060 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet 7 DCF804 0060 external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet 8 DCS800 S01 external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter 9 DCS800 S02 external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter 10 DCF803 0016 external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 OnBoard 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 17 ExFex Al2 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al2 18 ExFex Al3 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al3 19 ExFex Al4 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 21 VariFexType see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 22 Exc Appl 1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADW00031 1 If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Pot1 potentiometer 1 Constant test reference 1 for
187. 518 M2FexOverCur FaultWord2 9 02 bit 1 if M2FidOvrCurLev 49 09 in percent of M2NomFidCur 49 05 is exceeded It is recommended to set M2FidOvrCurtLev 49 09 at least 25 higher than M2NomFidCur 49 05 The field overcurrent fault is inactive if M2FidOvrCurLev 49 09 is set to 135 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M2KpFex motor 2 p part field current controller Proportional gain of the field current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal field current M2NomFidCur 49 05 with M2KpFex 49 10 3 if the field current error is 5 of M2NomFidCur 49 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 329 Signal Parameter name M2TiFex motor 2 i part field current controller Integral time of the field current controller M2TiFex 49 11 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal field current M2NomFidCur 49 05 with M2KpFex 49 10 3 if the field current error is 5 of M2NomFidCur 49 05 On that condition and with M2TiFex 49 11 200 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal field current if the current error is constant after 200 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M2TiFex 49 11 to 0 ms disables the int
188. 6 06 EableAppl application on drive and Memory Card are different activate application on Memory Card by means of ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl overvoltage protection active OvrVoltProt 30 13 A118 1 A119 autotuning failure Diagnosis 9 11 selected motor mechanical brake BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 M2SirtTorqRefSel 49 44 at least one fault message is mask speed scaling out of range M1SpeedScale 50 01 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 selected motor speed feedback M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 external alarm via binary input ExtAlarmSel 30 32 analog input range AI Mon4mA 30 29 fieldbus communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 The parameters found in flash were found invalid at power up checksum fault The parameters were restored from the parameter backup local command loss LocalLossCtrl 30 27 A new firmware with a different amount of parameters was downloaded The new parameters are set to their default values The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 parameter setting conflict the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Volatile Y A132 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 9 08 AlarmWord3 alarm word 3 Alarm word 3 Bit BO B1 Alarm
189. 6 Adaptive Program outputs 88 Internal 90 Receiving data sets addresses 1 91 Receiving data sets addresses 2 92 Transmit data sets addresses 1 93 Transmit data sets addresses 2 94 DCSLink control 97 Measurement 98 Option modules 99 Start up data 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal and parameter list 174 Signal Parameter name 20 07 TorqMaxSPC maximum torque speed controller Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 at the output of the speed controller TorqRef2 2 09 Note1 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N SpeedRef speed reference Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed 2 17 via RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Internally limited from 2 29 edith rpm to 2 29 S217 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Sample of parameters Parameter changes by DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light are stored in the flash Changes made by the overriding control are only stored in the RAM Min max def Minimum and maximum value or selection of parameter Default value or default selection of parameter Unit Shows the physical
190. 601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 261 Signal Parameter name M1SpeedMax motor 1 maximum speed Motor 1 positive speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedRef2 2 01 SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Internally limited from 2 29 E rpm to 2 29 32767 rpm 20000 20000 Note1 M1SpeedMax 20 02 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note2 M1SpeedMax 20 02 is also applied to SoeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SoeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N M1ZeroSpeedLim motor 1 zero speed limit When the Run command is removed set UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 to zero the drive will stop as chosen by StopMode 21 03 As soon as the actual speed reaches the limit set by M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the motor will coast independent of the setting of StopMode 21 03 Existing brakes are closed applied While the actual speed is in the limit ZeroSpeed AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 11 is high Note1 In case FlyStart 21 10 StartFrom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 4 is generated Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volati
191. 601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 98 06 AIO ExtModule analog extension module First RAIO xx extension module interface selection AIO ExtModule 98 06 releases AIS Al6 AO3 and AO4 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 5 see switch S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no first RAIO xx is used default 1 Slot first RAIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 first RAIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 first RAIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA first RAIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 5 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RAIO extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery 1 RAIO Switch S1 ADDRESS Ge Ee al CH A NotUsed min NotUsed det Ei DO Ex as SS pyr S1 Int Scaling 1 Volatile N 98 08 ModBusModule2 Modbus module 2 The Modbus module RMBA xx can be connected in option slot 1 2 or 3 see also CommModule 98 02 0 NotUsed no RMBA xx is used default 1 Slot1 RMBA xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 RMBA xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 RMBA xx is co
192. 7 0 V the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed feedback assistant M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 1 V the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant Note1 Use ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune Int Scaling 10 1 V Type l Volatile N max Encoder2 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 333 Signal Parameter name 49 28 M2BrakeCirl motor 2 brake control Releases the control of motor 2 brake 0 NotUsed brake logic is blocked default 1 On brake logic is released according to it s parameter settings 2 BrakeClose test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always closed applied 3 BrakeOpen test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always opened lifted Attention A closed applied brake will open lift immediately Do not use this mode with e g an unsaved crane drive The brake open lift command BrakeCmd is readable in AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and can be connected to the digital output controlling the brake Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed M2BrakeAckSel motor 2 brake acknowledge selector The drive sets either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 if a digital input is selected and the brake acknowledge fails 0 NotUsed brake acknowledge is blo
193. 7 DCF804 0050 or DCF804 0060 in percent ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage If 2 successive AC voltage measurements differ more than M2FreewhiLev 45 15 the free wheeling function is activated Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N M2PosLimCirl motor 2 positive output limit field current controller Positive output limit for motor 2 field exciter current controller in percent of the maximum field exciter output voltage Note 4 Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M2PosLimCtrl 45 16 also as negative limit Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 45 17 FidCurTrim field current trimming The field current of motor 1 and motor 2 can be corrected by means of FldCurTrim 45 17 in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 respectively M2NomFidCur 49 05 0 to 20 The value is subtracted from motor 1 field current reference The result is visible in FidCurRefM1 3 30 20 to 0 The absolute value is subtracted from motor 2 field current reference The result is visible in FldCurRefM2 3 31 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N FidMinTripDly delay field current minimum trip FidMinTripDly 45 18 delays F541 M1iFexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 respectively F542 M2FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 9 If the field current recovers before the delay is elapsed F541 F542 wil
194. 7 is only active in the armature converter The communication fault is inactive if FexTimeOut 94 07 is set to 0 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N The field exciter node ID is inactive if M1FexNode 94 08 is set to 0 Note1 M1FexNode 94 08 is void when M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed or OnBoard 94 08 M1FexNode motor 1 field exciter node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 1 field exciter in the drive See also examples 1 to 4 above Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 94 09 M2FexNode motor 2 field exciter node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 2 field exciter in the drive See also example 1 above The field exciter node ID is inactive if M2FexNode 94 09 is set to 0 Note1 M2FexNode 94 09 is void when M2UsedFexType 49 07 NotUsed or OnBoard Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name The drive to drive and master follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes to transfer data Thus data transfer to any station in the system is possible Each mailbox can transmit receive up to 4 values Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data negative only receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed Example 6 Drive to drive configuration sending signals from drive 2 using MailBox3 94 24 to drive 3 using MailBox3 94 24 by means of 5 to transmit data and 5 to rec
195. 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 Auto 0 Hand MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12_ 1 Auto 0 Hand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 Auto 0 Hand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 Auto 0 Hand AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 Auto 0 Hand AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed def NotUsed ACW Biti 10 08 Off2 Off2 command electrical disconnect Binary signal for Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 For fastest reaction use fast digital inputs DI7 or DI8 0 NotUsed 1 DN 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 2 DI2 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 3 DIS 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 4 DA 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active default 5 DI5 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 6 DI6 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 7 DI7 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 8 DI8 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 9 DIO 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtrilWord 7 0
196. 70 24 15 92 01 MainStatWord 92 02 MotSpeed 92 03 TorqRef2 92 04 AuxStatWord 92 05 MotSpeedFilt 92 06 MotTorq 92 07 FaulWord1 92 08 FaulWord2 92 09 FaulWord3 92 10 FaulWora4 92 11 AlarmWord1 92 12 AlarmWord2 92 13 AlarmWord3 92 14 LimWord 92 15 DI StatWord 92 16 DO StatWord 92 17 BridgeTemp 92 18 Moti TempMeas 93 01 93 02 93 03 93 04 93 05 93 06 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note The update time is the time within the drive is reading values from the data sets Since the drive is a slave the actual communication cycle time depends on the master s cycle time Fieldbus communication Nxxx The communication between the fieldbus adapter Nxxx and the SDCS COM 8 uses data sets The data set base address is set by means of CHO DsetBaseAdadr 70 24 1 The communication for the fieldbus adapters is activated by means of CommMoadule 98 02 COM 8 Nxxx The contents of the fieldbus data sets is set by means of the same pointers as for the ABB overriding control data sets see sections Received data set table and Transmitted data set table Received and transmitted values are set according to groups 90 to 93 Also the update times are the same Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 99 Chi I O devices All optional I O devices are connected via AIMA 01 board to Ch1 The SDCS COM 8
197. 703 equals AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus2Val3 data set X 2 value 3 Data set X 2 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 2 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 363 Signal Parameter name 90 07 DsetXplus4Val1 data set X 4 value 1 Data set X 4 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdoar 70 24 4 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile 90 08 DsetXplus4Val2 data set X 4 value 2 Data set X 4 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 4 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus4Val3 data set X 4 value 3 Data set X 4 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 4 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus6Val1 data set X 6 value 1 Data set X 6 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 6 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus6Val2 data set X 6 value 2 Data set X 6 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 6 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus6Val3 data set X 6 value 3 Data set X 6 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 6 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus8Val1 data set X 8 value 1 Data set X 8 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set a
198. 76 Signal Parameter name Physical actual values MotSpeedFilt filtered motor speed Filtered actual speed feedback Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Filtered with 1 s and SpeedFiltTime 50 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedActEMF speed actual EMF Actual speed calculated from EMF Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedActEnc speed actual encoder 1 Actual speed measured with pulse encoder 1 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y MotSpeed motor speed Actual motor speed Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 If M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 is set to External the signal is updated by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control SpeedFiltTime 50 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedActTach speed actual tacho Actual speed measured with analog tacho Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y MotCur motor current Relative actual motor current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y MotTorqFilt filtered motor torque Relative filtered motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period plus TorqActFiltTime 97 20 Note1 the value is calculated every 20 ms Note2 the value is calculated the following way Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 MotCur 1 06 100 Mo
199. 9 lf TorqRef1 2 08 50 then TorqRef2 2 09 is limited to 50 The output of the torque reference selector is TorqRef3 2 10 Note1 TorqSel 26 01 is only valid if TorgMuxMode 26 04 TorqSel Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N LoadComp load compensation Load compensation in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 added to TorqRef3 2 10 The sum of TorqRef3 2 10 and the LoadComp 26 02 results in TorqRef4 2 11 Note1 Since this torque offset is added it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqSelMod torque selector mode Mode setting for the torque selector the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control in case the mode described in e Off1Mode 21 02 StopMode 21 03 E StopMode 21 04 LocalLossCtrl 30 27 ComLossCtrl 30 28 FaultStopMode 30 30 M1TorgProvTime 42 10 M2TorgProvTime 49 40 ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 or e Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 is active and the parameter is set to RampStop or TorqueLimit default the torque selector is fixed to the value set by TorqSel 26 01 TorqMuxMode 26 04 and TorqMux 26 05 The setting of TorqSelMod 26 03 is especially affecting drives using torque control e g master Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 282 Signal Parameter name Torque selector Torque reference and to
200. ADW000194 Drive data Check following items for each drive and mark the differences in the delivery documents motor analog tacho or pulse encoder and cooling fan rating plates data direction of motor rotation maximum and minimum speed and if fixed speeds are used speed scaling factors e g gear ratio roll diameter acceleration and deceleration times operating modes e g stop mode E stop mode the amount of motors connected Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 25 Checking with the power switched on There is dangerous voltage inside the cabinet Switching the power on prior to connecting the voltage proceed as follows 1 ensure that all the cable connections are checked and that the connections can t cause any danger 2 close all doors of enclosed converter before switching power on 3 be ready to trip the supply transformer if anything abnormal occurs 4 switch the power on Measurements made with power on check the operation of the auxiliary equipment check the circuits for external interfaces on site 1 E stop circuit 2 remote control of the main breaker 3 signals connected to the control system 4 other signals which remain to be checked Connecting voltage to the drive check from the delivery diagrams the type of boards and converters which are used in the system check all time relay and breaker settings close the supply dis
201. APE DI Go Folders WEI Desktop B My Documents E Se Local Disk C H CO ass E CO pcssoo CO Docu O DwComp d My Computer DE L 0130005 DEU109895 Workspaces je uninsO00 exe KE uninsOO0 dat B01 02 DCS800 Name plate data amp macro assistant dww B 03 pcssoo Autotuning field current controller dww B 04 Dese Autotuning armature current controller dww Bios DCS800 Speed feedback assistant dww B 06 Dezem Autotuning speed controller dww D pcsso0 Field weakening assistant dw 8 objects Disk free space 8 82 GB A y a26 KB A My Computer Location of workspaces 01 02 Macro assistant Name plate data 1 2 3 Open the workspace 01 02 DCS800 Name plate data amp macro assistant dww Set all parameters to default by means of App Macro 99 08 Factory and App Restore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 Enter the motor data the mains supply data and the most important protections W1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Language 99 01 M1NomVolt 99 02 M1NomCur 99 03 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 NomMainsVolt 99 10 and M1NomFldCur 99 1 1 After filling out the parameters it is in most cases possible to turn the motor for the first time Select an application macro by means of App Macro 99 08 lt macro gt and App Restore 99 07 Yes Check with Ma
202. Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited 2 Edit edit the Adaptive Program is not running and can be edited 3 SingleCycle The Adaptive Program runs only once If a breakpoint is set with BreakPoint 83 06 the Adaptive Program will stop before the breakpoint After the SingleCycle AdapProgCmd 83 01 is automatically set back to Stop 4 SingleStep Runs only one function block LocationCounter 84 03 shows the function block number which will be executed during the next SingleStep After a SingleStep AdapProgCmd 83 01 is automatically set back to Stop LocationCounter 84 03 shows the next function block to be executed To reset LocationCounter 84 03 to the first function block set AdapProgCmd 83 01 to Stop again even if it is already set to Stop A136 NoAPTaskTime AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 3 is set when TimeLevSel 83 04 is not set to 5 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 500 ms but AdapProgCmd 83 01 is set to Start SingleCycle or SingleStep Note1 AdapProgCmd 83 01 Start SingleCycle or SingleStep is only valid if AdapPrgStat 84 01 Running Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name EditCmd edit command Edit Adaptive Program EditCmd 83 02 is automatically set back to Done after the chosen action is finished 0 Done no action or edit of Adaptive Program completed default Shifts the function block in the spot defined by Edi
203. Bit12_ 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 16 MCW Bit13 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 17 MCW Bit14 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 18 MCW Bit15 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 19 ACW Bit12 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 20 ACW Bit13 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 21 ACW Bit14 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 22 ACW Bit15 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Invert1102 ACW Bit1 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def MotPotUp motor pot up With the motor pot up function the motor speed is increased by means of the selected binary input The acceleration is limited by AccTime1 22 01 MotPotDown 11 14 overrides MotPotUp 11 13 0 NotUsed default 1 Dl1 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 2 DI2 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 3 DI
204. C voltage measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode OV take value from TypeCode 97 01 1 V to 2000 V take value from S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in ConvNomVolt 4 04 ServiceMode 99 06 has to be set back to NormalMode by the user Attention When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Int Scaling 1 1V Type l Volatile N 150 C the temperature supervision is inactive if S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 is set to 150 C e g for rebuild kits This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 Note1 Maximum bridge temperature for converters size D6 and D7 is 50 C 97 04 S MaxBrdgTemp set maximum bridge temperature Adjustment of the converters heat sink temperature tripping level in degree centigrade 0 C take value from TypeCode 97 01 1 C to 149 C take value from S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 Int Scaling 1 1 C Type l Volatile N Os Converter temperature measurement is released The drive trips with F504 ConvOverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 4 in case of excessive converter temperature 1 s to 300 s Converter fan current measurement is released when the drive is in On state UsedMCW 7 04 bit O On 1 The drive trips with F511 ConvFanCur FaultWor
205. CS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Analog I O AlTacho Val analog input for tacho Measured actual voltage at analog tacho input The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper setting Note1 A value of 11 V equals 1 25 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Al1 Val analog input 1 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 1 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Al2 Val analog input 2 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 2 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AI3 Val analog input 3 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 3 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Al4 Val analog input 4 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 4 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AIS Val analog input 5 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 5 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and DIP switch settings Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule 98 06 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Vol
206. Comments ServiceMode 99 06 2 FieldC urAuto Give the On and Run command within 20 s Firmware description 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 60 Stand alone field exciter Overriding control rm H TO DCS800 DCF505 excitation DCF506 Stand alone field exciter H In the stand alone field exciters set OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv and CommandSel 10 01 Local I O or MainCtrlWord as source for the control word OnOff1 StartStop and Reset The reference is selected by CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt or AI to AI6 In the stand alone field exciter the current is set by means of M1NomCur 99 03 Parameters to be set in the stand alone field exciter Before starting with the commissioning set all parameters to default by means of ApplMacro 99 08 Factory and App Restore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 Parameter Excitation Comments CommandSel 10 01 0 Local I O def 1 MainCtrilWord MotFanAck 10 06 0 NotUsed OvrVoltProt 10 13 2 DI2 depending on hardware connection to DCF506 ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 500 to suppress F503 ArmOverVolt if this does not help increase M1NomVolt 99 02 OperModeSel 43 01 1 FieldConv CurSel 43 02 1 CurRefExt depending on the connection 2 All 3 Al2 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 61 4 A3
207. Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus ModuleType 51 01 CANopen Node ID 51 02 1 set node address as required Bauarate 51 03 8 8 1 MBits s PDO21 Cfg 51 04 1 0 Configuration via CANopen objects 1 Configuration via RCAN 01 adapter parameters RX PDO21 Enable 51 05 769 This value has to be calculated with 300 Hex 768 Node ID 51 02 Here 768 1 769 Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 107 RX PDO21 TxType 51 06 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 RX PDO21 1stObj 51 07 8197 2005 Hex 8197 Transparent Control Word see page 62 RX PDO21 1stSubj 51 08 0 RX PDO21 2ndObj 51 09 8198 2006 Hex 8198 Transparent Reference Speed see page 62 RX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 10 RX PDO21 3rdObj 51 11 16409 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with TorqRefA 25 01 follows 16384 25 16409 see page 64 RX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 12 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with TorqRefA 25 01 follows 1 see page 64 RX PDO21 4thObj 51 13 16391 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with AuxCtrlWord 7 02 follows 16384 7 16391 see page 64 RX PDO21 4thSubj 51 14 This value has to be taken from the
208. D numbers only transmit data negative only receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs e g 5 5 and 6 6 are needed Firmware 1 drive Firmware 2 drive MailBox1 94 12 5 MailBox1 94 12 5 MailBox2 94 18 6 MailBox2 94 18 6 1 drive P94 01 1 P94 12 5 P94 18 6 2 drive P94 01 2 P94 12 5 P94 18 6 Attention Positive mailbox node ID numbers must be unique Negative mailbox node ID numbers can be used by several mailboxes Activate the communication supervision The communication supervision is activated by means of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 The function of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is depending on the setting of MailBox1 94 12 If MailBox1 94 12 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if Mai BoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms If MailBox1 94 12 is negative data will be received Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 92 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 e
209. DCS800 Firmware manual DCS800 Drives 20 to 5200 A AA ED ED FADED DCS800 Drive Manuals All the documents available for the drive system DCS800 are listed below Language Public number E D l ES F CN RU DCS800 Quick Guide 3ADW000191 x D D D D DCS800 Tools amp Documentation CD 3ADW000211 D DCS800 Converter module Flyer DCS800 3ADW000190 x D p x D p Technical Catalogue DCS800 3ADW000192 x x x x x x x Hardware Manual DCS800 38ADW000194 x x p p x x x Firmware Manual DCS800 38ADW000193 x x p x p x x Installation according to EMC 38ADW000032 x Technical Guide 38ADW000163 x Service Manual DCS800 38ADW000195 x x 12 Pulse Manual 38ADW000196 x CMA 2 Board 3ADW000136 p Flyer Hard Parallel 38ADW000213 x Drive Tools DriveWindow 2 x User s Manual 3BFE64560981 x DriveOPC 2 x User s Manual 3BFE00073846 x Optical DDCS Communication Link 3AFE63988235 x DDCS Branching Units User s Manual 3BFE64285513 x DCS800 Applications PLC Programming with CoDeSys CoDeSys_V23 x x x 61131 DCS800 target tool description Application Program 38ADW000199 x DCS800 Crane Drive DCS800 Crane Drive Manual suppl 3AST004143 x R0101 DCS800 Crane Drive Product note p DCS800 Winder ITC DCS800 Winder Product note PDC2 EN D DCS800 Winder de
210. E For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 bit 14 For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 bit 15 549 ParComp Parameter compatibility 9 04 always 1 When downloading parameter sets or during power up bit 0 the firmware attempts to write their values If the setting is not possible or not compatible the parameter is set to default The parameters causing the fault can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Check parameter setting 550 ParMemRead Parameter or Memory Card read 9 04 always Reading the actual parameter set or a user parameter bit 1 set from either flash or Memory Card failed checksum one or both parameter sets User1 and or User2 have not been saved properly see ApplMacro 99 08 Memory Card and SDCS CON 4 551 AlRange Analog input range 9 04 always 4 Undershoot of one of the analog input values under bit 2 4mA 2V Check Al Mon4mA 30 29 used analog inputs connections and cables polarity of connection 552 MechBrake Selected motor mechanical brake 9 04 always 3 The acknowledge signal for brake opened lifted or bit 3 brake closed applied is missing Check M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 M1BrakeFltTime 42 05 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 brake brake cabling used digital inputs and outputs group 14 Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 436 Triplevel Text on DCS800 Definition Action Ge Fault is active Control Panel w
211. Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help sale eles ale Kole el gt lm x aK diel a Xx Al Application amp Control z Data logger ig Event logger SI Fault logger 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0H1 Par 1 17 2 03 12 CurRefUsed O 1 Par 3 12 amp 43 02 Cursel O 1 Par 43 2 Memory 43 06 MikpArmCur O 1 Par 43 6 ei 43 07 M1TiArmCur ms 0 1 Par 43 7 EI amp Parameters E 43 08 MiDiscontCurLim O 1 Par 43 8 01 Phys Act Values Zi 43 09 M1ArmL mH 0 1 Par 43 9 02 SPC Signals e 43 10 M1ArmR mOhm CH 03 ReffAct Values E 99 12 MiUsedFextype O 1 Par 43 10 O 1 Par 99 12 Monitor Settir fi Mode Normal 205 Interval ms 10 History Buffer s 3600 000 ix Axis Length ei 15 000 T Y Axis Maximum 20 00 Y Axis Minimum 10 00 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0 00 100 00 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 0 00 100 00 3 Channel 3 0 00 100 00 104 4 Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 channelS 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 10 Time s e cmn J A E ee o e Hset F2 CHAAGDOSS IBS ele 85 wo le n leie Oon Moc Aoc Sw l n 18 ooh a e m g cr Before tuning of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 46 10 tune M1ArmR 46 10 until the EMF is as close as possible to zero and dose not change it s value during the current step Start up 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800
212. ID d part PID controller PID controller derivation time TdPID 40 03 defines the time within the PID controller derives the error value The PID controller works as PI controller if TdP D 40 03 is set to zero Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TdFiltPID filter time for d part PID controller Derivation filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N Index pointer to the source of the PID controller actual input value 1 The format is xxyy with negate actual input value 1 xx group and yy index e g 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Act2 PID controller actual input value 2 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller actual input value 2 The format is xxyy with negate actual input value 2 xx group and yy index e g 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref1Min PID controller minimum limit reference input value 1 Minimum limit of the PID controller reference input value 1 in percent of the source of PID Ref1 40 13 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Sl Volatile N PID Ref1Max PID controller maximum limit reference input value 1 Maximum limit of the PID controller reference input value 1 in percent of the source of PID Ref1 40 13 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Sl Volatile N PID Ref2Min PID controller minimum limit reference input value 2 Minimum limit of the PID controller reference input va
213. IE lh Configurable yes The Al s can be connected to several converter functions and it is possible to scale them by means of group 13 In addition the Al s can be read by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Configurable temperature The Al s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement see M1TempSel 31 05 and M2TempSel 49 35 Configurable Al s are defined by means of following parameters Ref1Sel 11 03 Ref2Sel 11 06 TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 TorgRefA Sel 25 10 TorqCorrect 26 15 ResCurDetectSel 30 05 M1TempSel 31 05 M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 CurSel 43 02 M2TempSel 49 35 M2SirtTorqRefSel 49 44 Following restrictions apply the residual current detection input is fixed assigned to Al4 if activated via ResCurDetectSel 30 05 the motor temperature measurement is fixed assigned to Al2 and Al3 respectively Al7 and Al8 if activated via M1TempSel 31 05 respectively M2TempSel 49 35 Scaling Firmware signal Firmware signal Firmware signal A e Unipolar signal Unipolar signal S oa A 0 10V 0 20MA Uni 5V 10mA Offset 100 e 2 10V 4 20mA Un a 6V 12mA Offset g rt 1 1 Input voltage 1 current a 1 Input 1 voltage 100 3 1 current 100 f f Input 10V i voltage 20mA_ P1302 H i 0 aaa i L Surrent p1303 0 10V Uni OV Paan 10V e P1301 10
214. L D I Mma u o XBW te a aer WN pueg 0000 Buljeos mem sw g g Kuue juano anyeuuy TOYLNOS LNSAYYND SYNLVANYV Appendix A Firmware structure diagram 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 455 Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SDCS CON 4 CONNECTOR ALLOCATION X300 Routine test A ege JEB DCS800 module TERMINAL ALLOCATION Memory card Aar EB XD H Jumpers shown in default position 8 X34 X8 SDCS DSL 4 E XI 7 DriveWindow El DCS Link 5 SEET BS 12 EEN Sie ay eee MBs zm 2 X9 Slot 1 X33 DCS800 Panel Bekins er J UO extension A X2 89 a H2500 S D2001 A 5 1 X37 SDCS PIN 4 SDCS POW 4 A aa re 4X10 F100 F101 F102 X13 SDCS PIN 4 SDCS PIN 51 8 we me X11 Slot 3 L aa gt mam SDCS COM 8 o X10 Slot 2 Relay Aux UO extension UO extension e DOG supply pee zg EzE E 1 Uu Vi wu m X12 SDCS PIN 4 SDCS PIN 51 L ge en Zeg X20 Slot 4 DCS800 Accessories Mw SDCS DSL 4 24V DCS Link X51 Lal g lo urga UTBL X54 s2 H
215. M1UsedFexType 99 12 DCF803 0035 FEX 425 Int or X100 5A X100 35A Field X100 D1 M1UsedFexType 99 12 FEX 4 Term5A X100 5A X100 35A Field X100 D1 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the armature converter and the FEX 4 Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the armature converter node ID number to 1 and the FEX 4 node ID number to 21 The communication supervision is activated in the armature converter Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 BaudRate 94 02 500 kBit s S1100 4 S1100 5 S1100 6 kBit s OFF OFF ON 500 FexTimeOut 94 07 100 ms M1FexNode 94 08 21 S801 S800 2 1 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Communication 84 Set the DCSLink Cable connection SDCS DSL 4 X51 1 va X8 24V 200 mA FEX 4 Fex4_DCSLink dst D La Lab a 24 V 200 MA Termination 200 kOhm Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus 120 ohm 1 1 4 W Hardware SDCS DSL 4 Hardware FEX 4 jumper S1 1 2 if b
216. M1iFexCom Int Scaling Signal Parameter name Fault alarm words Fault code and trip level F501 F502 F503 Comment auxiliary undervoltage armature overcurrent ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 armature overvoltage ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 converter overtemperature ConvTempDly 97 05 shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 residual current detection ResCurDetectSel 30 05 ResCurDetectLim 30 06 ResCurDetectDel 30 07 motor 1 measured overtemperature M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 or M1KlixonSel 31 08 motor 1 calculated overload thermal model M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 I O board not found or faulty DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 AIO ExtModule 98 06 AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 IO BoardConfig 98 15 motor 2 measured overtemperature M2FaultLimTemp 49 37 or M2KixonSel 49 38 motor 2 calculated overload thermal model M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 converter fan current ConvTempDly 97 05 mains low under voltage PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 mains overvoltage actual mains voltage is gt 1 3 NomMainsVolt 99 10 for more than 10 s mains not in synchronism DevLimPLL 97 13 motor 1 field exciter overcurrent M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 motor 1 field exciter communication loss FexTimeOut 94 07 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 M1FexNode 94 08 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name FaultWord2 faul
217. MENU Fault logger mode Use the fault logger mode to see the drives fault alarm and event history the fault state details and help for the faults DCS800 panel operation 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 402 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight FAULT LOGGER in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 20 faults alarms and events are logged 2 Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault Details are available for the three latest faults independent of the location in the fault logger 3 Press DIAG to get additional help only for faults 4 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Clock set mode Use the Clock set mode to Enable or disable the clock function Select the display format Set date and time 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight CLOCK SET in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the desired option then press SEL 3 Choose the desired setting then press SEL or OK to store the setting or press CANCEL to leave without modifications 4 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Note To get the clock visible on the LCD display at least one change has to be done in the clock set mode and the DCS800 Control Panel has to be de energized and energized again Parameter backup mode The DCS800 Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters AP programs will be uploaded and downloaded when they are not protected see EditCmd 83 02
218. MF controller set VoltCorr 44 25 0 remove On and Run via DriveWindow pcs 800 D1 0H1 set FldCtriMode 44 01 EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 and EMF CtrlNegLim 44 08 back to their original settings Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 43 Flux linearization Basics In case the motor needs to be used in the field weakening area the flux linearization has to be set The flux linearization is needed because of the non linear relation of flux and field current due to saturation effects of the field winding Flux Flux linearization Field P4412P4413 P4414 current Flux of DC motor versus field current The magnetization of the motor starts to saturate at a certain field current and thus the flux does not increase linearly For this reason the field current cannot be directly used to calculate the flux inside the motor In base speed area EMF and speed are directly proportional because the flux is kept constant k EMF k constant D Flux Example If the nominal armature voltage is 440 V and the motor is running at half speed with full flux then the armature voltage is about 220 V Now the flux is reduced to 50 at constant speed then the armature voltage drops to about 110 V Since the EMF is directly proportional to the flux it is possible to define a relationship between the field current and the flux by means of measuring the armature voltage without load
219. MOA UO eo pou PS YI YHOASURW 1A ROA sory i S 6g 09 ER Ueeum V mouen sw g joujuoo xny pue Au Ui Dau BU TOYLNOO LNSAYYND qald d sen ANOPISWONL IQON IOV IWS awyn boer arem leyiovHonuuy uowe noe9 4W3 Auogplaly egepoyedo Ter joyyonuuy SIE Wueuemsgen ZLG6 166 TOASUIEWIUION OV 6 peedsesegiW ANQWON LW VOAWON LIN s er uen Ser een PU GG EO G Z066 10 66 inguionnuog GOP vovinonuog FLY reutovionsuen CIETS quewainseau queuno Jeyienuog juswainseaus ien suen 4urTSOG I erep om pue qusweunseaus eum einyewsy Seu co ER ARIS jenas asind Z 0 1 Jesu jenas asind z yuana ampewy Erer t d apoyu buya uweydivuny xepeydjywiy esgepoyysedQ Mor dea ON nowy Ite er 0000 unQuuy DEE Buyeos jewaru unquuy erer xarundansina Hrer SC unguuy S wrungwuoosia ua H G IE a deu en mou ees peadsuinungxey TEF SEH Ousch un SO SP Hoi iesapowionuoo H SOEP gp z6piguiungtWw ken Jens resepowedo Uer zo AWI pesson GOT spaedgwrunouny zz er nels jayesed
220. MainStatWord main status word MSW Main status word Bit BO B1 Name RdyOn RdyRun RdyRef Tripped Off2NStatus Off3NStatus OnInhibited AtSetpoint Remote AboveLimit reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Value OO ch OO ch OO ch OO ch Comment ready to switch on not ready to switch on ready to generate torque not ready to generate torque operation released Running operation blocked fault indication no fault Off2 not active Off2 OnInhibit state active Off3 not active Off3 OnInhibit state active Oninhibited state is active after a fault Emergency Off Coast Stop Off2 E stop Off3 OnlInhibited via digital input Off2 10 08 or E Stop 10 09 Onlnhibit state not active alarm indication no alarm setpoint actual value monitoring in the tolerance zone setpoint actual value monitoring out of the tolerance zone remote control local control speed greater than defined in SpeedLev 50 10 speed lower or equal than defined SpeedLev 50 10 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name AuxStatWord auxiliary status word ASW Auxiliary status word Bit Name Value Comment BO DataLogReady 1 contents of data logger is readable 0 contents of data logger is not readable B1 OutOfWindow 1 actual speed is out of window defined by WinWidthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09
221. Manual e f Signal Parameter name ConvModeAl5 conversion mode analog input 5 The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and current is done via DIP switches on the RAIO 01 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 1 0V 10V Uni OVto10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range O V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Bipolar and unipolar DIP switch setting Input signal type Analogue input Ali Analogue input Al2 ON ON OI DU 123456 123456 0 4 20 mA ON ON 0 2 10 V TTT TTT GEN 123456 123456 Default Voltage and current Input signal DIP switch settings Analogue input 1 Analogue input 2 Current signal 0 4 20 M Default Voltage signal 0 2 10 V Volatile N Al6HighVal analog input 6 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in A 6HighVal 13 25 Note1 To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter
222. Note This is an example and does not necessarily correspond to any motor Using formula 1 we can calculate the correct value for t when starting with a cold motor With 2 ah 31 04 Hos x l e 7 Motn J Follows t f S ous 1225 gt 1 0 In 1 31 04 Me In 1 1 067 I J d Gel act Set M1ModelTime 31 01 122 s Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 416 Field overcurrent The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFidCur 99 11 The overcurrent level is set by means of M1FidOvrCurLev 30 13 Exceeding this level causes F515 M1FexOverCur Armature current ripple The current control is equipped with a current ripple monitor This function detects 1 a broken fuse or thyristor 2 too high gain e g wrong tuning of the current controller 3 abroken current transformer T51 T52 The current ripple monitor level is set by means of CurRippleLim 30 19 Exceeding this level causes either F517 ArmCurRipple or A117 ArmCurRipple depending on CurRippleSel 30 18 Current ripple monitor method is based on comparing positive and negative currents of each phase The calculation is done per thyristor pair Isnubber circuit d not fired thyristor H 16 12 32 34 54 56 DCS800 FW curr rip mon dsf Current ripple monitor method CurRipple 1 09 is calculated as abs I I abs I I abs I l By low
223. O 1 Par 44 14 03 Ref act Values Gi 0 1 Par 44 27 E o4 Information E Zi 99 04 MiBaseSpeed rpm 0H1 Par 99 4 Monitor History Buffer s 3600 000 KX Axis Length s 50 000 T Y Axis Maximum 100 00 Y Axis Minimum 0 00 1 01 14 ArmVoltAct V 0 00 60 00 2 01 29 MotiFidCurRel fe 0 00 100 00 3 01 04 MotSpeed rpm 0 00 1500 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 Channel 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 50 00 Time s d Vi CS 800 D1 mn Lal al ns E E ze Go a W vcs 800 D1 Im ae DriveWindow manual tuning flux linearization set FluxCorr 44 27 0 remove On and Run via DriveWindow set FldCurFlux90 44 14 FldCurFlux70 44 13 and FldCurFlux40 44 12 to the determined values set M1FIidMinTrip 30 12 FldCtriMode 44 01 EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 and EMF CtrlNegLim 44 08 back to their original settings Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 46 Firmware description Chapter overview This chapter describes how to control the drive with standard firmware Identification of the firmware revisions The DCS800 is controlled by the SCDS CON 4 The firmware revision can be checked from FirmwareVer 4 01 The DDCS communication is handled by the SDCS COM 8 The firmware revision can be checked from Com8SwvVersion 4 11 The firmware revisions of the field exciters can be checked from
224. O defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DI of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DI3 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DI of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control DI2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control DI3 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control B14 reserved B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 210 Signal Parameter name 8 06 DO StatWord digital outputs status word DOSW Digital output word shows the value of the digital outputs after inversion to DO StatWord 8 06 from drive invert DOx to DOx Name Comment default setting DO1 DO1 Index 14 01 603 and DO1BitNo 14 02 15 FansOn actual setting depends on macro DO2 DOZ2Index 14 03 603 and DO2BitNo 14 04 5 FieldOn actual setting depends on macro DO3 DO3Index 14 05 603 and DO3BitNo 14 06 7 MainContactorOn actual setting depends on macro DO4Index 14 07 0 and DO4BitNo 14 08 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DOSIndex 14 09 0 and DOSBitNo 14 10 0 Not connected actual setting depends
225. O6BitNo 14 12 gt DO6lndex 14 11 L DO6 X7 6 X5 3 4 DO7index 14 13 eee DOZBitNo 14 14 Ss pozo ais DO7 ay Lo eee DOB8Index 14 15 bit 7 DO8 DOBBIINO 14 16 gt MainContactorOn DO8Index 14 15 _ DO8 X7 8 X5 7 8 jg RDIO 01 DIO ExtModule1 98 03 bit 8 DOO X21 98 03 bit 9 DO10 x22 2rd RDIO 01 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 bit 10 DO11 X21 U bit 11 DO12 SC y E Si lelelaleleir leese elol i i i i ioi i iei l 6 A JA jajajajaja ja jasyqAljasa B S a j ls j js Jw sls fe amp S S S S S S S 5 S g leis Q a Structure of DO s VO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 75 Analog inputs APs The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 4 standard Al s All 4 standard Al s can be replaced with SDCS IOB 3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO 01 analog I O extension modules Thus the maximum number of Al s is 8 The hardware source is selected by AlO ExtModule 98 06 for AIS and Al6 AlO MotTempMeas 98 12 for AI7 and Al8 10 BoardConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of analog I O extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 Hardware setting switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S2 and S3 for more details see Hardware Manual Input range Ali and Al2 set by parameter 10V 0Vto10V 2Vto10V 5 V offset 6 V offset 20 mA 0 mA to
226. Panel Start up The commissioning configures the drive and sets parameters that define how the drive operates and communicates Depending on the control and communication requirements the commissioning requires any or all of the following The Start up Assistant via DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Light steps you through the default configuration The DCS800 Control Panel Start up Assistant runs automatically at the first power up or can be accessed at any time using the main menu Application macros can be selected to define common system configurations See chapter Application Macros Additional adjustments can be made using the DCS800 Control Panel to manually select and set individual parameters See chapter Signal and parameter list DCS800 Control Panel Use the DCS800 Control Panel to control the drive to read status data to adjust parameters and to use the pre programmed assistants Features The DCS800 Control Panel features Alphanumeric LCD display Language selection for the display by means of Language 99 01 Panel can be connected or detached at any time Start up Assistant for ease drive commissioning Copy function parameters can be copied into the DCS800 Control Panel memory to be downloaded to other drives or as backup Context sensitive help Fault and alarm messages including fault history DCS800 panel operation 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 396 Disp
227. Par 84 02 PrgProtected Application program protected The application program is protected by password and cannot be edited Check PassCode 83 05 PrgPassword Application program wrong password Wrong password is used to unlock the application program Check _PassCode 83 05 FB found Fieldbus adapter found Fieldbus adapter of Fxxx series found Modbus found Modbus adapter found Modbus adapter of Fxxx series found COM8 found SDCS COM 8 found Communication board SDCS COM 8 found 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Fault tracing 450 Text on DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Definition Action AIO found Analog extension module found Analog extension module connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found DIO found Digital extension module found Digital extension module connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found Enc found Encoder module found Encoder module RTAC 01 or RTAC 03 connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found DSL found SDCS DSL 4 found DCSLink board found Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 451 iagram tructure d irmware S F Appendix A Jsp 5 aax werBetp eamqonz3s ma 008590 asemu PAePUEYS ay MOYS SEI mons SENAT OyL uo u yy lonuos Dupueng 10 wesBo d uopeajjdde EHS RE Wiese eunt J ey pssdenezu
228. PulseCom F535 M1FexLowCur F541 12PCurDiff F534 M1FexNotOK F529 12PRevTime F533 MiFexOverCur F515 12PSlaveFail F536 MiFexRdyLost F537 M1OverLoad F507 AlRange F551 M1OverTemp F506 ApplLoadFail F545 M2FexCom F519 ArmCurRipple F517 M2FexLowCur F542 ArmOverCur F502 M2FexNotOK F530 ArmOvervVolt F503 M2FexOverCur F518 AuxUnderVolt F501 M2FexRdyLost F538 M2OverLoad F510 COM8Com F543 M2OverTemp F509 COM8Faulty F540 MainContAck F524 ConvFanAck F527 MainsLowVolt F512 ConvFanCur F511 MainsNotSync F514 ConvOverTemp F504 MainsOvrVolt F513 MechBrake F552 ExternalDl F526 MotorStalled F531 ExtFanAck F523 MotOverSpeed F532 FastCurRise F539 P2PandMFCom F544 ParComp F549 FieldAck F521 ParMemRead F550 FieldBusCom F528 FwFailure F548 ResCurDetect F505 ReversalTime F557 HwFailure F547 SpeedFb F522 OBoardLoss F508 TachPolarity F553 LocalCmdLoss_ F546 TachoRange F554 TorgProving F556 M1iFexCom F516 TypeCode F525 Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 424 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Triplevel 501 AuxUnderVolt Auxiliary undervoltage l RdyRun 1 1 The auxiliary voltage is too low while the drive is in bit 0 operation If resetting fails check internal auxiliary voltages SDCS CON 4 and change SDCS CON 4 and or SDCS PIN 4 respectively SDCS POW 4 board Auxiliary supply voltage Trip
229. S 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 4 Di4 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 5 DI5 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 6 DI6 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 7 DI7 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 8 DI8 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 9 DIO 1 increase speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 increase speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 increase speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW BIR 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Note1 The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1 Sel 11 03 MotPot respectively Ref2Sel 11 06 MotPot Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed ACW Di Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 244 Sign
230. S IOB 3 detected see IO BoardConfig 98 15 SDCS IOB 3 not existing or faulty SDCS COM 8 detected see CommMoadule 98 02 and group 70 SDCS COM 8 not existing or faulty RMBA xx Modbus detected see CommModule 98 02 and ModBusModule2 98 08 RMBA xx Modbus not existing or faulty SDCS MEM 8 Memory Card detected SDCS MEM 8 Memory Card not existing or faulty Type Cc Volatile Y CPU Load load of processor The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts CPU Load 4 21 shows the load of firmware and ApplLoad 4 22 shows the load of application Neither should reach 100 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile Y ApplLoad load of application The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts CPU Load 4 21 shows the load of firmware and ApplLoad 4 22 shows the load of application Neither should reach 100 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name MotTorqNom motor nominal torque Calculated nominal motor torque Note1 the value is calculated the following way M1 NomVolt 99 02 M 1NomCur 99 03 M 1BaseSpeed 99 04 MotTorqNom 4 23 c with c cons tant Int Scaling 1 1Nm Type Volatile Y ProgressSignal progress signal for auto tunings Progress signal for auto tunings used for Startup Assistants Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile Y Ta
231. S PIN 4 auxiliary voltage for integrated and external field exciter DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination set dip switch S1100 1 ON DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodeID 94 01 M1FexNode 94 08 respectively switches S800 and S801 on DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Triplevel Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light F517 517 ArmCurRipple Armature current ripple 9 02 RdyRef 1 One or several thyristors may carry no current bit 0 Check CurRippleSel 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 for too high gain of current controller M1KpArmCur 43 06 current feedback with oscilloscope 6 pulses within one cycle visible branch fuses thyristor gate cathode resistance thyristor gate connection current transformers T51 T52 429 Definition Action Fault is active when Triplevel CA 518 Motor 2 field exciter overcurrent 9 02 RdyRun 1 1 M2FexOverCur Check bit 1 M2FldOvrCurLev 49 09 parameter settings of group 49 field excitation field current controller tuning connections of field exciter insulation of cables and field winding resistance of field winding fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 519 M2FexCom Motor 2 field exciter communication loss 9 02 RdyRun
232. SDCS CON 8 firmware version conflict 9 08 always Invalid combination of SDCS CON 4 firmware and bit 8 SDCS COM 8 firmware Check Tor valid combination of SDCS CON 4 FirmwareVer 4 01 and SDCS COM 8 Com8SwVersion 4 11 firmware version according to the release notes Memory Card missing 9 08 directly after There is an application loaded in the drive The bit9 energizing of Memory Card belonging to the application is not found electronics Check H the Memory Card is properly plugged into the SDCS CON 4 X20 de energize the electronics insert the proper Memory Card and reenergize ParApplSave 16 06 in case there is no Memory Card used set ParApplSave 16 06 DisableAppl Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm Control Panel word DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 143 MemCardFail Memory Card failure Checksum failure or wrong Memory Card directly after 9 08 bit10 energizing of Check electronics Memory Card If proper ABB Memory Card is used rApplSave 16 06 2xx lt alarm name gt Disappearing system alarm o 301 APAlarm1 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9 08 always bit 11 302 APAlarm2 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program always bit 12 303 APAlarm3 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program always bit 13 Pa SS l 325 UserAlarm16 User defined fault by application program 9 09 always bi
233. SH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by Ethernet adapter If all DIP switches S1 are OFF the IP address is set according to parameters 51 04 51 07 In case at least one DIP switch is on the last byte of the IP address P address 4 51 07 is set according to the DIP switches see page 42 DCS800 parameter setting using Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Up to 4 data words The content of Input Output 1 to 4 can be configured with the RETA 01 configuration parameters Please see table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters which contains all the necessary basic settings Up to 12 data words The DCS800 supports up to 12 data words in each direction The first configuration of the RETA 01 adapter has to be done according to the table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters which contains all the necessary basic settings The additional desired data words have to be configured via the fieldbus network using Vendor Specific Drive I O Object Class 91h The adapter will automatically save the configuration The table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configu
234. ScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed Either when emergency stop is released and E StopMode 21 04 RampStop or as reaction to a fault of trip level 4 and FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name ShapeTime shape time Speed reference softening time This function is bypassed during an emergency stop Max Speed reference before ramp Speed reference after ramp no shape time Speed reference after i 1 1 i I 1 I I 1 i ramp with shape time 1 i H 1a Acceleration Shape time time Volatile N 22 07 VarSlopeRate variable slope rate Variable slope is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change It is active only with VarSlopeRate 22 07 0 The drive s internal ramp is bypassed in case variable slope is activated VarSlopeRate 22 07 defines the speed ramp time t for the speed reference change A Speed reference Senf ed t cycle time of the overriding control e g speed reference generation A speed reference change during cycle time t SpeedRef 2 02 Note1 In case the overriding control systems cycle time of the speed reference and VarSlopeRate 22 07 are equal the shape of SpeedRef3 2 02 is a strait line Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N BalRampRef balance ramp reference The output of the speed ramp
235. SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Type The data type is given with a short code 16 bit integer value 0 65536 SI 16 bit signed integer value 32768 32767 C text string ENUM Volatile Y values are NOT stored in the flash they will be lost when the drive is de energized N values are stored in the flash they will remain when the drive is de energized Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Parameters 173 This chapter explains the function and valid values or selections for all parameters They are arranged in groups by their function The following table gives an overview of all parameter groups Group Description 10 Start stop select 11 Speed reference input 12 Constant speeds 13 Analog inputs 14 Digital outputs 15 Analog outputs 16 System control inputs 19 Data storage 20 Limits 21 Start stop 22 Speed ramp 23 Speed reference 24 Speed control 25 Torque reference 26 Torque reference handling 30 Fault functions 31 Motor 1 temperature 34 DCS800 Control Panel display 40 PID control 42 Brake control 43 Current control 44 Field excitation 45 Field converter settings 47 12 pulse operation 49 Shared motion 50 Speed measurement 51 Fieldbus 52 Modbus 60 69 Application program parameters 70 DDCS control 71 Drivebus 83 Adaptive Program control 84 Adaptive Program 85 User constants 8
236. Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using User specific assembly Output instance 51 06 102 102 User specific assembly Input instance 51 07 103 103 User specific assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to 1 18 Set these values according Input I O par 9 51 25 table Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words and according to the desired numbers of data words VSA I O size 51 26 1 9 Defines the length of the User specific assembly in pairs of data words E g a parameter value of 4 means 4 word as output and 4 words as input FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by DeviceNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the DIP switches of the RDNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using User specific assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 119 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92
237. TachFineTune A Oo A A A m Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 443 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 116 Selected motor mechanical brake BrakeLongFalling The acknowledge signal for brake closed applied is missing Check M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 brake brake cabling used digital inputs and outputs group 14 A117 117 ArmCurRipple Armature current ripple One or several thyristors may carry no current Check Pf Alarmtove CurRippleSel 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 for too high gain of current controller M1KpArmCur 43 06 current feedback with oscilloscope 6 pulses within one cycle visible branch fuses thyristor gate cathode resistance thyristor gate connection current transformers T51 T52 118 Found new application on Memory Card directly after FoundNewAppl Activate application on Memory Card by means of energizing of ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl auxiliary 119 ApplDiff Application on drive and Memory Card are directly after different energizing of Activate application on Memory Card by means of auxiliary ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl 120 OverVoltProt Overvoltage protection active Overvoltage protection DCF806 is active and converter is blocked a is set to 150 single firing pulses Check OvrVoltProt 10 13 if
238. TachoTune motor 2 tacho tuning factor Internally used tacho fine tuning factor for motor 2 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Scaling 1000 Type l Volatile N M1TachoGain motor 1 tacho tuning gain Internally used tacho gain tuning for motor 1 This value should only be written to by tacho gain tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 SpdFbAssist M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 and parameter download Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N M2TachoGain motor 2 tacho tuning gain Internally used tacho gain tuning for motor 2 This value should only be written to by tacho gain tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 SpdFbAssist M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 and parameter download Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N AnybusModType last connected serial communication module Internally used memory for the last attached serial communication module This value should only be written to by the DCS800 firmware and parameter download Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 362 Signal Parameter name Receiving data sets addresses 1 Addresses for the received data transmitted from the overriding control to the drive The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index The data
239. To modify the speed reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is highlighted press the UP or DOWN button the reference changes immediately The speed reference can be modified via the DCS800 Control Panel when in local control LOC Note The START STOP buttons shaft direction DIR and reference functions are only valid in local control LOC Below the output mode the DCS800 Control Panel has Other operating modes are available through the MAIN MENU A fault mode that is triggered by faults The fault mode includes a diagnostic assistant mode An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms LOC U MAIN MENU PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS MACROS ENTER Access to the MAIN MENU and other modes To reach the MAIN MENU 1 Press EXIT as necessary to step back through the menus or lists associated with a particular mode Continue until you are back to the output mode 2 Press MENU from the output mode At this point the middle of the display is a listing of the other modes and the top right text says MAIN MENU 3 Press UP DOWN to scroll to the desired mode 4 Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted Following modes are available in the MAIN MENU 1 Parameters mode 2 Start up assistants mode 3 Macros mode currently not used 4 Changed parameters mode DCS800 panel operation 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 399 5 Fault logger mode 6 Cl
240. V P1301 10V P1302 n a oma 20mA P1302 n a P1303 5V Offset 20mA 20mA ki 100 P1303 10V Bi DWL assistant dsf It is possible to scale Al1 to Al6 and AlTacho with 3 parameters each VO configuration 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 78 the range of each Al is set by means of a jumper distinguishing between current and voltage and ConvModeAl1 13 03 to ConvModeAl6 13 27 100 of the input signal connected to an Al is scaled by means of Al1HighVal 13 01 to Al6HighVal 13 25 100 of the input signal connected to an Al is scaled by means of Al1LowVal 13 02 to Al6LowVal 13 26 Example In case the min max voltage 10 V of Al1 should equal 250 of TorgRefExt 2 24 set TorgRefA Sel 25 10 Al1 ConvModeAl1 13 03 10V Bi Al1HighVal 13 01 4000 mV Al1LowVal 13 02 4000 mV SpeedActTach 1 05 Use of Als Ref1Sel 11 03 Ref2Sel 11 06 TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 TorgRefA Sel 25 10 Input value AlTacho ay ee Val 5 01 GEN e e EE L enee a AlTacho TorqCorrect 26 15 ResCurDetectSel 30 05 M1TempSel 31 05 StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 CurSel 43 02 M2TempSel 49 35 Fixed assigned Al s The residual current detection is fixed assigned Al4 ConvMode E E Al4HighVal 13 13 Al4 13 15 ji Va Al4LowVal 13 14 to Al4 X3 11 and X3 12 The motor temp
241. Val2 data set X 13 value 2 Data set X 13 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 13 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus13Val3 data set X 13 value 3 Data set X 13 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 13 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus15Val1 data set X 15 value 1 Data set X 15 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus15Val2 data set X 15 value 2 Data set X 15 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus15Val3 data set X 15 value 3 Data set X 15 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 368 Signal Parameter name DCSLink control This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the DCSLink board SDCS DSL 4 For communication between the armature converter and the field exciters respectively 12 pulse communication only the basic communication parameters 94 01 to 94 09 have to be set For master follower and drive to drive communication the basic communication parameters have to be set The data transfer is done by means of the 4 available mailboxes 94 12 to 94 35 Parameter settings d
242. W Run UsedMCW Off2N UsedMCW Result 7 04 bit 0 7 04 bit 3 7 04 bit 1 0 D D field is turned off 1 0 1 reduced field current 1 1 1 normal field current 1 130 1 normal field current then reduced after stop 1 D 1 gt 0 field is turned off as 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Firmware description 56 motor coasts to stop and cannot turned back on again as long as Coast Stop is pending see Off2 10 08 the field current will be at the level set by means of M1FldHeatRef 44 04 while motor is stopped In both modes of operation if the E stop see E Stop 10 09 is pending the field will be turned off It cannot be turned back on again as long as the E stop is pending If the E stop is cleared while in motion the motor will be stopped according to E StopMode 21 04 and then field and drive will be turned off E stop Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 57 Field exciter mode General The standard DCS800 module can be operated as large field exciter by simply setting parameters It is either controlled by a DCS800 armature converter or can be configured as stand alone field exciter Thus the current of the converter ConvCurAct 1 16 equals the field current of the motor For these configurations an overvoltage protection DCF505 or DCF506 is mandatory Large field exciter controlled by a DCS800 armature converter
243. W Bit12 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed in ACWBiti5 max SyncCommand synchronization command for position counter encoder 1 Activation of synchronization for pulse encoder 1 and setting of the binary input signal At the synchronization event AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 SyncCommand the position counter is initialized with following values PosCountinitLo 50 08 is written into PosCountLow 3 07 and PosCountinitHi 50 09 is written into PosCountHigh 3 08 At the same time AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 SyncRdy is set to 1 The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 10 SyncDisable to 1 The synchronization event is selected by 0 NotUsed default 1 DI7 rising edge 0 gt 1 taken from DI7 2 DI7HI amp Z DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 3 DI7Hi amp Z Fwd DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward 4 DI7Hi amp Z Rev DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse 5 DI7 falling edge 1 0 taken from DI7 6 DI7LO amp Z DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zer
244. Word 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N X NotUsed det NotUsed ACW Biti Constant speeds ConstSpeed1 constant speed 1 Defines constant speed 1 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program Internally limited from 2 29 SE rpm to 2 29 seal rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N ConstSpeed2 constant speed 2 Defines constant speed 2 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program Internally limited from 2 29 E rpm to 2 29 sie rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name ConstSpeed3 constant speed 3 Defines constant speed 3 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N ConstSpeed4 constant speed 4 Define
245. X read only X X read only 0 NotUsed no communication used default 1 Fieldbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via a fieldbus adapter Rxxx connected in option slot 1 The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 1 This choice is not valid for the Modbus 2 COM 8 AC800x The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 The data set base address is selected by means of ChO DsetBaseAdor 70 24 3 COM 8 Nxxx The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 and a fieldbus adapter Nxxx The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAdadr 70 24 1 4 Modbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via the Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 1 for that set ModBusModule2 98 08 Slot1 The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAdoar 70 24 1 5 AC800xFldbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 The data set base address is selected by means of ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 An additional fieldbus adapter Rxxx connected in option slot 1 is used for monitoring purposes only This choice is not valid for the Modbus 6 AC800xModbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 The data set base add
246. ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorgSelMod 26 03 Auto and Run is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note1 In case UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 On and UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run are set to low run and on commands are taken away at the same time or nearly contemporary Off1Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 must have the same setting Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N RampStop RampStop PO Ram Sto RampStop def Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name E StopMode emergency stop mode Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 Off3N respectively E stop is set low 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the c
247. a Al1 fast Al 2 Al2 torque correction via Al2 fast Al 3 Al3 torque correction via Al3 4 Al4 torque correction via Al4 5 Al5 torque correction via AIS 6 Al6 torque correction via Al6 Note1 If TorqCorrect 26 15 AI then Al3 is connected to TorqCorr 2 14 and thus added to TorqRefUsed 2 13 Note2 Since this torque offset is added it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed StallTime stall time The time allowed for the drive to undershoot StallSpeed 30 02 and exceed StallTorq 30 03 A triggered stall protection leads to F531 MotorStalled Fau tWord2 9 02 bit 14 The stall protection is inactive if StallTime 30 01 is set to zero Int Scaling 1 1s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def m unit EA Ae min E C SitallSpeed stall speed Actual speed limit used for stall protection Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N StallTorq stall torque Actual torque limit used for stall protection Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ResCurDetectSel residual current detection selector The drive trips with F505 ResCurDetect FaultWord1 9 01 bit 4 if the earth current exceeds ResCurDetectLim 30 06 for ResCurDetectDel 30 07 0 NotUsed residual current detection is blocked default 1 Al4 The earth c
248. a are used electronics for Note max 10s The backup of the lost retain data reflects the status at the previous power up Examples for retain data are fault logger data Data 19 01 to Data4 19 04 I O options see group 98 and parameters defined by means of DCS800 ControlBuilder CoDeSys with the box RETAIN ticked The situation of invalid retain data occurs if the auxiliary voltage of the DCS800 is switched off about 2 seconds after power up while the retain data sector is being rearranged Check if the flash of the SDCS CON 4 is defective and H the auxiliary power supply has a problem setting is not possible or not compatible the parameter for max 10 s is set to default The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Check parameter setting Parameter up or download failed 9 08 after up or The checksum verification failed during up or bit2 download of Parameter compatibility 9 08 after When downloading parameter sets or during power up bit1 download of a the firmware attempts to write the parameters If the parameter set download of parameters Please try again parameters for Two or more parameter set actions were requested at max 10s the same time Please try again Adaptive Program task time not set 9 08 The task time for the Adaptive Program is not set bit 3 while the Adaptive Program is started Check that TimeLevSel 83 04 is set to 5 m
249. a second thyristor in bridge 2 is no conducting e g 3dd25 means V22 and V25 are not conducting dd dont care the numbers of this digits do not carry any information about the thyristors of the second bridge Example 36030 means V16 in bridge 1 and V23 in bridge 2 are not conducting A124 SpeedScale alarm speed scaling 40000 49999 the parameter with the speed scaling conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits F549 ParComp fault parameter compatibility conflict 50000 59999 the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits F545 AppliLoadFail ControlBuilder DCS800 application programming 64110 task not configured 64112 attempt to run an illegal copy of a program 64113 retain data invalid caused by SDCS CON 4 hardware problem 64125 5 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64126 10 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64127 20 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64128 50 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64129 100 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64130 200 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64131 500 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64132 1000 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64133 application program is using an unsupported DCS800 Drive library version Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile Y Las
250. aana 106 108 126 128 180 TorgRef3 EE 88 99 180 TorgRef4 ve crcstonesconnentysgnccteanenveequemmaseanatbaess 180 TorqRefA 88 99 102 106 108 126 128 136 280 TorqRefA A e 49 280 TorqRetA Zei 77 TONING E 280 TOMRGIER ccs incnictiounnteenmanicns 77 182 TorqgRefUsed eeeeeeeeeeeseesreeeee 52 81 181 eier e EE 285 POT el erento 88 101 281 TorgSelMod viisina 89 281 TorqUsedMaXx E 181 TorqUsedMaxSel s 77 263 TorgUsedMin ca 2ecncscccascesarstestneacecentavvaddapentes 181 TorqUsedMinSel AAA 77 263 TransparentIProfil cccceeeeees 106 108 TrmtbiecHal 1 88 92 372 TrmtRecVall 3 88 92 372 Trmtiec al 3 88 92 372 TrmtRecVal l A 88 92 372 TrmtiecHal 1 92 373 Trmmibec al 2 92 373 TrmtiecH al 3 92 373 TrmtRecVal2 A 92 373 TrmtRecVal3 1 374 THMURGGV RE 374 Trmmibec al 3 374 TrmmiecH al A 374 Trmiecald 1 375 Blau e WE 375 Trmmiecald 3 375 TrmtRecVal4 A ietegietN deg NENNEN ENEE 375 TS PDO3 1etObt 106 108 TX PDO21 1StSuUbj cece 106 108 TS PDO3 2ndGub 106 108 TX PDO21 2ndtObj 00ceeceeeeee 106 108 TX PDO21 3rdOb j 0cceceeeeeeeeee 106 108 TS PDO3 2rdGubt 106 108 TX PDO21 4thOD ecccceeeeeeeeees 106 108 TS PDOZ A0hGub 106 108 TX PDO21 Enable cceece eee 106 108 TX PDO21 EvVTiME oa 106 108 TS PDO31 Txfvpe 106 108 TypeCode 26 376 402 404 424 425 430
251. active EMF controller released field reversal active optitorque blocked 4 Fix Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal blocked optitorque active 5 EMF Opti field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal blocked optitorque active 6 Fix Rev Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal active optitorque active 7 EMF Rev Opti field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal active optitorque active Note1 The field control mode for motor 2 depends on the setting of M2RefFieldMode 45 13 Note2 It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 EMF Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N M1KpFex motor 1 p part field current controller Proportional gain of the field current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal field current M1NomFldCur 99 11 with M1KpFex 44 02 3 if the field current error is 5 of M1NomFidCur 99 11 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M1TiFex motor 1 i part field current controller Integral time of the field current controller M1TiFex 44 03 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal field current M1NomFldCur 99 11 with M1KpFex 44 02 3 if the field current error is 5 of M1NomFlidCur 99 11 On
252. adapter RDNA O1 eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeerrresserrrrrrrresssee 116 EE 116 RDNA 0T DCS A EE 116 Related documentation sisisisceacstinttndineiniscceaneeedeaintadied eee 116 Overriding control configuration s i 205 lt 4c5 cccseids cascesascecesnstacs cdessederedexsancicaxeedabontanacteenaceae 116 EDS EE 116 Mechanical and electrical mstallapon AAA 116 DFIVE COMMNQUIAION DEE 116 Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly AAA 116 Parameter setting example 2 using User specific assemblv AAA 118 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 ANd 07 119 Further intormatiO Mesin eege ele Eed 119 WIECH RTE ne 119 Ethernet IP communication with fieldbus adapter HEI AO 120 ASIN ica ec ag a oS e a gee E 120 RETA 01 DOS800 mra ea aa fied tect EE EEN an 120 Related documentation deser Eege 120 EDS TE 120 Mechanical and electrical mstallapon AAA 120 Drive COMMIQUIATION E 120 Parameter setting example using Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile 120 1B og ome data WOAS ee Eed 122 Wp to Ke Ne 122 ene E EEN 125 Modbus RTU communication with fieldbus adapter RMBA 01 cecceeeeeeereeeeeteeeees 126 GAS IVE EEN 126 RMBA 01 DEC S600 EE 126 Related documentation sage cited sek rade EEN Edel Ee 126 Mechanical and electrical mstallapon AAA 126 Drive EE HELENE EE 126 Parameter setting example seet ec cic Levee ege 126 ee When controlling ERT 126 when used for monitoring only ceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
253. afety 1 35 cos U 1 35 cos 20 14 U and VU gay 44 21 follows genMax genMax Mains _ act genMax Mains _ act U 1 35 cos 20 14 U 44 21 U genMotor Mains act Mains _ act Example With ArmAlphaMax 20 14 150 RevVoltMargin 44 21 10 and U 99 10 follows NomMainsVolt Mains_act U 1 35 cos 150 U U 1 16 U follows U Mains _ act 0 1 U L 3150 genMotor Mains _ act genMotor Mains _ act Mains _ act x genMotor 1 06 e acs Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N VoltRefExt external voltage reference External voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Note1 VoltRefExt 44 22 is only valid if EMF RefSel 44 23 VoltRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name EMF RefSel EMF reference selector EMF RefSel 44 23 selector 0 EMF Internal internally calculated EMF default 1 Ext4422 VoltRefExt 44 22 external voltage reference 2 Al1 analog input Al1 3 Al2 analog input Al2 4 AIB analog input Al3 5 AM analog input Al4 6 AIS analog input AIS 7 Al6 analog input Al6 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N EMF Internal min VoltCorr voltage correction Voltage correction in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Added to VoltRef1 3 25 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y VoltRefSlope voltage referen
254. ake place H PwrLossTrip 30 21 Immediately o the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt Fau tWord1 9 01 bit 11 H PwrLossTrip 30 21 Delayed o field acknowledge signals are ignored o the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 o single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible the controllers are frozen the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and A111 MainsLowVolt A armWord1 9 06 bit 10 is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 is generated Note1 UNetMin2 30 23 isn t monitored unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 30 22 first Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 30 22 has to be larger than UNetMin2 30 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N PowrDownTime power down time The mains voltage must recover over both limits within PowrDownTime 30 24 Otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 will be generated Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 292 Signal Parameter name min def Overview local and communication loss Device Related fault Related alarm DCS800 LocalLossCtrl 30 27 fixed to 5 s F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss Control Panel Rxxx Fieldbus ComLossCtrl 30 28
255. al Parameter name MotPotDown motor pot down With the motor pot down function the motor speed is decreased by means of the selected binary input The deceleration is limited by DecTime1 22 02 until zero speed respectively MotPotMin 11 15 is reached MotPotDown 11 14 overrides MotPotUp 11 13 0 NotUsed default 1 Dl1 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 2 DI2 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 3 DIS 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 4 D 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 5 DI5 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 6 DI6 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 7 DI7 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 8 DI8 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 9 DI9 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 11 DI 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14
256. al Input range AIS and Al6 set by parameter 10V 0Vto10V 2Vto 10 V 5 V offset 6 V offset 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Resolution 11 bits sign Scan time for AIS and Al6 10 ms connected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all Als are galvanically isolated Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Hardware setting Al and Al8 are only used for motor temperature measurement thus set 0 V to 2 V for 1 PT100 respectively 0 V to 10 V for 2 or 3 PT100 using the DIP switch for more details see RAIO 01 User s Manual Resolution 11 bits sign Scan time for Al7 and Al8 10 ms connected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all Als are galvanically isolated motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to Al7 and Al8 see section Motor protection Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery VO configuration 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 77 Configuration The value of Al1 to Al6 and AlTacho can be read from group 5 configurable default setting yes yes yes yes yes yes temperature temperature OC N OD ECH S
257. al e f 41 set SpeedCorr 23 04 0 remove On and Run via DriveWindow EMF controller Basics Manual tuning In case the motor needs to be used in the field weakening area the EMF controller has to be tuned The EMF controller needs to have a quick response Usually 2 to 3 times slower than the field current controller The tuning has to be done in the field weakening area because the EMF controller is blocked in the base speed range EMF 5 step Field weakening point EMF reference for manual tuning EMF controller DriveWindow information VW Dron 01 0X1 al a oiled E 9 mjo ei Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Manual tuning of the EMF controller connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor EMF VoltActRel 1 17 and VoltRef2 3 26 set FidCtrlMode 44 01 EMF set EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 100 set EMF CtrlNegLim 44 08 100 give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference in the field weakening area use VoltCorr 44 25 to step the EMF controller tune the EMF controller by means of KpEMF 44 09 and TIEMF 44 10 o steps size 2 5 do not hit any limits during the step and the step response o step response time 2 3 times slower than the field current controller o where to step in the field weakening area Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 42
258. al output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Volatile Y 7 06 RFE CtriWord control word resonance frequency eliminator RFECW The Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name BO FilterRelease B1 BalFilter B2 reserved to B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Value Comment 1 release the RFE filter with a static 1 0 block the RFE filter with a static 0 1 Balance the RFE filter after a parameter change Use a pulse of gt 10ms __ 0 no action Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 206 Signal Parameter name Status limit words
259. aling 1 Type l Volatile N Block100ut block 10 output The value of function block 10 output Block1Output 84 63 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block11Out block 11 output The value of function block 11 output Block1Output 84 69 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N min 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 359 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 360 Signal Parameter name min Block12Out block 12 output The value of function block 12 output Block1Output 84 75 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Block13Out block 13 output The value of function block 13 output Block1 Output 84 81 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index
260. alog tacho The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held tacho M1TachoAdjust 50 12 speed actual Internally limited to 2 29 send rpm 20000 HandHeldTacho Note1 Changes of M1TachoAdjust 50 12 are only valid during tacho fine tuning ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune During tacho fine tuning M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 is automatically forced to EMF Attention The value of M1TachoAdjust 50 12 has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and not the delta between speed reference and measured speed Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile Y M1TachoVolt1000 motor 1 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed of 1000 rpm M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V the setting is used to calculate tacho gain M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 0 V the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed feedback assistant M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 1 V the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant Note1 Use ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune or assistant DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Light ie ANA 10 1V Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name PosSyncMode position counter synchronization mode Position counter synchronization mode for pulse encoder 1 and or pulse encoder 2 depends on the setting of SyncC
261. alue the bit belonging to the This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain input must be set bit out of a packed Boolean word It is used to connect high the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word With Bit O 0000 Oh Bit 1 0001 th Bit 15 1111 Fh Int Scaling 1 Volatile N 84 09 Block1Output function block 1 output Function block 1 output can be used as an input for further function blocks Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Function BlockxType BlockxIn1 BlockxIn2 BlockxIn3 BlockxAttrib BlockxOutput BlockxOut block input 1 input 2 input 1 signal pointer 84 04 84 05 84 06 84 07 84 08 84 09 86 01 84 10 84 11 84 12 84 13 84 14 84 15 86 02 84 16 84 17 84 18 84 19 84 20 84 21 86 03 84 22 84 23 84 24 84 25 84 26 84 27 86 04 84 28 84 29 84 30 84 31 84 32 84 33 86 05 84 34 84 35 84 36 84 37 84 38 84 39 86 06 84 40 84 41 84 42 84 43 84 44 84 45 86 07 84 46 84 47 84 48 84 49 84 50 84 51 86 08 84 52 84 53 84 54 84 55 84 56 84 57 86 09 84 58 84 59 84 60 84 61 84 62 84 63 86 10 84 64 84 65 84 66 84 67 84 68 84 69 86 11 84 70 84 71 84 72 84 73 84 74 84 75 86 12 84 76 84 77 84 78 84 79 84 80 84 81 86 13 84 82 84 83 84 84 84 85 84 86 84 87 86 14 84 88 84 89 84 90 84 91 84 92 84 93 86 15 84 94 84 95 84 96 84 97 84 98 84 99 86 16
262. alue 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 1 Default setting of 801 equals MainStatWord 8 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus1Val2 data set X 1 value 2 Data set X 1 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 1 Default setting of 104 equals MotSpeed 1 04 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus1Val3 data set X 1 value 3 Data set X 1 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 1 Default setting of 209 equals TorqgRef2 2 09 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus3Val1 data set X 3 value 1 Data set X 3 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 3 Default setting of 802 equals AuxStatWord 8 02 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus3Val2 data set X 3 value 2 Data set X 3 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 3 Default setting of 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus3Val3 data set X 3 value 3 Data set X 3 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 3 Default setting of 108 equals MotTorg 1 08 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 366 Signal Parameter name 901 Default setting of 901 equals FaultWord1 9 01 92 07 DsetXplus5Val1 data set X 5 value 1 Data
263. ameter e g DsetXVal1 90 01 can be identified by means of the last 4 digits F548 FwFailure fault firmware failure 20000 29999 the read only parameter with is being written to by means of a pointer parameter e g DsetXVal1 90 01 Adaptive Program or application program can be identified by means of the last 4 digits Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Thyristor diagnosis 30000 possibly trigger pulse channels are mixed up 31xdd V1 or V11 not conducting 32xdd V2 or V12 not conducting 33xdd V3 or V13 not conducting 34xdd V4 or V14 not conducting 35xdd V5 or V15 not conducting 36xdd V6 or V16 not conducting x 0 only a single thyristor in bridge 1 is not conducting e g 320dd means V2 respectively V12 is not conducting x 1 6 additionally a second thyristor in bridge 1 is no conducting e g 325dd means V2 and V5 respectively V12 and V15 are not conducting dd dont care the numbers of this digits do not carry any information about the thyristors of the first bridge Example 36030 means V16 in bridge 1 and V23 in bridge 2 are not conducting 3dd1y V21 not conducting 3dd2y V22 not conducting 3dd3y V23 not conducting 3dd4y V24 not conducting 3dd5y V25 not conducting 3dd6y V26 not conducting y 0 only a single thyristor in bridge 2 is not conducting e g 3dd0020 means V22 is not conducting y 1 6 additionally
264. and encoder 2 Note2 Formula to calculate the maximum speed using an encoder E 300kHz 60s Ppr with ppr pulses per revolution see M1EncPulseNo 50 04 Note3 Formula to calculate the minimum speed resolution using an encoder 60s N nin rpm k ppr t cycle with k speed evaluation factor see M1EncMeasMode 50 02 ppr pulses per revolution see M1EncPulseNo 50 04 ta cycle time of the speed controller either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms cycle Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N SpeedFiltTime actual speed filter time Speed actual filter time for MotSpeed 1 04 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f pulse encoder 341 Signal Parameter name cx EO E a 5 Uu 50 07 PosCountMode position counter mode a so Ju The position counter is based on the pulse count of pulse encoder 1 and or pulse encoder 2 with E all pulse edges are counted The 32 bit position value is divided into two 16 bit words for each hy D OI 5 ai 0 PulseEdges 1 Scaled 2 Rollover for the low words PosCountLow 3 07 PosCount2Low 3 04 PosCountlInitLo 50 08 and PosCouni2InitLo 50 21 is valid 1 1 pulse edge for the high words PosCountHigh 3 08 PosCount2High 3 05 PosCountlInitHi 50 09 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is valid 1 65536 pulse edges for the low words PosCountLow 3 07 PosCount2Low 3 04 PosCoun
265. aptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI C Volatile N String2 string 2 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N String3 string 3 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N String4 string 4 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N String5 string 5 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N Adaptive Program outputs Block1 Out block 1 output The value of function block 1 output Block1 Outpu
266. are For that purpose there are two possibilities The output e g 84 09 can be selected for further functions The signal output is available with the write pointer e g 86 01 This parameter is to be set with the destination parameter which needs the output value of this function block Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 142 Using of Block Parameter Set 1 Block Parameter Set 1 ABS Select Type XOR Act Signal Parameter table 1 01 1 02 99 99 84 07 Set Attribute HEX 84 08 pointer 0 Bit Ne nput To use an input as a constant value the bit belonging to the input must be set high VY input 3 input 2 Input 3 2 1 bitsel bit sel bit sel This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word It is used to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word With Bit 0 0000 Oh Bit 1 0001 1h Add to speed reference a constant value and an external additional reference value 1 Set 84 04 2 selection of ADD function Set 84 05 xx xx selection of speed reference for Input 1 Set 84 06 xx xx selection of external ref Alx for Input 2 Set 84 08 4000h b
267. armWord1 9 06 bit 15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def E C min max All speed references have to be routed via the speed ramp With brake control On M1BrakeCtrl 42 01 and RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 bit 2 1 the torque proving is done if selected Afterwards the torque reference is set to StrtTorqRef 42 08 and the brake open lift command is given The brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 is send delayed by M1BrakeLiftDly 42 11 to the brake Then M1BrakeLiftDly 42 11 and M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 are started at the same time During M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 the speed ramp is clamped to zero and the torque reference equals StrtTorqRef 42 08 After MiBrakeRefDly 42 03 is elapsed and the brake acknowledge if selected with M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 is active clamp of speed reference is removed This function compensates for the mechanical open lift delay of the brake With Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 0 and motor speed below M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 M1ZeroSpeeaDly 42 04 starts to compensate for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 to actual speed 0 Until M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 is elapsed the brake is kept open lifted After M1ZeroSpeeaDly 42 04 is elapsed the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 is removed and the brake close apply delay MiBrakeStopDe
268. at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 531 MotorStalled 533 12PRevTime 534 12PCurDiff F535 535 12PulseCom Triplevel Definition Action Fault is active when Selected motor motor stalled 9 02 RdyRef The motor torque exceeded StallTorq 30 03 for a bit 14 time longer than StallTime 30 01 while the speed feedback was below StallSpeed 30 02 Check motor stalled mechanical couplings of the motor proper conditions of load correct field current parameter settings of group 20 limits current and torque limits Selected motor motor overspeed 9 02 always Check bit 15 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 parameter settings of group 24 speed control speed controller scaling of speed controller loop SpeedScaleAct 2 29 drive speed MotSpeed 1 04 vs measured motor speed hand held tacho field current too low speed feedback encoder tacho connection of speed feedback if the motor was accelerated by the load in case of EMF control if the DC voltage measurement C1 D1 might be swapped or if the armature circuit is open e g DC fuses DC breaker 1 3 12 pulse reversal timeout 9 03 RdyRef 1 3 Current direction not changed before 12P RevTimeOut bit 0 47 05 is elapsed Check Tor high inductive motor too high motor voltage compared to ma
269. atile Y Al6 Val analog input 6 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 6 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and DIP switch settings Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule 98 06 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AO1 Val analog output 1 value Measured actual voltage at analog output 1 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AO2 Val analog output 2 value Measured actual voltage at analog output 2 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 195 Signal Parameter name Drive logic signals SystemTime converter system time Shows the time of the converter in minutes The system time can be either set by means of SetSystemTime 16 11 or via the DCS800 Control Panel Int Scaling 1 1min Type Volatile Y CurCtrlStat1 1 current controller status 17 current controller status word Bit Value Comment BO command FansOn 0 command FansOff B1 motor heating function active motor heating function not active field direction reverse field direction forward command to switch excitation on FieldOn command to switch excitation off FieldOff dynamic braking active dynamic braking not active command to close main contactor MainContactorOn command to open main contactor MainContactorOff command to close contactor for dynamic braking resistor DynamicB
270. ation related voltage drops The compensation depends on the uk short circuit voltage of the mains CompUKkPLL 97 12 defines the mains short circuit voltage in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 which is caused by the converter s nominal current for the PLL correction CompUkPLL uk Se x 100 S with uk related mains short circuit voltage S apparent power of converter and S apparent power of transformer Commissioning hint CompUKkPLL 97 12 is used to compensate for the phase shift of the mains due to commutation notches in case the mains are measured on the secondary side of the dedicated transformer The whole situation leads to unstable armature current during high motor loads Increase CompUkPLL 97 12 slowly 1 by 1 until the armature current becomes stable Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N is blocked in case the limit is reached see CurCtrlStat2 6 04 bit 13 1 for 50 Hz mains is valid 360 20ms 31250 zg for 60 Hz mains is valid 360 16 67ms 97 13 DevLimPLL phase locked loop deviation limit Maximum allowed deviation of the mains cycle time between two measurements The drive trips with F514 MainsNotSynce FaultWord1 9 01 bit 13 if the limit is overshot The current controller Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N 97 14 KpPLL phase locked loop p part Gain of firing unit s phase lock loop Int Scaling 100 Type Volatile N 97 15 TfPLL phase
271. atist eege dei 363 Dsetvpluspval 126 128 363 Deets plus Val 366 DsetXplus7Val2 ege Wee diecedudeatauns iver 366 Desetxplus Val 126 128 366 DsetXplusB Vall sic ccc aeeteeweania 363 Deetsgplusepv al 363 DSCIXDIUSBV E 363 DsetXplus9Val i r 366 DsetXplus9Val2 i 366 DsetXplusOVal3 AA 366 DsetXVal1 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 362 DsetXVal2 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 362 DsetXVal3 eee 108 126 128 137 362 OV EE 181 DvnfrakeAck 70 237 440 DynBrakeDly 5 ice icteric tease eut 343 EE e paie 70 89 231 440 E StopDecMaXx EE 265 E StopDecMin ii ccetonesstecniavectasieciertes 265 et 265 E StopRamp EE 268 Elle eegene eege 353 EdtCMd eieiei 353 402 449 EMF ActFiltTime ccc ccc cecnnaremtiersers 382 EMF Cirlheol Im 41 44 314 EMF Ciibosl im 41 44 314 EMF FbMonLev 288 417 430 436 444 EMF Eiter Ae eege ee 318 EMF VoltActRel on ct Serge S ng 33 41 Ene2McasM od EE 344 ue TEE E 344 Encoder2Module n oonnnnennnnenennnnnne 383 426 Ext IO Status ccratinscssoctetideecalasdieve douse 192 426 Exvt larmmCnGel 295 444 Evi larmzel 70 295 444 ExtFaultOnSel ccccccccccesseseeeeeeees 295 430 ExtFaultSel a an 70 294 408 430 FANDIY hisss titi 49 266 421 431 440 FaAultedPar reenviar atanan 354 449 FauhtztopMode 294 404 421 FaultWord ccceeeececeeesseeeeeeeseeeees 212 419 FaultiWord 213 419 FaultWord cccccceee
272. be done by means of ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 30 17 SpeedFbFitSel speed feedback fault selector SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 determines the reaction to a speed feedback problem 0 NotUsed 1 Fault 2 EMF Fault 3 EMF Alarm 4 Enc Alarm Int Scaling 1 Signal Parameter name max no reaction the drive trips according to SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 default NotUsed Enc Alarm Immediate Immediate fault fault Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed The speed feedback is switched to EMF the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 11 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 In case speed actual is greater than base speed the drive trips according to SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 Change from encoder tacho to EMF control Immediate and reacts according to fault EMF Fault Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed The speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFb AlarmWora2 9 07 bit 8 is set In case speed actual is greater than base speed the drive trips according to SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 Change from encoder tacho to EMF control Immediate and reacts according to fault EMF Alarm Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed This selection is on
273. bit integer value 15 bit sign Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 159 Event Type Display function Illustration Operation IN1 triggers the event IN2 selects the number of the fault alarm or notice IN3 is the event delay in ms IN1 Activation input boolean 0 gt 1 activate block 0 block deactivated IN2 Selection of the message to be displayed There exists 15 different messages which are selected by using numbers The default message is shown in the brackets It can be changed by means of string parameters Alarms Faults Notices String parameters 301 APAlarm1 601 APFault1 801 1 String 85 11 302 APAlarm2 602 APFault2 DO String2 85 12 303 APAlarm3 603 APFault3 803 rarest String3 85 13 304 APAlarm4 604 APFault4 804 aoaaa String4 85 14 305 APAlarm5 605 APFault5 805 Leeds String5 85 15 IN3 delay in ms Connections Input IN1 Boolean value Input IN2 Text of alarm fault or notice Must be defined via string parameter 85 11 85 15 and connected to IN2 Input IN3 16 bit integer values Filter Type Arithmetic function Illustration IN1 IN2 OUT Operation OUT is the filtered value of IN1 IN2 is the filtering time in ms Connections OUT IN1 1 e Note The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors Input IN1 16 bit integer val
274. c Volatile Y MacroSel selected macro Currently selected macro None default Factory factory default parameter set User1 User1 parameter set User2 User2 parameter set Standard standard parameter set Man Const manual constant speed Hand Auto hand manual automatic Hand MotPot hand manual motor potentiometer reserved reserved MotPot motor potentiometer TorqCtrl torque control TorqLimit torque limit DemoStandard demo standard 2WreDCcontUS 2 wire with US style DC breaker 3WreDCcontUS 3 wire with US style DC breaker 3WreStandard 3 wire standard See ApplMacro 99 08 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile Y RFE StatWord status word resonance frequency eliminator Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word Bit Name Value Comment BO FiltParCalcAct internal parameters are being calculated filter algorithm is skipped no action B1 ParUdpReq parameter update request after parameter change no action FiltReleased RFE filter is released RFE filter is blocked ParChange parameter have changed no action B4 reserved to B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 212 FaultWord1 fault word 1 Fault word 1 Bit BO B1 Fault text AuxUnderVolt ArmOverCur ArmOverVolt ConvOverTemp ResCurDetect M10verTemp M1OverLoad l OBoardLoss M2OverTemp M2OverLoad ConvFanCur MainsLowVolt MainsOvrVolt MainsNotSync M1FexOverCur
275. caling 100 1A Type l Volatile N M2FidHeatRef motor 2 field heating reference Field current reference in percent of M2NomFieldCur 49 05 for field heating and field reducing Field heating Field heating is released according to FldHeatSel 21 18 Field reducing Field reducing is only available when 2 motors with 2 independent field exciters are connected to the drive Field reducing for motor 1 is released by means of M2FIdHeatRef 49 06 lt 100 and activated if Run 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 for longer than 10 s and the other motor is selected via ParChange 10 10 and can be seen in MotSel 8 09 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 328 Signal Parameter name 49 07 M 2UsedFexType motor 2 used field exciter type 0 NotUsed 1 OnBoard 2 FEX 425 Int 3 DCF803 0035 4 DCF803 0050 5 DCF804 0050 6 DCF803 0060 7 DCF804 0060 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 10 DCF803 0016 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 17 ExFex Al2 18 ExFex AI3 Motor 2 used field exciter type no or foreign field exciter connected integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A
276. can be forced to the value defined by BalRampRef 22 08 The function is released by setting AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 3 1 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm nternally limited from 50000 Dp 50000 Dp Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name min def AccTime2 acceleration time 2 The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 AccTime2 22 09 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N DecTime2 deceleration time 2 The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 DecTime2 22 10 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N 30 300 max Acte 2 20 Ramp2Select ramp 2 selector Select active ramp parameters 0 Acc Dec1 parameter set 1 AccTime1 22 01 and DecTime1 22 02 is active default 1 Acc Dec2 parameter set 2 AccTime2 22 09 and DecTime2 22 10 is active 2 SpeedLevel If SpeedRef3 2 02 lt SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter set is active If SpeedRef3 2 02 gt SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter set 2 is active 3 DN 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 4 DI 0
277. cation Chapter overview This chapter describes the communication capabilities of the drive DCSLink with SDCS DSL 4 General The DCSLink is a multi purpose twisted pair bus for the DCS800 All functions using the same hardware and can be used at the same time The DCSLink can be used for excitation master follower drive to drive communication and 12 pulse Excitation commissioning a FEX 4 Layout FEX 4 240 X5 X110 aw C ee La 21D o E I T110 Field Z x100 To alol o T112 T111 R106 s vg XxX Mains O lr xo ae sii Is R108 e as 24 V supply X3 DSL Link X1 1 24 V DC X3 1 GND B X1 2 OVDC X3 2 CAN L X3 3 CAN H Layout SDCS DSL 4 o C SDCS DSL Se Ta H SEET D800 S800 u730 0 U731 a amp 15 E X3 Fex4_layout_a dsf Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Set the FEX 4 type The FEX 4 can be used in 3 different applications FEX 425 Int internal field exciter of a D5 module with up to 25 A DCF803 0035 external field exciter with up to 35 A and FEX 4 Term5A internal or external field exciter with max 5 A 83 Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4
278. ce slope Voltage reference slope in percent M1NomVolt 99 02 per 1 ms The dv dt limitation is located at the input of the EMF controller Int Scaling 100 1 ms Type Volatile N FluxCorr flux correction FluxCorr 44 27 in percent of nominal flux is added to the sum of the flux reference FluxRefSum 3 28 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N MG ConfigWord MG set configuration word MG set configuration word For more information see DCS800 MG set motor control 3ADW000310 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Field converter settings M1FreewhlLev motor 1 freewheeling level Motor 1 field exciter free wheeling level only when M1UsedFexType 99 12 DCF804 0050 or DCF804 0060 in percent ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage If 2 successive AC voltage measurements differ more than M1FreewhlLev 45 01 the free wheeling function is activated Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N M1PosLimCirl motor 1 positive output limit field current controller Positive output limit for motor 1 field exciter current controller in percent of the maximum field exciter output voltage Note 4 Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M1PosLimCtrl 45 02 also as negative limit Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1FldRefMode motor 1 field current reference mode M1FidRefM
279. ception of the first valid message Note2 The time out starts when the link doesn t update the master follower data set Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Ch2 ComLossCtrl channel 2 communication loss control Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 2 F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 is set with 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped default In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorgSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the
280. choTerminal tacho terminal to be used Depending on the analog tacho output voltage e g 60 V at 1000 rpm and the maximum speed of the drive system which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 different inputs connections at the SDCS CON 4 have to be used Analog tacho inputs SDCS CON 4 90V to 270V 30V to 90V 8V to 30V TachoTerminal 4 25 shows which terminal has to be used depending on the setting of M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 and the actual maximum speed of the drive system NotUsed if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 0 V no analog tacho used or not set jet X3 3 8 30V result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V X3 2 30 90V result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V X3 1 90 120V_ result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V Auto result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 1 V after the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant Note1 TachoTerminal 4 25 is also valid for motor 2 depending on setting of ParChange 10 10 and MacroChangeMode 16 05 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y lactScaling scaling of the fixed actual current output I act Scaling of analogue output for the actual output current in Ampere per 10 V output voltage See terminals SDCS CON 4 X4 9 and SDCS IOB 3 X4 5 Note1 The scaling can also be adjusted by means of R110 when using a SDCS IOB 3 Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 D
281. cked default 1 DIl 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 2 DI2 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 3 DI3 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 4 D4 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 5 DI5 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted lifted lifted lifted lifted NotUsed NotUsed ACW Di 1 6 DI6 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 7 DI7 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 8 DI8 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 9 DIO 0 brake is closed applied 1 with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open
282. connecting device check the connection from the delivery diagrams close all protection switches one at a time and measure for proper voltage Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 26 Commissioning a DCS800 Nominal values of the converter can be found in group 4 check following signals ConvNomVolt 4 04 nominal AC converter voltage in V read from TypeCode 97 01 or S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 ConvNomCur 4 05 nominal converter DC current in A read from TypeCode 97 01 or S ConvScaleCur 97 02 ConvType 4 14 recognized converter type read from TypeCode 97 01 QuadrantType 4 15 recognized converter quadrant type read from TypeCode 97 01 or S BlockBrdg2 97 07 MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade read from TypeCode 97 01 or S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 If signals are not correct adapt them see group 97 in this manual Commissioning a DCS800 with the wizard To launch the commissioning wizard start DriveWindow Light and press the Wizard button Start the wizard in DriveWin For basic commissioning press the Start buttoh or select a specific assistant dow Light DriveWindow Light 2 Parame 7 Fleld weakening assistant 6 Autotuning speed controller File View Options Drive Toc 5 Speed feedback assistant ie E a 4 Autotuning armature current controller iz Fe re se Ss EA 3 Autotuning field current controller ime e
283. croSel 8 10 03 Autotuning field current controller 1 2 3 Open the workspace 03 DCS800 Autotuning field current controller dww Enter the field circuit data FldCtriMode 44 01 M1NomFldCur 99 11 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 FieldCurAuto and set On within 20 s Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 28 5 During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be closed the field circuit is measured by means of increasing the field current to nominal field current and the field current control parameters are set The armature current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn When the autotuning is finished successfully check M1KpFex 44 02 M1TiFex 44 03 and M1PosLimCtrl 45 02 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning 04 Autotuning armature current controller 1 2 Open the workspace 04 DCS800 Autotuning armature current controller dww Enter the basic current limitations and the motor nominal current TorqMax 20 05 TorqMin 20 06 M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 and M1NomCur 99 03 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel
284. ct AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 15 is generated For M2NomFidCur 49 05 gt S M2FidScale 45 21 the scaling is automatically set by M2NomFidCur 49 05 The scaling factor is released when M2NomFldCur 49 05 lt S M2FlidScale 45 21 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over immediately Int Scaling 100 1A Type l Volatile N M1OperModeFex4 motor 1 fex4 operation mode selector The DCF803 0035 can be connected to either a 3 phase supply or a single phase supply 0 1 phase single phase supply 1 3 phase 3 phase supply default Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M2OperModeFex4 motor 2 fex4 operation mode selector The DCF803 0035 can be connected to either a 3 phase supply or a single phase supply 0 1 phase single phase supply 1 3 phase 3 phase supply default Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N MultiFexCount Multi fex count Number of connected field exciters For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 83ADW000309 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N MultiFexOff1 Multi fex off 1 For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N MultiFexOff2 Multi fex off 2 For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N
285. cted field exciter and communication OK F519 M2FexCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 2 communication faulty F530 M2FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 13 field exciter selftest faulty F538 M2FexRdyLost FaultWord3 9 03 bit 5 field exciter not ready F542 M2FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 9 field exciter undercurrent F518 M2FexOverCur FaultWord2 9 02 bit 1 field exciter overcurrent check setting of M1UsedFexType 99 12 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 Type C Volatile Y Control words All signals in this group can be written to my means of DWL DCS800 Control Panel Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 200 Signal Parameter name MainCtrlWord main control word MCW The main control word can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name Value Comment BO On Off1N 1 Command to RdyRun state With MainContCtriMode 21 16 On Contactors are closed field exciter and fans are started With MainContCtriMode 21 16 On amp Run RdyRun flag in MainStatWord 8 01 is forced to 1 Command to Off state Stopping via OfffMode 21 02 No Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop Command to OnInhibit state Stop by coasting The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened fi
286. cted to any integer or signed integer of the drive by means of group 14 It is possible to invert the DO s by simply negate DO1Index 14 01 to DO8lIndex 14 15 In addition the DO s can be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if the corresponding DOx ndex 14 xx is set to zero see DO CtrlWord 7 05 Configurable no The DO s can only be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control see DO CtrlWord 7 05 Note DO8 is only available as relay output on the SDCS PIN 4 if no SDCS IOB 2 is used VO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 74 Source selection DO s 0 DOxindex 10 BoardConfig 98 15 DO CtrlWord SES SEA SE DO CtrlWord 7 05 l DOtIndex 14 01 default R E p Peter DO1BitNo 14 02 el FansOn DOtIndex 14 01 DO ES CES DO2Index 14 03 Ge DO2BitNo 14 04 ma FieldOn Do2Index 14 03 DO2 75 SCH DO3index 14 05 DEE DO3BitNo 14 06 gt NainGontactorOn DO3Index 14 05 DO3 ox weg i DO4index 14 07 SES DO4BitNo 14 08 d 7 EH DO4 ere SE DOSindex 14 09 Sac DOSBitNo 14 10 gt Sep el Dos SE ES DO6index 14 11 rs Doe D
287. ction In case a digital output see group 14 is assigned to one of the two signals it is updated immediately after detecting the fault and thus actively tripping the DC breaker Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 66 Position counter General The position counter is used for position measurements It can be synchronized that is preset with an initial value The counter output value and its initial value are 32 bit signed values The 32 bit position value is sent to and received as two 16 bit values Thus the low word dose not possess a sign Counting procedure The position counting is only possible when using an encoder see M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Its measurement mode is selected by means of M1EncMeasMode 50 02 and PosCountMode 50 07 Counting is increasing when the motor is rotating forward and decreasing when the motor is rotating backward A loss free algorithm is used in order to avoid an increasing error due to rounding errors Synchronization The position counter can be synchronized with an initial value This initial value is set by means of PosCountinitLo 50 08 and PosCountinitHi 50 09 At the synchronization event the position counter output PosCountLow 3 07 and PosCountHigh 3 08 is preset with the initial value and SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 is set PosCountinitLo 50 08 PosCountLow 3 07 PosCountInitHi 50 09 PosCountHigh 3 08 The synchr
288. ctive 7 01 bit 14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 01 bit 15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 02 bit 12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 02 bit 13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 02 bit 14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 02 bit 15 only available only available only available MainCtrlWord MainCtrlWord MainCtrlWord MainCtrlWord MainCtrlWord AuxCtrlWord AuxCtrlWord AuxCtrlWord AuxCtrlWord Load and speed dependent adaptation parameters are valid regardless of the selected parameter set Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal and parameter list 280 Signal Parameter name Torque reference TorqRefA torque reference A External torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 TorqRefA 25 01 can be scaled by LoadShare 25 03 Note1 TorqRefA 25 01 is only valid if TorqgRefA Sel 25 10 TorqRefA2501 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRefA FTC torque reference A filter time TorqRefA 25 01 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type SI Volatile N LoadShare load share Scaling factor TorqRefA 25 01 Int Scaling 10 1 Type SI Volatile N w ms TorqRefB torque reference B External torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4
289. d M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 TorqMax 20 05 TorqMin 20 06 M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 SpeedErrFilt 23 06 SpeedErrFilt2 23 11 SpeedFiltTime 50 06 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Attention For better results set the filters especially when using EMF speed feedback Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 SpdCtrlAuto and set On and Run within 20 s During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively current limits are valid The speed controller is tuned by means of speed bursts up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 and the speed controller parameters are set Attention During the autotuning the torque and or current limits will be reached When the autotuning is finished successfully check KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation 7 Ifthe autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning Attention The assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 If using setting Encoder Encoder2 or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly 07 Field weakening assistant 1 2 Open the workspace 07 DCS800 Field weakening assistant dww Enter the motor data and the field circuit data M1 SpeedMin
290. d and the DC breaker is controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens the DC breaker with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWora2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 64 AC breaker controlled by the drive DC breaker controlled externally AC breaker Command MainContactorOn see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 a Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 TA S DC breaker DC breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck 10 23 External DC breaker on command e g from operator AC breaker controlled by the drive DC breaker controlled externally In the above example the AC breaker is controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens the AC breaker with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck Fau tWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker is controlled externally e g by the operator The result is checked by means of DC BreakAck 10 23 In case the DC breaker acknowledge is missing A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 2 is set is forced to 150 and single firing pulses are given The DC br
291. d1 9 01 bit 10 in case of missing or excessive converter fan current after ConvTempDly 97 05 is elapsed Int Scaling 1 1s Type l Volatile N elen S y y 97 07 S BlockBridge2 set block bridge 2 97 05 ConvTempDly converter temperature delay Instead of measuring the converter temperature it is possible to measure the converter fan current by means of the PW 1002 3 board ConvTempDly 97 05 avoids false fault messages during the fan acceleration Bridge 2 can be blocked 0 Auto operation mode is taken from TypeCode 97 01 default 1 BlockBridge2 block bridge 2 2 Q operation for e g 2 Q rebuild kits 2 RelBridge2 release bridge 2 4 Q operation for e g 4 Q rebuild kits This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in QuadrantType 4 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 379 bei Signal Parameter name 97 09 MainsCompTime mains compensation time Mains voltage compensation filter time constant Is used for the mains voltage compensation at the current controller output Setting MainsCompTime 97 09 to 1000 ms disables the mains voltage compensation Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N 97 10 fined ole SSCS 97 12 CompUkPLL phase locked loop to compensate for uk The measured phase angle of the firing unit s PLL can be corrected in order to compensate the error caused by the commut
292. dBoostFact 44 18 150 then S M1FidSacle 45 20 30 A Note2 If FidBoostFact 44 18 gt 100 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A S M2FidSacle 45 21 has to be set accordingly Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N FidBoostTime field boost time Time the field boost should last Int Scaling 1 1 s Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name RevVoltMargin reversal voltage margin RevVoltMargin 44 21 in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 is a safety margin for the motor voltage during regenerative mode Setting RevVoltMargin 44 21 to 0 provides no protection against commutation faults shooting through Attention The motor is idling until a save motor voltage for regenerative mode is reached Only when field weakening e g FidCtrlMode 44 01 EMF is activated the field current is decreased for faster adapting of the motor voltage Uai o generating motoring Ugenmax Max regenerative voltage 150 Umotvax Max motoring voltage 15 RevVoltMargin 44 21 Ugenmotor regenerative motor voltage with safety margin Ugenmotor regenerative motor voltage with safety margin RevVoltMargin 44 21 Lens Max regenerative voltage 150 motoring generating Umotmae Max motoring voltage a 159 RevVoltMargin dsf For regenerative mode is valid gie U with U U gt U s
293. ddr 70 32 must be set for each drive individually before starting the communication through the connection This setting has to be made by a point to point connection using either the DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light The new node address becomes valid after the next SDCS COM 8 power up The SDCS COM 8 Ch3 has been configured to be a slave in the communication point of view With DeviceName 99 09 and DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string name with a maximum of 12 characters for individual drive identification See also Configuration Instructions NDBU 85 95 3ADW000100 Optical DDCS Communication Link 3BFE64285513 and DDCS Cabling and Branching 3AFE63988235 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 104 Ethernet communication for monitoring with Ethernet adapter NETA 01 General This chapter gives information using the Ethernet adapter NETA 01 together with the DCS800 NETA 01 DCS800 The Ethernet communication for monitoring with the drive requires the options NETA 01 and SDCS COM 8 The NETA 01 is connected to the SDCS COM 8 usually via Ch3 ChO can be used as well Following browser based remote monitoring functions are released for DC drives e Parameters Read and write parameters e Signals Read signals e Fault logger Show fault logger Clear fault logger Save faults to a file in the NETA 01 Download saved fault logger files via FTP e Data logger Select values and
294. ddress ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 8 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus8Val2 data set X 8 value 2 Data set x 8 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 8 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus8Val3 data set X 8 value 3 Data set X 8 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 8 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus10Val1 data set X 10 value 1 Data set X 10 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 10 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus10Val2 data set X 10 value 2 Data set X 10 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdoar 70 24 10 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus10Val3 data set X 10 value 3 Data set X 10 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 10 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Receiving data sets addresses 2 DsetXplus12Val1 data set X 12 value 1 Data set X 12 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 12 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus12Val2 data set X 12 value 2 Data set X 12 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 12 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus12Val3 data set X 12 value 3 Data s
295. defined alarm word All names are defined by the user via application program Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment and alarm level A310 A311 A312 BO UserAlarm1 B1 UserAlarm2 UserAlarm3 UserAlarm4 UserAlarm5 UserAlarm6 UserAlarm7 UserAlarm8 UserAlarm9 UserAlarm10 B10 UserAlarm11 B11 UserAlarm12 B12 UserAlarm13 B13 UserAlarm14 B14 UserAlarm15 B15 UserAlarm16 Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y SysFaultWord system fault word Operating system faults from SDCS COM 8 board Int Scaling 1 1 Bit Fault text BO Factory macro parameter file error B1 User macro parameter file error Non Volatile operating system error File error in flash Internal time level T2 overflow 100 us Internal time level T3 overflow 1 ms Internal time level T4 overflow 50 ms Internal time level T5 overflow 1 s State overflow Application window ending overflow Application program overflow Illegal instruction Register stack overflow System stack overflow System stack underflow reserved Type Fault code F default parameters are invalid one of the User macros is invalid AMCOS fault please contact Your local ABB agent problems when writing to the flash memory please try again timeout of task T2 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task T3 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task T4 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent time
296. display or flashing LED s 543 COM8Com SDCS COM 8 communication loss overriding 9 03 RdyOn 1 control and master follower bit 10 Check CommandSel 10 01 ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 fiber optic cables to overriding control always DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodeID 94 01 545 ApplLoadFail Application load failure 9 03 always Check bit 12 Diagnosis 9 11 546 Local command loss 9 03 local LocalCmdLoss Communication fault with DCS800 Control Panel bit 13 DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light during local mode Check LocalLossCtrl 30 27 if control DCS800 Control Panel is disconnected connection adapter cables Fault tracing Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and channel 0 overriding control adapters fiber optic cables between master and followers channel 2 544 Peer to peer and master follower communication 9 03 5 P2PandMFCom _ loss bit 11 Check ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBox1 94 12 MailBox2 94 18 MailBox3 94 24 MailBox4 94 30 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination E a EES 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 435 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active a Control Panel when 3 DriveWindow and SS P DriveWindow Light
297. drive is immediately tripped with F522 SpeedFb except two pulse encoders are in use Stall protection The stall protection trips the converter with F531 MotorStalled when the motor is in apparent danger of overheating The rotor is either mechanically stalled or the load is continuously too high It is possible to adjust the supervision time speed and torque The stall protection trips the drive if 1 the actual speed is below StallSpeed 30 02 and 2 the actual torque exceeds StallTorq 30 03 3 for atime longer than programmed in StallTime 30 01 Overspeed protection Current rise The motor is protected against overspeed e g in a case when the drive is in torque control mode and the load drops unexpected The overspeed level is set by means of M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Exceeding this level causes F532 MotOverSpeed The protection against fast current rise during generating is configured by means of ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 Exceeding this level causes F539 FastCurRise If present the DC breaker is tripped and the main contactor is opened Field undercurrent The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFidCur 99 11 The minimum field current level is set by means of M1FidMinTrip 30 12 Undershooting this level causes F541 M1FexLowCur FldMinTripDly 45 18 delays F541 M1FexLowCur Tacho polarity respectively pulse encoder polarity Tacho range The polarity of the analog tacho respectively pulse encode
298. e 2 Macro assistant Z2 Macro assistant BEER 1 Nameg an a wiz select dsf LOC Se00WwRard Configuration sequence f Select specific m Drive Staus assistant amp press Next Gel EE DCS800 247 _ Woicbme to the DCS800 arsierant Remote Stopped Forward Mne 13 Analoc eS 14 Digital Basic commissioning steps done Ee zg Lg e Se Help K Stortygsic commissioning 1 10 71 ial ee E ech asvilenks asc f ee 3 ihr ed curari 2 ts A Auloluning amaie cumen conbolle 5 Spred lemdback assistant T 6 Atchreng peed roi f I 7 Bel weakering arent f f Avane f f j A A j For more information about the wizard parameters faults and alarms press the Help button Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 27 Commissioning a DCS800 with DriveWindow Requirements 1 Be C ABB DCS800 DWComp Workspaces Before starting with the commissioning connect the drive via Ch3 on SDCS COM 8 with DriveWindow via e g NDPA 02 and NDPC 12 All workspaces are online workspaces thus use Ch3 NodeAdar 70 22 1 The preconfigured workspaces are available from Your local ABB agent or can be found after the DCS800 CD tools CD is installed under 215 15 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Q sack zs kA Ki J Search 1 Folders Ga gt F X i zk Address E C
299. e Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefScale speed reference scaling Speed reference scaling After SpeedRef3 2 02 and before SpeedRef4 2 18 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Speed control The Speed controller is based on a PID algorithm and is presented as follows 1 sTD_ 100 T ES Tifis an KpS DM Nact s sTiS sTF 1 2 29 with T torque reference KpS proportional gain KpS 24 03 N speed reference N Speed actual TiS Integration time TiS 24 09 TD Derivation time DerivTime 24 12 TF Derivation filter time DerivFiltTime 24 13 T nominal motor torque 2 29 actual used speed scaling SpeedScaleAct 2 29 e 100 Tn speed reference n act speed actual DroopRate droop rate 275 The amount of speed decrease caused by the load is determined by DroopRate 24 02 The result is a load dependent speed decrease in percent of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Example With DroopRate 24 02 3 and TorqintegRef 2 05 100 nominal motor torque the actual speed decreases 3 of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal and parameter list Signal Parameter name KpS p part speed coniroller Proportional gain
300. e SI Volatile Y CO CO NO 01 AVN 2 17 SpeedRefUsed used speed reference g o Used speed reference selected with RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 172 Sample of signals All signals are read only However the overriding control can write to the control words but it only affects the RAM Min max def Minimum maximum and default values are not valid for groups 1 to 9 Unit Shows the physical unit of a signal if applicable The unit is displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel and PC tools E C By means of USI Sel 16 09 it is possible to change between compact C and extended E signal and parameter list The compact list contains only signals and parameters used for a typical commissioning Group Index Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index Integer Scaling Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to read the value of the signal properly Example1 If MotTorgq 1 08 is read from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 torque Example2 If SpeedRefUsed 2 17 is read from the overriding control 20 000 equals the speed in rom shown in
301. e input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO71 15 06 to ScaleAO4 15 20 Ifthe range is set to unipolar signals without offset only 100 of the input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO71 15 06 to ScaleAO4 15 20 The smallest value is always zero Itis possible to invert the AO s by simply negate IndexAO1 15 01 to IndexAO4 15 16 Example In case the min max voltage 10 V of AO1 should equal 250 of TorqRefUsed 2 13 set IndexAO1 15 01 213 ConvModeAO 15 03 10V Bi ScaleAO1 15 05 4000 mV Source selection AO s Inversion of AO s 0 COMP m IndexAOx SE ER CtrlWordAOx EE op JO BoardContig 98 15 Source Default Scaling Output value SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 IndexAO1 15 01 ConvModeAO1 15 AO X4 7 X41 Gavan ee gt I ScaleAO1 m 9 indexaOt 15 01 AOT Val 6 11 X4 10 X4 2 IndexAO 06 ConvModeAO AO2 X4 8 X4 3 eege 18 07 We ScaleAO2 Al P eeng 15 06 AO2 Val 5 12 X40 X4 4 fixed AO X4 9 X4 5 Hardware 4 X4 10 X4 6 1 RAIO 01 AIO ExtModule IndexAO i CR ConvModeAO AO3 98 06 Bee eer L w SealeA03 P IndexAOs 15 11 Se ConvModeAO4 15 18 AO4 MOLE S me O SealeA04 SE TL maexaos is SE 2 RAIO 01 AIO MotTempMeas M1 TempSel 31 05 AOS X2 1 98 12 M2TempSel 49 35 X2 2 M1 TempSel 31 05 AO6 X2 3 M2TempSel 49 35 X2 4 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f VO configuration 82 Communi
302. e Le BEE 106 108 PIDSAC BEE 300 PID ACt2 oie ten se seer ere a a ea east 300 PID MUX EE 301 RIESCH ageseent 184 PID Outeset cc ceeeccececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenes 302 PID OUIMAX EE 301 PID OUtMiIN or aerieni aaa aa 301 PID Heft eeh 301 PID Ref1 Max ccccecceccceeseeeeesseteeeeneneees 300 PID RHettMt deent eege eens 300 PID He eeneg a Aere 301 PID Ref2MaX ieee arpei iien 300 PID Ref2Min eosoeeeesneeesrrrrrrrreeeerrrrrrrreeee 300 PID Reserved hooo REENEN 302 DlDHesei ho 302 PID RESGtINdOX g gsge dee bessie deis der 302 PLL OUb ee eee eel eee 185 406 428 PoleDampRF E 278 POISE OGRE Ennion Susteren ee 278 POSCOUNT2HIQN si set ENEE tien 183 PDosCount lnntit 344 PosCount lnttl o 344 POSCOUNt2LOW cccceceeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeees 183 POSCOUNTFIQM sicdicitccacentieiizaccaonets 66 184 PosCountlnmtit 66 343 PosCountlnt o 66 342 POSCOUNtLOW cceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 66 184 PosCountMode sesessesneeeerrrrrrereerernne 66 341 PoszvnchMode AAA 66 344 ROUT derenan aa a aa 394 POU oean a a a ai ioi 394 Powrt own Time 291 405 PPO DE a a a EE 134 ProcSpegd EE 179 ProgressSignal stecedtce tetas delve besmatet theres 193 PrOPFO Sel src sSestatcusutiatehetersenuhvacnteatianticects 309 PDrotocol ae Ain 120 131 PwrLossTrip s s s 290 405 427 441 a ee UE E EE 312 PZD TO IN eebe ee 135 PZDAO OW NEE 135 GEAR IC EE 135 AER QOU EE 135 Quadrant Type wissen 26 189 Ramp2Select AAA 70 27
303. e basic speed limitations the speed filter time and follow the instructions of the assistant During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively current limits are valid The speed controller is tuned by means of speed bursts up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 and the speed controller parameters are set Attention During the autotuning the torque limits will be reached When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help DCS800 panel operation 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 401 Attention This assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 If using setting Encoder Encoder2 or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly 7 Field weakening Enter the motor data the field circuit data and follow the instructions of assistant the assistant only used when maximum During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if speed is higher than base existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 The EMF controller data are calculated the flux linearization is tuned by means of a constant speed while decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux linearization paramete
304. e group 90 can also be read The following table shows the parameter settings Drive parameters Settings Comments CommMoadule 98 02 FldBusModbus FidBusModbus means controlling the drive by means of another Rxxx fieldbus adapter see description of CommMoadule 98 02 ModBusModule2 98 08 Slot2 or depends on the location of the Slot3 adapter StationNumber 52 01 1 247 desired station number BaudRate 52 02 5 5 9600 Baud Parity 52 03 4 4 Even DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 17 data word from overriding control to drive 40001 gt data word 1 1 DsetxXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive 40002 gt data word 1 2 DsetXVal3 90 03 2501 default TorgRefA 25 01 output data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from overriding control to drive 40003 gt data word 1 3 up to DsetXplus6Val3 90 12 O default not connected output data word 12 not connected 12 data word from overriding control to drive 40021 lt data word 7 3 DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control 40004 lt data word 2 1 DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04
305. e instructions of the assistant During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed the armature circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the armature current control parameters are set The field current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn but due to remanence in the field circuit about 40 of all motors will turn create torque These motors have to be locked When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help Speed feedback assistant Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters if applicable the parameters for the pulse encoder respectively the analog tacho and follow the instructions of the assistant The speed feedback assistant detects the kind of speed feedback the drive is using and provides help to set up pulse encoders or analog tachometers During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 During the whole procedure the drive will be in EMF speed control despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 When the assistant is finished successfully the speed feedback is set If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help Autotuning speed controller Enter the motor base speed th
306. e interface selection DIO ExtModule2 98 04 releases DI12 DI13 DI14 DO11 and DO12 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 3 see switch S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no second RDIO xx is used default 1 Slot second RDIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 second RDIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 second RDIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA second RDIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 3 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RDIO extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Note1 For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO xx by means of dip switch S2 Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected Note2 The digital inputs are available via DI StatWord 8 05 The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord 7 05 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery 2 RDIO Switch S1 ADDRESS Sees n N NotUsed min NotUsed def Filtering ENABLED DISABLED D sy oS Srel S1 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0
307. e is stopped The aux control bits B11 to B15 are not affected aux control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters aux control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters aux control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters aux control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters aux control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 202 Signal Parameter name 7 02 AuxCtriWord auxiliary control word 1 ACW1 The auxiliary control word 1 can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit BO B1 B2 Note1 Name RestartDataLog TrigDataLog RampBypass BalRampOut LimSpeedRef4 DynBrakingOn HoldSpeedCtrl WindowCtrl BalSpeedCirl SyncCommand SyncDisable ResetSyncRdy aux control aux control aux control aux control Value 1 0 1 0 1 Comment restart data logger no action trigger data logger see note 1 no action bypass speed ramp
308. e reference when in local from DCS800 Control Panel Middle Using parameter Group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display up to three parameter values By default the display shows three signals Use DispParam1Sel 34 01 DispParam2Sel 34 08 and DispParam3Sel 34 15 to select signals or parameters to display Entering value 0 results in no value displayed For example if 34 01 0 and 34 15 0 then only the signal or parameter specified by 34 08 appears on the DCS800 Control Panel display Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys Lower middle displays the current time if configured to do so Operating the Drive LOC REM Each time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and is controlled as specified in CommandSel 10 01 To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the DCS800 Control Panel press the button DCS800 panel operation 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 398 Other modes When switching from local control LOC to remote control REM the drive s status e g On Run and the speed reference of the remote control are taken p To switch back to remote control REM press the LS button Start Stop To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons Shaft direction To change the shaft direction press DIR Speed reference
309. e speed actual e g 5 ms 10 ms see SpeedFiltTime 50 06 Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 40 undercompensated p part too small and i part too short undercompensated p part too small normal normal when a low impact speed drop is required overcompensated p part too large and i part too short moO Speed controller step responses DriveWindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0H1 FE la Lal File Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help alex alc 216 Kele bl Amn ral tiaj x GW ocs 800 D1 041 E IA Application amp Control 1 01 04 MotSpeed rpm O 1 Par 1 4 D Datalogger 2 02 18 SpeedRef4 rpm dEr A event logger 0H1 Par 23 4 D I Faut logger 0H1 Par 23 6 0H1 Par 23 11 Memory 0H1 Par 24 3 ers 0H1 Par 24 9 0H1 Par 50 6 Monitor Normal 405 Interval ms 10 Store Buffer s 3600 000 Kx Axis Length s 15 000 T Y Axis Maximum 40 00 Y Axis Minimum 30 00 1 01 04 MotSpeed rpm 0 00 1500 00 2 02 18 SpeedRef4 rpm 0 00 1500 00 3 Channel3 0 00 100 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 D channelS 0 00 100 00 6 Channel6 0 00 100 00 324 30 d 2 23 5 23 8 23 11 23 14 23 17 23 Time s e swoon 2 2 es d E 0E el a HB DCS 800 D1 0H1 ee DriveWindow manual tuning speed controller Start up 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manu
310. e time defined by GearTorqTime 26 09 Torque GearTorqRamp 26 08 GearStartTorq 26 08 GearTorqTime 26 09 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N GearTorqTime gearbox torque time Gear backlash compensation When the torque is changing it s direction the torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorgTime 26 09 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N GearTorqRamp gearbox torque ramp Gear backlash compensation When the torque is changing it s direction the torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorgTime 26 09 After the time has elapsed the torque limit is increased to it s normal value according to the ramp time defined by GearTorqRamp 26 10 GearTorqRamp 26 10 defines the time within the torque increases from zero to MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name TorqScale torque scaling Scaling of TorqRefUsed 2 13 and MotTorg 1 08 TorqScale 26 13 TorqRefUsed FluxRefFldvWeak TorqScale E MotTorq MotTorgFilt TorgActFiltTime internal scaling 10000 mot nom 3 25 X mot nom Armature current measurement ConvCurActRel MotCur ma Volatile Y TorqCorrect torque correction Torque correction value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 0 NotUsed no torque correction used default 1 Al1 torque correction vi
311. eTemp 4 17 Check converter door open converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter fan components converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 if TypeCode 97 01 None and S MaxBridgeTemp 97 04 is set properly 505 ResCurDetect Residual current detection sum of l lz 9 01 always 1 bit 4 Check ResCurDetectSel 30 05 ResCurDetectLim 30 06 ResCurDetectDel 30 07 sum current transformer if necessary change transformer or SDCS IOB 3 disconnect the mains verify safe isolation from supply in armature and field circuits and make insulation tests for the complete installation Triplevel N 506 M1OverTemp Motor 1 measured overtemperature 9 01 always 2 Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will bit 5 continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 M1KlixonSel 31 08 M1AlarmLimTemp 31 08 motor temperature motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB
312. eactivated ResCurDetectDel 30 07 delays F505 ResCurDetect Measured motor temperature General The temperatures of motor 1 and motor 2 parameter for motor 2 see group 49 can be measured at the same time Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 and M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 If the levels are exceeded A106 M1OverTemp respectively F506 M1OverTemp is set The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down to alarm limit The measurement is configured by means of M1TempSel 31 05 and the measured temperature is shown in Mot TempMeas 1 22 The unit of the measurement depends on the selected measurement mode For PT100 the unit is degree Celsius and for PTC the unit is Q The temperature measurements uses either Al2 and Al3 of the SDCS IOB 3 or Al7 and Al8 of the RAIO for motor temperature measurement Additionally the SDCS IOB 3 features a selectable constant current source for PT100 5 mA or PTC 1 5 mA Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 411 Measurement selection Connection possibilities for PT100 max 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max 3 PT100 for motor 2 or upto 6 PT100 for a single motor SDCS IOB 3 Al2 motor 1 and Al3 motor 2 are used for the temperature measurement with PT100 In case only one PT100 is connected to an Al the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10 Jumper settings for input range and constant curren
313. eaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 65 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled externally Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 External DC breaker on command e g from operator DC breaker No AC breaker DC breaker controlled externally In the above example no AC breaker is used and the DC breaker is controlled externally e g by the operator The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Command Trip DC breaker CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 9 Command Trip DC breaker 6 03 bit 14 F512 MainsLowVolt 9 01 bit 11 Command Trip DC breaker 6 03 bit 15 F502 ArmOverCur 9 01 bit 1 F539 FastCurRise 9 03 bit 6 dcs _600docutfig_28 dsf Command Trip DC breaker The firmware sets the command Trip DC breaker continuous signal CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 14 and command Trip DC breaker 4 s pulse signal CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 15 by means of F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 in regenerative mode F502 ArmOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 1 or F539 FastCurRise FaultWord3 9 03 bit 6 see chapter Motor prote
314. ean Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 158 Count Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetic function The counter counts rising edges of IN1 The counter is reset by the rising edges of IN2 and limited to the value set with IN3 Input IN1 Trigger counter input 0 gt 1 edge Input IN2 Reset input high active Input IN3 Limit gt 0 the output value increases to the set limit lt 0 the output value increases up to the absolute maximum value 32768 When the maximum value is reached the output will be set to O and the counter starts counting from zero Output OUT The output shows the counted value Input IN1 IN2 Boolean values Input IN3 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign Output OUT 15 bit integer value D Pot Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetic function Increase OUT with IN1 and decrease OUT with IN2 The absolute value of IN3 is the ramp time in ms which is needed to increase from 0 to 32767 at OUT With positive IN3 the output range is between 0 and 32767 with negative IN3 the output range is between 32767 and 32767 If both IN1 and IN2 are active IN2 ramp down will overwrites IN1 Input IN1 Ramp up bool Input IN2 Ramp down bool Input IN3 ramp time in ms related to 20 000 Output OUT 15 1 bit value Input IN1 and IN2 Boolean values Input IN3 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign Output OUT 16
315. easured by means of an analog tacho 3 External MotSpeed 1 04 is updated by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control 4 Encoder2 speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 2 connected to a RTAC xx see Encoder2Module 98 01 Note1 It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M2SpeeFbSel 49 24 EMF Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N M2EncPulseNo motor 2 encoder 1 pulse number Amount of pulses per revolution ppr for pulse encoder 1 Int Scaling 1 1 ppr Type l Volatile N M2TachoAdjust motor 2 tacho adjust Fine tuning of analog tacho The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held tacho M2TachoAdjust 49 26 speed actual 32767 Internally limited to 2 29 nternally limited to 50000 TT HandHeldTacho Note1 Changes of M2TachoAdjust 49 26 are only valid during tacho fine tuning ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune During tacho fine tuning M2SpeedFbSel 49 24 is automatically forced to EMF Attention The value of M2TachoAdjust 49 26 has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and not the delta between speed reference and measured speed Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile Y M2TachoVolt1000 motor 2 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed of 1000 rpm M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 2 1 V the setting is used to calculate tacho gain M2TachoVolt1000 49 2
316. ecause Input 3 constant gt Bit 14 1 gt 4000h 3 4 Set 84 07 1500 constant value for Input 3 5 6 Read pointer of MF channel group 70 AP FB group 84 __ Dataset table group 92 DCS Link Mailbox group 94 Act Signal Parameter table 7 01 7 02 99 99 84 09 xxxx contains the computed value can be read from system s parts e g Master Follower channel other Block Parameter Set Inputs 7 Set 86 01 xx xx write computed value to destination for further processing Adaptive Program 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 143 How to control the execution of the program The Adaptive Program executes the function blocks in numerical order all blocks on the same time level This cannot be changed by the user The user can e select the operation mode of the program stop start editing single cycling single stepping e adjust the execution time level of the program e delete or add blocks e the execution order is given by the block number 1 16 Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 144 DWL AP General Another way to create applications is with DWL AP It is a program integrated in DriveWindow Light and can be opened with Tools and DriveAP for DCS800 Drive Window Light 2 DCS800 Using COM1 File View Options Drive Tools Communication Window Help a ag se E Online Offline Gob
317. eceived the field contactor is closed respectively the field converter is started and the firmware waits for the field acknowledge Finally the main contactor is closed and its acknowledge is waited for If the acknowledges are not received during 10 seconds after the On command MCW bit 0 is given the corresponding fault is generated These are 1 F521 FieldAck see Mot1FexStatus 6 12 2 F523 ExtFanAck see MotFanAck 10 06 3 F524 MainContAck see MainContAck 10 21 4 F523 ConvFanAck see ConvFanAck 10 20 Note F521 FieldAck is the sum fault for all field related faults like F515 M1FexOverCur see M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 F516 M1FexCom see FexTimeOut 94 07 F529 M1FexNotOK fault during self diagnosis F537 M1FexRdyLost AC voltage is missing or not in synchronism F541 MiFexLowCur see M1FldMinTrip 30 12 Je OMD Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 408 External fault The user has the possibility to connect external faults to the drive The source can be connected to Die MainCtrlWord 7 01 or AuxCtrlWord 7 02 and is selectable by ExtFaultSel 30 31 External faults generate F526 ExternalDl ExtFaultOnSel 30 33 selects the reaction 1 external fault is always valid independent from drive state 2 external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun MSW bit 1 for at least 6 s Note In case inverted fault inputs are needed it is possible to invert the Die Bridge reversal
318. ecessary to control and program the drive Study carefully the Safety instructions at the beginning of this manual before attempting any work on or with the drive Read through this manual before starting up the drive The installation and commissioning instructions given in the DCS800 Hardware Manual and DCS800 Quick Guide must also be read before proceeding This manual describes the standard DCS800 firmware What this manual contains The Safety instructions can be found at the beginning of this manual Introduction to this manual the chapter you are currently reading introduces you to this manual Start up this chapter describes the basic start up procedure of the drive Firmware description this chapter describes how to control the drive with standard firmware I O configuration this chapter describes the I O configuration of digital and analog inputs and outputs with different hardware possibilities Communication this chapter describes the communication capabilities of the drive Adaptive Program AP this chapter describes the basics of the Adaptive Program and instructs how to build a program Signal and parameter list this chapter contains all signals and parameters DCS800 Control Panel operation this chapter describes the handling of the DCS800 Control Panel Fault Tracing this chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive Appendix A Firmware structure diagram Appendix
319. ection see ConvFanAck 10 20 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name DynBrakeAck dynamic braking acknowledge The drive sets A105 DynBrakeAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 4 if a digital input for dynamic braking is selected and the acknowledge dynamic braking active is still present when On UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 is set Selection see ConvFanAck 10 20 A105 DynBrakeAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 4 should prevent the drive to be started while dynamic braking is active Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N DC BreakAck DC breaker acknowledge The drive sets A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 2 if a digital input for the DC breaker is selected and the acknowledge is missing Selection see ConvFanAck 10 20 The motor will coast if A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 2 is set Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed min NotUsed det Di Ipnvert invert digital input 1 Inversion selection for digital input 1 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Direct NotUsed_ Direct Ss NotUsed DI2Invert invert digital input 2 Inversion selection for digital input 2 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile 10 27 Di3Invert invert digital input 3 Inversion selection for digital input 3 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Dli4Invert
320. ectly taken from hardware Additional functions the gain of the fixed AO I act can be adjusted by means of R110 on the SDCS IOB 3 Output range AO3 and AO4 set by parameter OmA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Resolution 12bits Cycle time for AO3 and AO4 5 ms connected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all AO s are galvanically isolated Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery VO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 80 2 RAIO 01 Configuration Hardware settings AQ5 and AO6 are only used for motor temperature measurement no additional setting needed for more details see RAIO 01 User s Manual Resolution 12 bits Cycle time for AO5 and AO6 5msconnected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all AO s are galvanically isolated motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AO5 and AO6 see section Motor protection Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery The value of AO1 and AO2 can be read from group 5 AO configurable default setting 1 yes 2 yes 3 yes 4 yes 5 temperature 6 C temperature
321. ed reserved Hardware parameter flash faulty erase parameter flash faulty program check connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 and connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 reserved Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 222 Signal Parameter name A132 ParConflict alarm parameter setting conflict reserved flux linearization parameters not consistent reserved armature data not consistent Check if M1NomCur 99 03 is set to zero M1NomVolt 99 02 and M1NomCur 99 03 are fitting with the drive In case they are much smaller than the drive the internal calculation of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 can cause an internal overflow Set M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 to zero reserved Encoder 1 parameters for motor 1 not consistent Check SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1EncMeasMode 50 02 M1EncPulseNo 50 04 At scaling speed see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula ok bg zk ip f gt 600Hz ppr speed scaling S f gt 600Hz 50 04 50 02 2 29 E 60s E g the speed scaling must be 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A B evaluation Encoder 1 parameters for motor 2 not consistent Check SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M2EncMeasMode 49 23 M2EncPulseNo 49 25 At scaling speed see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula x E f 2 600 Hz
322. ed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 13 MCW Bit11 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 14 MCW Bit12 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active O switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 15 MCW Bit13 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 16 MCW Bit14_ 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 17 MCW Bit15 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active O switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 18 ACW Bit12 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 19 ACW Bit13 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 20 ACW Bit14 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 21 ACW Bit15 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N ACW Biti Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 0 SpeedRef2301 1 AuxSpeedRef 2 All1 3 Al2 4 AI3 5 Al4 6 AIS 7 Al6 8 FixedSpeed1 9 FixedSpeed2 10 MotP
323. ed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards Do not touch the boards unnecessarily Use grounding strip ABB order no 3ADV050035P0001 WARNING Handle the fiber optic cables with care When unplugging optic cables always grab the connector not the cable itself Do not touch the ends of the fibers with bare hands as the fiber is extremely sensitive to dirt The minimum allowed bend radius is 35 mm 1 38 in Mechanical installation These notes are intended for all who install the drive Handle the unit carefully to avoid damage and injury WARNING e DCS800 sizes D4 D7 The drive is heavy Do not lift it alone Do not lift the unit by the front cover Place units D4 and D5 only on its back DCS800 sizes D5 D7 The drive is heavy Lift the drive by the lifting lugs only Do not tilt the unit The unit will overturn from a tilt of about 6 degrees e Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive when installing Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or lead to malfunction e Ensure sufficient cooling e Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding Safety instructions 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate the drive Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury
324. eeceeeeeeeeeeees 81 255 ConmvMode Tacho 249 ConmvhomCur 26 79 186 Conmvhomvot 26 186 Conm OwrCur 189 404 ConvTempDly ssnnsnnneeaann 212 378 404 427 KENE aei a ate 26 189 CRU Eo 1o EA e E EEA 192 dn EE 178 CtrIMode Sehiicisve eee ece eid caseceneeete ds 308 CtrlStatMas n ronnan elades 197 ET dE E 198 CtrIWOordAO1 ccccccccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 253 CtrlWordAQO2 cccecccccccccseeeceeseeeeseeeeeaeeaes 253 CtrlWordAOS cccccccccccccccseeecesseeeeceeeeeaesees 254 CtrIWordAO4 cceccecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 255 Cur Achbeak 185 CGurtCmllntegoCut EEN 185 CurCtrlStat i iorri etii 65 195 CurCtrlStat2 ns 54 196 DEEL E EE E ere 184 C rRef EXT eege geet e 60 308 CurRefSlope EE 308 Curbeilsed 33 184 442 CurRipple EE 177 416 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 458 CUPAIPDIGR I ssscctcusca ie eeetecteone seen tetess 177 416 CurRippleLim 00 290 416 429 443 CurRippleSel na000nnnaaa 290 416 429 443 Curse anaana 33 58 60 77 308 Diertat geseet geg 259 446 Data TO sts eet E ARA 259 PALA Wc s2 3 ast coat tes tec E E E staat tees 259 RENE 259 Dati iid A a ee 259 alas E 259 R NNEN 259 446 REEL 259 Data gehaasst eg 259 RECKEN 259 R M EE 259 Data ege Boden Gece es Age 259 Data e crises cencleta decd trticraninciencies 183 DC Break Ack 62 70 237 440 DC Voten 179 DCSLinkN
325. eedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 Currently used speed scaling in rom for MotSel 8 09 Motor2 20 000 speed units M2SpeedScale 49 22 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 gt 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin 49 19 and M2SpeedMax 49 20 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 lt 10 or mathematically If 49 22 10 then 20 000 49 22 in rpm If 49 22 lt 10 then 20 000 Max 1 49 19 I 1 49 22 I in rom Int Scaling 1 1rpm Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name SpeedRefExt1 external speed reference 1 External speed reference 1 after reference 1 multiplexer Ref1Mux 11 02 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefExt2 external speed reference 2 External speed reference 2 after reference 2 multiplexer Ref2Mux 11 12 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRampOut speed ramp output Speed reference after ramp Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Reference actual values DataLogStatus status data logger Notlnit data logger not initialized Empty data logger is empty Running data logger is running activated Triggered data logger is triggered but not filled jet Filled data logger is triggered and filled data can be uploaded Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y SquareWave square wave Output signal of the square wave generator Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Y
326. eedNotZero AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 4 is generated 1 FlyingStart start motor with its actual speed when the drive was stopped by RampStop TorqueLimit or CoastStop Stop by DynBraking is not interrupted wait until zero speed is reached default 2 FlyStartDyn reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile N StartErom0 min FanDly fan delay After the drive has been switched off UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 On 0 both fans motor and converter mustn t switched off before FanDly 21 14 has elapsed If motor or converter overtemperature is pending the delay starts after the temperature has dropped below the overtemperature limit Int Scaling 1 1 s S Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name min MainContCtrlMode main contactor control mode MainContCtriMode 21 16 determines the reaction to On and Run commands UsedMCW 7 04 bits 0 and 3 0 On main contactor closes with On 1 default 1 On amp Run main contactor closes with On Run 1 2 OnHVCB for high voltage AC circuit breaker configuration for more information see chapter XXXX not implemented yet 3 DCcontact If aDC breaker is used as a main contactor it will be closed with On 1 Additionally the armature voltage measurements are adapted to an open DC breaker by clamping SpeedActEMF 1 02 ArmVoltActRel 1 13 ArmVoltAct 1 14 and EMF VoltActRel 1 17 to zero when the drive is Off Note1
327. eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeereeeeeees 54 Field Heating EE 54 OVEIVIGW nasa n A E E E E 54 Modes of operation WE 55 See TEE 56 Re Be gn ne Le EE 57 General ER 57 Large field exciter controlled by a DCS800 armature Converter 57 Parameters to be set in the DCS800 armature converter eeeeee 58 Parameters to be set in large field exciters AAA 58 Field current autotuning for large field exciters AAA 59 Stand alone TEI RE 60 Parameters to be set in the stand alone field exciter A 60 Field current autotuning for stand alone field exciter A 61 DIOT oli TNEI 2s ius A A E E cise iecebieuehiacten Kiaedawive 62 EEEE EE 62 AC and DC breaker controlled by the drive 62 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled by the drive cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeessesneeeeeeees 63 AC breaker controlled by the drive DC breaker controlled externally eee 64 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled eviermalhy 65 Command Trip DCG breaker AAA 65 Na Misler en 66 E EEN 66 Reine Bel 66 e elle Een EE 66 I O configuration 69 RE Ee EE 69 Digital inputs DPS E E E E A E E ESE E E A Ek 69 Table of contents 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f ele e ER Le 69 deri 2 DIO e EE 69 oTa EE EE TION EEEE EE vad eso EE E cage E taunt T AEE tetas 70 Digital OUT URS EE 72 leie e ER Le 72 Le Wen DIO HOt EE 72 Reuter EE 73 fatale oro Wiele 75 SDCS CONA E 75 6S B GPs al EE ere ee erent 75 ENEE 76 EIERE ee 76 Configura
328. eeeeeeeeeeeees 185 FIUXREfFSUM 1 cece cece a 185 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 460 FElusbevkMontly AA 54 320 EM ed beedertEg ereS GER EA 266 447 Forcet dr 53 320 GearStartTorq BEE 284 GearTorqRamp EE 284 Gear orgTime EE 284 GW address 120 131 GW address 120 131 GW address 3 120 131 GW address A 120 131 HandAuto enennooennnnenennonennrnsnnrrenenrene 70 230 ek er 382 HW SW option 112 114 116 118 LIP address A 120 131 FACTS CALIING EE 79 193 TO GXAO 1 doere aiene ss laedeiies 80 81 253 ele EE 253 INGOXAO WE 254 Index ACHEN 80 81 254 elef EE 120 131 leif 120 131 INPUT stier ege Eelere e 120 131 TLE Ae ae iat Mia tena ee caida cere 120 131 Input I O par gn 112 114 116 118 Input instance eeeeeen 112 114 116 118 IO BoardConfig 69 72 75 79 389 426 IP address 120 131 IF address EE 120 131 IP address 3 120 131 ee NEE 70 235 EE 70 236 JOGACC TMG Ee 271 JOGDOCT Ui EE 271 KOEMP sscsihanitititateedenpeiate nce 29 41 314 a i B eee Perper ee ee 300 BO PL a Senate cetera eterna erate teak 379 Eet 29 39 276 KOS 2 ahecseristhcretehetshieesibediental Eed 278 Le EE 276 KPSTiISMaxSpeed ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 278 KpSTiSMinSpeed AA 278 KpSValMinSpeed s nsesseneeeeeeeeeerrserre 278 KpSWeakp NEE 276 KoVWeakotitTme eenn 276 Rule UE 27 389 395 E D iooi re
329. eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 Setting of PLC parameter groups 90 And 07 130 en e EE 130 Modbus TCP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA 01 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeees 131 GEIS E 131 RETA 01 EE 131 FACIALS CUTIE OI sos cane cence ede cowed ate Geet Gude GR race vga ae 131 Mechanical and electrical installation AAA 131 Drive configuration EE 131 Parameter setting example using ModbuseifCh 131 lee EE 133 Profibus communication with fieldbus adapter RPBA 01 A 134 E E 134 RR BAO THC S800 EE 134 FG late Be ein EE 134 Table of contents 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 14 Overriding eene Re We Le TEE 134 Mechanical and electrical mstallapon AAA 134 ln lte UI en cco E cannes ce Pa E E 134 Parameter setting example 1 using PPO Type A 134 Parameter setting example 2 using PPO types 2 4 and bp 135 Communication via group 51 22st ete hae ct ced Cadierno naitoned teecktaatd Aaeteed edesosenewhasts 136 Communication via group 90 ANd group Oe 137 WIECH Re E 138 Ala SO TAINS ch coxere oho Sie ina ea Ee 139 Adaptive Program AP 140 Chapter Ov rvie W egene edd art e ERE E EE a Eaa 140 What is the Adaptive Program ccccceeccseccceeceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeeseeesaaeees 140 EE 140 How to build the program EE EE 141 How to connect the program to the frmware 141 How to control the execution of the program 143 E 144 EE 144 Important keys and BUntONS erae esd e d
330. eege 263 Start SlOD BE 263 STEE EE e Ee 268 Speed TAM e EE 268 RAOUL 22 Beh eS ag ict atte Unt aaa ecd Seas tare 271 Speed reference gees cessed ek recedes EENEG Seu 271 SERA 275 Speed COMO E 275 SEI ee Ges ou e as none she eal AN ee al tela peace Ee 280 ste En 280 EI 281 Torque reference handling cs ececccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 281 Gro p EE 285 Fault ned 285 AOU EE 296 Motor aaen 296 Eet ER 298 DCS800 Control Panel display uk 298 Eiren EE 299 ler 299 Group EE 302 Brake Oste eebe e eege Ee 302 RTO EE 307 C rr nt comto EE 307 Group AA EE 313 Ee KE eh EE 313 EI 318 Field converter ut Le CEET 318 REO BU E 325 Ee EE 325 COD EE 326 Shared MOON WEE 326 EI ee EE 338 Speed Measurement secvcnsseniindscrienwehisenieeensiteievieneaaeeietncieade 338 EILER 345 at 10 C are es rw a ey Or ey OT ev eee ee Cen Cet er ar ere rene Ter 345 ARON 2 esata cy Eege 346 Table of contents 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f lee 346 Elte leg GO EE OD EE 346 Application program Daramelerg cc cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeeeeeeea 346 Group ee ates ce I ctaad hare terete ee a ieee trie cea dete de a tela 347 PIGS e E 347 Group EE 352 lge 352 EIERE 352 Adaptive eleng 352 MBOUP 8i ip ne aa Sea cts each aah ac Saag Meta yee eb agri eal asaya 354 Adaptive Prograf EE 354 COU Ke areca ee 357 User constants serar aes degen 357 Elei 358 Adaptive Program outputs sde icatio
331. efault 1 Delayed A111 MainsLowVolt AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 10 is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 is generated Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N UNetMin1 mains voltage minimum 1 First upper limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 If the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin1 30 22 following actions take place the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible the controllers are frozen the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and A111 MainsLowVolt AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 10 is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 is generated UNetMin2 30 23 isn t monitored unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 30 22 first Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 30 22 has to be larger than UNetMin2 30 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N NotUsed min x Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name UNetMin2 mains voltage minimum 2 Second lower limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 If the mains voltage undershoots UnetMin2 30 23 following actions t
332. efault values single drive with excitation DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 see example 1 M1FexNode 94 08 21 M2FexNode 94 09 30 12 pulse drive DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 see example 2 12P SlaNode 94 04 31 M1FexNode 94 08 21 Example parameter settings for Node number master follower 94 01 3 ihe see example 3 field exciter 94 08 1 23 D see example 3 12 pulse slave 94 04 and 94 01 1 see example 4 drive to drive 94 01 3 see example 5 Example 1 Single drive with one respectively two field exciters and communication supervision single drive 1st excitation P94 01 1 P94 01 21 P94 08 21 P94 07 100 2nd excitation P94 09 30 P94 01 30 Example 2 12 pulse configuration and communication supervision 12 pulse master drive P94 01 1 P94 03 100 P94 04 31 P94 07 100 P94 08 21 12 pulse slave drive P94 01 31 1st excitation P94 01 21 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Example 3 Master follower configuration broadcast with one mailbox activated and communication supervision Master drive 13t follower drive 1 excitation P94 01 1 P94 01 2 P94 01 22 P94 07 100 P94 07 100 P94 08 21 P94 08 22 P94 12 5 P94 12 5 P94 13 100 P94 13 200 1s excitation 2nd follower drive 13t excitation P94 01 21 P94 01 3 P94 01 23 P94 07 100 P94 08 23 P94 12
333. egral part of the field current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N M2CurLimBrdg1 motor 2 current limit of bridge 1 Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 Setting M2CurLimBrdg1 49 12 to 0 disables bridge 1 Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M2CurLimBrdg2 motor 2 current limit of bridge 2 Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 Setting M2CurLimBrdg2 49 13 to 0 disables bridge 2 Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Note2 M2CurLimBrdg2 49 13 is internally set to 0 if QuadrantType 4 15 2 Q 2 Q drive Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M2KpArmCur motor 2 p part armature current controller Proportional gain of the current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M2NomCur 49 02 with M2KpArmCur 49 14 3 if the current error is 5 of M2NomCur 49 02 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N M2TiArmCur motor 2 i part armature current controller Integral time of the current controller M2TiArmCur 49 15 defines the time within the integral par
334. eive data P94 30 6 Example 7 Master follower configuration send TorqRef3 2 10 from the master drive via MailBox1 94 12 to TorqRefA 25 01 of the followers via MailBox2 94 18 Master drive 1 follower drive P94 01 1 P94 01 2 P94 12 1 P94 18 1 P94 14 210 Tress P94 20 2501 Treta 2 4 follower drive P94 01 3 P94 18 1 P94 20 2501 Treta 10 follower drive P94 01 11 P94 18 1 P94 20 2501 Treta data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox1 94 12 is set to 0 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 94 12 MailBox1 mailbox 1 node ID Mailbox 1 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal1 1 94 13 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 14 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 15 and TrmtRecVal1 4 94 16 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name MailBoxCycle1 cycle time mailbox 1 The function of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is depending on the setting of MailBox1 94 12 If MailBox1 94 12 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communica
335. eld exciter and fans are stopped Off2N has priority over OffN3 and On No Off3 E stop Command to OnInhibit state Stopping via E StopMode 21 04 Off3N has priority over On Command to RdyRef state The firing pulses are released and the drive is running with the selected speed reference Command to RdyRun state Stop via StopMode RampOutZero no action speed ramp output is forced to zero RampHold no action freeze hold speed ramp RampinZero no action speed ramp input is forced to zero Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name acknowledge fault indications with the positive edge no action Inching1 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed1 23 02 active only with CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord and RampOutZero RampHold RamplinZero Run 0 Inching2 overrides Inching1 alternatively Jog 10 17 can be used no action Inching2 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed2 23 03 active only with CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord and RampOutZero RampHold RamplinZero Run 0 Inching2 overrides Inching1 alternatively Jog2 10 18 can be used no action RemoteCmd overriding control enabled overriding control has to set this value to 1 If MainCtrlWord 7 01 0 the last UsedMCW 7 04 and the last references SpeedRef 23 01 AuxSpeedRef 23 13 TorqRefA 25 01 and TorqRefB 25 04 are retained On control place change see CommandSel 10 01 the driv
336. elected value in as an integer Note The parameter selected as an input should be an integer value The internal scaling for each parameter is given in the Firmware Manual How to select the input e Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode Enter e Set the address from which the input value is to be read with group x 100 index e g parameter 22 01 2201 A negative address e g 2201 will act an inversion of the connected value The figure below shows the DCS800 Control Panel display when the input BlockxIn1 with e g x 1 for 1 block selection parameter is in edit mode Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8405 Block1In1 SE E 903 CANCEL group x 100 index Example Analog input Al1 which is supplied with a voltage source of 5 8 V How is the signal connected to the MAX block as function block 1 in the Adaptive Program What is the value at the block input Al1 is connected to the block as follows e Scroll to the input Block1In1 selection parameter 84 05 and shift to edit mode Enter e Set the address of 503 because group 5 and index 3 contains the input value of Al1 05 03 05x100 3 503 The value at the input of the block is 5800 since the integer scaling of actual signal 5 03 is 0 001 V 1 with default setting of Al1 given in the Firmware Manual Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 151 Constant as an integer inpu
337. elector 2 09 E 2 09 Booed 4 H ee TorgReta TorqRefExt i p TorgRefA Sel 224 Filter Torque 2 TorgRef3 2501 J TorgRefA2501 Ga EA TorqRef1 Alt Al6 d 2502 HTorgreta Erd boadShare TorgRefB 204 1 Torque ramp 7 TorgMaxTret TorgMinTref TorgMaxAll 25 05 4 TorqRampUp TorqMinAll 25 06 TorqRampDown T 26 04 TorgSel 2607 MCW Bit 11 MCW PS CW Bit 12 ACW Bit15 OID Off Mode StopMode E StopMode LocalLoossCtrl 26 05 Speed Max 1 or 4 Speed Limit 1 or 6 CommLossCtrl FaultStopMode Mi TorgProvTime M2TorgProvTime Cho ComLossCtrl Ch2 ComLossCtrl For further information consult the DCS800 Firmware Manual 3ADW000193 and the DCS800 Hardware Manual 3ADW000194 Additional settings E stop In case of an E stop the master must be in control of all followers Thus set E Stop 10 09 NotUsed and TorgSelMod 26 03 Fix in all followers Connection to overriding control In case followers are connected to an overriding control make sure that the overriding control is not writing on the same signals via group 51 and or group 90 as the master via the master follower link There is always a problem when two sources writing on one sink Be very carefully with e g
338. employed Another reason field heating is used is to keep moisture out of the motor Following parameters are used to turn on and control field heating FldHeatSel 21 18 M1FlidHeatRef 44 04 There are basically two modes of operation In both modes the field current will be at a reduced level determined by M1FidHeatRef 44 04 FidHeatSel 21 18 On Field heating is on as long as On 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 Off2N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 and Off3N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 In general field heating will be on as long as the OnOff input is not set and no Coast Stop or E stop is pending Condition On UsedMCW Off2N UsedMCW Result 7 04 bit 0 7 04 bit 1 Power up A 1 reduced field current Start drive 1 1 normal field current Normal stop 130 1 normal field current then reduced after stop Coast Stop 1 1 gt 0 field is turned off as while running motor coasts to stop and cannot turned back on again as long as Coast Stop is pending see Off2 10 08 the field current will be at the level set by means of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 while motor is stopped FidHeatSel 21 18 OnRun Field heating is on as long as On 1 Run 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Off2N 1 and Off3N 1 In general field heating will be on as long as the OnOff input is set the Start Stop input is not set and no Coast Stop or E stop is pending On UsedMC
339. en using Input I O par 9 51 25 ABB Drives assembly VSA I O size 51 26 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by DeviceNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the DIP switches of the RDNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using ABB Drives assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 118 Parameter setting example 2 using User specific assembly User specific assembly can run with up to 9 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus ModuleType 51 01 DEVICENET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 a 2 500 kBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software
340. ent Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit To which products this chapter applies The information is valid for the whole range of the product DCS800 the converter modules DCS800 SOx size D1 to D7 field exciter units DCF80x etc like the Rebuild Kit DCS800 R00 9xxx Usage of warnings and notes There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual warnings and notes Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment General danger warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment Electrostatic sensitive devices warning warns of electrostatic discharge which can damage the equipment Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Installation and maintenance work These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment WARNING e Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive
341. er name M2OvrSpeed motor 2 overspeed The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed FaultWora2 9 02 bit 15 if M2OvrSpeed 49 21 is exceeded It is recommended to set M2OvrSpeed 49 21 at least 20 higher than the maximum motor speed 32767 rpm 20000 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 Note1 The value of M2OvrSpeed 49 21 is as well used for the analog tacho tuning Any change of its value has the consequence that A115 TachoRange AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 comes up for 10 seconds and M2TachoAdjust 49 26 respectively M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 have to be adjusted anew The adjustment can be done by means of ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N M2SpeedScale motor 2 speed scaling Motor 2 speed scaling in rpm M2SpeedScale 49 22 defines the speed in rpm that corresponds to 20 000 speed units The speed scaling is released when M2SpeedScale 49 22 gt 10 20 000 speed units M2SpeedScale 49 22 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin 49 19 and M2SpeedMax 49 20 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 lt 10 or mathematically If 49 22 gt 10 then 20 000 49 22 in rpm If 49 22 lt 10 then 20 000 Max 1 49 19 l 1 49 20 I in rpm The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act 2 29 Note1 M2SpeedScale 49 22 has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding control e g fieldbus No
342. eral This chapter gives additional information using the ControlNet adapter RCNA 01 together with the DCS800 RCNA 01 DCS800 The ControlNet communication with the drive requires the option RCNA 01 Related documentation Users Manual ControlNet Adapter Module RCNA 01 SAFE 64506005 REV A The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Please refer to the Scanner documentation for information how to configure the system for communication with RCNA 01 EDS file The EDS file for RCNA 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RCNA 01 into slot 1 of the drive see page 17 Drive configuration The ControlNet adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances User transparent assembly and Vendor specific assembly The instances Basic speed control and Extended speed control instance 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since firmware version 2 x With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800 Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly ABB Drives assembly is using 2 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Re
343. eration OUT is the highest input value OUT MAX ONT IN2 IN3 Note An open input will be set to as zero Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Min Type Arithmetic function Illustration Operation OUT is the lowest input value OUT MIN IN1 IN2 IN3 Note An open input will be set to as zero Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign MulDiv Type Arithmetic function Illustration IN1 IN2 OUT Operation OUT is the IN1 multiplied with IN2 and divided by IN3 Connections OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 162 NotUsed Type i Illustration Operation Block is not enabled and not working default Connections OR Type Logical function Illustration Operation OUT is true if any of the inputs is true Truth table IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 False All bits 0 0 0 0 1 True Allbits 1 1 0 1 0 True Allbits 1 1 0 1 1 True Allbits 1 1 1 0 0 True Allbits 1 1 1 1 0 True Allbits 1 1 1 1 1 True Allbits 1 1 Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean values Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boo
344. erature Al6 13 27 ConvMode Al5HighVal 13 21 Ald 13 23 EE Al5LowVal 13 22 Al6HighVal 13 25 AIG Val 3 08 Al6LowVal 13 26 measurement is fixed assigned to Al2 and Al3 ConvMode Al7 respectively Al7 and Al8 AIS AlO MotTempMeas 98 12 Structure of AIs dsf Structure of Ale JO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 79 Analog outputs AQ s The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 3 standard AO s Two AO s are programmable the third one is fixed and used to display the actual armature current taken directly from the burden resistors All 3 standard AO s can be replaced with SDCS IOB 3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO 01 analog I O extension modules Thus the maximum number of AQ s is 7 The hardware source is selected by AlO ExtModule 98 06 for AO3 and AO4 AlO MotTempMeas 98 12 for AO5 and AO6 JO BoardConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of analog I O extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 1 RAIO 01 Output range AO1 and AO2 set by parameter 10V 0Vto10V 2Vto10V 5 V offset 6 V offset Output range fixed AO I act 8V equals the minimum of 325 M1NomCur 99 03 or 230 ConvNomCur 4 05 see also lactScaling 4 26 for more details see Hardware Manual Resolution 11 bits sign Cycle time for AO1 and AQ2 5ms Cycle time fixed AO I act dir
345. erence input 1 PID RefiMax 40 09 Hy J PID Refi _40 13 PID RefiMin 40 08 H A PID controller PID OutMax e PID Out as Actual input 1 i eee PID Act 40 06 j KpPID SCH lb PID Mux 02 TiPID PID OutMin 40 78 D I 03 TaPID Donnea PID2 H TdFiltPID Reference input 2 D11 D111 MCW Em Bit15 PID ReQMax AOI Hy 7 i l ACW Bit12 Bit15 19 H PID ResetIndex PID Ge 4014 H 20 H PID ResetBitNo PID Ref2Min 40 10 Pere EC EH Reset amp Hold Actual input 2 PID Act2 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name min def 325 max KpPID p part PID controller Proportional gain of the PID controller Example The controller generates 15 output with KpPID 40 01 3 if the input is 5 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N TiPID i part PID controller Integral time of the PID controller TiP D 40 02 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 output with KpPID 40 01 3 if the input is 5 On that condition and with TiPID 40 02 300 ms follows the controller generates 30 output if the input is constant after 300 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TdP
346. erse 0 Forward AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCitrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed ACW Bit1 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 228 Signal Parameter name def E C Reset Reset command Binary signal for Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 0 NotUsed 1 DNl Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 2 DI2 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 3 DIS Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 4 DM4 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 5 DI5 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 6 DI6 Reset by rising edge 0 1 default 7 DI7 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 8 DI8 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 9 DI9 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 Reset by rising edge 0 1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge 0 1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 Reset by rising edge 0 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge 0 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge 0 1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 AC
347. es AC80 ModuleBus 17 124 No FCI CI810A 17 124 No Int Scaling 1 Volatile N 70 02 ChO LinkControl channel 0 link control DDCS channel 0 intensity control for transmission LEDs This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance of the link Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N ChO BaudRate channel 0 baud rate Channel 0 communication speed ChO BaudRate 70 03 must be set to 4 Mbits s when ABB overriding control modules e g FCI or AC 800M are used Otherwise the overriding control automatically sets the communication speed 0 8 Mbits s 1 4 Mbits s default 2 2 Mbits s 3 1 Mbits s Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N 8 Mbits s 4 Mbits s Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 348 70 04 70 05 70 06 Signal Parameter name ChO TimeOut channel 0 timeout Time delay before a communication loss with channel 0 is declared Depending on the setting of ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 either F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 or A113 COM8Com AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 12 is set The communication fault and alarm are inactive if ChO TimeOut 70 04 is set to 0 ms Note1 The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message Note2 The time out starts when the link doesn t update any of the first 2 receive data sets addressed by ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Example When Ch0 DsetBa
348. ese 144 Insert FUMCUOM DIOCKS 25252 cetecszdasnadvs aaan eoa iaaa cedace AnA Ae ARA AAA a AAE ERAEN EAS 145 Connection of function DIGCKS EE 145 Program MOd S nanii masrana ee ae nal eee play gedig agree Seva eae eee 147 SAVING AP Programs ER 147 Function e ee 148 General ENEE sirere ant ecteadetat dere eer Seege 148 Se n e EE 148 Block input attributes 2 geesde Egger Seege eiert gkg ee 149 Parameter value aS an integer Imput ee eee eee ennnneeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeees 150 How the block handles the mput eee ceeececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeees 150 How to s lectthe UNDUE eesnik ee 150 Constant as an integer Input 151 How to set and connect the input REENEN 151 Parameter value as a boolean mput ee eee e ee eeentte ee eeeeeeeeeeneteeeeeeeeees 152 How the block handles the input ccceeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 152 Constant as a boolean Input 153 How to set and connect the input cccccceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeetees 153 SUNG DUN E E 153 How to select the input E 153 Function eer 154 ABS erinan ari E E E E R E a 154 VAN D E 155 le 155 UE 156 Beet denge Edge ege Een 157 CONAN EE 157 ETag eege Eeer 158 Eege er SEET 158 EV EE 159 a ETE 159 Table of contents 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f BL EE 160 MASKS E 160 VEE se as eves ae Racecar ae ca Aid a ea ers arava aaah eau cane ae edhe 161 MDs ese becca EE 161 UI 161 NOUS
349. esseeeeeeeeeeerrereserrn 336 M2CurLimBrdg1 ates o s cures eter 329 M2CurLimBrdg2 vais di teeter does eg 329 M fDiscopntCurt Im 329 M2EncMeasMode o nnneeonnnnnennnnesnnrerernnene 331 M tnchulseho 332 M au ml oa 334 427 M2FaultLimTemp eeeeeeennn 335 426 M texv larmmuWord 226 M tevtaubWord 226 M tevhode nneonnnnnennnnesnrnnrernrrsrrnne 370 429 M tldleaitef 327 M2FIdMinTrip 0 cccccceeeeeseeereeeeees 328 434 M ldChvrCurl ey 328 429 M2FIGREPEXt ce aration 322 M ldbieMode 322 M treewhll ey 322 M2KlixonSel ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 70 336 426 REECH 329 MAK DFOX secticci ta anini eiiiai 328 M ModelTme 334 M ert ceeecceeedeciedss eise eege ee 327 M homtldcCur 327 M2NOMWVOltissicaiitiiisertecriccnciieieaicst 326 M2OperModeFex4 snnneeeeeeeeenneeeserrr nee 324 M ChvrGpeed Ae 331 442 M boel mn 53 322 M peedtbtzel ek 332 447 M peedMan e 330 444 M GpeedMim e 330 444 M2SpeedScale e 331 444 M2StrtTorqRefSel aaaaaaaaaaaaaa 77 337 444 M3TachMavtGpeed 361 EAR Tee Le E EE 332 M2 TaCho Gallia EE 361 M2 Tacho RE 361 M2TachoVolt1 000 332 M Temptzel 77 80 335 M2 TIARMC UP E 329 KEE ee 329 M2 TorgProv Time eeen 336 M2UsedFexType AAR 328 429 M Zerot peedDhy ree 334 M Zerotzpeedt Im 327 447 MacroChangeMode snsesseeeeeeneeeseer nn 256 Ma te 27 211 Mailbox 87 91 371 434 442 MailBOX2 ER 91 372 434 442 MallBOxS EE
350. esys Application Download Refresh DriveAP For DCS e e Important keys and buttons Sequence Programming Tool The program will be controlled by means of the following keys and buttons Keys and buttons Function Ctrl left mouse button on a box or function block Shift left mouse button on the Change insert function blocks connect in and outputs in Edit mode View actual values in Start mode red cross Cancel Abort the action Help Open the online help Insert Change Remove Block r Insert Change Block Insert After Block 1 Change Block 1 Remove Block 1 Cancel Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Insert function blocks 145 It is possible to insert up to 16 function blocks from the list to the desktop With the button Change Block xx the selected block will be changed The button nsert Before Block xx means that the new block will be inserted before the selected block Button nsert After Block xx means that the new block will be inserted after the selected block Insert Before Block 6 Insert After Block 6 Change Block 6 Connection of function blocks Function blocks can be connected to others or to firmware parameters When connecting packed Boolean values it is important to select the correct bit To connect click Ctrl left mouse button on the red cross at the input and choose one
351. et X 12 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 12 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus14Val1 data set X 14 value 1 Data set X 14 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 14 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus14Val2 data set X 14 value 2 Data set X 14 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 14 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus14Val3 data set X 14 value 3 Data set X 14 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 14 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 365 Signal Parameter name Transmit data sets addresses 1 Addresses for the transmit data send from the drive to the overriding control The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index The data set base address is set in ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table Signals and parameters Dataset Value e g data storage group 19 DDCS link via Cho of SDCS COM 8 Address assignment of dataset Serial communication via Group Index X 2 la ki slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 90 05 X 4 X see Cho DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr dsf DsetXplus1Val1 data set X 1 value 1 Data set X 1 v
352. et and the acknowledge TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 is not set before M1TorgProvTime 42 10 is elapsed The torque proving is inactive H M1TorqProvTime 42 10 is set to 0 Note1 The acknowledge signal TorqProvOK has to be provided by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control and is set by means of a rising edge 0 gt 1 The torque reference might be set by means of Ba Ref 24 11 or TorqSel 26 01 and BalSpeedCtrl AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 8 or TorqRefA 25 01 The reaction of the drive might be taken from MotCur 1 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1BrakeLiftDly motor 1 brake lift delay Brake open lift delay This function delays the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 until M1BrakeLiftDly 42 11 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1BrakeLongTime motor 1 brake long time Brake close apply acknowledge monitor During this time the brake close apply command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 can be different without causing either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1s Type Volatile N M1BrakeStopDly motor 1 brake stop delay Brake close apply delay This function starts after the brake acknowledge if selected with M
353. et number of the 17 data set used for the communication with the overriding control system e g field bus adapters ABB overriding control The data set addressed by ChO DsetBaseAdadr 70 24 is the 1 data set send from the overriding control to the drive while the next 2 data set is the first one send from the drive to the overriding control and so on Up to 8 data sets for each direction are supported addressing of the data sets see groups 90 to 93 Examples Ch0 DsetBaseAdadr 70 24 1 data set range 1 16 Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 data set range 10 25 Note1 The data sets for the APC mailbox function 32 and 33 as well as for the master follower communication 41 are not programmable Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 352 Signal Parameter name Drivebus ChO DriveBus channel 0 drive bus Communication mode selection for channel 0 The DriveBus mode is used with the AC80 and AC 800M controllers 0 No DDCS mode recommended when ModuleBus is used 1 Yes _ DriveBus mode default Attention A new mode becomes only valid after the next SDCS COM 8 power up Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Adaptive Program control AdapProgCmd Adaptive Program command Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program 0 Stop stop the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited default 1 Start running the
354. et the bit for constant attribute of this input in BlockxAttrib parameter e Accept by Enter How to select the input With the EVENT block the text from fault alarm or notice lists will be selected To change the text DriveWindow and SDCS COM 8 are required Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 154 Function blocks General Each of the 16 function blocks has three input parameters group 84 which are connected to the firmware outputs of other function blocks or constants One further parameter is used for the attributes of these inputs This attribute parameter is to be edited manually if functions blocks are edited by using DCS800 Control Panel or by using the parameter browser of DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light The attribute parameter is set automatically when DWL AP is used The output OUT group 84 can connected with the inputs of function blocks To write output values into firmware parameters connect the necessary output pointer group 86 to the desired parameter ABS Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetic function ABS IN IN2 IN3 OUT OUT is the absolute value of IN1 multiplied by IN2 and divided by IN3 OUT IIN11 IN2 IN3 Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 155 ADD Type Arithmetic function
355. eter list Signal Parameter name Speed controller signals SpeedRef2 speed reference 2 Speed reference after limiter M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRef3 speed reference 3 Speed reference after speed ramp and jog input Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedErrNeg An An speed actual speed reference Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y TorqPropRef proportional part of torque reference P part of the speed controller s output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqintegRef integral part of torque reference l part of the speed controller s output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqDerRef derivation part of torque reference D part of the speed controllers output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqAccCompRef torque reference for acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRef1 torque reference 1 Relative torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after limiter for the external torque reference TorqMaxTref 20 09 TorqMinTref 20 10 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRef2 torque reference 2 Output value of the speed controller in percent of MotNomTorque 4
356. etting unipolar Input signal type Analog input Al1 Analog input Al2 N 0 4 20 mA Ol ON 0 2 10 V HI UI Ge SE BN 123456 Default Set the number of connected PT100 per channel DIP switch settings Input signal type Analog input Al1 2 or 3 PT100 ON set the voltage DI signal to AUT 0 10V EE 1 PT100 SR oN set the voltage OT yet 123456 123456 Int Scaling 1 Volatile N Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 389 Signal Parameter name E C max l def OT Nottseg LL IO BoardConfig I O board configuration JO BoardConfig 98 15 selects the optional interface boards SDCS IOB 2 and or SDCS IOB 3 for the standard I O of the SDCS CON 4 0 NotUsed no optional interface boards connected default 1 SDCS IOB 2 only SDCS IOB 2 connected 2 SDCS IOB 3 only SDCS IOB 3 connected IOB 2 IOB 3 SDCS IOB 2 and SDCS IOB 3 connected The drive trips with F508 I OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the IO board configuration is not met e g one or two boards are physically connected but not selected by JO BoardConfig GEAR Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N ebe TT NotUsed min i LL um Ee E Start up data Language language Select language 0 English default 1 English AM not implemented yet 2 Deutsch 3 Italiano 4 Espanol 5 Portugu s not implemented yet 6 Nederlands not imp
357. f 134 Profibus communication with fieldbus adapter RPBA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Profibus adapter RPBA 01 together with the DCS800 RPBA 01 DCS800 The Profibus communication with the drive requires the option RPBA 01 Related documentation User s Manual PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module RPBA 01 8AFE64504215 Rev F The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Supported operation mode is VENDOR SPECIFIC for ABB Drives see page 19 and 20 The RPBA 01 uses data consistent communication meaning that the whole data frame is transmitted during a single program cycle Some overriding controls handle this internally but others must be programmed to transmit data consistent telegrams Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RPBA 01 into slot 1 of the drive see page 21 Drive configuration The Profibus adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 see page 22 Please note that the DCS800 works only with the ABB Drives profile Parameter setting example 1 using PPO Type 1 ABB Drives profile Vendor specific with PPO Type 1 DP VO see page 25 The first two data words PZD1 OUT PZD2 OUT from the overriding control to the drive are fixed connected as control word and speed reference at the Profibus side and cannot be changed The first two data words PZD1 IN PZD2 IN from the drive to the overriding control a
358. f 255 Signal Parameter name 15 17 CtrlWordAO4 control word analog output 4 Analog output 4 can be written to via CtrliWordAO4 15 17 using Adaptive Program application min def program or overriding control if IndexAO4 15 17 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvModeAO4 convert mode analog output A Analog output 4 signal offset 0 O0mA 20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output 1 4mA 20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output default 2 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 3 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N FilterAO4 filter analog output A Analog output 4 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO4 scaling analog output 4 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO4 15 16 is scaled to the current in ScaleAO4 15 20 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N O m m it Ke N NI cpl f D lt E OJ N lt wt ao ol ma20mA Uni o System control inputs ParLock parameter lock The user can lock all parameters by means of ParLock 16 02 and SysPassCode 16 03 To lock parameters set SysPassCode 16 03 to the desired value and change ParLock 16 02 from Open to Locked
359. f Signal Parameter name Option modules Encoder2Module encoder 2 extension module RTAC xx extension module interface selection Encoder2Module 98 01 releases pulse encoder 2 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 0 see switch 1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no first RTAC xx is used default 1 Slot first RTAC xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 first RTAC xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 first RTAC xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA first RTAC xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 0 The drive trips with F508 OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RTAC extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RTAC xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery RTAC Switch 1 ADDRESS NotUsed NotUsed ree Int Scaling Lee Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 384 Signal Parameter name 98 02 CommModule communication modules For the communication modules following selections are available NotUsed def NotUsed Fieldbus Rxxx DDCS e g AC 800M DDCS Nxxx Modbus RMBA xx X X read only X read only
360. f1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetxXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive DsetxXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 113 overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 CONTROLNET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 Ee 2 500 kBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly Output instance 51 06 100 100 ABB Drives assembly Input instance 51 07 101 101 ABB Drives assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to NA not applicable when using Input I O par 9 51 25 ABB Drives assembly VSA I O size 51 26 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of t
361. field boost 0 no field boost Only available with digital extension Noted Pg NotUsed a board 13 MCW Bit11 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 14 MCW Bit12 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrilWord 7 01 bit 12 15 MCW Bit13 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 16 MCW Bit14 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrilWord 7 01 bit 14 17 MCW Bnp 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 18 ACW Bit12 1 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 19 ACW Bit13 1 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 20 ACW BA 1 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 21 ACW Bit15 1 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N LACH BEIS Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 316 Signal Parameter name 44 18 FidBoosiFact field boost factor Field boost factor in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 The resulting field boost current must be lower than the nominal current of the used field exciter If the field boost current is out of range A132 ParConflict AlarmWorad2 9 07 bit 15 is generated Note1 If FidBoostFact 44 18 gt 100 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A S M1FidSacle 45 20 has to be set accordingly Example M1NomFidCur 99 11 20 A and Fi
362. g edge 0 1 AuxCitrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 ell E AdjUDC adjust DC voltage AdjUDC 97 23 is used to cover drives with different voltage measuring circuits for armature and mains voltage It rescales the armature voltage measurement Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N 125 100 OffsetUDC offset DC voltage measurement Offset value in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 added to the armature voltage measurement OffsetUDC 97 24 adjusts ArmVoltAct 1 14 and the real armature voltage Setting OffsetUDC 97 24 to 5 1 disables the manual offset Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N EMF ActFiltTime actual EMF filter time EMF actual filter time constant for EMF VoltActRel 1 17 Is used for the EMF controller and the EMF feed forward Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N HW FiltUDC hardware filter DC voltage measurement Hardware filter for the UDC measuring circuit 0 FilterOff the filter time is set to 200 us 1 FilterOn the filter time is set to 10 ms default Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N Fiteor ol so Fiteron 10 541 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e
363. g on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle4 94 31 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 1 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 2 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 3 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 4 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 376 Signal Parameter name Measurement TypeCode type code TypeCode 97 01 is preset in the factory and is write protected It identifies the drives current voltage temperature measurement and its quadrant type To un protec
364. g or Star ChO topology selection CHO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 use either data set range 1 to 16 or data set range 10 to 25 CommMoadule 98 02 COM 8 AC800x ChO DriveBus 71 01 No or Yes ChO communication mode selection DCS800 parameter setting for ABB overriding control Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Received data set table Send from the overriding control to the drive typical 70 24 14 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note 90 01 90 02 90 03 90 04 90 05 90 06 90 07 90 08 90 09 90 10 90 11 90 12 90 13 90 14 90 15 90 16 90 17 90 18 91 01 91 02 91 03 91 04 91 05 91 06 97 MainCtrlWord SpeedRef TorqRefA AuxCtrlWord AuxCirlWord2 The update time is the time within the drive is reading values from the data sets Since the drive is a communication slave the actual cycle time depends on the cycle time of the communication master 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Communication 98 Transmitted data set table Send from the drive to the overriding control typical
365. ge signals are ignored and blocked Note1 UNetMin2 30 23 isn t monitored unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 30 22 Thus for proper operation UNetMin1 30 22 must be larger than UNetMin2 30 23 Note2 If no UPS is available set PwrLossTrip 30 21 to Immediately Thus the drive will trip with F512 MainsLowVolt avoiding secondary phenomena due to missing power for Als and Die Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 406 Drive behavior during auto reclosing hold speed controller integrator speed ramp follows speed actual AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 15 AutoReclosing ip ses og Mains VoltActRel 1 11 UNetMint 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 A PowrDownTime 30 24 F512 MainsLowVolt if KEES PwrLossTrip 30 21 A111 MainsLowVolt Immediately PowrDown Time 30 24 is exceeded F512 MainsLowVolt DCS800 FW aut recl dsf Auto reclosing Mains synchronism As soon as the main contactor is closed and the firing unit is synchronized with the incoming voltage supervising of the synchronization is activated If the synchronization fails F514 MainsNotSync will be generated The permitted deviation of the cycle time between 2 measurements is set by means of DevLimPLL 97 13 The synchronization of the firing unit takes typically 300 ms before the current controller is ready Incoming voltage T r AT T To DCS800 FW synchr meas dsf Synchronization measuremen
366. gnal parameter selected with DO3Index 14 05 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DO4Index digital output 4 index Digital output 4 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO4BitNo 14 08 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO4BitNo digital output 4 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO4Index 14 07 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DO5Index digital output 5 index Digital output 5 is controlled by a selectable bit see DOSBitNo 14 10 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO5BitNo digital output 5 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DOS5Index 14 09 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DO6Index digital output 6 index Digital output 6 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO6BitNo 14 12 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N DO6BitNo digital output 6 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO6Index 14 11 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DO7Index digital output 7 index Digital output
367. gotiate automatic set baud rate as required DHCP 51 03 0 DHCP disabled IP address setting from following parameters IP address 1 51 04 192 e g IP address 192 168 0 1 IP address 2 51 05 168 IP address 3 51 06 0 IP address 4 51 07 157 Subnet mask 1 51 08 255 e g subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 2 51 09 255 Subnet mask 3 51 10 255 Subnet mask 4 51 11 0 GW address 1 51 12 0 e g gateway address 0 0 0 0 GW address 2 51 13 0 GW address 3 51 14 0 GW address 4 51 15 0 Protocol 51 16 2 1 Ethernet IP AC DC communication profile 2 Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile Modbus timeout 51 17 22 0 no monitoring 1 100 ms 22 2200 ms Stop function 51 18 0 0 Ramp stop Output 1 51 19 1 data word 1 setting via parameter 90 01 Output 2 51 20 2 data word 2 setting via parameter 90 02 Output 3 51 21 3 data word 3 setting via parameter 90 03 Output 4 51 22 7 data word 4 setting via parameter 90 04 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 122 Input 1 51 23 4 data word 1 setting via parameter 92 01 Input 2 51 24 5 data word 2 setting via parameter 92 02 Input 3 51 25 6 data word 3 setting via parameter 92 03 Input 4 51 26 10 data word 4 setting via parameter 92 04 FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRE
368. haMax 20 14 depending on the actual motor current and M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 3 CalcSingle function same as in Calculated but single pulses are fired when the limit is reached degrees a ArmAlphaMax 20 14 actual motor M1DiscontCurLim current 43 08 Note1 Single firing pulses force discontinuous current automatically to zero Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N RevDly reversal delay RevDly 43 14 defines the delay time in ms for the bridge reversal after zero current has been detected lact CtrlStatMas 6 09 bit 13 is set CtrlStatMas 6 09 Zero current bit 12 is set detection RevDly 43 14 ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 RevDly dsf The reversal delay time starts when zero current has been detected after a command to change current direction has been given After a command to change the current direction the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 RevDly 43 14 must have the same setting for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave with one exception only If there is no current measurement in the 12 pulse serial slave set RevDly 43 14 in the 12 pulse serial slave to minimum 0 ms Thus the 12 pulse serial slave uses the reversal command of the 12 pulse master for its own bridge changeover see CtrlStatMas 6 09 bit 12 No additional reversal delay is added since the master delays bit 12 acc
369. he safety instructions it is not sufficient to merely shut down the drive via signals RUN drive OFF or Emergency Stop respectively control panel or PC tool e Intended use The operating instructions cannot take into consideration every possible case of configuration operation or maintenance Thus they mainly give such advice only which is required by qualified personnel for normal operation of the machines and devices in industrial installations If in special cases the electrical machines and devices are in tended for use in non industrial installations which may require stricter safety regulations e g protection against contact by children or similar these additional safety measures for the installation must be provided by the customer during assembly Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Note e When the control location is not set to Local L not shown in the status row of the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel press the LOC REM key and then the stop key Safety instructions 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Table of contents Safety instructions 3 What this Chapter COmlains ais cai aie Aer Aes eee eae eee ee ee ee 3 To which products this chapter Applies ccceeeeeeceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssseeaenseeeeeeeeeeseneneeaees 3 Usa e OF WAIMINGS ANG ale te 3 I
370. he fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by ControlNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using ABB Drives assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 114 Parameter setting example 2 using Vendor specific assembly Vendor specific assembly can run with up to 9 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus ModuleType 51 01 CONTROLNET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 5 5 5 MBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using Vendor specific assembly Output instance 51 06 102 102 Vendor specific assembly Input instance 51 07 103 103 Vendor specific assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to 1 18 Set these values according Input I O par 9 51 25 table Setting of pa
371. he first time the start up assistants guides you through the setup of the basic parameters There are seven start up assistants available They can be activated one after the other as the ASSISTANTS menu suggests or independently The use of the assistants is not required It is also possible to use the parameter mode instead The assistant list in the following table is typical 1 Name plate data Enter the motor data the mains supply data the most important protections and follow the instructions of the assistant After filling out the parameters of this assistant it is in most cases possible to turn the motor for the first time Macro assistant Selects an application macro Autotuning field current controller Enter the field circuit data and follow the instructions of the assistant During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be closed the field circuit is measured by means of increasing the field current to nominal field current and the field current control parameters are set The armature current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help Autotuning armature current controller Enter the motor nominal current the basic current limitations and follow th
372. hen DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 553 TachPolarity Selected motor tacho polarity 9 04 always The polarity of the analog tacho respectively pulse bit 4 encoder depending on M1SpeedFbSell 50 03 is checked against the EMF Check EMF FbMonLev 30 15 SoeedFbMonLev 30 14 polarity of tacho cable polarity of pulse encoder cable e g swap channels A and A not polarity of armature and field cables direction of motor rotation 554 TachoRange_ Selected motor tacho range 9 04 always Overflow of AlTacho input bit 5 Check Tor the right connections X3 1 to X3 4 on the SDCS CON 4 556 TorgProving Selected motor torque proving 9 04 while The acknowledge signal for torque proving is missing bit7 M1TorqProvTi Check me 42 10 is M 1TorqProvTime 42 10 active the Adaptive Program application program or overriding control providing the acknowledge signal TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 F557 557 ReversalTime Reversal time 9 04 RdyRef 1 Current direction not changed before ZeroCurTimeOut bit 8 97 19 is elapsed Check for high inductive motor too high motor voltage compared to mains voltage lower RevDly 43 14 if possible and increase ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 ee re bd gen etalon I ect a ewer Heft ene eerie ee e e Hen beige l a E Heng a E EE EE EE l Fault tracing EC REES CES 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 437 Text on DCS800 Definitio
373. iaasnes 252 DOPBING si sesi e a Geen tered 252 BIG Fd ne EE 252 DOBBINO inienn 252 DOB8BINdEX eege esoe an 73 252 kleed 134 Re TE 189 RI Ee 49 210 leie 275 DsetXplus10Val1 oaaae 363 DsetXplus10Val2 osae 363 DsetXplus10Val3 0 eee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteees 363 DsetXplus11Val1 c a 366 DsetXplus11Val2 n 366 DsetXplus11Val3 wt even civied act eae 366 DsetXplus12V all ooo 364 DsetXplust2Val2 A 364 DsetXplus12Val3 noaee 364 DsetXplus13V all oaaae 367 DsetX plus 13V al iaoee 367 DsetXplus13Val8 aaao 367 DsetXplust4Vall ooo 364 DsetXplust4Val2 ane 364 DsetX plus 14 el noae 364 DsetXplus15Val1 oaae 367 DsetXplus15Val2 n on 367 DsetX plus 15 Vald saae 367 DsetXplusiVal1 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 365 DsetXplus1Val2 108 112 116 120 126 128 131 134 365 DsetXplus1Valo 108 126 128 137 365 DsetXplus2Val A 108 362 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f DSetXplusS2V el cesiscccieseccnasnwnccevecetineie 362 DSetXpllS2V al sie snctwnericieensiiane 362 DsetXplus3Val1 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 365 DsetXplusSVal2 i 365 DSGtUXPIUSSV AB uncon eteenete genee dee Ee 365 DsetXplus4Valld i 363 DeetsgplusAV al 363 DsetXplus4Val8 seccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 363 DSetXplusSSV all i 366 Desetvplusbal 366 DsetXplusSVal3 seccceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 366 Dsetxplus6 Vall sciureus 363 DsetXplus6Val2 sa st
374. idthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 Example To get a window of 10 rpm width around the speed error An set WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedErrWin WinWidthPos 23 08 5 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 5 rpm Example2 To get a window e g 500 rpm to 1000 rpm around speed actual set WinCitrlMode 23 12 SpeedActWin WinWidthPos 23 08 1000 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 500 rpm To get a window e g 50 rpm to 100 rpm around speed actual set WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedActWin WinWidthPos 23 08 100 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 50 rpm Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name AuxSpeedRef auxiliary speed reference Auxiliary speed reference input for the speed control of the drive Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed 2 17 via Ref1Mux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Internally limited from 2 29 e rpm to 2 29 SEL rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y DirectSpeedRef direct speed reference Direct speed input is connected to SpeedRef3 2 02 by means of AuxCtriWord2 7 03 bit 10 1 and replaces the speed ramp output 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Note1 Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp it must be set to zero prior to stopping the driv
375. igital extension board 11 DI11 0 no fault 1 fault Only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtrilWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 0 no fault 1 fault external fault is connected to AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N ACW D k C 5 GS xo bk ON D I Ol Z Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name ExtAlarmSel external alarm selector The drive sets A126 ExternalDI AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 9 if a binary input for an external alarm is selected and 0 0 NotUsed no reaction default 1 Dl 0 no fault 1 fault 2 DI2 0 no fault 1 fault 3 DIS 0 no fault 1 fault 4 Di4 0 no fault 1 fault 5 DI5 0 no fault 1 fault 6 DI6 0 no fault 1 fault 7 DI7 0 no fault 1 fault 8 DI8 0 no fault 1 fault 9 DIO 0 no fault 1 fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 no fa
376. ings have to be made now DsetxXVal3 90 03 2501 TorgRefA 25 01 and DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 107 MotTorgFilt 1 07 Parameter group 51 Parameter group 90 and 92 iname setvalue PLC lt gt Drive Datasets name def value 1 1 90 01 DsetValt f 701 7 PPO 1 PPO 3 PPO 2 PPO 4 Nn 51 11 PZD60UT 9 i 42 1 51 13 PZD7OUT i 13 i 16 Setting of data words using group 90 and group 92 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 138 Switch on sequence RemoteCmd ch O SS Inching2 2 RampOutZerd SS Inching1 SS RamplinZero S RampHold CH N Reset Off before On On main cont On Run with reference E Stop Start inhibit Examples for the MainCtrlWord 7 01 Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 139 Data set table A lot of fieldbus communications use the data set table to transmit data words The next table shows the configuration number of each data word and the corresponding pointer Parameter pointer from PLC to DCS800 Parameter pointer from DCS800 to PLC Parameter pointer from PLC to DCS800 Parameter pointer from DCS800 to PLC Parameter pointer from PLC to DCS800 Parameter pointer from DCS800 to PLC Configuration no Configuration no Data set no Data set no Data set no EN ealooiel Aenlomnl a wlm fConfiguration no e
377. ink only available if OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv 9 FluxRefEMF FiuxRefEMF 3 27 EMF controller reference from armature converter only if available OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv max CurRef311 def LE EL EI El CurRef311 FluxRefEME Note1 In case OperModeSel 43 01 is 12PParSlave CurSel 43 02 is overwritten by the current reference from the 12 pulse parallel master Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N CurRefExt external current reference External current reference in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Note1 CurRefExt 43 03 is only valid if CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRefSlope current reference slope CurRefSlope 43 04 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 per 1 ms The di dt limitation is located at the input of the current controller Int Scaling 100 1 ms Type Volatile N CtrlModeSel control mode selector Current controller mode selection 0 Standard Pl controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current actual plus feed forward default 1 FeedFwdRef Pl controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current reference plus feed forward 2 NoFeedFwd Pl controller without RL compensation of EMF No feed forward takes place Standard to o 3 reserved 4 PowerSupply2 PwrSupplyRefExt 43 24 is fed into the current control chain directly after the current controller The current controller is blocked Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile
378. input Al4 7 Al5 analog input AIS 8 Al6 analog input Al6 Note1 Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e g suspended load The preset torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open lift command is removed After energizing the drive the value of StrtTorqRef 42 08 is set as torque memory Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N StrtTorqRef start torque reference Selected motor start torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N BrakeEStopMode emergency stop mode brake Selected motor BrakeEStopMode 42 09 determines the reaction when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 Off3N respectively E stop is set low 0 Disable the brake is closed applied according to the standard brake control default 1 Enable the brake is closed applied immediately together with the E stop command Note1 If BrakeEStopMode 42 09 Enable the E StopRamp 22 04 should be shorter than the time needed to stop the motor with the mechanical brake applied only Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N T xe bk bk Y Yn D D ES E OJ OJ ES ES LOJ QJ NI OJ Q Q O bei bei 2 2 Q O Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1TorqProvTime motor 1 torque proving time Brake torque proving acknowledge The drive trips with F556 TorqProv FaultWord4 9 04 bit 7 if the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is s
379. ins voltage 12 pulse current difference only for 12 pulse 9 03 always parallel operation bit 1 Check DiffCurLim 47 02 DiffCurDly 47 03 parameter settings of group 43 current control armature current controller 12 pulse communication 9 03 Check bit 2 12P TimeOut 94 03 DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodeID 94 01 12P SlaNode 94 04 EC o o Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 433 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and Triplevel DriveWindow Light 536 12PSlaveFail 12 pulse slave failure 9 03 RdyOn 1 12 pulse master is tripped by a fault of the 12 pulse bit 3 slave Check Fault logger of 12 pulse slave Motor 1 field exciter ready lost 9 03 RdyRun 1 M1FexRdyLost Field exciter lost ready for operation message while bit 4 working AC voltage missing or not in synchronism Check if all phases are present VU the mains voltage is within the set tolerance fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 538 Motor 2 field exciter ready lost 9 03 RdyRun M2FexRdyLost Field exciter lost ready for operation message while bit 5 working AC voltage missing or not in synchronism Check 1 1 ifall phases are present if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance fault message at
380. is forced to forward direction 2 Reverse field direction is forced to reverse direction 3 ExtReverse In case an external contactor in the field current loop is used to change the field direction ForceFidDir 45 07 has to be switched between Forward and ExtReverse ExtReverse adapts the armature voltage and speed supervision The external contactor interlocking and the control of ForceFldDir 45 07 has to be done by means of Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N 45 08 FluxRevMonDly flux reversal monitoring delay Maximum allowed time within Mot1FldCurRel 1 29 and the internal motor flux doesn t correspond to each other during field reversal During this time F522 SpeedFb Fau tWora2 9 02 bit 5 is disabled Note1 FluxRevMonDly 45 08 is only effective for FidCirlMode 44 01 Fix Rev EMF Rev Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N FidRevHyst field current reversal hysteresis The sign of Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 is used to generate the field reversal acknowledge To avoid signal noise problems a small hysteresis in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 is needed Note1 FidRevHyst 45 09 is only effective for FidCtriMode 44 01 Fix Rev EMF Rev Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N is symmetrical and is set by FidRefHyst 45 10 The field reversal is controlled by the sign of TorqRefUsed 2 13
381. is not connected 105 120 reserved Al monitoring 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Al1 below 4 mA Al2 below 4 mA Al3 below 4 mA Al4 below 4 mA AIS below 4 mA Al6 below 4 mA AITAC below 4 mA 128 149 reserved Option modules 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 fieldbus module missing see CommModule 98 02 SDCS COM 8 for DDCS respectively fieldbus communication missing see CommMoadule 98 02 SDCS COM 8 for master follower communication missing see group 70 reserved RMBA xx module missing see group 98 RAIO xx in option slot on SDCS CON 4 missing see group 98 RAIO xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98 RDIO xx in option slot on SDCS CON 4 missing see group 98 RDIO xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98 RTAC xx in option slot on SDCS CON 4 missing see group 98 RTAC xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98 reserved SDCS IOB 2x respectively SDCS IOB 3 connection does not match selection in JO BoardConftig 98 15 SDCS DSL 4 missing see group 94 needed for DCSLink SDCS DSL 4 missing see group 94 needed for Modbus A134 ParComp alarm parameter compatibility conflict 10000 19999 the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits ParNoCyc notice parameter not cyclic 20000 29999 the not cyclic parameter with is being written to by means of a pointer par
382. is possible to force and clamp the field current direction This gives the user the possibility to control the field current direction or change it in case of need Thus unnecessary field current changes at low torque are prevented and it is also possible to release field reversal for certain occasions e g jogging or E stop The physical reversal time can be reduced by increasing the input voltage of the field exciter Please note that the output voltage of the field exciter is limited by means of M1PosLimCtrl 45 02 or M2PosLimCtrl 45 16 This can also increase the physical reversal time Due to high inductances of motors the field reversal takes a relatively long time In certain cases this time can be reduced by means of optitorque see FldCtriMode 44 01 In case the process requires only a small torque during field reversal the field current is decreased and the armature current is increased prior to the field current change This speeds up the field reversal The rate of the field current reduction depends on the process E g if the speed direction is changed rather slowly the required torque may also be quite small This allows the reduction of the field current Thus by means of optitorque it is possible to shorten the field reversal time In optitorque mode the field current will be reduced proportionally to TorgRefUsed 2 13 The relation between TorqRefUsed 2 13 and field current is defined by FldRefGain 45 11 Firm
383. is written directly onto the speed error summation point Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RampinZero 0 see MainCtriWord 70 1 Type Volatile N SpeedRef2301 Enc2Direct max SpeedRef2301 def Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 0 SpeedRef2301 1 AuxSpeedRef 2 All1 3 Al2 4 AI3 5 Al4 6 AIS 7 Al6 8 FixedSpeed1 9 FixedSpeed2 10 MotPot 11 Al2 Al3 12 Al2 Al3 13 Al1 Al2 14 Al2 Al3 15 MinAI2Al4 16 MaxAl2Al4 17 Encoder2 Int Scaling 1 Signal Parameter name Ref2Sel speed reference 2 input signal Speed reference 2 value SpeedRef 23 01 default AuxSpeedRef 23 13 analog input Al1 analog input Al2 analog input AI3 analog input Al4 analog input AIS analog input Al6 FixedSpeed 23 02 FixedSpeed 2 23 03 motor pot controlled by MotPotUp 11 13 MotPotDown 11 14 and MotPotMin 11 15 Al2 minus Al3 Al2 plus Al3 Al1 multiplied with Al2 Al2 multiplied with Al3 minimum of Al2 and Al4 maximum of Al2 and Al4 pulse encoder 2 Volatile N SpeedRef2301 max Encoder2 SpeedRef2301 def 241 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 242 Signal Parameter name Ref2Mux speed reference 2 selector multiplexer Speed reference 2 selector 0 Invert1102 Invert speed ref 1 selection implements a change ove
384. it14 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW BA 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed ACW Biti Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 232 Signal Parameter name ParChange parameter change Binary signal to release either Motor1 User1 or Motor2 User2 The choice to release Motor1 2 shared motion or macros User1 2 is defined by means of MacroChangeMode 16 05 0 NotUsed default 1 DH switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 2 DI2 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 3 DI switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 4 Dl4 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 5 DI5 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 6 DI6 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1
385. iter acknowledge via Al3 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADW00031 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 188 Signal Parameter name 4 07 Mot2FexType motor 2 type of field exciter Motor 2 field exciter type Read from M2UsedFexType 49 07 0 NotUsed 1 OnBoard 2 FEX 425 Int 3 DCF803 0035 4 DCF803 0050 5 DCF804 0050 6 DCF803 0060 7 DCF804 0060 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 10 DCF803 0016 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 17 ExFex Al2 18 ExFex Al3 no or foreign field exciter connected integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 2 Q 3 phase field exci
386. ither 10 of MainsVoltAct 1 11 or 10 V is undershot Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N ACW Biti Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 97 19 ZeroCurTimeOut zero current timeout After a command to change current direction the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 I act CtrlStat Las 6 09 bit 13 is set CtriStat las 6 09 Zero current bit 12 is set detection RevDly 43 14 ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 The reversal delay time starts when zero current has been detected after a command to change current direction has been given The time needed to change the current direction can be longer when changing from motoring mode to regenerative mode at high motor voltages because the motor voltage must be reduced before switching to regenerative mode see also RevVoltMargin 44 21 ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must have the same setting for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave with one exception only If there is no current measurement in the 12 pulse serial slave set ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 in the 12 pulse serial slave to maximum 12000 ms Note1 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 and ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must be longer than RevDly 43 14 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TorqActFiltTime actual torq
387. ither F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Firmware 1 drive Firmware 2 drive MailBoxCycle1 94 13 100 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 200 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 200 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 100 Send and receive values Each mailbox can transmit receive up to 4 values depending on the sign of the mailbox node ID number 1 mailbox TrmtRecVal1 1 94 14 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 15 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 TrmtRecVal1 4 94 17 2 mailbox TrmtRecVal2 1 94 20 TrmtRecVal2 2 94 21 TrmtRecVal2 3 94 22 TrmtRecVal2 4 94 23 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 93 12 pulse Set the DCSLink hardware Cable connection 12 pulse master SDCS DSL 4 12 pulse slave SDCS DSL 4 X8 X8 X51 1 F AVT amA X51 1 A t S1 o CANL J X8 Dara Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus 120 ohm 1 1 4 W In the above example termination is mandatory at the 12 pulse master and the excitation SDCS DSL 4 jumper S1
388. ives electronics With the very first energizing of the drives electronics the motor s ambient temperature is set to 30 C WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it is not properly cooled e g due to dust and dirt Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1ModelTime2 motor 1 model time 2 constant Thermal time constant for motor 1 with fan forced cooling if motor fan is switched off fan on fan off Attention For motors without fan set M1ModelTime 31 01 M1ModelTime2 31 02 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N M1AlarmLimLoad motor 1 alarm limit load The drive sets A107 M1OverLoad AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 6 if M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 thermal model is Mot1TempCalc 1 20 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N M1FaultLimLoad motor 1 fault limit load The drive trips with F507 M1OverLoad FaultWord1 9 01 bit 6 if M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 thermal model is Mot1TempCalc 1 20 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1TempSel motor 1 temperature selector M1TempSel 31 05 selects motor 1 measured temperature input Connection possibilities for PT100 max 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max 3 PT100 for motor 2 or up to 6 PT100 for motor 1 only Connection
389. justed at the external device Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N ResCurDetectLim residual current detection limit Residual current detection ripping level If ResCurDetectSel 30 05 is connected to a digital input ResCurDetectLim 30 06 is deactivated because the limit is adjusted at the external device Int Scaling 10 1 A Type l Volatile N 30 07 ResCurDetectDel residual current detection delay Time delay for F505 ResCurDetect FaultWord1 9 01 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N eg wol 4 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 287 Signal Parameter name 30 08 ArmOvrVoltLev armature overvoltage level The drive trips with F503 ArmOverVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 2 if ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 is exceeded It is recommended to set ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 at least 20 higher than M1NomVolt 99 02 Example With M1NomVolt 99 02 525 V and ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 120 the drive trips with armature voltages gt 630 V Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N ArmOvrCurLev armature overcurrent level The drive trips with F502 ArmOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 1 if ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 is exceeded It is recommended to set ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 at least 25 higher than M1NomCur 99 03 Example With M1NomCur 99 03 850 A and ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 250 the drive trips with armature current
390. l p0 zy funpeedsoszin 600z 2160 aaua LI wesBoig anndepy Aq o uapum Aljensn si ajewed JE Keeler weed BER e ETC onesnazoua Eros sawed JESS paadgienoiow zess BEN eg ups EIS epowseawzoua Igro pue6ey wesuaapeeds ZI 06 SET Z Jepooue asd zeman awa HIST OE z t ERR TC 001 AYLIN HEL OS Geet E snipyyoesiw Het 05 p
391. l be disregarded MI1FIdMinTrip 30 12 M2FidMinTrip 49 08 Note1 FldMinTripDly 45 18 is blocked when OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N S M1FidScale set motor 1 field current scaling factor Motor 1 field exciter scaling factor S M1FIdScale 45 20 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode To use S M1FldScale 45 20 following inequation has to be valid M1NomFldCur 99 11 lt S M1FldScale 45 20 lt maximum field current of the used field exciter For S M1FidScale 45 20 gt maximum field current of the used field exciter A132 ParConflict AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 15 is generated For MiNomFidCur 99 11 gt S M1FldScale 45 20 the scaling is automatically set by M1NomFidCur 99 11 The scaling factor is released when M1NomFidCur 99 11 lt S M1FidScale 45 20 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over immediately Int Scaling 100 1A Type l Volatile N S M2FldScale set motor 2 field current scaling factor Motor 2 field exciter scaling factor S M2FIdScale 45 21 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode To use S M2FidScale 45 21 following inequation has to be valid M2NomFidCur 49 05 lt S M2FidScale 45 21 lt maximum field current of the used field exciter For S M2FidScale 45 21 gt maximum field current of the used field exciter A132 ParConfli
392. l current is monitored against the overcurrent level of the converter module The converters actual overcurrent level can be read from ConvOvrCur 4 16 Exceeding one of the two levels causes F502 ArmOverCur Converter overtemperature converter fan current Converter overtemperature The maximum temperature of the bridge can be read from MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 and is automatically set by TypeCode 97 01 or manually set by S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 Note When setting the air entry temperature for D6 and D7 modules manually use MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 50 C as absolute maximum Exceeding this level causes F504 ConvOverTemp The threshold for A104 ConvOverTemp is 5 C below the tripping level The measured temperature can be read from BridgeTemp 1 24 If the measured temperature drops below minus 10 C F504 ConvOverTemp is generated Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 405 Auto reclosing mains undervoltage Auto reclosing allows to continue drive operation immediately after a short mains undervoltage without any additional functions in the overriding control system In order to keep the overriding control system and the drive control electronics running through short mains undervoltage an UPS is needed for the 115 230 VAC auxiliary voltages Without the UPS all DI like e g E stop start inhibition acknowledge signals etc would have false states and trip the drive although the system itself could s
393. l part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal torque with KpS 24 03 3 if the speed error An is 5 of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 On that condition and with TiS 24 09 300 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal torque if the speed error An is constant after 300 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting T S 24 09 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the speed controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TiSinitValue initial value for i part speed controller Initial value of the speed controller integrator in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 The integrator is set as soon as RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 becomes valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 277 Signal Parameter name BalRef balance speed reference External value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Both i part and output of the speed controller are forced to BalRef 24 11 when AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 8 1 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N DerivTime d part speed controller Speed controller derivation time DerivTime 24 12 defines the time within the speed controller derives the error value The speed controller works as PI controller if DerivTime 24 12 is set to zero Int Scaling
394. lay 42 13 is started During M1BrakeStopDelay 42 13 the motor control remains active with speed reference set to zero and the speed controller stays alive This function compensates for the mechanical close apply delay of the brake The brake can be forced by ForceBrake AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 12 ForceBrake 1 If ForceBrake is set the brake remains closed applied If the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is given to a drive in state RdyOn or RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 bit 0 and 1 the brake logic will be started up to the point of the brake open lift command A drive in state Running MainStatWord 8 01 bit 2 will be stopped by ramp the brake will be closed applied but the drive will remain in state Running ForceBrake 0 The brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 Brake control ee SS Pg oo WE EE EEN uit J O O O O O M1BrakeCirl motor 1 brake control Releases the control of motor 1 brake 0 NotUsed brake logic is blocked default 1 On brake logic is released according to it s parameter settings 2 BrakeClose test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always closed applied 3 BrakeOpen test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always opened lifted Attention A closed applied brake will open lift immediately Do not use this mode with e g an unsaved crane drive The brake open lift command BrakeCmd is readable in AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 a
395. lay overview The following table summarizes the button functions and displays of the DCS800 Control Panel Status LED e Green for normal operation e Flashing green for alarms e Red for faults Soft key 1 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower left corner of the LCD display Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the middle of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected e Increments the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted in reverse video LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive STOP Stops the drive in local control from DCS800 panel and when the Start up Assistant is used General display features LCD display Divided into three main areas e Top line variable depending on the mode of operation e Middle area variable in general shows parameter values menus or lists e Bottom line shows current function of the two soft keys and the clock display if enabled START Starts the drive in local control from DCS800 panel and when the Start up assistant is used Soft key functions The soft key functions are defined by the text displayed just above each key Display contrast Soft key 2 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower right corner of the LCD display Down e Scrolls down through a menu or lis displayed in the middle of the LCD Display e Dec
396. le N TorqMax maximum torque Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for selector TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqMin minimum torque Minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for selector TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N 20 07 TorqMaxSPC maximum torque speed controller Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 at the output of the speed controller TorqRef2 2 09 Note1 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 262 Signal Parameter name 20 08 TorqMinSPC minimum torque speed controller Minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 at the output of the speed controller TorqRef2 2 09 Note1 The used torque limit depends also on the converte
397. lean ParRead Type Logical function Illustration ParRead IN1 IN2 OUT Operation OUT shows the value of a parameter which is defined with IN1 as parameter group Connections and IN2 as parameter index Example for reading parameter 22 01 IN1 22 and IN2 01 Input IN1 and IN2 Input IN3 Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign defined as constants not used 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Adaptive Program 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 163 ParWrite Type Logical function Illustration IN IN2 OUT Operation Value of IN1 is written into a parameter which is defined with IN2 as parameter group 100 parameter index IN3 is Boolean True means save in flash and False means save not in flash OUT gives the error code if parameter access is denied Example to set parameter 22 01 150 not saving into flash IN1 150 value of the signal or parameter IN2 2201 this must be a defined as a constant and not as a parameter IN3 false Connections Input IN1 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign defined as constant Input IN3 Boolean value Output OUT byte code PI Type Arithmetic controller Illustration Operation OUT is IN1 multiplied by IN2 100 plus integrated IN1 multiplied by IN3 100 Connections O 11 12 100 73 100 ln Note The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors Input IN1 16 bi
398. lemented yet 7 Fran ais 8 Dansk not implemented yet 9 Suomi not implemented yet 10 Svenska not implemented yet 11 Po Russki not implemented yet 12 Polski not implemented yet 13 Turkish not implemented yet 14 Cesky not implemented yet Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N M1NomVolt motor 1 nominal DC voltage Motor 1 nominal armature voltage DC from the motor rating plate Note1 In 12 pulse serial mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor voltage if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in series are connected it is 100 of one motor s rated voltage Note2 The hardware of the measuring circuit has to be adapted for motor voltages lower than 50V Int Scaling 1 1V Type l Volatile N 350 Po y v e Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1NomCur motor 1 nominal DC current Motor 1 nominal armature current DC from the motor rating plate If several motors are connected to the drive enter the total current of all motors Note1 In 12 pulse parallel mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor current if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 of one motor s rated current Note2 In case the converter is used as a 3
399. level 230 VAC lt 185 VAC 115 VAC lt 96 VAC 502 ArmOverCur Armature overcurrent 9 01 always 3 Check bit 1 ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 parameter settings of group 43 current control armature current controller tuning current and torque limitation in group 20 all connections in the armature circuit for faulty thyristors armature cabling in case of a rebuild kit proper connection of firing pulses and CT s if TypeCode 97 01 None and S ConvScaleCur 97 02 is set properly 503 ArmOverVolt Armature overvoltage DC 9 01 always 1 Check bit 2 if setting of ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 is suitable for the system parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning EMF controller tuning flux linearization too high field current e g problems with field weakening if the motor was accelerated by the load overspeed does the speed scaling fit see SoeedScaleAct 2 29 proper armature voltage feedback connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 425 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 504 Converter overtemperature 9 01 always ConvOverTemp Wait until the converter is cooled down bit 3 Shutdown temperature see MaxBridg
400. lifted AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N brake is open lifted only available Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M2BrakeRefDly motor 2 brake reference delay Brake open lift delay This function compensates for the mechanical open lift delay of the brake During the start Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 1 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller output is set to start torque see M2StrtTorqRefSel 49 44 until M2BrakeRefDly 49 30 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2ZeroSpeedDly motor 2 zero speed delay This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 to actual speed 0 Until M2ZeroSpeedDly 49 31 is elapsed the brake is kept open lifted Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2ModelTime motor 2 model time constant Thermal time constant for motor 2 with fan forced cooling The time within the temperature rises to 63 of its nominal value The motor thermal model is blocked if M2ModelTi
401. llel are connected it is 100 of one motor s rated current Note2 In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M2NomCur 49 02 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 1 1A Type l Volatile N M2BaseSpeed motor 2 base speed Motor 2 base speed from the rating plate usually the field weak point M2BaseSpeed 49 03 is must be set in the range of 0 2 to 1 6 times of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type l Volatile N M2ZeroSpeedLim motor 2 zero speed limit When the Run command is removed set UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 to zero the drive will stop as chosen by StopMode 21 03 As soon as the actual speed reaches the limit set by M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 the motor will coast independent of the setting of StopMode 21 03 Existing brakes are closed applied While the actual speed is in the limit ZeroSpeed AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 11 is high Note1 In case FlyStart 21 10 StartFrom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 4 is generated Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N M2NomFldCur motor 2 nominal field current Motor 2 nominal field current from the motor rating plate Note1 In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M2NomCur 49 05 to set the nominal field current Int S
402. lue 2 in percent of the source of PID Ref2 40 14 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref2Max PID controller maximum limit reference input value 2 Maximum limit of the PID controller reference input value 2 in percent of the source of PID Ref2 40 14 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N 10 o ol ml of ofl ol of so s5 bet a a e gt 1 bet a a oO 1 ike NI lop r ite NI ke gag ol s ol Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name PID Mux PID controller reference input selector multiplexer PID controller reference input selector 0 PID1 reference input 1 is selected default 1 PID2 reference input 2 is selected 2 Dl1 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 3 DI2 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 4 DIS 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 5 D 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 6 DI5 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 7 DI6 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 8 DI7 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 9 DIS reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 10 DI9 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected available with digital extension boa
403. lues SDCS PIN 4 DO8 max 3 A 24 VDC max 0 3 A 115 VDC 230 VDC or max 3 A 230 VAC for more details see Hardware Manual Output values SCDS IOB 2 DO6 and DO7 max 50 mA 24 VDC all others max 3 A 24 VDC max 0 3 A 115 VDC 230 VDC or max 3A 250 VAC for more details see Hardware Manual Cycle time for DO to DO8 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency 17 and 2 RDIO 01 The extension DO s are isolated by means of relays Output values max 5 A 24 VDC max 0 4 A 120 VDC or max 1250 VA 250 VAC for more details see RDIO 01 User s Manual Cycle time for DO9 to DO12 5msconnected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO 01 boards with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery JO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Configuration 73 All DO s can be read from DO StatWord 8 06 bit DO configurable default setting 0 1 yes FansOn CurCirlStat1 6 03 Di 1 2 yes FieldOn CurCirlStat1 6 03 DIS 2 3 yes MainContactorOn CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit7 3 4 yes 4 5 yes 5 6 yes 6 7 yes 7 8 yes MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit7 8 9 no not selectable 9 10 no not selectable 10 11 no not selectable 11 12 no not selectable Configurable yes The DO s can be conne
404. ly valid if 2 pulse encoders are connected Depending on the setting of M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 the speed feedback is switched from pulse encoder 1 to pulse encoder 2 or vice versa in case of a problem and A125 SpeedFb AlarmWora 2 9 07 bit 8 is set Change from encoderl to encoder 2 or vice versa Change from encoder to encoder 2 or vice versa Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name CurRippleSel current ripple selector CurRippleSel 30 18 determines the reaction when CurRippleLim 30 19 is reached 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 Fault the drive trips with F517 ArmCurRipple Fau tWord2 9 02 bit 0 default 2 Alarm A117 ArmCurRipple AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 0 is set The current ripple function detects a broken fuse thyristor or current transformer T51 T52 too high gain of the current controller Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N CurRippleLim current ripple limit Threshold for CurRippleSel 30 18 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Typical values when a thyristor is missing armature about 300 high inductive loads e g excitation about 90 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N PwrLossTrip power loss trip The action taken when the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin2 30 23 0 Immediately the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 d
405. m limit The default values are selected in order to achieve quite high overload ability Recommended value for alarming is 102 and for tripping 106 of nominal motor current Thus the temperature rise is M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 102 1 02 1 04 and d M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 106 1 06 1 12 The temperature rise output of the model is shown in Mot1TempCalc 1 20 Thermal model selection The activation of the thermal models is made by setting M1ModelTime 31 01 greater than zero Thermal time constant The time constant for the thermal model is set by means of M1ModelTime 31 01 If the thermal time constant of a motor is given by the manufacturer just write it into M1Model Time 31 01 In many cases the motor manufacturer provides a curve that defines how long the motor can be overloaded by a certain overload factor In this case the proper thermal time constant must be calculated Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 415 Example The drive is desired to trip if the motor current exceeds 170 of motor nominal current for more than 60 seconds Selected tripping base level is 106 of nominal motor current thus M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 106 Current ha Example 31 04 Prp 106 112 Sg lact 170 240 Juan 100 200 t 60s 180 160 140 120 100 30 60 300 600 6000 _ Time sec DCS800 FW mot load curv dsf Motor load curve
406. me 49 32 is set to zero The value of Mot2TempCalc 1 21 is saved at power down of the drives electronics With the very first energizing of the drives electronics the motor s ambient temperature is set to 30 C WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it is not properly cooled e g due to dust and dirt Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2AlarmLimLoad motor 2 alarm limit load The drive sets A110 M2OverLoad AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 9 if M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 thermal model is Mot2TempCalc 1 21 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N M2FaultLimLoad motor 2 fault limit load The drive trips with F510 M2OverLoad FaultWord1 9 01 bit 9 if M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 thermal model is Mot2TempCalc 1 21 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M2TempSel motor 2 temperature selector M2TempSel 49 33 selects motor 2 measured temperature input Connection possibilities for PT100 max 3 PT100 for motor 2 and max 3 PT100 for motor 1 or upto 6 PT100 for motor 2 only Connection possibilities PTC max 1 PTC for motor 2 and max 1 PTC for motor 1 or upto 2 PTC for motor 2 only 0 NotUsed motor 2 temperature measurement is blocked default 1 1PT100 AIS one
407. me FaultWord3 9 03 bit 0 F534 12PCurDiff FaultWord3 9 03 bit 1 or F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 no action OperModeSel 43 01 12P OperModeSel 43 01 FieldExciter Overvoltage protection active freewheeling no action motor 1 field exciter selftest faulty F529 M1FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 12 motor 1 field exciter selftest OK motor 1 field exciter not ready F537 M1FexRdyLost FaultWord3 9 03 bit 4 motor 1 field exciter ready motor 2 field exciter selftest faulty F530 M2FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 13 motor 2 field exciter selftest OK motor 2 field exciter not ready F538 M2FexRdyLost Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 5 motor 2 field exciter ready waiting for zero current no action field reversal active armature current controller is blocked no action current controller not released because DevLimPLL 97 13 is reached no action mains not in synchronism AC F514 MainsNotSync FaultWord1 9 01 bit 13 no action Current controller not released This bit is set in case of a relevant fault Fxxx or an alarm Axxx of alarm level 3 no action Note1 A set bit does not necessarily lead to a fault message it depends also on the status of the drive Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 197 Signal Parameter name SelBridge selected bridge Selected current conducting bridge NoBridge no bridge selected
408. mperature from motor thermal model Used for motor overtemperature protection M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile Y MotiTempMeas motor 1 measured temperature Motor 1 measured temperature Used for motor overtemperature protection Unit depends on setting of M1 TempSel 31 05 NotUsed 1 to 6 PT100 C PTC Q Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Volatile Y Mot2TempMeas motor 2 measured temperature Motor 2 measured temperature Used for motor overtemperature protection Unit depends on setting of M2TempSel 49 35 NotUsed 1 to 6 PT100 C PTC Q Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Volatile Y BridgeTemp actual bridge temperature Actual bridge temperature in degree centigrade Int Scaling 1 1 C Type l Volatile Y CtriMode control mode Used control mode see TorgSel 26 01 NotUsed SpeedCtrlspeed control TorqCtrl torque control CurCtrl current control Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y MotiFidCurRel motor 1 relative actual field current Motor 1 relative field current in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Mot1FidCur motor 1 actual field current Motor 1 field current Filtered with 500 ms Int Scaling 100 1A Type SI Volatile Y Mot2FidCurRel motor 2 relative actual field current Motor 2 relative field cu
409. mperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 Fault is active when Triplevel Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 427 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and Triplevel DriveWindow Light 510 M2OverLoad Motor 2 calculated overload 9 01 always Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will bit 9 continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 _M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 511 ConvFanCur Converter fan current 9 01 RdyRun 1 only with ConvTempDly 97 05 0 and a PW 10002 3 bit 10 board connected to SDCS PIN 4 51 Check converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter fan components converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 512 MainsLowVolt Mains low under voltage AC 9 01 RdyRun Check bit 11 PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 if all 3 phases are present if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance if the main contactor closes and opens if the mains voltage scaling is correct NomMains Volt 99 10 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN
410. n 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 110 RX PDO21 1stObj 51 07 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Control Word see page 63 Data set 1 word 1 RX PDO21 1stSubj 51 08 1 Hex 1 Control Word see page 63 Data set 1 word 1 RX PDO21 2ndObj 51 09 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Reference 1 see page 63 Data set 1 word 2 RX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 10 2 Hex 2 Reference 1 see page 63 Data set 1 word 2 RX PDO21 3rdObj 51 11 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Reference 2 see page 63 Data set 1 word 3 RX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 12 3 Hex 3 Reference 2 see page 63 Data set 1 word 3 RX PDO21 4thObj 51 13 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Reference 3 see page 63 Data set 3 word 1 RX PDO21 4thSubj 51 14 7 Hex 7 Reference 3 see page 63 Data set 3 word 1 TX PDO21 Enable 51 15 641 This value has to be calculated with 280 Hex 640 Node ID 51 02 Here 640 1 641 TX PDO21 TxType 51 16 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 TX PDO21 EvTime 51 17 10 10 10ms TX PDO21 1stObj 51 18 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Status Word see page 63 Data set 2 word 1 TX PDO21 1stSubj 51 19 4 Hex 4 Status Word see page 63 Data set 2 word 1 TX PDO21 2ndObj 51 20 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Actual Value 1 see page 63 Data set 2 word 2 TX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 21 5 Hex 5 Actual Value 1 see page 63
411. n Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Ea 613 UserFault4 User defined fault by application program bit 3 ficial 614 UserFault5 User defined fault by application program bit 4 GE 615 UserFault6 User defined fault by application program bit 5 este 616 UserFault7 User defined fault by application program bit 6 F617 617 UserFault8 User defined fault by application program bit 7 GEN 618 UserFault9 User defined fault by application program bit 8 Ke 619 UserFaulti0 User defined fault by application program bit 9 eee 620 UserFault11 User defined fault by application program bit 10 EH 621 UserFaulti12 User defined fault by application program bit 11 ER 622 UserFault13 User defined fault by application program bit 12 oe 623 UserFault14 User defined fault by application program bit 13 ea 624 UserFault15 User defined fault by application program bit 14 625 UserFault16 User defined fault by application program 05 bit 15 EE Ee EE Lz Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 438 Alarm signals A An alarm is a message that a condition occurred which may lead to a dangerous situation It is displayed and written into the fault logger However the cause for the alarm can inhibit the drive from continuing with normal operation If the cause of the alarm disappears the alarm will be automatically reset The fault logger shows the appearing alarm with
412. n be written to with the DCS800 Control Panel the commissioning tools the Adaptive Program and application program Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table DDCS link via ChO e g Control panel D Val of SDCS COM 8 pees ane te as Address assignment of dataset 19 01 Serial communication via p Group Index p 19 02 slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 92 05 ven 19 04 D 19 12 X see ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr dsf Note1 This parameter group can be used as well for reading writing analog inputs outputs Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Data1 data container 1 Data container 1 See group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N Data2 data container 2 Data container 2 see group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Data3 data container 3 Data container 3 see group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Data4 data container 4 Data container 4 see group description above
413. n eege ee ENEE 358 VOU SB EEEE E L oh tea cca seas testa kbar thes acerca E ae Es Granteel coisa dite 360 a un RE 360 Gro p 9O neh ic EE 362 Receiving data sets addresses 1 cecccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseesseeeenseeeeeeees 362 OUD Oeste eine teas Reh Ae E ET E EEEE areata eae ea eter eet 364 Receiving data sets addresses 2 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeees 364 Group EE 365 Transmit data sets addresses 1 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 365 GVO OS rai ses ate a te cea eae E cal oa aa E EEA 367 Transmit data sets addresses 2 367 Ee DSA E a atthe NON rc eG ated Deed hapa EE 368 DCSEink control osere eng e a EES aerate 368 AO SRS EH 376 Meas reme nt sahii ie aandaa E eege gege Eeer egen 376 Eet EE 383 Be te Rue HI 383 EILER 389 le ege E EE 389 DCS800 Control Panel operation 395 t EE 395 PAE UD EEEE E axccaas dasceecahahey nce node aoe EAE E E N 395 DCS800 Control PAM E 395 BIEL 396 General display features EE 396 OUTPUT MOG EE 397 MAGE NOUS EE 398 Ee ee 403 Fault tracing 404 Chapter OVEIWIOW edd EES 404 EI E 404 Fault Modes ee ege EE 404 Convener protection EE 404 Auxiliary UNGOrVON EE 404 Table of contents 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 18 Armat re overture Eege a DE i a a E a ead aE Converter overtemperature converter fan Current Auto reclosing mains undervoltage ss sssssseesssseresssrrrnerrtrrrrsrtrrssrrr
414. n false for a time equal or longer than IN2 OUT remains true as long as IN1 1 plus the time defined in IN2 IN1 1 0 gt t j i IN2 IN2 OUT All bits 1 i All bits 0 Values on display True 1 false 0 With IN3 False the delay time of IN2 is scaled in ms with IN3 True the delay time of IN2 is scaled in s Input IN1 and IN3 boolean value Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 168 TON Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function OUT is true when IN1 has been true for a time equal or longer than IN2 IN1 i S ti N2 IN2 noe OUT All bits 1 All bits 0 time Values on display True 1 false 0 With IN3 False the delay time of IN2 is scaled in ms with IN3 True the delay time of IN2 is scaled in s Input IN1 and IN3 boolean value Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean Trigg Type Illustration Operation Logical function The rising edge of IN1 sets OUT bit 0 for one program cycle The rising edge of IN2 sets OUT bit 1 for one program cycle The rising edge of IN3 sets OUT bit 2 for one program cycle Example T Program cycle IN packed Boolean to 2 10V 0 OUT Bit 0 t 1 0 T EEN Adaptive Program 8ADW000193R0601
415. n setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 Rollover 0 0 and 65536 360 See also SyncCommand 2 10 05 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N PosCount2InitHi Position counter encoder 2 high initial value Position counter initial high word for pulse encoder 2 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 65536 pulse edges Scaled 1 1 revolution Rollover always 0 See also SyncCommand 2 10 05 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Sl Volatile N Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 345 Signal Parameter name This parameter group defines the communication parameters for fieldbus adapters Fxxx Rxxx and Nxxx The parameter names and the number of the used parameters depend on the selected fieldbus adapter see fieldbus adapter manual Note1 If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Fieldbus1 fieldbus parameter 1 Fieldbus parameter 1 Volatile Y Fieldbus15 fieldbus parameter 15 Fieldbus parameter 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Fieldbus16 fieldbus parameter 16 Fieldbus parameter 16 Volatile N 51 27 FBA PAR REFRESH fieldbus parameter refreshing If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27
416. nBraking fan contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 CoastStop but stays on in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop TorqueLimit or DynBraking At standstill the main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor stays on in case of field heating fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly 21 14 is running Trip level 5 As long as the drive is stopping via any communication loss control Loca LossCtrl 30 27 ComLossCtrl 30 28 ChoComLossCtrl 70 05 or Ch2ComLossCtrl 70 15 the main contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected communication loss control field contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected communication loss control but it stays on in case of field heating fan contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected communication loss control At standstill main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor stays on in case of field heating fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly 21 14 is running In case a fault occurs it stays active until the cause is eliminated and a Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 is given Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 423 Fault name Fault number Fault name Fault number 12
417. name Al6LowVal analog input 6 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in AlJO6LowVal 13 26 Note1 Al6LowVal 13 26 is only valid if ConvModeAl6 13 27 10V Bi Note2 To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl6 conversion mode analog input 6 The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and current is done via DIP switches on the RAIO 01 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 1 0V 10V Uni OV to 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2 Vto 10V 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Digital outputs DO1Index digital output 1 index Digital output 1 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO1BitNo 14 02 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Examples If DO1Index 14 01 801 main status word and DO1BitNo 14 02 1 RdyRun digital output 1 is high when the drive is RdyRun H DO1I
418. nani an an eege 104 Mechanical and electrical installation AAA 105 Drive configuration EE 105 CANopen communication with fieldbus adapter RCAN 01 ssssssssesssseessnrrsserrrnrerrnerssrrrrsne 106 EL EE 106 RCAN OT DCS800 E 106 Related documentation 4s ccsiecdee ladies gedet 106 OVErriding Ree Ru le ELTER 106 EDS EE 106 Mechanical and electrical mstallapon AAA 106 DEVE COMMGUIPATIOM DEE EE 106 Parameter setting example 1 USING group DI 106 Fre ECHTER gerett teens ote TE aa aa Ea ewes ekainera 108 Parameter setting example 2 using groups 90 And 07 108 Re TE 111 ControlNet communication with fieldbus adapter RCNA 01 ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 112 General ae ergs EE 112 RONA 01 DOSB00 sec eei eso reegeeeerkedhe eege uge a Eege ee 112 Related documentation geeiert cen teseronaiitdankpaay ees censrteceapemanieee 112 Overriding Control configuration AEN 112 BS TUNG rei aa i aetna a meee tala A E A tad ates 112 Mechanical and electrical mstallapon AAA 112 Drive lte UI e teas eecdin cad ncaa wh aea edna reece es tenga ak oatha tee awe E LAS Ksa E aoia Ea 112 Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly AAA 112 Parameter setting example 2 using Vendor specific assembhy cece 114 Table of contents 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Setting of parameter groups 51 90 ANd 07 115 Further plett eier eier ER EE AER zantac tetas 115 WITCH RE TEE 115 DeviceNet communication with fieldbus
419. nced In case an application will be loaded anew all user defined parameters are set to default This procedure can also be used to repair a memory card After an action e g save load is finished ParApp Save 16 06 is changed back to Done This will take max 1 second Note1 Do not use the parameter save function unnecessarily Note2 Parameters changed by DCS800 Control Panel or commissioning tools are immediately saved into the flash Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y True max Motor1 2 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name USI Sel selector for user interface The user interface for the DCS800 Control Panel Compact Extended parameter list can be selected by USI Sel 16 09 0 Compact short parameter list C default 1 Extended long parameter list E Note1 USI Sel 16 09 works only for the DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light always show the extended parameter list Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N SetSystemTime set the drive s system time Sets the time of the converter in minutes The system time can be either set by means of SetSystemTime 16 11 or via the DCS800 Control Panel Int Scaling 1 1 min Type Volatile Y ToolLinkConfig tool link configuration The communication speed of the serial communication for the commissioning tool and the application program tool can be selected with ToolLinkConfig 16
420. nd IN3 16 bit integer values packed boolean Output OUT 16 bit integer values packed boolean Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 157 Bset Type Logical function Illustration Operation Before the value of IN1 will be send to OUT the bit of IN1 defined at IN2 will be set to the value of IN3 IN1 is to be a packed word The value of IN3 should have the value 1 for true and 0 for false Connections Input IN1 input 16 bit word e g a signal like 7 03 Input IN2 0 15 bit number Input IN3 boolean value 1 0 Output OUT 16 bit word use group 86 for writing Compare Type Arithmetical function Illustration Compare IN1 IN2 OUT Operation Output bits 0 1 and 2 bits 4 15 are not used Connections If IN1 gt IN2 OUT 001 OUT bit 0 is true If IN1 INS OUT 010 OUT bit 1 is true If IN1 lt IN2 OUT 100 OUT bit 2 is true Output bit 3 If IN1 gt IN2 OUT 1ddd OUT bit 3 is true and remains true until IN1 lt IN2 IN3 after which bit 3 is false gt 2 it bit 3 Z S Output bit 4 15 not used OUT integer value which is shown on display is the sum of the bits bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 OUT value on display 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 12 Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer packed bool
421. nd MotPot load macro hand manual motor potentiometer into RAM and flash 10 reserved reserved 11 MotPot load macro motor potentiometer into RAM and flash 12 TorqCtrl load macro torque control into RAM and flash 13 TorqLimit load macro torque limit into RAM and flash 14 DemoStandard load macro demo standard into RAM and flash 15 2WreDCcontUS load macro 2 wire with US style DC breaker into RAM and flash 16 3WreDCcontUS load macro 3 wire with US style DC breaker into RAM and flash 17 3WreStandard load macro 3 wire standard into RAM and flash Note1 When loading a macro group 99 is set reset as well Note2 If User1 is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 3 is set If User2 is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 4 is set Note3 It is possible to change all preset parameters of a loaded macro On a macro change or an application restore command of the actual macro the macro depending parameters are restored to the macro s default values Note4 In case macro User or User2 is loaded by means of ParChange 10 10 it is not saved into the flash and thus not valid after the next power on Noted The DriveWindow backup function only saves the active macro Thus both macros User1 and User2 must be backed up separately Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y NotUsed min NotUsed def rit J DeviceNumber device number DeviceName device name The user can set a drive number by means of the DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Light
422. nd can be connected to the digital output controlling the brake Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M1BrakeAckSel motor 1 brake acknowledge selector The drive sets either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 if a digital input is selected and the brake acknowledge fails 0 NotUsed brake acknowledge is blocked default 1 DIl 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 2 DI2 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 3 DIS 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 4 Di4 0 brake is closed applied brake is open lifted 5 DIS 0 brake is closed applied brake is open lifted lifted lifted lifted lifted NotUsed min ACW Bit1 NotUsed 1 1 1 6 DI6 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 7 DI7 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 8 DI8 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 9 DI9 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 brake is closed applied
423. ndex 14 01 801 main status word and DO1BitNo 14 02 3 Tripped digital output 1 is high when the drive is not faulty Digital output 1 default setting is command FansOn CurCirlStat1 6 03 bit 0 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO1BitNo digital output 1 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO1Index 14 02 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DO2Index digital output 2 index Digital output 2 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO2BitNo 14 04 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Digital output 2 default setting is command FieldOn CurCirlStat1 6 03 bit 5 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO2BitNo digital output 2 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO2Index 14 03 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name DO3Index digital output 3 index Digital output 3 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO3BitNo 14 06 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output xx group and yy index Digital output 3 default setting is command MainContactorOn CurCtr Stat1 6 03 bit 7 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO3BitNo digital output 3 bit number Bit number of the si
424. necessary invert the signal group 10 field converter cables and connections 121 AutotuneFail Autotuning failed For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 To clear the alarm set ServiceMode 99 06 NormalMode Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 444 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 122 MechBrake Selected motor mechanical brake Acknowledge brake applied closed is missing or torque actual does not reach SitrtTorqRef 42 08 during torque proving Check BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 M2StrtTorqRefSel 49 44 brake brake cabling used digital inputs and outputs group 14 123 FaultSuppres Fault suppressed At least one fault message is currently active and suppressed 124 SpeedScale Speed scaling out of range The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 a is set to 150 single firing pulses Check M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 M2BaseSpeed 49 03 M2SpeedMin 49 19 M2SpeedMax 49 20 M2SpeedScale 49 22 M1SpeedScale 50 07 125 SpeedFb Selected motor speed feedback The comparison of the speed feedback from pulse encoder or analog tacho has failed Check M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 EMF FbMonLev 30 15 SpoeedFbMonLev 30 14 pulse encoder encoder itself alignment cabling cou
425. nedeastvadasner tacts 249 AL Lowa ege reide 7 Sestak g et A uuNE 249 AIG Valinn uel bee 194 Abel eg deg a eretetigCe eeguuee 77 250 AlGlowyal 77 251 AIO ExtModule noiaeo 75 79 387 426 AlO MotTempMeas 75 79 388 426 AlTracho Val a eet 194 AlarmWoOrd 1 ccccceseeeeee es 87 91 217 419 Alammword 1 0 eeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenes 126 128 AlarmWord2 ccccccceeeeceeeeneeeeeteneees 218 419 AlarmWord3 eonnnnoennnoosnnrenennrrssrrrerena 219 419 AnybusModType nsee 361 AOT Val raaa an 194 BO Val Genine yae 194 ApplicName 00 ceeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 186 ei e te E 188 APPllOa EH 192 AppIMaGro iis ceseciseistetiscntenrandin 27 392 402 ApplRestore cccsescesecereesessorsenesssees 27 391 en en EE 184 ArMAIDNAMAX EE 262 ArmA phaMiin AAA 262 442 ArMAIpha lesen eaten teehee ca eee 184 leie 179 E ulelg E 179 ArmCurLimSpeed1 sssnneneenneeeeeee eeen 311 ArmCurLimSpeed2 n s eenen 311 ArmCurLimSpeeds e 312 ArmCurLimSpeed4 n se eeen 312 ArmmCurl Im peedb nn 312 ArmCurRiSeMakx naaien 287 418 433 ArmOvrCurLev 27 212 287 404 424 ArmOvrVoltLev 58 60 212 287 410 424 AmmVohtAct ccccceeeeeececeeeeseeeeeeeseeteaes 44 177 ArmVoltActRell eeens 177 AUXGUIIWONG WEE 106 108 202 AUXGtrIWOPd EE 203 TEE 274 AuxStatWord ccesseeeeeeeeees 106 108 207 BalRamp Rel cire 269 IS MR E 277 Baud RE 134 Baud rate
426. nly be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune via M1TachVolt1000 50 13 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Internally limited from 2 29 32767 rpm to 2 29 32767 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M2TachMaxSpeed motor 2 tacho maximum speed Internally used tacho maximum speed for motor 2 This value is depending on the analog tacho output voltage e g 60 V at 1000 rpm and the maximum speed of the drive system which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M2OvrSpeed 49 21 and M2BaseSpeed 49 03 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune via M2TachVolt1000 49 27 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Internally limited from 2 29 eel rpm to 2 29 32767 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N rpm M1TachoTune motor 1 tacho tuning factor Internally used tacho fine tuning factor for motor 1 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Scaling 1000 Type l Volatile N M2
427. nment cabling coupling mechanical disturbances jumper S1 on SDCS CON 4 EMF connection converter armature circuit closed SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 SDCS POW 4 External fan acknowledge missing Check MotFanAck 10 06 external fan contactor external fan circuit external fan supply voltage used digital inputs and outputs group 14 Main contactor acknowledge missing Check MainContAck 10 21 switch on off sequence auxiliary contactor relay switching the main contactor after On Off command safety relays used digital inputs and outputs group 14 Type code mismatch When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Check TypeCode 97 01 S ConvScaleCur 97 02 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 External fault via binary input There is no problem with the drive itself Check ExtFaultSel 30 31 ExtFaultOnSel 30 33 Fault is active when Triplevel 9 02 bit 5 always 9 02 RdyRun 1 bit 6 RdyRun 9 02 bit 7 9 02 always bit 8 Always or RdyRun 1 CCS 9 02 bit 9 Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 528 FieldBusCom 529 M1FexNotOK 530 M2FexNotOK 431 Definition Action Fault is active when 9 02 RdyRun 1 bit 10 Triplevel ConvFanAck 10 20 FanDly 21 14 converter fan contactor
428. nnected in option slot 3 4 DSL reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 388 Signal Parameter name def AIO MotTempMeas analog extension module for motor temperature measurement Second RAIO xx extension module interface selection AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 releases Al7 Al8 AO5 and AO6 The analog in and outputs are only used for motor temperature measurement see M1 TempSel 31 05 and M2TempSel 49 33 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 9 see switch S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no second RAIO xx is used default 1 Slot1 second RAIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 second RAIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 second RAIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA second RAIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 9 The drive trips with F508 I OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RAIO extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery 2 RAIO Switch S1 ADDRESS ye Ze 0 CH A NotUsed NotUsed D A a on Switch S2 Set the operating mode to unipolar DIP switch s
429. nnection is possible if a pulse encoder is used make sure that pulse encoder s auxiliary voltage connection corresponds to its voltage and that the channel connection corresponds to correct direction of rotation check that the shielding of the pulse encoder s cable is connected to the TE bar of the DCS800 if an analog tacho is used make sure that it is connected to the proper voltage input at the SDCS CON 4 X3 1 X3 4 90 270 V X3 2 X3 4 30 90 V X3 3 X3 4 8 30 V for all other cables make sure that both ends of the cables are connected and they do not cause any damage or danger when power is being switched on Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 24 Measuring the insulation resistance of the motor cables and the motor isolate the motor cables from the drive before testing the insulation resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the motor On oS Instructions how to measure the insulation resistance measure the insulation resistance between 1 cables and PE 2 cables and PE 3 armature cables and field cables 4 field cable and PE 5 field cable and PE the result should be MQs Setting of Jumpers The boards of the DCS800 include jumpers to adapt the boards to different applications The position of the jumpers must be checked before connecting voltage For specific jumper settings consult the DCS800 Hardware Manual 83
430. nnnrrnnntesrernseet Mains synchronism ossee cei et neces ante detect E E E dete A EE ENEE e Reien Ile ie Fan field and mains contactor acknowledge AAA External Tals safeties oes ee eege edd BOGGS reversal iarrainn ence ect a E eaten ed eats pee a aa a E A aloginput MONO EE eigene enne ee EE Residual current detection EE Measured motor le DEE ele Motor nn Ennen RE Eelere eege Armat recu rent Tripple eegener tee Speed feedback monttor Aan he e EE Overspeed lee BEE GUIS ng elle RE E Tacho polarity respectively pulse encoder polarity cceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaaees Fachorange EE Status messages EE Display of status fault and alarm eigonals A Categories of signals and display Options cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeees Ge eral MESSAGES EE Power p errors E EE Fault Signals FR ed eebe eegal eesgeee e e E EE E A EE R EE Een Ece AIS A EE Disappearing system alarm NEE User defined alarm by Adaptive Program leier Appendix A Firmware structure diagram Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation Appendix C Index of signals and parameters Table of contents 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 19 Table of contens 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 20 Introduction Chapter overview This chapter describes the purpose contents and the intended use of this manual Before You Start The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information n
431. nsmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 4 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N MailBox4 mailbox 4 node ID Mailbox 4 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal4 1 94 32 TrmtRecVal4 2 94 33 TrmtRecVal4 3 94 34 and TrmtRecVal4 4 94 35 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox4 94 30 is set to 0 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 375 Signal Parameter name MailBoxCycle4 cycle time mailbox 4 The function of MailBoxCycle4 94 31 is depending on the setting of MailBox4 94 30 If MailBox4 94 30 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle4 94 31 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals values from 1 4 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle4 94 31 is set to 0 ms If MailBox4 94 30 is negative data will be receive MailBoxCycle4 94 31 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Dependin
432. nstallation and maintenance WOrk 3 siciecdinciecehedeuettclt Eege did ead inde eeaed eh 4 Mechanical installation EE 6 Operaatio Ee 7 Table of contents 9 Introduction 20 Chapter Mel ecien eie e ea E eaea E EEE cake 20 Before TE EE 20 What this manual contains 2nca 2 c02ecserartaildncredecvnarevues dere seennttarestektncdeipetes paves Biteradatiesey 20 Start up 22 Chapter EE 22 EE 22 SEHR POCO OUI isin eM ae ss eae Aa aed Oe cies weet ea curate Ee CAME a 23 Checking with the power Switched ot 23 Checking with the power switched on 25 Commissioning a DOSB00 se ccicsisesciracectoceeatheveeiincateieieeeett alias uae dient aia ie 26 Commissioning a DCS800 with the wzarnd eee ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaaeeeeneaas 26 Commissioning a DCS800 with DriveWindowW sssssssessssresssrrrnsrrrntrrrrrressrrrnnertnnnnestrrnsern nnne 27 Re TEE LCE 27 01 02 Macro assistant Name plate data 27 03 Autotuning field Current controller AAA 27 04 Autotuning armature Current Controller ee cece eee eeeeee eect eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaae 28 05 Speed TESAbACK ASSISCAN a daccsese teeta sehvtacasde pe ae vances ween Dee ee nne nee 28 Analog tacho fine tune procedure c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 29 06 Autotuning speed controller ox lt lt caitiens Saud deg reegen 29 07 Field weakening assistant ccccceecceeeesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeseees
433. nstant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q or 4 Q blocked field reversal blocked optitorque blocked default EMF field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q or 4 Q field reversal blocked optitorque blocked Fix Rev constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q blocked field reversal active optitorque blocked EMF Rev field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q field reversal active optitorque blocked Fix Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q or 4 Q blocked field reversal blocked optitorque active EMF Opti field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q or 4 Q field reversal blocked optitorque active Fix Rev Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q Firmware description 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Field reference hysteresis Force field current direction Reversal time Optitorque Field current reference gain 53 blocked field reversal active optitorque active EMF Rev Opti field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q field reversal active optitorque active To prevent field reversal from continuous toggling due to a too small torque reference a torque reference hysteresis is available The hysteresis is symmetrical and is set by FidRefHyst 45 10 l We FidRefHyst 45 10 Field reference hysteresis TorqRefUsed 2 13 With ForceFldDir 45 07 it
434. nt Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeTacho conversion mode analog input tacho Analog input tacho on the SDCS CON 2 is only working with voltage The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 1 0V 10V Uni OVto10V 0mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2 Vto 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N Al5HighVal analog input 5 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in Al5HighVal 13 21 Note1 To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N Al5LowVal analog input 5 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in AlOS5LowVal 13 22 Note1 Al5LowVal 13 22 is only valid if ConvModeAl5 13 23 10V Bi Note2 To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware
435. ntnteeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeees 91 Send and Ree 92 12 PUlSe caase o a E ocala se a Aa tend R A AE aLa E A A E 93 Set the DCSLink Ee UE 93 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision 94 Table of contents 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 12 DDCS channels with SBGS GOME B EE 95 EC 95 Integer scaling on the DDOS link EEN 95 ChO communication to overriding Control 96 ABB overriding COMMOl E 96 Parameter setting example cs sc2c scp trate otcde eae SE Eescher geed tededendeHdegeete 96 Received data set Pabeier geess EAR 97 Transmitted data Set Gebeess ect nckces desks de caravans aciasd siecs xdeysneesaatssanqedasexiaseuiasnadactxe 98 Selen ee te nt EE 98 ch Reg Ee 99 Ch2 Master follower link xicsccesecsccseced seed ttvadeciealue tveheatesetecenvcueds techvsuse ened iegeaiiulediaves Sicgecestaineae 99 SINS EE 99 LIA configuration RE 99 EE 99 eil EE 99 Firmware ee 100 Toggle between speed and torque Control 101 en le Ee ie e Le 102 Master follower link specification cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesessseneeeneeeeeetees 102 Ch3 commissioning and maintenance tools ssssssseeseeeeeeeresstrrrreerertrrsrtrrssrrrnnnrtnnnnnsrernnnet 103 RI lee e 103 Ethernet communication for monitoring with Ethernet adapter NE TA 01 aeee 104 EN 104 NETA 0 1 SIDG S600 wie seid acca site sans tants E E E 104 Related documentation EE 104 NETA OT GOEN ise
436. ntrol MainCtrlWord 7 01 The overriding control commands On On 1 bit0 The overriding control commands Run Run 1 bit 3 Now the drive follows the speed respectively torque references Drive MainStatWord 8 01 When the drive is ready to close the main contactor RdyOn state is set RdyOn 1 bit 0 The drive closes the main contactor the field contactor and the contactors for converter and motor fans After the mains voltage and all acknowledges are checked and the field current is established the drive sets state RdyRun RdyRun 1 bit 1 The drive releases the ramp all references all controllers and sets state RdyRef RdyRef 1 bit 2 Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 49 Stop the drive The drive can be stopped in two ways either by taking away the On command directly which opens all contactors as fast as possible after stopping the drive according to Off1 Mode 21 02 or by means of the following sequence Overriding Control Drive MainCtrlWord 7 01 MainStatWord 8 01 The overriding control removes Run Run 0 bit 3 gt d In speed control mode the drive stops according to StopMode 21 03 In torque control mode the torque reference is reduced to zero according to TorqRefA FTC 25 02 respectively TorqgRampDown 25 06 depending on the used torque reference channel A or B When zero speed or zero torque is reached
437. ntrol word analog output 1 Analog output 1 can be written to via CtrlWordAO71 15 02 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if IndexAO7 15 07 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvModeA0O1 convert mode analog output 1 Analog output 1 signal offset 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V bipolar output default 1 0V 10V Uni OV to 10 V unipolar output 2 2V 10V Uni 2V to 10 V unipolar output 3 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range O V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N FilterAQ1 filter analog output 1 Analog output 1 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO1 scaling analog output 1 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO1 15 01 is scaled to the voltage in ScaleAO1 15 05 Example In case the min max voltage 10 V of analog output 1 should equal 250 of TorqRefUsed 2 13 set IndexAO1 15 01 213 ConvModeAO1 15 03 10V Bi and ScaleAO1 15 05 4000 mV Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N IndexAO2 analog output 2 index Analog output 2 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO2 15 06 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy
438. o action Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 208 Signal Parameter name LimWord limit word LW Limit word Bit active limit BO TorqMax 20 05 or TorqMaxAll 2 19 B1 TorqMin 20 06 or TorqMinAll 2 20 TorqMaxSPC 20 07 or TorqMaxAll 2 19 TorqMinSPC 20 08 or TorqMinAll 2 20 TorqMaxTref 20 09 TorqMinTref 20 10 M1SpeedMax 20 02 or M2SpeedMax 49 20 M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M2SpeedMin 49 19 M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 or M2CurLimBrdg1 49 12 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 or M2CurLimBrdg2 49 13 reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name DI StatWord digital inputs status word DISW Digital input word shows the value of the digital inputs before inversion Dl1 Invert 10 25 Dl11 Invert 10 35 to DI StatWord 8 05 from Dlx DIxInvert to drive Name Comment default setting DI1 ConvFanAck 10 20 actual setting depends on macro DI2 MotFanAck 10 06 actual setting depends on macro DI3 MainContAck 10 21 actual setting depends on macro Off2 10 08 actual setting depends on macro E Stop 10 09 actual setting depends on macro Reset 10 03 actual setting depends on macro OnOff 10 15 actual setting depends on macro StartStop 10 16 actual setting depends on macro DI of the extension I
439. o be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 88 Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 follower MailBoxCycle1 94 13 100 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 200 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 200 Send and receive values Each mailbox can transmit receive up to 4 values depending on the sign of the mailbox node ID number The master follower communication usually needs to send 3 values from the master to the followers thus the follower is completely controlled by the master Master parameters source TrmtRecVal1 1 94 14 701 or 704 MainCtrlWord 7 01 or UsedMCW 7 04 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 15 217 SpeedRefUsed 2 17 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 210 TorgRef3 2 10 TrmtRecVal1 4 94 17 0 not used Follower parameters sinks TrmtRecVal1 1 94 14 701 MainCtrlWord 7 01 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 15 2301 SpeedRef 23 01 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 2501 TorgRefA 25 01 TrmtRecVal1 4 94 17 0 not used CommandSel 10 01 MainCtriWord TorqSel 26 01 Torque or Add Master signal TorqRef3 2 10 is send via master parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 to follower signal TorqRefA 25 01 via follower parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 Firmware structure Master MailBox1 94 12 5 configures the masters first mailbox to transmit data Torque reference and torque
440. o channel pulse encoder 7 DI7LO amp Z Fwd DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward 8 DI7LO amp Z Rev DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse 9 Z rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 10 SyncCommand rising edge 0 1 taken from AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 Note1 Forward rotation means that encoder channel A pulses lead channel B pulses by 90 electrical Reverse rotation means that encoder channel B pulses lead channel A pulses by 90 electrical Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N k C 5 SE CH CH feb 2 2 5 2 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name SyncCommand2 synchronization command for position counter encoder 2 Activation of synchronization for pulse encoder 2 and setting of the binary input signal At the synchronization event AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 SyneCommand the position counter is initialized with following values PosCount2InitLo 50 21 is written into PosCount2Low 3 05 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is written into PosCount2High 3 06 At the same time AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 SyncRady is set to 1 The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit 10 SyncDisable to 1 The synchronization event is selected by 0 NotUsed default 1 DI7 rising edge 0 gt 1 taken f
441. o stopping the drive Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedShare speed sharing Scaling factor SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Before speed ramp Int Scaling 10 1 Type SI Volatile N SpeedErrFilt filter for An Speed error An filter time 1 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N Idea of Window Control The idea of the Window Control is to block the speed controller as long as the speed error An respectively speed actual remains within the window set by WinWidthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 This allows the external torque reference TorqRef1 2 08 to affect the process directly If the speed error An respectively actual speed exceeds the programmed window the speed controller becomes active This function could be called over underspeed protection in torque control mode WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedErrWin TorgRef2 2 09 WinWidthPos 23 08 l Window width WinWidthNeg 23 09 WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedActWin TorqRef2 2 09 WinWidthPos 23 08 speed actual f Window width WinWidthNeg 23 09 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 273 Signal Parameter name 23 07 WinIntegOn window control integrator on Enables the integrator of the speed controller when window control is released 0 Off Integrator of the speed controller is blocked when window control is released 1 On Integrator of the speed controller is enabled when window cont
442. oad 31 03 109 M2OverTemp Motor 2 measured overtemperature 9 06 always bit 8 M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 motor temperature motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 110 M2OverLoad Motor 2 calculated overload 9 06 ce Check Eo 9 M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 111 MainsLowVolt Mains low under voltage AC w 06 w 1 is set to 150 single firing pulses bit 10 Check PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 If all 3 phases are present if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance if the main contactor closes and opens if the mains voltage scaling is correct NomMainsVolt 99 10 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 N Alarmlevel Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 112 P2PandMFCom 113 COM8Com 114 ArmCurDev 115 TachoRange Definition Action Alarm Alarm is active word when Peer to peer and master follower communication 9 06 loss bit 11 Check ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBox1 94 12 MailBox2 94 18 MailBox3 94 24 MailBox4 94 30
443. oasting and AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 2 E StopCoast is set high Note1 The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax 21 06 or E StopDecMin 21 05 is set to default Int Scaling 1 1 rpm s Type l Volatile N E StopDecMax emergency stop maximum deceleration rate During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised This supervision starts after the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly 21 07 is elapsed In case the drive isn t able to decelerate within the window defined by E StopDecMin 21 05 and E StopDecMax 21 06 it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 2 E StopCoast is set high Note1 The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax 21 06 or E StopDecMin 21 05 is set to default Int Scaling 1 1 rpm s Type l Volatile N DecMonDly delay deceleration monitoring Time delay before the deceleration monitoring of the emergency stop starts See also E StopDecMin 21 05 and E StopDecMax 21 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name FlyStart flying start Selection of the desired operating response to a Run command UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 during braking or coasting 0 StartFrom0 wait until the motor has reached zero speed see M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 then restart In case the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 Sp
444. ock set mode 7 Parameter backup mode 8 UO settings mode currently not used The following sections describe each of the other modes Parameters mode Use the parameters mode to view and edit parameter values 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight PARAMETERS in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER LOC MAIN MENU PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS MACROS 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter group then press SEL LOC PAR GROUPS 01 Phys Act Values 02 SPC Signals 03 Ref Act Values 04 Information 3 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter in a group then press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode LOC PARAMETERS 9901 Language 9903 M1NomCur 9904 M1BaseSpeed Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter 4 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired parameter value LOC PAR EDIT 9902 M1NomVolt 60 V Note To get the parameter default value press UP DOWN simultaneously 5 Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications 6 Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to step back to the MAIN MENU DCS800 panel operation 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 400 Start up assistants mode Use the start up assistants mode for basic commissioning of the drive When the drive is powered up t
445. ode 45 05 selector 0 Internal motor 1 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel 8 09 or field heating FidHeatSel 21 18 default 1 M2FidCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 2 2 MI1FidRefExt M1FidRefExt 45 06 external field current reference Internal min M1FldRefExt max Internal def Field current control 5 ms ParChange FidHeatSel 21 18 M1FldRefMode T pera field Optitorque e current controller and M1FidHeatRef 44 04 field reversal M1FidRefExt group 45 O M1KpFex E S M1TiFex FldCurTrim M1PosLimCtrl ST ParChange 10 10 FidHeatSel FidCurRefM2 M1FidRefMode 45 13 Motor 2 field otc C current controller M2FidHeatRef 49 06 M2FlidRefExt 45 14 o O M2KpFex M2TiFex 5 16 M2PosLimCtrl Int Scaling 1 Cc Volatile N M1FlidRefExt motor 1 external field current reference Motor 1 external field current reference input in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 Note1 M1FidRefExt 45 06 is only valid if M1FidRefMode 45 05 M1FldRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 320 Signal Parameter name 45 07 ForceFldDir force field current direction Motor 1 field direction force command 0 NotUsed the field direction is controlled by FidCtriMode 44 01 and TorqRefUsed 2 13 default 1 Forward field direction
446. ode8 active and OK DCSLink node8 not active or faulty DCSLink node9 active and OK DCSLink node9 not active or faulty DCSLink node10 active and OK DCSLink node10 not active or faulty Node11 DCSLink node11 active and OK DCSLink node11 not active or faulty Node12 DCSLink node12 active and OK DCSLink node12 not active or faulty Node13 DCSLink node13 active and OK DCSLink node13 not active or faulty DCSLink node14 active and OK DCSLink node14 not active or faulty DCSLink node15 active and OK DCSLink node15 not active or faulty DCSLink node16 active and OK DCSLink node16 not active or faulty Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Node14 Node15 Node16 OO ch OO ch OO ch OO ch Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 191 Signal Parameter name DCSLinkStat2 DCSLink status 2 of field exciter nodes Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 17 to 32 Bit Name Value Comment BO Node17 DCSLink node17 active and OK DCSLink node17 not active or faulty B1 Node18 DCSLink node18 active and OK DCSLink node18 not active or faulty Node19 DCSLink node19 active and OK DCSLink node19 not active or faulty DCSLink node20 active and OK DCSLink node20 not active or faulty DCSLink node21 active and OK DCSLink node21 not active or faulty Node22 DCSLink node22 active and OK DCSLink node22 not active or faulty Node23 DCSLink node23 active and OK DCSLink node23 not active or faulty DCSLink node24 active
447. odelD 58 83 87 91 94 369 426 428 429 432 434 442 DCSLinkStat 0 0 0 ccc ce eeeceseeeeeeeeees 85 190 DCSLIinkStat2 cece a 85 191 Re RU 265 Ren Kiel 268 DOC Hie 270 DerivFilt Time cece cc eccceeeceseeseeseeeeueeeas 277 eriwer ge 277 Devicehlame 103 392 Devicehumber A 392 Dev ml 58 60 379 406 428 lo ler GE 120 131 DI StatWord ccccccccssseseeceeeeseeeeeeenees 70 209 BIhlall TEE 238 DIT 1lnvert ec eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenes 70 238 PAV EE 70 237 DINA EE 237 BIR la VT EE 237 DIAE EE 237 BRILL VC EE 237 DIGINVOT EEN 237 DI INVG EE 237 DISIN Ned co ee yore se ead Eh Be 238 NI la VE 238 Diagnosis 27 221 426 434 435 446 DIN CUIDIY cc cssuatnctceedsapereeimatiiceateuetecc 326 432 DttCurt mm 325 432 DIO ExtModule1 69 72 385 426 DIO ExtModule2 0 69 72 386 426 Direction DEE 70 227 DirectSpeedRe AAA 274 DispParam1 Gel 298 397 Dispbaram Gel neeese 299 397 DISPParam3 Se leticcicieecctcresaiedcetsasatedens 299 397 DO CtrlWOld eiten 73 205 DO StatWord ccccceccceceeesseeeeeeeeeeees 73 210 DO TBUING EE 251 DOTINGA EK e 73 251 DOOBIINO EE 251 DO ING OX CPET 251 DOSBING sc ecacaccedeetensJeuusiaccssivurton eds EES 252 DOSING EE 252 DOA BIN E 252 POA nie ae odie cece ct cece reaa ariaa 252 DOSBHING EE 252 DOSING EEN 252 DOGBINO wsiceststictetcast cxehietelerdsnetendads 252 DOG ING GX ca lt 8 cisesnccitanaon eee s
448. of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal torque with KpS 24 03 3 if the speed error An is 5 of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N Load adaptive proportional gain The adaptive proportional gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out disturbances which are caused by low loads and backlash Moderate filtering of the speed error An is typically not enough to tune the drive The load adaptation is valid for positive KpSMin 24 04 and negative torque p part KpS 24 03 KpSWeakpFiltTime 24 06 TorqRef2 2 09 KpSWeakp 24 05 KpSMin minimum p part speed controller KpSMin 24 04 determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output TorqRef2 2 09 is zero KoSMin 24 04 cannot be greater than KpS 24 03 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N KpSWeakp weakening point of p part speed controller The speed controller output value TorqRef2 2 09 in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 where the gain equals KpS 24 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N KpSWeakpFiltTime filter time for weakening point of p part speed controller Filter time to soften the proportional gains rate of change Volatile N TiS i part speed controller Integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 TiS 24 09 defines the time within the integra
449. of the three possibilities Select a Parameter from the list and set the bit Set Pointer Parameter 84 35 x Parameter C Constant Undefined Cancel 7 01 MainCtrword 3 09 PID Out 5 03 All 5 04 Al2 5 05 Al3 5 06 Al4 6 03 CurCtrStat1 7 01 MainCtrword 7 02 AuxCth ord 7 03 AuxCtly ord2 7 04 used MCW 8 01 MainStatWord 8 02 AuxStatword 8 05 DI StatWord 1806 Datab zl Help Bit fio I Inverted 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Adaptive Program 146 Connect a Constant to the input block constant Set Pointer Parameter 84 35 xj Help Parameter 10d Constant Undefined Cancel Select undefined if there is no connection required Set Pointer Parameter 84 43 x Help Parameter C Constant Cancel If an output of a function block should be connected with an input it is necessary to select the parameter of the output at the input Connections of outputs to firmware parameters are not shown on the desktop In this case it is necessary to connect them to the output pointers on the right side of the desktop Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 147 Program modes There are 5 modes for the Adaptive Program see AdapProgCmd 83 01 Stop the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited Start the Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited Edit the Adaptive Program is n
450. olatile N CtrlWordAO3 control word analog output 3 Analog output 3 can be written to via CtrlWordAO3 15 12 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if IndexAO3 15 11 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvModeAO3 convert mode analog output 3 Analog output 3 signal offset 0 0mA 20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output 1 4mA 20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output default 2 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 3 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N FilterAO3 filter analog output 3 Analog output 3 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO3 scaling analog output 3 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO3 15 11 is scaled to the current in ScaleAO3 15 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N IndexAO4 analog output 4 index Analog output 4 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO4 15 16 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N 999 o ol amazomauni 32768 ae ol o LL of of mazmawi 0 o Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e
451. ommand 10 04 and SyncCommand2 10 05 the next synchronization of the pulse encoders must be prepared by resetting SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 with ResetSyncRdy AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 11 default 1 Cyclic the synchronization of the pulse encoders happens on every occurrence of the synchronization event Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N WinderScale winder scaling Speed actual scaling Before speed error An generation Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N Enc2MeasMode encoder 2 measuring mode Enc2MeasMode 50 18 selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 2 0 A B Dir channel A rising edges for speed channel A not not used channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 1 1 A channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channels B and B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 2 A B Dir channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 3 A B channels A A not and B B not rising and falling edges for speed and direction speed evaluation factor 4 default Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Enc2PulseNo encoder 2 pulse number Amount of pulses per revolution ppr for pulse encoder 2 Int Scaling 1 1 ppr Type Volatile N PosCount2InitLo Position counter encoder 2 low initial value Position counter initial low word for pulse encoder 2 Unit depends o
452. on blocks set EditBlock 83 03 17 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y TimeLevSel time level select Selects the cycle time for the Adaptive Program This setting is valid for all function blocks 0 Off no task selected 1 5ms Adaptive Program runs with 5 ms 2 20ms Adaptive Program runs with 20 ms 3 100ms_ Adaptive Program runs with 100 ms 4 500ms Adaptive Program runs with 500 ms A136 NoAPTaskTime AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 3 is set when TimeLevSel 83 04 is not set to 5 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 500 ms but AdapProgCmd 83 01 is set to Start SingleCycle or SingleStep Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N PassCode pass code The pass code is a number between 1 and 65535 to write protect Adaptive Programs by means of EditCmd 83 02 After using Protect or Unprotect PassCode 83 05 is automatically set back to zero Attention Do not forget the pass code Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 354 faa Signal Parameter name 83 06 BreakPoint break point Breakpoint for AdapProgCmd 83 01 SingleCycle The break point is not used if BreakPoint 83 06 is set to zero Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Adaptive Program AdapPrgStat Adaptive Program status word Adaptive Program status word Bit Name Value Comment BO BitO 1 Adaptive Program is running 0 Adaptive Program is stopped B1 Biti 1 Adaptive Program can be edited 0 Adaptive P
453. onization command is chosen by means of SyncCommand 10 04 It can either be SyncCommand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 or hardware The fastest synchronization is achieved by the encoder zero pulse Synchronization by DI7 is delayed due to its scan time and additional hardware filter times The synchronization can be inhibited by setting SyncDisable AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 10 SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 can be reset by means of ResetSyncRdy AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 11 With PosSyncMode 50 15 either single or cyclic synchronization is selected With single synchronization the next synchronization event must be released with ResetSyncRdy AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 11 Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f DI m gt 14 Mux O t amp Le 2 o amp t S o R forward Ha 3 direction reverse amp 4 direction 9 gt 5 Fault DCS800 OR amp 6 forward Tle 7 Se Cyclic Single reverse amp 8 direction PosSyncMode 50 15 4 Pulse encoder 1 A 9 zero channel SyncCommand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 10 Sel SyncCommand 10 04 l SyncDisable AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit10 ResetSyncRdy AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 11 PosCountInitLo 50 08 PosCountInitHi
454. ontactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Off3N is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Off3N is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note1 E StopMode 21 04 overrides Off1Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N RampStop RampStop E StopDecMin emergency stop minimum deceleration rate During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised This supervision starts after the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly 21 07 is elapsed In case the drive isn t able to decelerate within the window defined by E StopDecMin 21 05 and E StopDecMax 21 06 it is stopped by c
455. ontrol 1 binary Input 1 minimum control 3 3 Speed Max operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary input 0 speed control 1 binary input 1 maximum control 4 4 Speed Limit operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary input O speed control 1 binary input 1 limitation control 6 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N ToraSel2601 ToraSel2601 Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def TorqMux torque multiplexer TorqMux 26 05 selects a binary input to change between operation modes The choice of the operation modes is provided by means of TorqMuxMode 26 04 Torque reference multiplexer binary input NotUsed min max NotUsed 0 NotUsed 1 DI1 2 DI2 3 DI3 4 Di4 5 DI5 6 DIG 7 DI 8 DI8 9 DIQ 10 DI10 11 DI11 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 operation mode depends on TorqSel 26 01 default 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control
456. op bit 4 Even even parity indication bit one stop bit default Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Even go 201 ke D Es D Yn D 2 Application program parameters WW These parameter groups contain all parameters created by the application program Raat Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 347 Signal Parameter name DDCS control ChO NodeAddr channel 0 node address Channel 0 is used for communication with the overriding control Node address channel 0 if APC2 or NCSA 01 AC31 is used ChO NodeAdar 70 01 1 if AC70 or AC80 is used via the optical module bus adapters TB810 or TB811 ChO NodeAdar 70 01 is calculated from the POSTION terminal of the DRIENG data base element as follows 1 multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16 2 add the tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result Example POSITION l ChO NodeAdar 70 01 101 l 16 1 01 17 712 l 16 7 12 124 if AC 800M is used via the optical module bus ChO NodeAdadr 70 01 is calculated from the position of the DCS600 ENG hardware module as follows 1 multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16 2 add the tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result Example POSITION l ChO NodeAdar 70 01 112 l 16 1 12 28 503 l 16 5 03 83 Controller Node address Node address Node address ChO DriveBus DDCS DriveBus ModuleBus 71 01 APC AC31 No AC70 17 124 No AC80 DriveBus Y
457. or SpeedRef2 2 01 SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Internally limited from 2 29 A rpm to 2 29 SE rpm 20000 20000 Note1 M2SpeedMin 49 19 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale A armWora2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note2 M2SpeedMin 49 19 is also applied to SpoeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SoeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N M2SpeedMax motor 2 maximum speed Motor 2 positive speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedRef2 2 01 SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Internally limited from 2 29 evel rpm to 2 29 E rpm 20000 20000 Note1 M2SpeedMax 49 20 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale A armWora2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note2 M2SpeedMax 49 20 is also applied to SoeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SoeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 331 Signal Paramet
458. or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 ArmCurAuto and set On and Run within 20 s During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed the armature circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the armature current control parameters are set The field current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn but due to remanence in the field circuit about 40 of all motors will turn create torque These motors have to be locked When the autotuning is finished successfully check M1KpArmCur 43 06 M1TiArmCur 43 07 M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 M1ArmLim 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning 05 Speed feedback assistant 1 2 Open the workspace 05 DCS800 Speed feedback assistant dww Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters and if applicable the parameters for pulse encoder 1 pulse encoder 2 or the analog tacho M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1EncMeasMode 50 02 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 M1EncPulseNo 50 04 M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 M1NomVolt 99 02 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 SpdFbAssist and set On and Run within 20 s The speed feedback assistant
459. ording to its own RevDly 43 14 Note1 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 and ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must be longer than RevDly 43 14 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name RevMode reversal mode RevMode 43 16 defines the behavior of the speed ramp and speed controller during bridge and field reversal torque reversal 0 Soft the speed ramp and speed controller are frozen during reversal gt bumpless reversal 1 Hard the speed ramp and speed controller are released during reversal gt the drive follows the ramp default Note1 RevMode 43 16 is automatically set to Hard when RevDly 43 14 25 ms Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Speed depending current limit ArmCurLimSpd1 43 18 ArmCurLimSpd2 43 19 ArmCurLimSpd3 43 20 ArmCurLimSpd4 43 21 ArmCurLimSpd5 43 22 0 MaxCurLimSpeed 43 17 d W maximum absolute value of 1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 max MaxCurLimSpeed speed limit for maximum armature current Minimum speed level where the armature current reduction begins Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 a rpm 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed1 armature current at speed limit 1 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at MaxCurLimSpeed 43 17 Should be set
460. orr 44 27 until ArmVoltAct 1 14 reaches 90 of the 1 measurement read the value of Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 keep it in mind and write it into FldCurFlux90 44 14 after this procedure is finished reduce the flux with FluxCorr 44 27 until ArmVoltAct 1 14 reaches 70 of the 1 measurement read the value of Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 keep it in mind and write it into FldCurFlux70 44 13 after this procedure is finished reduce the flux with FluxCorr 44 27 until ArmVoltAct 1 14 reaches 40 of the 1 measurement read the value of Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 keep it in mind and write it into FldCurFlux40 44 12 after this procedure is finished Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f DriveWindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 Bf 18 x File Edit view Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help Zlglelzsl oles alal ole ed rlsloalscl al mjia x CW bcs 800 D1 041 A Application amp clas 3 01 04 MotSpeed rpm OHI Par 1 4 D Data logger 1 01 14 ArmVoltAct V 0H1 Par 1 14 I Event logger 2 01 29 Mot1FldCurRel 0H1 Par 1 29 Fault logger E Hinne SC 44 01 FidCtriMode OH1 Par 44 1 Memory E 44 07 EMF CtrlPostim O 1 Par 44 7 E Parameters 44 08 EMF CtriNegLim 2 0 1 Par 44 8 Ot Phys Act Values Zi 44 12 FldCurFlux40 O 1 Par 44 12 E 02 SPC Signals Zi 44 13 FldCurFlux70 0H1 Par 44 13 IdCurFlux90
461. orresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Parameter setting example 2 using PPO types 2 4 and 5 The first two data words PZD1 OUT PZD2 OUT from the overriding control to the drive are fixed connected as control word and speed reference at the Profibus side and cannot be changed The first two data words PZD1 IN PZD2 IN from the drive to the overriding control are fixed connected as status word and speed actual at the Profibus side and cannot be changed Further data words are to be connected to desired parameters respectively signals SCH means of parameters in group 51 PZD3 OUT 51 05 means 3 data word from overriding control to drive PZD3 IN 51 06 means 3 data word from Drive to overriding control to PZD10 OUT 51 18 means 10 data word from overriding control to drive PZD10 IN 51 19 means 10 data word from drive to overriding control or by means of setting parameters in group 90 and group 92 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 136 Communication via group 51 E g the 3 data word from overriding control to drive should be the torque reference and the 3 data word from the drive to the overriding control should be the actual motor torque Therefore following settings have to be made P2ZD3 OUT 51 05 2501 TorgRefA 25 01 and PZD3 IN 51 06
462. ot 11 AuxRef Al1 12 reserved 13 MinAI2Al4 14 MaxAl2Al4 15 Al1Direct 16 Al2Direct 17 Enc2Direct Signal Parameter name RefiSel speed reference 1 input signal Speed reference 1 value SpeedRef 23 01 default AuxSpeedRef 23 13 analog input Al1 analog input Al2 analog input AI3 analog input Al4 analog input AIS analog input Al6 FixedSpeed 23 02 FixedSpeed 2 23 03 motor pot controlled by MotPotUp 11 13 MotPotDown 11 14 and MotPotMin 11 15 AuxSpeedRef 23 13 minus value of Al1 reserved minimum of Al2 and Al4 maximum of Al2 and Al4 Fast speed reference input using analog input Al1 SoeedRefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RamplinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 Fast speed reference input using analog input Al2 SoeedRefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation point Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOuitZero 0 or RamplnZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 Fast speed reference input using pulse encoder 2 SoeedRefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation point Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RamplinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 18 SpeedRef2315 Fast speed reference input using DirectSpeedRef 23 15 SpeedRefExt1 2 30
463. ot running and can be edited Other states for testing are SingleCycle and SingleStep Attention Do not forget to set the Time Levels Time Levels msec x Help Time Levels msec Time level Sms 83 04 Saving AP programs It is possible to save AP programs as ap files Bj briveap for DCS800 DCS800 File Edit Drive Help Open Gtrl O Save As X Print Ctrl P 5600 default factory 260 DWL dwp 5600 correct version ap henge PMi Tempi DCD dwp UNa ngog nN Exit Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 148 Function blocks General rules The use of block input 1 BlockxIn1 is compulsory it must not be left unconnected Use of input 2 BlockxIn2 and input 3 BlockxIn3 is voluntary for the most blocks As a rule of thumb an unconnected input does not affect the output of the block The Attribute Input BlockxAttrib is to set with the attributes like declaration of constant and bits of all three inputs The constant attribute define a block constant which can only be changed or modified in EDIT mode Block inputs The blocks use two input formats e integer e boolean The used format varies depending on the block For example the ADD block uses integer inputs and the OR block boolean inputs Note The inputs of the block are read when the execution of the block starts not simultaneously for all blocks Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS8
464. our depends on FidHeatSel 21 18 and M1FIdMinTrip 30 12 7 Behaviour depends on FanDly 21 14 8 Behaviour depends on M1BrakeCtrl 42 01 start atop geg Ae 100 0 0 0 rpm Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Torque SpeedRefUsed 2 17 SpeedLev 50 10 ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 MCW 7 01 Bit On Off1N Off2N Off3N Run RampOutZero RampHold RamplnZero Reset 51 START On Run ESTOP E Stop 7 01 bit 3 is given A AuxSupplyOn H FieldCurrent Inching1 Inching2 RemoteCmd MSW 8 01 RdyOn RdyRun RdyRef Tripped Off2NStatus Off3NStatus OnInhibited Alarm AtSetpoint Remote p DI ja o o Nala eA fo PO O FF LO O0 N O7 B 0 po O AboveLimit ZeroSpeed 8 02 Bit 11 BrakeCmd 8 02 Bit 8 Speed ramp output clamped CmdFansOn __ 6 03 Bit 0 CmdMainContactorOn 6 03 Bit 7 M1 BrakeDly 42 03 M1BrakeCloseDly 42 04 5 Behaviour depends on Off1Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 6 Behaviour depends on FidHeatSel 21 18 and M1FidMinTrip 30 12 7 Behaviour depends on FanDly 21 14 8 Behaviour depends on BrakeEStopMode 42 09 9 Bebaviour depends on EStopMode 21 04 don t care
465. out of task T5 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task State if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent application on SDCS COM 8 faulty application on SDCS COM 8 faulty crash of CPU due to EMC or hardware problems overflow due to EMC or firmware bug overflow due to EMC or firmware bug underflow due to crash of CPU or firmware bug Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Diagnosis diagnosis Attention Diagnosis 9 11 is set to zero by means of Reset Displays diagnostics messages 0 no message Firmware default setting of parameters wrong parameter flash image too small for all parameters reserved illegal write attempt on a write protected parameter reserved wrong type code an un initialized interrupted has occurred reserved wrong parameter value Autotuning 11 autotuning aborted by fault or removing the Run command UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 12 autotuning timeout RUN command UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 is not set in time 13 motor is still turning no speed zero indication 14 field current not zero 15 armature current not zero 16 armature voltage measurement circuit open e g not connected or interrupted check also current and torque limits armature circuit and or armature voltage measurement circuit wrongly connected no load connected to armature circuit invalid nominal armature current se
466. overriding control system or only for monitoring purposes together with another fieldbus which is responsible for the control Therefore different parameter settings are necessary when controlling a drive In data set mode cyclic communication the drive will be controlled from the overriding control using the Modbus Up to 12 data words in each direction are possible The following table shows the parameter settings Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Modbus ModBusModule2 98 08 Slot1 StationNumber 52 01 1 247 desired station number BaudRate 52 02 5 5 9600 Baud Parity 52 03 4 4 Even DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 127 word 1 data word from overriding control to drive 40001 gt data word 1 1 DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive 40002 gt data word 1 2 DsetXVal3 90 03 2501 default TorgRefA 25 01 output data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from overriding control to drive 40003 gt data word 1 3 up to DsetXplus6Val3 90 12 O default not connected output data word 12 not connected 12 data word from ove
467. ow Battery A battery is used in the DCS800 Control Panel to keep the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel The type of the battery is CR2032 Note The battery is not required for any DCS800 Control Panel or drive functions except for the clock DCS800 panel operation 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 404 Fault tracing Chapter overview General Fault modes This chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive Depending on the trip level of the fault the drive reacts differently The drive s reaction to a fault with trip level 1 and 2 is fixed See also paragraph Fault signals of this manual The reaction to a fault of level 3 and 4 can be chosen by means of SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 respectively FaultStopMode 30 30 Converter protection Auxiliary undervoltage If the auxiliary supply voltage fails while the drive is in RdyRun state MSW bit 1 fault F501 AuxUnderVolt is generated Auxiliary supply voltage Trip level 230 VAC lt 185 VAC 115 VAC lt 96 VAC Armature overcurrent The nominal value of the armature current is set with M1NomCur 99 02 The overcurrent level is set by means of ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 Additionally the actua
468. p On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 21 DI7DI8 On and Start by rising edge 0 1 of DI7 Stop and Off1 by falling edge 1 0 of DI8 Following settings apply OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 DI7DI8 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 234 Signal Parameter name StartStop Start Stop command Binary signal for StartStop UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 0 NotUsed 1 DI 2 DI2 3 DIS 4 D14 5 DIS 6 DI6 7 DI7 8 DI8 9 DI9 10 DI10 11 DI11 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 20 ACW Bit15 21 DI7DI8 Int Scaling 1 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop Start by rising edge 0 1 0 Stop default Star
469. pe l Volatile N KpEMF p part EMF controller Proportional gain of the EMF controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal EMF with KoEMF 44 09 3 if the EMF error is 5 of M1NomVolt 99 02 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N TiEMF i part EMF controller Integral time of the EMF controller TiEMF 44 10 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal EMF with KoEMF 44 09 3 if the EMF error is 5 of M1NomVolt 99 02 On that condition and with TiIEMF 44 10 20 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal EMF if the EMF error is constant after 20 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting TIEMF 44 10 to O ms disables the integral part of the EMF controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N FidCurFlux40 field current at 40 flux Field current at 40 flux in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N FidCurFlux70 field current at 70 flux Field current at 70 flux in percent of M1NomFldCur 99 11 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N FidCurFlux90 field current at 90 flux Field current at 90 flux in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f
470. peration the reason is usually caused by EMC In this case please check for proper grounding of cables converter and cabinet Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 421 Fault signals F To avoid dangerous situations damage of the motor the drive or any other material some physical values must not exceed certain limits Therefore limit values can be specified for these values by parameter setting which cause an alarm or a fault when the value exceeds the limits e g max armature voltage max converter temperature Faults can also be caused by situations which inhibit the drive from normal operation e g blown fuse A fault is a condition which requires an immediate stop of the drive in order to avoid danger or damage The drive is stopped automatically and cannot be restarted before removing its cause All fault signals with the exception of F501 AuxUnderVolt F525 TypeCode F547 HwFailure and F548 FwFailure are resetable in case the fault is eliminated To reset a fault following steps are required remove the Run and On commands UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 and 0 eliminate the faults acknowledge the fault with Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 via digital input overriding control system or in Local mode with DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light depending on the systems condition generate Run and On commands UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 and 0 again The fault signals
471. pling power supply feedback might be too low mechanical disturbances analog tacho tacho itself tacho polarity and voltage alignment cabling coupling mechanical disturbances jumper S1 on SDCS CON 4 EMF connection converter armature circuit closed SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 SDCS POW 4 126 ExternalDl External alarm via binary input There is no problem with the drive itself Check ExtAlarmSel 30 32 alarm 0 ExtAlarmOnSel 30 34 LEE EE El eriegl Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f A127 Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 127 AlRange 128 FieldBusCom 129 ParRestored 130 LocalCmdLoss 131 ParAdded 132 ParConflict Definition Action Analog input range Undershoot of one of the analog input values under 4mA 2V Check Al Mon4mA 30 29 used analog inputs connections and cables polarity of connection Fieldbus communication loss F528 FieldBusCom is only activated after the first data set from the overriding control is received by the drive Before the first data set is received only A128 FieldBusCom is active The reason is to suppress unnecessary faults the starts up of the overriding control is usually slower than the one of the drive Check ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 CommModtule 98 02 parameter settings of group 51 fieldbus fieldbus cable fieldbus termination fieldbus adapter Parameter
472. plus6Val2 DsetXplus6Val3 DsetXplus7Val1 DsetXplus7Val2 DsetXplus7Val3 an o RE 2 ee ee Int Setting of PLC parameter groups 90 and 92 depending on desired data words Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 131 Modbus TCP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Ethernet adapter RETA 01 together with the DCS800 RETA 01 DCS800 The Modbus TCP communication with the drive requires the option RETA 01 Related documentation User s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module RETA 01 SAFE 64539736 REV D The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RETA 01 into slot 1 of the drive Drive configuration The Ethernet adapter is activated by means of CommMoadule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with Modbus TCP if Protocol 51 16 is set to 0 Modbus TCP Parameter setting example using Modbus TCP Modbus TCP is using 4 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this protocol Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1 Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 17 data word from overriding
473. polar input default 1 0V 10V Uni O Vto 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range O V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N FilterAl1 filter time analog input 1 Analog input 1 filter time The hardware filter time is lt 2ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Al2HighVal analog input 2 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in Al2HighVal 13 05 Note1 To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N Al2LowVal analog input 2 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in Al2LowVal 13 06 Note1 Al2LowVal 13 06 is only valid if ConvModeAl2 13 07 10V Bi Note2 To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl2 conversion mode analog input 2 The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bi
474. polar input default 1 0V 10V Uni O Vto 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N FilterAl2 filter time analog input 2 Analog input 2 filter time The hardware filter time is lt 2ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N AI3HighVal analog input 3 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in Al3HighVal 13 09 Note1 To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Al3LowvVal analog input 3 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in A 3LowVal 13 10 Note1 Al3LowVal 13 10 is only valid if ConvModeAl3 13 11 10V Bi Note2 To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl3 conversion mode analog input 3 Analog input 3 on the SDCS CON 4 is only working with voltage The dis
475. pulse encoder 1 connected to either SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 2 Tacho speed is measured by means of an analog tacho 3 External MotSpeed 1 04 is updated by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control 4 Encoder2 speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 2 connected to a RTAC xx see Encoder2Module 98 01 Encoder2 Note1 It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 EMF Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N M1EncPulseNo motor 1 encoder 1 pulse number Amount of pulses per revolution ppr for pulse encoder 1 Int Scaling 1 1ppr Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 340 Signal Parameter name MaxEncoderTime maximum encoder time When an encoder is used as speed feedback device the actual speed is measured by counting the amount of pulses per cycle time The cycle time for the measurement is synchronized with the mains every 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms In case very small speeds have to be measured that means there is less than one pulse per cycle time it is possible to increase the measuring time by means of MaxEncoderTime 50 05 The speed is set to zero after MaxEncoderTime 50 05 is elapsed without a measured pulse speed cycle cycle cycle cycle i cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle time time time time time time time time time Note1 MaxEncoderTime 50 05 is valid for motor 1 motor 2 encoder 1
476. put value 1 xx group and yy index e g 201 equals SpeedRef2 GO Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref2 PID controller reference input value 2 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller reference input value 2 The format is xxyy with negate reference input value 2 xx group and yy index e g 201 equals SpeedRef2 2 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N PID OutMin PID controller minimum limit output value Minimum limit of the PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N 40 17 PID OutMax PID controller maximum limit output value Maximum limit of the PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 302 Signal Parameter name 40 18 PID OutDest PID controller output value index Index pointer to the sink of the PID controller output value The format is xxyy with negate output value xx group and yy index e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Resetindex PID controller reset index The PID controller reset is controlled by a selectable bit see PID ResetBitNo 40 20 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert reset signal xx group and yy inde
477. r 3 gt 1 3 90 03 DsetXVal3 2501 51 11 Output I O par 4 2 A 3 1 90 04 DsetXplus2Val1 702 51 12 Input Opari Al lt lt 2 1 92 01 DsetXplus1Val1 801 51 13 Input I O par 2 2 2 92 02 DsetXplus1Val2 104 51 14 Input I O par 3 6 23 92 03 DsetXplus1Val3 209 51 15 Input I O par 4 10 4 1 92 04 DsetXplus3Val1 802 51 16 Output I O par 5 IER e 3 2 90 05 DsetXplus2Val2 703 51 17 Output I O par 6 7 3 3 90 06 DsetXplus2Val3 51 18 Output I O par 7 i 43 gt 5 1 90 07 DsetXplus4valt 51 19 Output I O par8 144 gt 52 90 08 DsetXplus4Val2 51 20 Output I O par 9 145 gt 5 3 90 09 DsetXplus4val3 51 21 Input I O par 5 l 11 4 2 92 05 DsetXplus3Val2 E 101 51 22 Input I O par 6 2 12 4 3 92 06 DsetXplus3Val3 108 51 23 Input I O par 7 16 Kee 6 1 92 07 DsetXplus5Val1 901 51 24 Input Opar8 17 lt 6 2 92 08 DsetXplus5Val2 902 For proper communication shown values have to be used Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words Further information Output and input parameters 51 08 51 25 can also be connected directly to the desired DCS800 parameters In this case please take care that the RCNA 01 adapter gets the changed values and also take care that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 to prevent data trouble Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of
478. r 43 06 and M1TiArmCur 46 07 Start up 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 38 Al optimal p part too high i part too short Al i part too long p part too low and i part too long gt t Armature current controller step responses remove On and Run via DriveWindow set CurSel 43 02 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 back to their original settings Speed controller Basics When tuning the drive change one parameter at a time then monitor the effect on the step response and possible oscillations The effect of each parameter change must be checked over a wide speed range and not just at one point The set speed controller values mainly depend on the relationship between the motor power and the attached masses backlashes and natural frequencies of the attached mechanics filtering The step response tests must be carried out at different speeds from minimum up to maximum speed at several different points The whole speed range must also be tested carefully e g at 25 30 of maximum speed step has to be in base speed range and 80 of maximum speed step has to be in field weakening area in order to find any oscillation points A suitable speed step is about 2 of maximum speed A too large step reference or incorrect values of the speed controller might force the drives into torque current limits damage the mechanical parts e g gear boxes or cause tripping of Start
479. r depending on M1SpeedFbSell 50 03 is checked against the EMF If the polarity is wrong F553 TachPolarity is generated If an overflow of the AlTacho input is imminent F554 TachoRange is generated Check for the right connections X3 1 to X3 4 on the SDCS CON 4 Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 419 Status messages Display of status fault and alarm signals Categories of signals and display options The thyristor power converters series DCS800 generate general messages power up errors fault and alarm signals general messages Elle power up errors F fault signals A alarm signals The messages are indicated on the seven segment display H2500 of the SDCS CON 4 control board On the seven segment display the messages appear in code The letters and numbers of multi character codes are displayed one after the other for 0 7 seconds at a time Plain text messages are available on the DCS800 Control Panel and in the fault logger of DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 0 7s 0 7s 0 7s 0 7s FS 4 F514 mains not in synchronism For evaluation via digital outputs or communication to the overriding control 16 bit words are available containing all fault and alarm signals as binary code FaultWord1 9 01 FaultWord2 9 02 FaultWord3 9 03 FaultWord4 9 04 UserFaultWord 9 05 AlarmWord1 9 06 AlarmWo
480. r IN3 is true OUT is false e Heset dominant IN1 IN2 IN3_ OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 no change no change 0 0 1 False All bits 0 0 0 1 0 False All bits 0 0 0 1 1 False All bits 0 0 1 0 0 True All bits 1 1 1 0 1 False All bits 0 0 1 1 0 False All bits 0 0 1 1 1 False All bits 0 0 Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean values Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Switch B Type Logical function Illustration Switch B IN IN2 OUT Operation OUT is equal to IN2 if IN1 is true and equal to INS if IN1 is false IN1 OUT 0 IN3 1 IN2 IN Ne OUT IN3 ai Connections Input IN1 boolean values only bit 0 is read Input IN2 and IN3 boolean values Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 167 Switch Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetical function IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT OUT is equal to IN2 if IN1 is true and equal to INS if IN1 is false IN OUT 0 IN3 1 INS IN1 n OUT IN3 t Input IN1 boolean value only bit 0 is read Input IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign TOFF Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function OUT is true when IN1 is true OUT is false when IN1 has bee
481. r name CtrlStatSla 12 pulse slave control status 12 pulse slave control status i Value Comment slave is Tripped no action 12 pulse serial operation see OperModeSel 43 01 12 pulse parallel operation see OperModeSel 43 01 bridge change over active no action CurCtriStat2 6 04 gt 0 current controller is blocked no action CurRefUsed 3 12 negative CurRefUsed 3 12 positive Valid in 12 pulse master and slave Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Mot1FexStatus motor 1 field exciter status Motor 1 field exciter status NotUsed no field exciter connected OK field exciter and communication OK ComFault F516 M1FexCom FaultWord1 9 01 bit 15 communication faulty FexFaulty F529 M1FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 12 field exciter selftest faulty FexNotReady F537 M1FexRdyLost FaultWord3 9 03 bit 4 field exciter not ready FexUnderCur F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 field exciter undercurrent FexOverCur F515 M1FexOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 14 field exciter overcurrent WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType 99 12 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 199 Signal Parameter name Mot2FexStatus motor 2 field exciter status Motor 1 field exciter status NotUsed OK ComFault FexFaulty FexNotReady FexUnderCur FexOverCur WrongSetting Int Scaling 1 no field exciter conne
482. r s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqMaxTref maximum torque of torque reference A B Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for external references TorqRefA 25 01 TorqRefB 25 04 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqMinTref minimum torque of torque reference A B Minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for external references TorqRefA 25 01 TorqRefB 25 04 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M1CurLimBrdg1 motor 1 current limit of bridge 1 Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Setting M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 to 0 disables bridge 1 Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M1CurLimBrdg2 motor 1 current limit of bridge 2 Curren
483. r switch together with speed ref 2 selection E g if speed ref 1 selection switch is open the switch for speed ref 2 is closed and vice versa 1 Open switch for speed ref 2 is fixed open default 2 Close switch for speed ref 2 is fixed closed 3 DI 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 4 DI2 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 5 DIS 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 6 Di4 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 7 DI5 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 8 DI6 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 9 DI7 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 10 DI8 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 11 DI9 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 12 D10 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 13 DI11 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 14 MCW Bit11 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 15 MCW
484. r voltages not valid when galvanic isolation is used 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero only available with digital extension board 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero only available with digital extension board 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero only available with digital extension board 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 If zero current is detected by means of the thyristor voltages e
485. rakingOn command to open contactor for dynamic braking resistor DynamicBrakingOff drive is generating drive is motoring command to close the US style changeover DC breaker close the DC breaker open the resistor breaker US DCBreakerOn command to open the US style changeover DC breaker open the DC breaker close the resistor breaker US DCBreakerOff Cur Cristatl 6 03 bit 7 f Geschier 6 03 bit 8 AT RET OA B firing pulses active on firing pulses blocked continuous current discontinuous current zero current detected current not zero command Trip DC breaker continuous signal no action command Trip DC breaker 1 s pulse no action Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y CO A Eh Eh CH A Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 196 Signal Parameter name CurCtrlStat2 2 current controller status 2 current controller status word The current controller will be blocked CurRefUsed 3 12 is forced to zero and ArmAlpha 3 13 is forced to the value of ArmAlphaMax 20 14 if any for the bits is set 0 OK Bit Value Meaning BO overcurrent F502 ArmOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 1 no action B1 mains overvoltage AC F513 MainsOvrVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 12 no action B2 mains undervoltage AC F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 no action waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage see RevVoltMargin 44 21 no action F533 12PRevTi
486. rameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words and according to the desired numbers of data words VSA I O size 51 26 1 9 Defines the length of the Vendor specific assembly in pairs of data words E g a parameter value of 4 means 4 word as output and 4 words as input FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by ControlNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using Vendor specific assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 115 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 Parameter group 51 Direction ABB Parameter group 90 and 92 l iname iset value PLC lt gt Drive Datasets name def value 51 08 Output Opari Il gt E 90 01 DsetxValt 701 51 09 Output Opar2 z E 90 02 Dsetxval2 2301 51 10 Output uppe
487. ration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N ConvFanAck converter fan acknowledge The drive trips with F527 ConvFanAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 10 if a digital input for the converter fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds As soon as the acknowledge is missing A104 ConvOverTemp AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 3 is set The alarm is reset automatically if the converter fan acknowledge is coming back before the 10 seconds are elapsed 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 DI 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge default 2 DI2 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 3 DIS 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 4 Di4 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 5 DI5 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 6 DI6 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 7 DI7 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 8 DI8 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 9 DI9 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N MainContAck main contactor acknowledge The drive trips with F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 if a digital input for the main contactor is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds Sel
488. ration parameters shows the index configuration numbers and the corresponding data words via data sets Please note The grayed index is also addressed via group 51 please set the outputs and inputs to the same configuration numbers as shown in the table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters Example Task The 5 data word of the telegram index05 should be connected to AuxCtrlWord 7 03 Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 123 Todo AuxCtrlWord 7 03 is the default content of DsetXplus2Val2 90 05 The corresponding index configuration number of DsetXplus2Val2 90 05 is 8 So the configuration has to be done using the following values in the IP address all values are in hex service 0x10 write single class 0x91 drive IO map function instance 0x01 output attribute 5 index05 data 0800 2 char hex value Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 124 DCS800 RETA 01 Datasets Class 91h index d instance 1 configuration Output PLC gt Drive Instance 2 Leg DICH PLC lt Drive index 03 RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters Parameter group 90 and 92 name i DsetxVal1 DsetxVal2 DsetxVal3 DsetXplus2Val1 DsetXplus2Val2 DsetXplus2Val3 DsetXplus4Val1 DsetXplus6Val1 i DsetXplus6Val2 12 DsetXplus6Val3 DsetXplus1Val1 DsetXplus1Val2 DsetXplus1Val3 Dse
489. rd 11 DI10 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected available with digital extension board 12 DI11 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected available with digital extension board 13 MCW Bit11 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected ACW Di MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 14 MCW Bit12 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 15 MCW Bit13 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 16 MCW Bit14 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 17 MCW Bit15 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 18 ACW Bit12 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 19 ACW Bit13 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 20 ACW BA 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 21 ACW Bit15 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N PID Ref1 PID controller reference input value 1 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller reference input value 1 The format is xxyy with negate reference in
490. rd2 9 07 AlarmWord3 9 08 and UserAlarmWord 9 09 Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 420 General messages SDCS CON 4 General messages will only be indicated on the seven segment display of the SDCS CON 4 Ke Text on DCS800 Definition Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light not available firmware is not running segment display not available firmware is running no faults no alarms not available indication while loading firmware into SDCS CON 4 8 WEE Ee not available indication while loading DCS800 Control Panel texts into eee a a oe E ee ene don t switch off Power up errors E SDCS CON 4 Power up errors will only be indicated on the seven segment display of the SDCS CON 4 With a power up error active it is not possible to start the drive 7 Text on DCS800 Definition GE Control Panel SE DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Checksum fault firmware flash SDCS CON 4 ROM memory test error SDCS CON 4 RAM memory test error even addresses SDCS CON 4 hardware is not compatible unknown board SDCS CON 4 RAM memory test error odd addresses SDCS CON 4 watchdog timeout occurred 1 Units should be de energized and energized If the fault occurs again check the SDCS CON 4 SDCS PIN 4 respectively SDCS POW 4 boards and change them if necessary 2 Power up errors are only enabled immediately after power on If a power up error is indicated during normal o
491. rding to SpeedFbFItSel 30 17 or trips with F553 TachPolarity FaultWord4 9 04 bit 4 if the measured speed feedback SpeedActEnc 1 03 SpeedActTach 1 05 or SpeedActEnc2 1 42 does not exceed SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 while the measured EMF exceeds EMF FbMonLev 30 15 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 eat rpm 20000 Example With SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 15 rpm and EMF FbMonLev 30 15 50 V the drive trips when the EMF is gt 50 V while the speed feedback is lt 15 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 288 Signal Parameter name EMF FbMonLev EMF feedback monitor level The speed measurement monitoring function is activated when the measured EMF exceeds EMF FbMonLev 30 15 See also SpoeedFbMonLev 30 14 Int Scaling 1 1V Type l Volatile N M1OvrSpeed motor 1 overspeed The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed FaultWord2 9 02 bit 15 if M1OvrSpeed 30 16 is exceeded It is recommended to set M1OvrSpeed 30 16 at least 20 higher than the maximum motor speed Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 ect rpm 20000 Note1 The value of M1OvrSpeed 30 16 is as well used for the analog tacho tuning Any change of its value has the consequence that A115 TachoRange AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 comes up for 10 seconds and M1 TachoAdjust 50 12 respectively M1 TachoVolt1000 50 13 have to be adjusted anew The adjustment can
492. re fixed connected as status word and speed actual at the Profibus side and cannot be changed Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetxXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 PZD1 OUT control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 135 PZD2 OUT speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 PZD1 IN status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 PZD2 IN speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 PROFIBUS DP Node address 51 02 4 set node address as required Baud rate 51 03 1500 PPO type 51 04 PPO1 DP Mode 51 21 0 FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by Profibus adapter DCS800 parameter setting using PPO Type 1 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 c
493. rements a value if a parameter is selected e Decrements the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted in reverse video Help Displays context sensitive information when the button is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the middle area of the display DCS800 FW pan sum dsf To adjust display contrast simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN as appropriate DCS800 panel operation 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Output mode 397 Use the output mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the output mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC indicates that the drive control is local from the DCS800 Control Panel REM indicates that the drive control is remote via local I O or overriding control indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows DCS800 Control Panel display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or Drive is running and at setpoint EE __ Shaft direction is forward 2 or reverse sl Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right position shows the activ
494. ress is selected by means of ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 An additional Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 1 or 2 see ModBusModule2 98 08 is used for monitoring purposes only 7 NxxxModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 and a fieldbus adapter Nxxx The data set base address is selected by means of ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 An additional Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 1 or 2 see ModBusModule2 98 08 is used for monitoring purposes only 8 FldBusModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via a fieldbus adapter Rxxx connected in option slot 1 The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 1 This choice is not valid for the Modbus An additional Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 2 or 3 see ModBusModule2 98 08 is used for monitoring purposes only The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the communication module configuration is not met Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the communication modules with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def 98 03 DIO ExtModule1 digital extension module 1 First RDIO xx extension module interface selection DIO ExtModule1 98 03 release
495. rmal model M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 no action motor 2 measured overtemperature M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 motor 2 calculated overload thermal model M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 mains low under voltage PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 Drive to drive and master follower communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 SDCS COM 8 communication loss ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 armature current deviation Overflow of AlTacho input or M1OvrSpeed 30 16 respectively M2OvrSpeed 49 21 have been changed selected motor mechanical brake M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 218 Signal Parameter name 9 07 AlarmWord2 alarm word 2 Alarm word 2 Bit BO B1 B15 Alarm text ArmCurRipple FoundNewAppl ApplDiff OverVoltProt AutotuneFail MechBrake FaultSuppres SpeedScale SpeedFb ExternalDl AlRange FieldBusCom ParRestored LocalCmdLoss ParAdded ParConflict Int Scaling 1 1 Type Alarm code Comment and alarm level A117 4 armature current ripple CurRippleMode 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 found new application on Memory Card activate application on Memory Card by means of ParApplSave 1
496. rogram cannot be edited B2 Bit2 1 Adaptive Program is being checked 0 no action B3 Bit3 1 Adaptive Program is faulty 0 Adaptive Program is OK 1 Adaptive Program is protected 0 Adaptive Program is unprotected Faults in the Adaptive Program can be used function block with not at least input 1 connection used pointer is not valid invalid bit number for function block Bset location of function block PlI Bal after PI function block Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y B4 Bit4 FaultedPar faulted parameters The Adaptive Program will be checked before running If there is a fault AdapPrgStat 84 01 is set to faulty and FaultedPar 84 02 shows the faulty input Note1 In case of a problem check the value and the attribute of the faulty input Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y LocationCounter location counter Location counter for AdapProgCmd 83 01 SingleStep shows the function block number which will be executed next Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 84 04 BlockiType function block 1 type Selects the type for function block 1 Block Parameter Set 1 BPS1 Detailed description of the type can be found in chapter Function blocks 0 NotUsed 1 ABS 2 ADD 3 AND 4 Bitwise 5 Bset 6 Compare 7 Count 8 D Pot 9 Event 10 Filter 11 Limit 12 MaskSet 13 Max
497. rol is released To release window control set TorqSel 26 01 Add and AuxCitrlWord 7 02 bit 7 1 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N WinWidthPos positive window width Positive speed limit for the window control when the speed error An pn N iS positive Internally limited from 2 29 32767 rpm to 2 29 32767 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N WinWidthNeg negative window width Negative speed limit for the window control when the speed error An pn n is negative Internally limited from 2 29 e210 rpm to 2 29 SE rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N SpeedStep speed step SpeedStep 23 10 is added to the speed error An at the speed controller s input The given min max values are limited by M1SpeedMin 20 02 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Note1 Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedErrFilt2 2 filter for An Speed error An filter time 2 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N WinCirlMode window control mode Window control mode 0 SpeedErrWin standard window control Speed error An has to be in a window defined by WinWidthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 default 1 SpeedActWin speed actual has to be in a window defined by WinW
498. rom DI7 2 DI7HI amp Z DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 3 DI7Hi amp Z Fwd DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward 4 DI7Hi amp Z Rev DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse 5 DI7 falling edge 1 0 taken from DI7 6 DI7LO amp Z DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 7 DI7LO amp Z Fwd DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward 8 DI7LO amp Z Rev DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse 9 Z rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 10 SyncCommand rising edge 0 1 taken from AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 Note1 Forward rotation means that encoder channel A pulses lead channel B pulses by 90 electrical Reverse rotation means that encoder channel B pulses lead channel A pulses by 90 electrical Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N NotUsed min def NotUsed MotFanAck motor fan acknowledge The drive trips with F523 ExtFanAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 6 if a digital input for an external fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 DN 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 2 DI2 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge default 3 DI 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 4
499. rque selection 3 3 ms TorgRet2 Torque selector TorqRef2 Speed 1 TorgRefExt i TorqRefA Sel 2 24 H Torque 2 TorqRefA2501 aaa ae TorgReft an ae FTorqRetA FTG boadShare TorgRefB 25 Torque ramp 20 09 H TorqMaxTret 20 10 H TorqMinTret TorqMaxAll C220 TorqMinAll TorqSelMod TorqMux 26 04 _ TorgMuxMode Oif Mode INotUsed TorgSel 2601 TorqSel2601 0 6 Stopii di Dn D11 Speed Torq 1 or 2 Sa a MCW Bit 11 MCW Bit15 Speed Min D or 3 i J E StopMode ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 i LocalLoossCtri Speed Limit 1 or 6 CommLossCtrl FaultStopMode M1 TorgProvTime M2TorgProvTime cho ComLossCtrl AG ComLossCtrl TorqMuxMode torque multiplexer mode TorqMuxMode 26 04 selects a pair of operation modes The change between operation modes is done by means of TorqMux 26 05 Torque reference multiplexer 0 TorqSel2601 operation mode depends on TorqSel 26 01 default 1 Speed Torq operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary Input 0 speed control 1 binary Input 1 torque control 2 2 Speed Min operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary Input 0 speed c
500. rrent in percent of M2NomFidCur 49 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Mot2FidCur motor 2 actual field current Motor 2 field current Filtered with 500 ms Int Scaling 100 1A Type SI Volatile Y ArmCurActSIi 12 pulse slave actual armature current Actual armature current of 12 pulse slave Valid in 12 pulse master only Valid for 12 pulse parallel only Int Scaling 1 1 A Type SI Volatile Y ArmCurAll 12 pulse parallel master and slave actual armature current Sum of actual armature current for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave Filtered with 10 ms Valid in 12 pulse master only Valid for 12 pulse parallel only Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI Volatile Y Sum of actual armature voltage for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave Valid in 12 pulse master only Valid for 12 pulse serial sequential only Int Scaling 1 1V Type SI Volatile Y MainsFreqAct actual mains frequency Actual mains frequency Int Scaling 100 1 Hz Type l Volatile Y AhCounter ampere hour counter Ampere hour counter Int Scaling 100 1kAh Type Volatile Y ProcSpeed process speed Calculated process line speed Scaled with WinderScale 50 17 Int Scaling 10 1 m min Type SI Volatile Y SpeedActEnc2 speed actual encoder 2 Actual speed measured with pulse encoder 2 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y 179 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal and param
501. rriding control to drive 40021 lt data word 7 3 DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control 40004 lt data word 2 1 DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control 40005 lt data word 2 2 DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 209 default TorgRef2 2 09 input data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from drive to overriding control 40006 lt data word 2 3 up to DsetXplus7Val3 92 12 907 default Alarmword2 9 07 input data word 12 alarm word 2 12 data word from drive to overriding control 40024 lt data word 8 3 DCS800 parameter setting using a Modbus controlling the drive Note New settings of group 52 take effect only after the next power up of the adapter Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 128 when used for monitoring only 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 For monitoring only read commands are supported Up to 24 data words for monitoring are possible because the 12 data words written to by the overriding control se
502. rs are set When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help 4 5 Press UP DOWN to highlight ASSISTANTS in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate start up assistant then press SEL to enter PAR EDIT mode Make entries or selections as appropriate Press SAVE to save settings Each individual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Macros mode Currently not used Changed parameters mode Use the changed parameters mode to view and edit a listing of all parameter that have been changed from their default values 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight CHANGED PAR in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight a changed parameter then press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter 3 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired parameter value Note To get the parameter default value press UP DOWN simultaneously 4 Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications Note If the new value is the default value the parameter will no longer appear in the changed parameter list 5 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN
503. s 20 ms 100 ms or 500 ms when AdapProgCmd 83 01 is set to Start SingleCycle or SingleStep pf Alarmiover Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light SpeedNotZero 138 Off2FieldBus 139 Off3FieldBus 140 IllgFieldBus 141 COM8FwVer 142 MemCardMiss 447 Definition Action Alarm word Speed not zero 9 08 Not active if Re start of drive is not possible Speed zero see bit4 RdyRef 1 M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 or M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 has not been reached only in case FiyStart 21 10 StartFromO In case of a trip set On Run 0 to reset the alarm Check M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 FlyStart 21 10 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 M2SpeedFbSel 49 24 M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop pending via 9 08 RdyRun 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 fieldbus start inhibition bit 5 There is no problem with the drive itself Check _ MainCtrlWord 7 01 biti Off2N Off3 E stop pending via MainCtriWord 7 01 9 08 RdyRun 1 fieldbus bit 6 There is no problem with the drive itself Check _ MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit2 Off3N mk Ooo a A A a ay ama Illegal fieldbus settings 9 08 always The fieldbus parameters in group 51 fieldbus are not bit 7 set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has not been selected Check group 51 fieldbus configuration of fieldbus adapter
504. s gt 2125 A Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurRiseMax maximum rise armature current The drive trips with F539 FastCurRise FaultWord3 9 03 bit 6 if ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 per 1 ms is exceeded This trip opens the main contactor and the DC breaker if present Int Scaling 100 1 ms Type Volatile N M1FidMinTrip motor 1 minimum field trip The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if M1FldMinTrip 30 12 in percent of M1NomFldCur 99 11 is still undershot when FldMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Note1 M1FldMinTrip 30 12 is not valid for FldCtriMode 44 01 Fix Opti EMF Opti Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opii In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 of FidCurRefM1 3 30 The drive trips with F541 M1iFexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if 50 of FidCurRefM1 3 30 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M1FldOvrCurLev motor 1 field overcurrent level The drive trips with F515 M1FexOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 14 if M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 in percent of M1NomFldCur 99 11 is exceeded It is recommended to set M1FldOvrCurtLev 30 13 at least 25 higher than M1NomFldCur 99 11 The field overcurrent fault is inactive if M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 is set to 135 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N SpeedFbMonLev speed feedback monitor level The drive reacts acco
505. s DI9 DI10 Dl11 DO9 and DO10 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 2 see switch S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no first RDIO xx is used default 1 Slot first RDIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 first RDIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 first RDIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA first RDIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 2 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RDIO extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Note1 For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO xx by means of dip switch S2 Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected Note2 The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord 7 05 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery 17 RDIO Switch S1 Switch S2 ADDRESS NotUsed NotUsed FELA Hw Ee Filtering DACH ENABLED si ret DISABLED Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 386 Signal Parameter name 98 04 DIO ExtModule2 digital extension module 2 Second RDIO xx extension modul
506. s constant speed 4 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Analog inputs Al1HighVal analog input 1 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in Al1HighVal 13 01 Example Incase the min max voltage 10 V of analog input 1 should equal 250 of TorqRefExt 2 24 set TorqRefA Sel 25 10 Al1 ConvModeAI 1 13 03 10 V Bi AltHighVal 13 01 4000 mV and AltLowVal 13 02 4000 mV Note1 To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N AliLow Val analog input 1 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in A 7LowVal 13 02 Note1 Al1LowVal 13 02 is only valid if ConvModeAl1 13 03 10 V Bi Note2 To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 247 Signal Parameter name ConvModeAI1 conversion mode analog input 1 The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bi
507. s cooled down bit 3 Shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 The converter overtemperature alarm will already appear at approximately 5 C below the shutdown temperature Check Alarmlevel ConvFanAck 10 20 FanDly 21 14 converter door open converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter fan components converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 105 DynBrakeAck Selected motor dynamic braking is still pending 9 06 RdyRun 1 is set to 150 and single firing pulses are given thus bit 4 the drive cannot be started or re started while dynamic braking is active Check _ DynBrakeAck 10 22 Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 441 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and 9 06 always bit 5 M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 motor temperature motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 DriveWindow Light A107 107 M1OverLoad Motor 1 calculated overload 9 06 always 2 Check bit 6 _M1AlarmLimL
508. s of DriveDirection is not possible Note2 If ForceBrake is set the brake remains closed applied If the Run MainCtrilWord 7 01 bit 3 command is given to a drive in state RdyOn or RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 bit O and 1 the brake logic will be started up to the point of the brake open command A drive in state Running MainStatWord 8 01 bit 2 will be stopped by ramp the brake will be closed applied but the drive will remain in state Running Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 204 Signal Parameter name 7 04 UsedMCW used main control word UMCW Internal used selected main control word The selection is depending on the drives local remote control setting CommandSel 10 01 and HandAuto 10 07 The bit functionality is the same as the in the MainCtrlWord 7 01 Not all functions are controllable from local control or local I O mode BO see MainCtrlWord 7 01 to B15 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 7 01 MCW B10 Hand Auto MainCtrlWord MCW CommandSel Bito On Off1N Biti Off2N Coast Stop Bit2 Off3N E Stop Bit3 Run Bit4 RampOutZero Bits RampHold Bit RampInZero Bit7 Reset Bit8 Inching1 Bit9 Inching2 DO RemoteCmd Bit11 Bit15 aux control 0 15 0 15 7 04 UsedMCW UMCW OnOff1 Off2 E Stop
509. s signal is set during initialization of the drive new values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling Type c Volatile Y ApplicVer application version Version of the loaded application program The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name DriveLibVer drive library version Version of the loaded function block library The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version Int Scaling Type Cc Volatile Y ConvType converter type Recognized converter type Read from TypeCode 97 01 None when TypeCode 97 01 None D1 D1 converter D2 D2 converter D3 D3 converter D4 D4 converter D5 D5 converter D6 D6 converter D7 D7 converter ManualSet set by user if S ConvScaleCur 97 02 and or S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 have been changed for e g rebuild kits Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile Y QuadrantType quadrant type of converter 1 or 2 bridges Recognized converter quadrant type Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S BlockBrdg2 97 07 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S BlockBrdg2 97 07 0 Read from S BlockBrdg2 97 07 if S BlockBrdg2 97 07 0 BlockBridge2 bridge 2 blocked 2 Q operation RelBridge2 bridge 2 released 4 Q operation default Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y ConvOvrCur converter overcurrent DC level
510. s used Int Scaling 1 1 Type c Volatile N TorqGenMax maximum and minimum torque limit during regenerating Maximum and minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 only during regenerating Note1 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening ie limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N Poe o Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 264 Signal Parameter name Off1Mode off 1 mode Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW 7 04 bit O On respectively Off1N is set to low 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and On is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing p
511. s zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking A113 COM8Com AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 12 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note1 The time out for ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 is set by Ch0 TimeOut 70 04 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N CHO HW Config channel 0 hardware configuration CHO HW Config 70 06 is used to enable disable the regeneration of the Channel 0 optotransmitters in DDCS mode ChO DriveBus 71 01 No Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back DDCS mode is typically used with APC2 AC70 AC80 and module bus of AC 800M 0 Ring Regeneration is enabled Used with ring type bus topology Typically when Channel 0 of all SDCS COM 8 has been connected to a ring 1 Star Regeneration is disabled Used with star type topology Typically with configurations using the NDBU x5 branching units default Note1 This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode Ch0 DriveBus 71 01 Yes Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N RampStop Fixed peed1 RampStop Star Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Ch1 LinkControl channel 1 link control Channel 1 is used for communication with the AIMA xx adapter DDCS channel 1 intensi
512. sVolt 99 10 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile Y MainsVoltAct actual mains voltage Actual mains voltage Filtered with 10 ms Int Scaling 1 1 V Type Volatile Y ArmVoltAciRel relative actual armature voltage Relative actual armature voltage in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Note1 the value is also influenced by AdjUDC 97 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y ArmVoltAct actual armature voltage Actual armature voltage Filtered with 10 ms Note1 the value is also influenced by AdjUDC 97 23 Int Scaling 1 1V Type SI Volatile Y ConvCurActRel relative actual converter current DC Relative actual converter current in percent of ConvNomCur 4 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvCurAct actual converter current DC Actual converter current Filtered with 10 ms Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 178 Signal Parameter name 1 17 EMF VoltActRel relative actual EMF Relative actual EMF in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 EMF VoltActRel 1 17 Int Scaling 100 1 Type MotiTempCalc motor 1 calculated temperature Motor 1 calculated temperature from motor thermal model Used for motor overtemperature protection Mt1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile Y Mot2TempCalc motor 2 calculated temperature Motor 2 calculated te
513. scription ITC 38ADW000308 x Winder Questionnaire 3ADW000253z x DCS800 E Panel Solution Flyer DCS800 E Panel solution 38ADW000210 x Hardware Manual DCS800 E 38ADW000224 x DCS800 A Enclosed Converters Flyer DCS800 A 3ADW000213 D Technical Catalogue DCS800 A 38ADW000198 x Installation of DCS800 A 38ADW000091 p DCS800 R Rebuild System Flyer DCS800 R 3ADW000007 D D DCS800 R Manual 3ADW000197 x DCS500 DCS600 Size A5 A7 C2b C3 and C4 Upgrade Kits 38ADW000256 x Extension Modules RAIO 01 Analogue IO Extension 3AFE64484567 x RDIO 01 Digital IO Extension 3AFE64485733 D AIMA R slot extension 3AFE64661442 x Serial Communication Drive specific serial communication NETA Remote diagnostic interface 3AFE64605062 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RPBA PROFIBUS 38AFE64504215 D Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RCAN 02 CANopen Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RCNA 01 ControlNet 3AFE64506005 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RDNA DeviceNet 3AFE64504223 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RMBA MODBUS 38AFE64498851 D Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RETA Ethernet 3AFE64539736 x x gt existing p gt planned Status 07 2008 DCS800 Drive Manuals List_g doc Safety instructions What this chapter contains This chapter contains the safety instructions you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive the motor or driven equipm
514. seAdar 70 24 10 the reception of data sets 10 and 12 is supervised Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Ch0 ComLossCtrl channel 0 communication loss control ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 0 control F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 is set with 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped default In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorgSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current i
515. seeceeeeees 87 91 214 419 FaultWord4 cc ceceececececesseeeeeeeseeeees 215 419 FB TimeOut cceceeeeeee sete ees 295 431 445 FBA PAR REFRESH 106 108 112 114 116 118 120 131 134 345 FbMonl ey 430 436 444 FexTimeOut 58 83 94 370 428 429 Fieldbus WEE 345 FIGIADUS ND ee eg d eege d 345 FIGIGDUS Iesse et A eege ed 345 Fieldbus2gp 345 SICH E 247 FIG KEE 247 PUE eet sccittaiies ides b sse 248 Eet aoe oN eas Oe Ate ET 248 FilterFAQ A EE 253 Fiter AQ EE 254 AterA OI a a eege 254 al Cd e EE 255 FInNQLimMOde 2 izeengedegugggereeeekg egreg egesden 310 FirmwareVer oeennesoennnneseen 46 105 186 447 FiIXCUS POCO 1 we ciscaceiscacedecivtcexiniteeeecnens 271 FixvedGpeed AANER 271 Fld oositact a aA 316 FldBoostSel cceseeceeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeees 70 315 Fld oost Time 316 FildCtriMode 27 29 41 44 52 58 313 FIACUrFIUX4O oe ceeeeceeeeseeeeee ees 29 43 314 FIACUrFIUX7O 1 2 eeeseeceeeeeeeeeneeeees 29 43 314 FIACUrFIUX9O 1 2 2 ceeeceeeeseeeee eens 29 43 314 FIdCUrRefM ccececeeeeseeeeeeeeees 31 54 185 Bleift EE 185 FICUTI epee 323 FldileatGel iaaa eei kii 54 268 FldMinTripDly 54 58 323 418 433 434 le ELE EE 53 321 elle VE EE 53 320 FldRevHyst s t GER 54 320 FldAWeakDyn i205 ciesseaisdere he caeeaticeiensmacede 315 FUXCO toes leis einen 44 318 FlusbertMt raria a 185 FluxRefFldWeak cccccccseeeses
516. selection 3 3 ms Panel 209 gt 2 09 Je TorgRefExt TorgRefA Sel 2 24 gt Fit vier 25 01 TorqRefA2501 25 03 x y i x Local Ai AR LoadShare 25 02 HTorgReiA FTC TorgRet8 2504 Torque ramp 20 09 H TorqMaxTref 20 10 FY TorgMinTref gM ax rqMin TorgMaxAll TorgMinAll 25 05 25 06 TorqSelMod 1 BH 26 05 TorgMux 26 04 TorqMuxMode 1 i 27 02 JOFIMode INotUsed TorgSel 2601 4TorgSel2601 0 6 21 03 StopMode DH D11 Speed Torg 1 or 2 i 21 04 HE StopMode MCW Bit 11 MCW Bitt5 Speed Min 1 or 3 ll 39 D7 LocalLoossctrl ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 Stee L J peegiU mt 1 or 6 30 28 CommLossCtr 30 30 42 10 49 40 70 05 70 15 FaultStopMode Mi TorgProvTime M2TorgProvTime Cho ComLossCtrl Ch2 ComLossCtrl Master parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 210 sends the torque value to the follower Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 89 Follower MailBox1 94 12 5 configures followers first mailbox to receive data Follower parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 2501 gets the torque value from the master Torque reference and torque selection 3 3 ms TorgRef2 Torque s
517. ser defined fault word All names are defined by the user via application program Bit Fault text Fault code Comment and trip level BO UserFault1 F610 B1 UserFault2 F611 UserFault3 F612 UserFault4 UserFault5 UserFault6 UserFault7 UserFault8 UserFault9 UserFault10 UserFault11 UserFault12 UserFault13 UserFault14 UserFault15 UserFault16 Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name AlarmWord1 alarm word 1 Alarm word 1 Bit BO B1 B2 B14 B15 Int Scaling 1 1 Alarm text off2ViaDI A101 off3ViaDI A102 DC BreakAck A103 ConvOverTemp DynBrakeAck M1OverTemp M1OverLoad reserved M2OverTemp M2OverLoad MainsLowVolt P2PandMFCom COM8Com ArmCurDev TachoRange BrakeLongFalling A116 Type Alarm code and alarm level 1 3 Comment Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop pending via digital input Off2 10 08 Off3 E stop pending via digital input E Stop 10 09 selected motor DC breaker acknowledge missing DC BreakAck 10 23 converter overtemperature shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 The converter overtemperature alarm will already appear at approximately 5 C below the shutdown temperature selected motor dynamic braking acknowledge is still pending DynBrakeAck 10 22 motor 1 measured overtemperature Mi1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 motor 1 calculated overload the
518. served reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y M2FexFaultWord motor 2 field exciter fault word Motor 2 field exciter fault word Bit Fault text Fault code Comment BO reserved B1 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 227 Signal Parameter name Start stop select CommandSel command selector UsedMCW 7 04 selector 0 Local I O Drive is controlled via local I O Reset 10 03 DI6 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 default OnOff1 10 15 DI7 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 default and StartStop 10 16 DI8 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 default 1 MainCtrlWord drive is controlled via MainCtrilWord 7 01 Automatic switchover from MainCtrlWord to Local I O in case of F528 FieldBusCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 11 It is still possible to control the drive via local I O OnOff1 10 15 DI7 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 default and StartStop 10 16 DI8 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 default The used speed reference is set by means of FixedSpeed 23 02 3 12PLink Drive is controlled from 12 pulse master OnOff1 StartStop Off2N and Reset Only available when OperModeSel 43 01 12P ParaSla or 12P SerSla 4 FexLink Drive is controlled from field e
519. set X 5 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 5 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus5Val2 data set X 5 value 2 Data set X 5 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 5 Default setting of 902 equals FaultWord2 9 02 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus5Val3 data set X 5 value 3 Data set X 5 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 5 Default setting of 903 equals FaultWord3 9 03 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus7Val1 data set X 7 value 1 Data set X 7 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 7 Default setting of 904 equals FaultWord4 9 04 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus7Val2 data set X 7 value 2 Data set X 7 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 7 Default setting of 906 equals AlarmWord1 9 06 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus7Val3 data set X 7 value 3 Data set X 7 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 7 Default setting of 907 equals AlarmWord2 9 07 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus9Val1 data set X 9 value 1 Data set X 9 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 9 Default setting of 908 equals AlarmWord3 9 08 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus9Val2 data set X 9 value 2 Data
520. set all trigger conditions Upload samples and show as values or as graphs Save samples as files in the NETA 01 Download saved data logger files via FTP e Status word MainStatWord 8 01 is shown after clicking on the lamp Note Bit 11 EXT_CTRL_LOC and bit 12 RUN_ENABLE are not used for DC drives Note Data set communication and motor control e g local control of the drives via NETA 01 are not released for the DCS800 Related documentation User s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module NETA 01 83AFE64605062 Rev D The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual NETA 01 configuration The NETA 01 homepage can be called by using a browser e g internet explorer Note1 Before connecting the NETA 01 via Ch3 with the DCS800 check that Too Channel Ch3 of the NETA 01 configuration is ticked otherwise group 51 Fieldbus will be overwritten Note2 When connecting the NETA 01 with the DCS800 make sure to use Ch3 tool channel on the SDCS COM 8 otherwise group 51 Fieldbus will be overwritten ChO can be used too but then group 51 Fieldbus will be overwritten and cannot be used for other serial communication Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 105 More details about the NETA 01 configuration see page 55 of the User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation The adapter module is mounted onto a standard mounting rail outside the drive Drive configuration The DCS800 needs no
521. special settings when using Ch3 concerning the released functions Firmware compatibility SDCS CON 4 firmware version 1 8 or higher see FirmwareVer 4 01 SDCS COM 8 firmware version 1 3 or higher see Com8SwVersion 4 11 Communication 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 106 CANopen communication with fieldbus adapter RCAN 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the CANopen adapter RCAN 01 together with the DCS800 RCAN 01 DCS800 The CANopen communication with the drive requires the option RCAN 01 Related documentation User s Manual CANopen Adapter Module RCAN 01 83AFE64504231 Rev A The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Supported operation mode is PDO21 see page 43 and 44 EDS file The EDS file for RCAN 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RCAN 01 into slot 1 of the drive Drive configuration The CANopen adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the operation mode PDO21 see page 43 and 44 Parameter setting example 1 using group 51 Communication via group 51 is using 4 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using group 51 Drive parameters Settings
522. t DI StatWord 8 05 Fixed assigned DI REF DI7 for positioning bit 0 Di X12 1 DHO 4 l X12 2 bit 1 DI2 X12 3 DItt bit 2 DIS X12 4 bit 3 D14 DIO ExtModulet 98 03 bit 4 DIS bit 5 Die 2 4 RDIO 01 bit 6 DI7 ai D12 bit 7 DI8 bit 8 DI9 os D13 4 bit 9 D110 i bit 10 D111 X12 3 DI14 bit 11 D112 X12 4 bit 12 DI13 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 aod Structure of DI s VO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 72 Digital outputs DO s The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 7 standard DO s Standard DO8 is located on the SDCS PIN 4 All 8 standard DO s can be replaced with SDCS IOB 2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO 01 digital I O extension modules Thus the maximum number of DO s is 12 The hardware source is selected by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 for DO9 and DO10 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 for D011 and DO12 10 BoardConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of digital UO extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 2 On the SDCS CON 4 the standard DO s are relay drivers DO8 is located on the SDCS PIN 4 and a isolated by means of a relay If the SDCS IOB 2 is being used DO6 and DO7 are isolated by means of optocouplers while the others DO1 to DO5 and DO8 are isolated by means of relays Output values SDCS CON 4 DO6 to DO7 max 50 mA 22 VDC at no load for more details see Hardware Manual Output va
523. t How to set and connect the input Option 1 e Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode Enter e Give the constant value to this input parameter arrow keys e Accept by Enter e Scroll to attribute parameter BlockxAttrib e Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in BlockxAttrib parameter e Accept by Enter The figure below shows the DCS800 Control Panel display when the input BlockxIn1 selection parameter is in edit mode and the constant field is visible The constant may have a value from 32768 to 32767 The constant cannot be changed while the Adaptive Program is running Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8406 Block1In2 Value of the desired 1 0000 constant CANCEL Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8408 Block1 Attrib Setti f tant Seting of conta 2000 hex input CANCEL Option 2 e The user constant 85 01 to 85 10 reserved for the Adaptive Program and can be used for customer setting Parameter 19 01 19 12 can be used in the same manner but not stored in the flash e Connect the user constant to a block as usual by the input selection parameter The user constants can be changed while the Adaptive Program is running They may have values from 32767 to 32767 Note A constant Block constant like option 1 can only be changed in Edit mode If the constant may be modified during running a user constant like option 2 is needed Adaptive Program
524. t If AT is longer than DevLimPLL 97 13 F514 MainsNotSync will be generated The actual value of the PLL can bee seen in PLLOut 3 20 Note at 50 Hz one period 360 20 ms 31250 at 60 Hz one period 360 16 7 ms 26042 Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 407 Mains overvoltage The overvoltage level is fixed to 1 3 NomMainsVolt 99 10 Exceeding this level for more than 10 s and RdyRun 1 causes F513 MainsOvrVolt Communication loss The communication to several devices is supervised The reaction to a communication loss can be chosen by means of LocalLossCtrl 30 27 respectively ComLossCtrl 30 28 The time out is set by the parameters listed in the table as well as all dependent fault and alarm messages Overview local and communication loss Device Related alarm DCS800 LocalLossCtrl 30 27 fixed to 5s F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss Control Panel DW DWL Rxxx ComLossCtrl 30 28 EE JEE E FieldBusCom Fieldbus DCSLink MailBoxCycle1 94 13 F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 DSP TimeOut 94 03 F535 12PulseCom_ pomore Bee F519 M2FexCom SDCS COM 8 F543 COM8Com A113 COM8Com Overview local and communication loss Fan field and mains contactor acknowledge When the drive is switched On MCW bit 0 the firmware closes the fan contactor and waits for acknowledge After it is r
525. t parameter set 2 KpS2 24 27 and TiS2 24 28 is active If IMotSpeed 1 04 lt SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter sei is active ACW Biti If IMotSpeed 1 04 gt SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter set 2 is active If SpeedErrNeg 2 03 lt SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter set1 is active If SoeedErrNeg 2 03 gt SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active with digital extension board 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active with digital extension board 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active with digital extension board 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 01 bit 11 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 01 bit 12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 01 bit 13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is a
526. t 84 09 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N def E ER DEE es E Pe eee EESCH EI el El El Eel Eel EL El E C Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Block2Out block 2 output The value of function block 2 output Block2Output 84 15 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block3Out block 3 output The value of function block 3 output Block3Output 84 21 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block4Out block 4 output The value of function block 4 output Block1 Output 84 27 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block5Out block 5 output The value of function block 5 output Block 1 Output 84 33 is wri
527. t Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N FB TimeOut fieldbus time out Time delay before a communication break with a fieldbus is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F528 FieldBusCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 11 or A128 FieldBusCom AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 11 is set The communication fault and alarm are inactive if FB TimeOut 30 35 is set to 0 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N SpeedFbFlitMode speed feedback fault mode SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 3 0 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 1 DynBraking dynamic braking Note1 SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 doesn t apply to communication faults Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N SI OO LL E D T o Q fe YN Kei bei fe OJ d Q fe ES Ke I Ke bei fe We def NotUsed Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Motor 1 temperature M1ModelTime motor 1 model time constant Thermal time constant for motor 1 with fan forced cooling The time within the temperature rises to 63 of its nominal value The motor thermal model is blocked if M1ModelTime 31 01 is set to zero The value of Mot TempCalc 1 20 is saved at power down of the dr
528. t of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M2NomCur 49 02 with M2KpArmCur 49 14 3 if the current error is 5 of M2NomCur 49 02 On that condition and with M2TiArmCur 49 15 50 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal current if the current error is constant after 50 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M2TiArmCur 49 15 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N M2DiscontCurLim motor 2 discontinuous current limit Threshold continuous discontinuous current in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 The actual continuous discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 12 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 330 Signal Parameter name 49 17 M2ArmL motor 2 armature inductance Inductance of the armature circuit in mH Used for the EMF compensation dl EMF U R 1 L Ge t Int Scaling 100 1 mH Type Volatile N M2ArmR motor 2 armature resistance Resistance of the armature circuit in mQ Used for the EMF compensation dl EMF U R 1 L dt Int Scaling 1 1 mQ Type Volatile N M2SpeedMin motor 2 minimum speed Motor 2 negative speed reference limit in rpm f
529. t possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800 Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly ABB Drives assembly is using 2 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtriWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 117 DsetxXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 DEVICENET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 2 2 500 kBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly Output instance 51 06 100 100 ABB Drives assembly Input instance 51 07 101 101 ABB Drives assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to NA not applicable wh
530. t 15 4xx UserAlarmxx Disappearing user alarm eooo a al el el al e el al el el al el a el ol ej af ol el of a June Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Notices 449 A notice is a message to inform the user about a specific occurrence which happened to the drive Text on DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Definition Action 718 PowerUp Energize electronics The auxiliary voltage for the drives electronics is switched on 719 FaultReset Reset Reset of all faults which can be acknowledged 801 APNotice1 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 802 APNotice2 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 803 APNotice3 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 804 APNotice4 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 805 APNotice5 User defined notice by Adaptive Program AccessDenied Access to Memory Card Access to Memory Card is denied due to another access ParNoCyc Cyclic parameters Anon cyclical parameter is written to e g the overriding control writes cyclical on a non cyclical parameter The parameters causing the notice can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 PrglnvMode Application program not in Edit mode Push or Delete action while application program is not in Edit mode Check EditCmd 83 02 AdapProgCmd 83 01 PrgFault Application program faulty Application program faulty Check Faulted
531. t Al1 4 Al2 analog input Al2 5 Al3 analog input AI3 6 Al4 analog input Al4 7 Al5 analog input AIS 8 Al6 analog input Al6 Note1 Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e g suspended load The preset torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open lift command is removed After energizing the drive the value of StrtTorqRef 42 08 is set as torque memory Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 338 Signal Parameter name Speed measurement M1SpeedScale motor 1 speed scaling Motor 1 speed scaling in rpm M1SpeedScale 50 01 defines the speed in rpm that corresponds to 20 000 speed units The speed scaling is released when M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 20 000 speed units M1SpeedScale 50 01 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 2 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 lt 10 or mathematically If 50 01 10 then 20 000 50 07 in rpm If 50 01 lt 10 then 20 000 Max 1 20 07 I 1 20 02 I in rpm The actual used speed scaling is visible in SoeedScale Act 2 29 M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 M1SpeedScale 50 01 SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 Note1 M1SpeedScale 50 01 has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding control e g fieldbus
532. t by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop only available with digital extension board Start by rising edge 0 1 0 Stop only available with digital extension board Start by rising edge 0 1 0 Stop only available with digital extension board Start by rising edge 0 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 Start by rising edge 0 1 0 Stop AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 Start by rising edge 0 1 0 Stop AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 On and Start by rising pulse 0 1 of DI7 Stop and Off1 by falling pulse 1 0 of DI8 Following settings apply OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 DI7DI8 Type c Volatile N NotUsed Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def 10 17 Jog1 jogging 1 command Binary signal for Jog1 Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed1 23 02 0 NotUsed default 1 Dl1 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 2 DI2 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 3 DIS 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 4 Di4 1 Jog1 ac
533. t integer value 15 bit sign Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign gain factor 100 corresponds to 1 and 10 000 to 100 Input IN3 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign integrator coefficient 100 corresponds to 1 and 10 000 to 100 Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign the range is limited from 20 000 to 20 000 Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 164 Pl Bal Type Arithmetic function Illustration Operation The PI Bal block initializes the PI block Thus in the program the PI Bal block must follow directly the PI block and can only be used together with the PI block When IN1 is true the PI Bal block writes the value of IN2 directly into OUT of the PI block When IN1 is false the PI Bal block releases OUT of the PI block which continues normal operation from the set output Connections Input IN1 boolean value Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Input IN3 not used Output OUT affects PI block Ramp Type Arithmetic function Illustration Operation The block uses IN1 as input With the ramp times IN2 and IN3 OUT increases or Connections decreases until the input value is reached IN1 Input value IN2 Ramp up time ms related to 20 000 acceleration IN3 Ramp down time ms related to 20 000 deceleration OUT integer output al IN2 IN3 t IN2 IN3 DCS800 FW ramp dsf Input IN1 16 bit integer value 15 bit sign Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15
534. t is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800 Parameter setting example using Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile uses up to 4 data words in each direction by default The internal connection from and to the DCS800 has to be done by means of parameter group 51 Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile uses up to 12 data words in each direction The configuration has to be done via fieldbus link configuration using Vendor Specific Drive I O Object Class 91h Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetxXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 121 reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 ETHERNET TCP Comm rate 51 02 0 Auto ne
535. t limit bridge 2 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Setting M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 to 0 disables bridge 2 Note1 The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Note2 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 is internally set to 0 if QuadrantType 4 15 2 Q 2 Q drive Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N ArmAlphaMax maximum firing angle Maximum firing angle o in degrees Int Scaling 1 1deg Type SI Volatile N ArmAlphaMin minimum firing angle Minimum firing angle in degrees Int Scaling 1 1 deg Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name def TorqUsedMaxSel maximum used torque selector TorqUsedMax 2 22 selector 0 TorqMax2005 TorqMax 20 05 default 1 All analog input 1 2 Al2 analog input 2 3 Al3 analog input 3 4 Al4 analog input 4 5 AIS analog input 5 6 Al6 analog input 6 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N ToraMax2005 ToraMax2005 20 19 TorqUsedMinSel minimum used torque selector gaa TorqUsedMin 2 23 selector 8 S S 0 TorqMin2006 TorqMin 20 06 default GK 1 All analog input 1 2 Al2 analog input 2 O O 3 Al3 analog input 3 E z 4 Al4 analog input 4 5 Al5 analog input 5 6 Al6 analog input 6 7 Negate2018 negated output of TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 i
536. t source see Hardware Manual SDCS IOB 3 gt A D gt lan NEE Ou PT100 Pop po po Po PT100 C EWEN Mi v Ke C Motor 1 Motor 2 J y single motor DCS800 FW PT100 and IOB3 dsf X3 5 PT100 and SDCS IOB 3 For more information see section Analog Inputs Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 412 RAIO for motor temperature measurement Al7 motor 1 and Al8 motor 2 are used for the temperature measurement with PT100 AO5 and AO6 are used as current source Al7 AO5 and Al8 AO6 have to be activated by means of AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 a BY Al PT100 PT100 PT100 E TZ Zs 2 1 AO5 D A PT100 PT100 PT100 IT er J N J Wa Ka C Motor 1 Motor 2 J Yo DCS800 FW PT0100 and sec RAIO dsf single motor PT100 and second RAIO SDCS IOB 3 Connection possibilities for PTC max 1 PTC for motor 1 and max 1 PTC for motor 2 or upto 2 PTC for a single motor Al2 motor 1 and AI3 motor 2 are used for the temperature measurement with PTC Jumper settings see Hardware Manual SDCS IOB 3 ma tee X3 5 Motor 1 Motor 2 DCS800 FW PTC and IOB3 dsf single motor PTC and SDCS IOB 3 Fault tracing 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Klixon 413 SDCS CON 4 Connection possibilities
537. t the type code set ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode The change of the type code is immediately taken over and ServiceMode 99 06 is automatically set back to NormalMode 0 None the type code is set by user see S ConvScaleCur 97 02 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 and S BlockBridge2 97 07 for e g rebuild kits 1 01 0020 04 type code see table to 148 S02 5200 05 type code see table The drive s basic type code DCS800 AAX YYYY ZZ Product family DCS800 Type AA Standard converter modules Rebuild system Bridge type Single bridge 2 Q 2 anti parallel bridges 4 Q Module type Rated DC current Rated AC voltage 230 VAC 400 VAC 230 VAC 500 525 VAC 270 VAC 600 VAC 315 VAC 690 VAC 360 VAC 800 VAC 450 VAC 990 VAC Attention When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Type code table None Signal Parameter name 01 2600 10 02 1000 04 S 01 0020 04 01 2600 12 02 1000 05 01 0020 05 01 3000 04 02 0900 06 S 01 0045 04 01 3000 05 02 0900 07 01 0045 05 01 3000 06 02 1200 04 S01 0065 04 01 3000 07 02 1200 05 S01 0065 05 01 3000 08
538. t ways how to control the DC breaker depending on the available hardware and the customers on off philosophy Following are the most common examples AC and DC breaker controlled by the drive AC breaker Command MainContactorOn see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 DC breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck 10 23 DC breaker AC and DC breaker controlled by the drive In the above example both the AC and the DC breaker are controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens both breakers with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 and DC BreakAck 10 23 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set In case the DC breaker acknowledge is missing A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 2 is set is forced to 150 and single firing pulses are given The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Firmware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 63 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled by the drive Command MainContactorOn see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge Command Trip DC breaker see MainContAck 10 21 see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 DC breaker No AC breaker DC breaker controlled by the drive In the above example no AC breaker is use
539. t word 2 Fault word 2 Bit Fault text Fault code Comment and trip level BO ArmCurRipple F517 3 armature current ripple CurRippleMode 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 B1 M2FexOverCur F518 1 motor 2 field exciter overcurrent M2FIdOvrCurLev 49 09 M2FexCom F519 motor 2 field exciter communication loss FexTimeOut 94 07 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 M2FexNode 94 09 reserved no action FieldAck selected motor field acknowledge check fault message of or at field exciter SpeedFb selected motor speed feedback SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 ExtFanAck external fan acknowledge missing MotFanAck 10 06 MainContAck main contactor acknowledge missing MainContAck 10 21 type code mismatch TypeCode 97 01 ExternalDl external fault via binary input ExtFaultSel 30 31 ConvFanAck converter fan acknowledge missing ConvFanAck 10 20 FieldBusCom fieldbus communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 CommModule M1FexNotOK motor 1 field exciter not okay M2FexNotOK motor 2 field exciter not okay MotorStalled selected motor motor stalled Stal Time 30 01 StallSpeed 30 02 StallTorq 30 03 MotOverSpeed selected motor motor overspeed M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Int Scaling 1 1 5 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 214 Signal Parameter name FaultWord3 fault word 3 Fault word 3 Bit Fault text Fault code Comment and trip
540. tBlock 83 03 and all subsequent function blocks one spot forward A new function block can be placed in the now empty spot by programming its parameter set as usual Example A new function block needs to be placed in between the function block number four 84 22 to 84 27 and five 84 28 to 84 33 In order to do this 1 set AdapProgCmd 83 01 Edit 2 set EditBlock 83 03 5 selects function block 5 as the desired spot for the new function block 3 set EditCmd 83 02 Push shifts function block 5 and all subsequent function blocks one spot forward 4 Program empty spot 5 by means of 84 28 to 84 33 2 Delete Deletes the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock 83 03 and shifts all subsequent function blocks one spot backward To delete all function blocks set EditBlock 83 03 17 3 Protect Turns all parameters of the Adaptive Program into protected mode parameters cannot be read or written to Before using the Protect command set the pass code by means of PassCode 83 05 Attention Do not forget the pass code 4 Unprotect Reset of protected mode Before the Unprotect command can be used PassCode 83 05 has to be set Attention The proper pass code has to be used Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y EditBlock edit block Defines the function block which is selected by EditCmd 83 02 Push or Delete After a Push or Delete EditBlock 83 03 is automatically set back to 1 Note1 To delete all functi
541. tFault last fault Displays the last fault F lt Fault code gt lt FaultName gt e g F2 ArmOverCur Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile Y 2 LastFault 2 last fault Displays the 2 last fault F lt Fault code gt lt FaultName gt e g F2 ArmOverCur Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name 3 LastFault 3 last fault Displays the 3 last fault F lt Fault code gt lt FaultName gt e g F2 ArmOverCur Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Motor 1 field exciter alarm word Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment BO reserved B1 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Volatile Y M1FexFaultWord motor 1 field exciter fault word Motor 1 field exciter fault word Bit Fault text Fault code Comment BO reserved B1 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 226 Signal Parameter name M2FexAlarmWord motor 2 field exciter alarm word Motor 2 field exciter alarm word Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment BO reserved B1 reserved reserved reserved reserved re
542. tTorgFilt 1 07 with M 1BaseSpeed 99 04 Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax MotSpeed 1 04 for n gt M BaseSpeed 99 04 or Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax 100 for n lt M1BaseSpeed 99 04 or M 1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name MotTorq motor torque Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period Note1 the value is calculated every 20 ms Note2 the value is calculated the following way Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 MotCur 1 06 MotTorg 1 08 i00 with M 1BaseSpeed 99 04 MotSpeed 1 04 Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax for n gt M BaseSpeed 99 04 or Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax 100 for n lt M1BaseSpeed 99 04 or M 1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRipple current ripple Relative current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRippleFilt filtered current ripple Relative filtered current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Filtered with 200 ms Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y MainsVoltActRel relative actual mains voltage Relative actual mains voltage in percent of NomMain
543. tXplus3Val1 DsetXplus3Val2 DsetXplus3Val3 DsetXplus5Val3 10 DsetXplus7Val1 11 DsetXplus7Val2 DsetXplus7Val3 def value Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 125 After configuration the packed telegram is defined Output input telegrams na f S me f 01 03 05 index index Index AR 04 NS Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 126 Modbus RTU communication with fieldbus adapter RMBA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Modbus adapter RMBA 01 together with the DCS800 RMBA 01 DCS800 The Modbus communication with the drive requires the option RMBA 01 The protocol Modbus RTU is supported Related documentation Users Manual Modbus Adapter Module RMBA 01 SAFE 64498851 REV A The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RMBA 01 into a slot of the drive Slot 1 has to be used if the Modbus should control the drive Drive configuration The Modbus adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 and ModBusModule2 98 08 The serial communication parameters of the RMBA 01 adapter have to be set by means of group 52 Up to 12 data words in each direction are possible Parameter setting example The Modbus adapter can be either used to control the drive with the
544. tate RdyRun RdyRef is still zero RampOutZero RampHold and RamplinZero have to be set to zero see MainCtrlWord 7 01 When Jog1 command is given the drive goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed 23 02 alternatively Inching1 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 can be used Note3 Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 e SE Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed ACW Di Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Jog2 jogging 2 command Binary signal for Jog2 Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed2 23 03 Selection see Jog1 10 17 NotUsed min max ACW Di X NotUsed def Jog2 10 18 overrides Jog1 10 17 CommandSel 10 01 Local I O _ The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRef is still zero When Jog2 command is given the drives sets automatically RampOutZero RampHold RampinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 and goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed 2 23 03 CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRef is still zero RampOutZero RampHold and RamplinZero have to be set to zero see MainCtrlWord 7 01 When Jog2 command is given the drive goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeead2 23 03 alternatively Inching2 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 can be used Accele
545. tay alive Also the control circuits of the main contactor must be supplied during the mains undervoltage Auto reclosing defines whether the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt or if the drive will continue running after the mains voltage returns Short mains undervoltage The supervision of mains undervoltage has two levels 1 UNetMin1 30 22 alarm protection and trip level 2 UNetMin2 30 23 trip level If the mains voltage falls below UNetMin1 30 22 but stays above UNetMin2 30 23 the following actions take place 1 the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 2 single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible 3 the controllers are frozen 4 the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and 5 A111 MainsLowVolt is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt is generated If the mains voltage returns before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed and the overriding control keeps the commands On MCW bit 0 and Run MCW bit 3 1 the drive will start again after 2 seconds Otherwise the drive trips with F512 MainsLowVolt When the mains voltage drops below UNetMin2 30 23 the action is selected by means of PwrLossTrip 30 21 1 the drive is immediately tripped with F512 MainsLowVolt or 2 the drive starts up automatically see description for UNetMin1 30 22 Below UNetMin2 30 23 the field acknowled
546. te2 M2SpeedScale 49 22 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M2BaseSpeed 49 03 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Commissioning hint set M2SpeedScale 49 22 to maximum speed set M2BaseSpeed 49 03 to base speed set M2SpeedMax 49 20 M2SpeedMin 49 19 to maximum speed Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type l Volatile N M2EncMeasMode motor 2 encoder 1 measuring mode M2EncMeasMode 49 23 selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 1 0 A B Dir channel A rising edges for speed channel A not not used channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 1 channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channels B and B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 3 A B channels A A not and B B not rising and falling edges for speed and direction speed evaluation factor 4 default Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M2SpeedFbSel motor 2 speed feedback selector Motor 2 speed feedback selection 0 EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF default 1 Encoder speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 1 connected to either SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 2 Tacho speed is m
547. ted positive torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Calculated from the smallest maximum torque limit field weakening and armature current limits TorqUsedMax 2 22 FluxRefFldWeak 3 24 and M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqMinAll torque minimum all Relative calculated negative torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Calculated from the largest minimum torque limit field weakening and armature current limits TorqUsedMax 2 22 FluxRefFldWeak 3 24 and M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqUsedMax used torque maximum Relative positive torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Selected with TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 Connected to torque limiter after torque selector TorqSel 21 01 and load compensation LoadComp 26 02 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqUsedMin used torque minimum Relative negative torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Selected with TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 Connected to torque limiter after torque selector TorqSel 21 01 and load compensation LoadComp 26 02 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name TorqRefExt external torque reference Relative external torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after torque reference A selector
548. ter external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al2 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al3 19 ExFex Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 21 reserved 22 Exc Appl 1 Int Scaling 1 1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADW00031 1 Type Cc Volatile Y 4 08 MotiFexSwVer motor 1 firmware version of field exciter Motor 1 field exciter firmware version The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version This signal is set during initialization of the drive new values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling Type Cc Volatile Y Mot2FexSwvVer motor 2 firmware version of field exciter Motor 2 field exciter firmware version The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version This signal is set during initialization of the drive new values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling Type Volatile Y Com8sSwvVersion firmware version of SDCS COM 8 SDCS COM 8 firmware version The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version Thi
549. ter describes the I O configuration of digital and analog inputs and outputs with different hardware possibilities Digital inputs DI s The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 8 standard Dis All 8 standard Dis can be replaced with SDCS IOB 2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO 01 digital I O extension modules Thus the maximum number of DI s is 14 The hardware source is selected by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 for DI9 to DI11 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 for DI12 to DI14 and 10 BoardConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of digital UO extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 2 On the SDCS CON 4 the standard Dl s are filtered and not isolated On the SDCS IOB 2 the standard Die are filtered and isolated Selectable hardware filtering time DI7 and DI8 on the SDCS IOB 2 2msor10ms jumper S7 and S8 Input voltages 24VDC to 48 VDC 115 VAC or 230 VAC depending on the hardware for more details see Hardware Manual Scan time for DI1 to DI6 5ms Scan time for DI7 and DI8 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency 17 and 2 RDIO 01 The extension DI s are isolated and filtered Selectable hardware filtering time 2msor5mstoi0ms Input voltages 24VDC to 250 VDC 110 VAC to 230 VAC for more details see RDIO 01 User s Manual Scan time for DI9 to DI14 5msconnected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Attention
550. ti or EMF Rev Opti Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name M2FldRefMode motor 2 field current reference mode M2FidRefMode 45 13 selector 0 Internal motor 2 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel 8 09 or field heating FidHeatSel 21 18 default 1 M1FidCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 1 2 M2FlidRefExt M2FidRefExt 45 14 external field current reference Internal Internal M2FidRefExt Field current control 5 ms ParChange FidHeatSel 21 18 M1FidRefMode FidCurRefM1_ pera field Optitorque e current controller and M1FidHeatRef 44 04 field reversal M1FidRefExt 45 06 o group 45 O M1KpFex E 7 M1TiFex pem 7 M1PosLimCtrl e ParChange 10 10 FidHeatSel FidCurRefM2 M1FidRefMode 45 13 Motor 2 field otc C current controller M2FidHeatRef 49 06 M2FlidRefExt 45 14 o O M2KpFex M2TiFex 5 16 M2PosLimCtrl Int Scaling 1 Cc Volatile N M2FldRefExt motor 2 external field current reference Motor 2 external field current reference input in percent of M2NomFidCur 49 05 Note1 M2FidRefExt 45 14 is only valid if M2FidRefMode 45 13 M2FldRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M2FreewhlLev motor 2 freewheeling level Motor 2 field exciter free wheeling level only when M2UsedFexType 49 0
551. tii OM pasie a edgaden ittae vate dunesaclies E ea a R 77 Scalig RE 77 Analog outputs AO S WE 79 SDCS CON 4 SDCS 10B 3 0 ceeecccceeeeeecce ee eeeeee enna cases saaaaeaeeeeseaaeesesaeaeeeenseeeetenaes 79 BO EE 79 Bee le 80 Reutte de EE 80 CAMINO EE 81 Communication 82 Chapter TE 82 DCOSLink with SDCS DSL 4 iieii ee a a a a a cathe elie dita aie 82 Ee EE 82 Excitation COMMISSIONING a FEX 4 eeegerareg ider gd dinaeepueedelesncuacteutezarine is docrseeon Geveubtorst 82 PAV OUT FEX A design 82 Layout SDCS DSL eedegegen teecnadnahiasds ETE E cae E Geet 82 DOL ING E TDs aos EEE cc case eli nex tae et E ech atic s tae EE E TTT 83 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision 83 E DESLNK EE 84 Set the supply of the FEX 4 ergeet great EEN ee AER 85 Checking the Eh oo Be es cerns cates ences eegene 85 Master follOwer COMMISSIONING E 86 Set the Klein gies UE 86 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed 87 Activate MEN e 87 Activate the COMMUNICATION SUPEIVISION cece cece eenntee eter ee eeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeneeeeee 87 Send and receive EE 88 Firmware TT 88 Additional SettingS EE 89 Drive to drive COMMUNICATION ccceeeeeeeeceeeeee ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeeeeesageaaaaeeeeeeeseesensneeaaaes 90 Set the DCSLink ergeet eege Eeer 90 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed 91 Activate El e 91 Activate the communication SUPEIVISION cece ee eeee
552. tinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 1 0V 10V Uni O Vto 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N FilterAl3 filter time analog input 3 Analog input 3 filter time The hardware filter time is lt 2 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Al4HighVal analog input 4 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in Al4HighVal 13 13 Note1 To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N Al4LowVal analog input 4 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in A 4LowVal 13 14 Note1 Al3LowVal 13 14 is only valid if ConvModeAl4 13 15 10V Bi Note2 To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl4 conversion mode analog input 4 Analog input 4 on the SDCS CON 4 is only working
553. tion is inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms If MailBox1 94 12 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 1 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 2 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 3 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 4 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N MailBox2 mailbox 2 node ID Mailbox
554. tive 0 no Jog1 5 DI5 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 6 DI6 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jogi 7 DI7 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jogi 8 DI8 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 9 DIO 1 dog active 0 no Jog1 only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 AuxCirlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Note1 Jog2 10 18 overrides Jog1 10 17 Note2 CommandSel 10 01 Local I O The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRef is still zero When Jog1 command is given the drives sets automatically RampOutZero RampHold RampinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 and goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed 23 02 CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord The drive has to be in s
555. tlInitLo 50 08 and PosCount2InitLo 50 21 is valid 0 0 and 65536 360 for the high words PosCountHigh 3 08 PosCount2High 3 05 PosCountInitHi 50 09 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is valid 1 1 revolution default for the low words PosCountLow 3 07 PosCount2Low 3 04 PosCountlInitLo 50 08 and PosCount2InitLo 50 21 is valid 0 0 and 65536 360 for the high words PosCountHigh 3 08 PosCount2High 3 05 PosCountlInitHi 50 09 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is valid always 0 Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 342 Signal Parameter name Forward direction Reverse direction PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges edges PosCountMode 50 07 Scaled 360 720 PosCountMode 50 07 Rollover High word 0 High word 0 The position counter is controlled by SyncCommand 10 04 SyncCommand2 10 05 and AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bits 9 to 11 The status can be seen from AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 SyncRdy The position control function has to be implemented by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N PosCountlnitLo Position counter encoder 1 low initial value Position counter initial low word for pulse encoder 1 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 Rollover 0 and 65536 360 See also
556. tten to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block6Out block 6 output The value of function block 6 output Block 1 Output 84 39 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Block7Out block 7 output The value of function block 7 output Block 1 Output 84 45 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Block8Out block 8 output The value of function block 8 output Block1 Output 84 51 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block9Out block 9 output The value of function block 9 output Block1Output 84 57 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Sc
557. tting armature current M1MotNomCur 99 03 is set to zero field current does not decrease when the excitation is switched off field current actual doesn t reach field current reference no detection of field resistance field circuit open e g not connected respectively interrupted no writing of control parameters of speed controller tacho adjustment faulty or not OK or the tacho voltage is too high during autotuning tuning of speed controller speed feedback assistant or tacho fine tuning not possible due to speed limitation see e g M1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 Tuning of speed controller speed feedback assistant or tacho fine tuning not possible due to voltage limitation During the tuning of the speed controller the speed feedback assistant or the tacho fine tuning base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 might be reached Thus full armature voltage M1NomVolt 99 02 is necessary In case the mains voltage is too low to provide for the needed armature voltage the autotuning procedure is canceled Check and adapt if needed Mains voltage M1NomVolt 99 02 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 26 field weakening not allowed see M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 and FidCtriMode 44 01 reserved DCS800 Control Panel up or download not started DCS800 Control Panel data not up or downloaded in time reserved DCS800 Control Panel up or download checksum faulty DCS800 Control Panel up or download software faulty DCS800 Control Panel up or download verification fail
558. ture Thus the thermal model does not directly calculate the temperature of the motor but it calculates the temperature rise of the motor This is based on the fact that the motor will reach its end temperature after the specified time when starting to run the cold motor 40 C with nominal Fault tracing 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 414 current This time is about four times the motor thermal time constant The temperature rise of the motor behaves like the time constant which is proportional with the motor current to the power of two 2 2E o ie d 1 Motn When the motor is cooling down following temperature model is valid Le p eT 2 Motn with Pam temperature rise M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 temperature rise M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 temperature rise Mot TempCalc 1 20 LL actual motor current overload e g 170 Ion NOMinal motor current 100 t length of overload e g 60 s t temperature time constant in seconds M1ModelTime 31 01 As from the formulas 1 and 2 can be seen the temperature model uses the same time constant when the motor is heating or cooling down Alarm and tripping levels Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 and M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 If the levels are exceeded A107 M1OverLoad respectively F507 M1OverLoad is set The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alar
559. ty control for transmission LEDs This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance of the link Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 NodeAddr channel 2 node address Channel 2 is used for point to point communication connections between drives e g master follower communication Node address channel 2 1 125 Node addresses of slave drives not valid if Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 Master Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 MaFoMode channel 2 master follower mode Channel 2 can be used to send reference values e g torque reference from the master to one or several followers Master follower is an application in which machinery is run by several drives with all motor shafts coupled to each other by gears chains belts etc 0 reserved 1 NotUsed channel 2 is not used for master follower communication default 2 Master the drive is the master of the master follower link and broadcasts via channel 2 the contents of data set 41 defined by Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 to Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 3 Follower the drive is a follower of the master follower link and receives via channel 2 the contents of data set 41 defined by Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 to Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Note1 The followers node address is defined by Ch2 NodeAddr 70 08 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N Ch2 MasSig1 channel 2 master signal 1 Master signal 1 broadcasts via channel 2 as 17 value of data set 41 to all followers
560. ue 15 bits sign Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign in ms Input IN3 not used Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 160 Limit Type Logical function Illustration Operation The value connected to IN1 will be limited with IN2 as upper limit and with IN3 as lower limit OUT is the limited input value OUT stays 0 if the lower limit IN3 is greater or equal than the upper limit IN2 Connections Input IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign MaskSet Type Logical function Illustration MaskSet IN IN2 OUT Operation The block sets or resets the bits defined in IN1 and IN2 Input IN1 Word input Input IN2 Set word input Input IN3 Set Reset IN2 in IN1 Example operation shown with only one bit with IN3 Set with IN3 Reset IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT IN IN2 IN3 OUT 0 0 True 0 0 0 False 0 1 0 True 1 1 0 False 1 1 1 True 1 1 1 False 0 0 1 True 1 0 1 False 0 Example operation shown with whole word with IN3 Set 0 Connections Input IN1 and IN2 16 bit integer value packed boolean Input IN3 boolean Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean Adaptive Program 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 161 Max Type Arithmetic function Illustration Op
561. ue filter time Torque actual filter time constant for MotTorqgFilt 1 07 ls used for the EMF controller and the EMF feed forward Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 382 Signal Parameter name E C ResetAhCounter reset ampere hour counter Binary signal to reset AhCounter 1 39 0 NotUsed default 1 DIl Reset by rising edge 0 1 2 DI2 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 3 DIS Reset by rising edge 0 1 4 Di4 Reset by rising edge 0 1 5 DI5 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 6 DI6 Reset by rising edge 0 1 7 DI7 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 8 DI8 Reset by rising edge 0 1 9 DI9 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board NotUsed min max ACW Di X NotUsed det i 5 El El E 11 DI11 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11_ Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 13 MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 14 MCW Bit13 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 15 MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 16 MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 17 ACW Bit12 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 18 ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCitrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 Reset by risin
562. ulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and On is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note1 In case UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 On and UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run are set to low run and on commands are taken away at the same time or nearly contemporary OT Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 must have the same setting Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N StopMode stop mode Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run is set to low 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Run is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1
563. ult 1 fault Only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 no fault 1 fault Only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtrilWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 0 no fault 1 fault MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 0 no fault 1 fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N NotUsed min ACW Bit1 ExtFaultOnSel external fault on selector ExtFaultOnSel 30 33 determines the reaction to an external fault 0 Fault external fault is always valid independent from drive state default 1 Fault amp RdyRun external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 for at least 6 s Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N ExtAlarmOnSel external alarm on selector ExtAlarmOnSel 30 34 determines the reaction to an external alarm 0 Alarm external alarm is always valid independent from drive state default 1 Alarm amp RdyRun external alarm is only valid when drive state is RdyRun MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 for at least 6 s In
564. uooas oyog Bojeuy jasqapeads 1 DH RESERVES onesinasuain ees wspeedsion sumad 90 05 o uaa TEE raros O oumioypeeds EOT sepooue asing peodgooig pasdsow k awaiypeads Im LT 20 66 Le quawainseew peeds DE aposiopum Fon maL TT 00002 6z z 9y reosp ds awa H Du poe ue sw g g uopoaj as yenjoe paadg MOV Lipa paedsuvsiisdy Jaydwogaybo mg laueg HGJ SU y4dwogooy De awy auag uadoj ozve aumeaen eum eqdwogooy ZoLLuenu Peedsunyengy P SC Toodeun part S vz SUL peedgxewsiisdy ma z1apoouz koras posdsumsiLsdy zpeadgpexi4 va P ot 2 KEN It cl peedsxensiisd fzssdsunensdy Souen J ipaadspaxiy Ach uedi weedy Sei are v d Lean s0 v2 deems od NEEE zpoodspoxsH C0 EZ 602 zoybioy D eege wose une ene any bord us Ree IupesdsnvH EFEZ Mgh so a Loezieupeads Tore k ege zispe0ua St rr ez ER Jup but xaJo ypeed Jaydweyjeg zixqjeupesds 0 sma Zi MOV IECH Fame Sr nodueyreg ug us MON Iesse Vaeupesde ao ug Ppy 10paas enbo jeupeedsioe ig gedoe oe eet ls eupoods Ste ara See Bon tnpIMMULAN CH Ad ZO HL iigpeedgieg D Z esua SOLL dweydos 3 GEES SOgUIPIANUIAN uxajeupaads yeg BEEN TET use H zewlooy Leet Je pads 94 MINN sw g g uoqoajas Se na DEENEN va MONN aouasajas Deele e LIEHS Siechkun BO 02 guapeeds aaizen GE Bel daygpaods uogpeads jeypeedspoaig fra MOWN ire tiv soenxny oan es orez JET vaeszdwey SEN aposd spay 6002 Lo eedgpoxist ZO oasantuo wakes Wescher 8 MOND uyesedsi
565. up 40 Int Scaling 100 1 Type CurRef current reference Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 after adoption to field weakening Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRefUsed used current reference Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 after current limitation M 1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 M2CurLimBrdg2 20 13 MaxCurLimSpeed 43 17 to 43 22 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y ArmAlpha armature a firing angle Firing angle ol Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y ReactCur reactive current Relative actual reactive motor current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Firing angle of 12 pulse slave converter Valid in 12 pulse master only Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 185 Signal Parameter name PLLOut phase locked loop output Mains voltage cycle period time Is used to check if the synchronization is working properly 1 50 Hz 20 ms 20 000 1 60 Hz 16 7 ms 16 667 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y CurCtrllntegOut integral part of current controller output l part of the current controller s output in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurActPeak relative actual armature peak current Relative actual armature peak current in percent of M1NomCur
566. up 85 used as data container Adaptive Program 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 141 How to build the program The programmer connects a function block to other blocks through a Block Parameter Set The sets are also used for reading values from the firmware and transferring data to the firmware Each Block Parameter Set consists of six parameters in group 84 and a write pointer in group 86 The figure below shows the use of Block Parameter Set 1 in the firmware e 84 04 to 84 09 and 86 01 Parameter 84 04 selects the function block type Parameter 84 05 selects the source that input IN1 of the function block is connected to A negative value means that the signal will be inverted Parameter 84 06 selects the source that input IN2 of the function block is connected to A negative value means that the signal will be inverted Parameter 84 07 selects the source that input IN3 of the function block is connected to A negative value means that the signal will be inverted Parameter 84 08 defines the attributes of inputs Parameter 84 09 contains the value of the function block output which can be used further for other input selections The user cannot edit this parameter value The output value is also available in write pointer 86 01 Parameter 86 01 contains the destination parameter which should get the value How to connect the program to the firmware The output of the Adaptive Program needs to be connected to the firmw
567. urrent is measured by means of a current difference sensor in combination with Al4 X3 11 and X3 12 on the SDCS IOB 3 board 2 Di The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 3 DIS The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 4 DI3 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 5 Di4 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 6 DI5 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 7 DI6 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 8 DI7 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 9 DI8 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 10 DI9 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays Only available with digital extension board 11 DI10 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays Only available with digital extension board 12 DI The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays Only available with digital extension board pit 325 omg max Notusea of o Notused 75 e If ResCurDetectSel 30 05 is connected to a digital input only ResCurDetectDel 30 07 remains valid The trip limit ResCurDetectLim 30 06 is ad
568. us termination is needed jumper 1100 1 ON if bus termination is needed jumper S2 sets the ground termination jumper 1100 2 and S 1100 3 set the ground termination Communication 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Set the supply of the FEX 4 85 The FEX 4 can be either supplied by 1 phase or by 3 phases Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 M1OperModeFex4 45 22 3 phase X101 U1 X101 V1 X101 W1 X100 5A X100 35A Field X100 D1 M1OperModeFex4 45 22 1 phase gitt X100 35A X101 U1 Zen X101 V1 3 X101 W1 E X100 D1 Checking the FEX 4 There are several signals to check the FEX 4 installation Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 Mot1FexType 4 06 shows the FEX 4 yellow U731 or waiting for DCSLink M1UsedFexType 99 12 type as chosen with green U730 LED is blinking communication DCSLinkStat1 4 18 DCSLinkStat2 4 19 as chosen with show the status of or the field exciter node M1FexNode 94 08 yellow U731 or green U730 LED is steady DCSLink communication is OK For further information consult the DCS800 Firmware Manual 3ADW000193 and the DCS800 Hardware Manual 3ADW000194 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Communication 86 Master follower commissioning Set the DCSLink hardware Cable connection Master SDCS DSL 4 1st follower SDCS DSL 4 X8 X8 lt a Rame
569. vOverTemp A104 Off3FieldBus A139 Off3ViaDI A102 DC BreakAck A103 OverVoltProt A120 DynBrakeAck A105 P2PandMFCom A112 ExternalDl A126 ParAdded A131 ParComp A134 FaultSuppres A123 ParConflict A132 FieldBusCom A128 ParRestored A129 FoundNewAppl A118 ParUpDwnLoad A135 IligFieldBus A140 RetainInv A133 LocalCmdLoss A130 SpeedFb A125 SpeedNotZero A137 M1OverLoad A107 SpeedScale A124 M1OverTemp A106 M2OverLoad A110 TachoRange A115 For additional fault messages see SysFaultWord 9 10 439 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Fault tracing 440 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 101 Off2ViaDI Off2 Emergency Off Coast stop pending via digital input start inhibition There is no problem with the drive itself Check Off2 10 08 if necessary invert the signal group 10 102 Off38ViaDI Off3 E stop pending via digital input RdyRun 1 There is no problem with the drive itself Check E Stop 10 09 if necessary invert the signal group 10 103 DC BreakAck Selected motor DC Breaker acknowledge missing 9 06 RdyRun 1 a is set to 150 and single firing pulses are given thus bit 2 the drive cannot be started or re started while the DC breaker acknowledge is missing Check DC BreakAck 10 23 if necessary invert the signal group 10 104 Converter overtemperature 9 06 always ConvOverTemp Wait until the converter i
570. vTimeOut 47 05 is only active in the 12 pulse master less than less than 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 current direction hmmm a 12 pulse master current direction 12 pulse slave Note1 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 and ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must be longer than RevDly 43 14 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Shared motion M2NomVolt motor 2 nominal DC voltage Motor 2 nominal armature voltage DC from the motor rating plate Note1 In 12 pulse serial mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor voltage if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in series are connected it is 100 of one motor s rated voltage Note2 The hardware of the measuring circuit has to be adapted for motor voltages lower than 50 V Int Scaling 1 1V Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 327 Signal Parameter name M2NomCur motor 2 nominal DC current Motor 2 nominal armature current DC from the motor rating plate If several motors are connected to the drive enter the total current of all motors Note1 In 12 pulse parallel mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor current if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in para
571. vailable with digital extension board 1 Inverted only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Speed reference input min Diret Diret Direct Direct Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f Signal Parameter name Ref1Mux speed reference 1 selector multiplexer Speed reference 1 selector 0 Open switch for speed ref 1 is fixed open 1 Close switch for speed ref 1 is fixed closed default 2 DI 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 3 DIS 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 4 DI3 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 5 DI4 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 6 DI5 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 7 DI6 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 8 DI7 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 9 DI8 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 10 DI9 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 11 D10 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 12 DI11 1 switch is clos
572. value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by CANopen adapter The values can be automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCAN 01 DCS800 parameter setting using group 51 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual VotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Further information RX and TX parameters 51 07 51 14 and 51 18 51 25 are directly connected to the desired DCS800 parameters Take care that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 and 92 to prevent data trouble Parameter setting example 2 using groups 90 and 92 Communication via groups 90 and 92 is using 4 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using groups 90 and 92 Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Communication 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 109 Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word
573. ware description 8ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 54 TorgRefUsed 2 13 FidRetGain 45 11 Field current reference gain For example with FidRefGain 45 11 20 100 field current is generated at TorgRefUsed 2 13 20 Field current monitoring Field During normal operation the field current is compared with M1FidMinTrip 30 12 SE The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if the field minimum trip ees current drops below this limit During field reversal the situation is different M1FidMinTrip 30 12 is disabled for FldCtriMode 44 01 Fix Opti EMF Opti Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 of FidCurRefM1 3 30 The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if 50 of FidCurRefM1 3 30 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed If actual flux and armature voltage of the motor cannot follow the field current during field reversal it is necessary to delay the active field direction FluxRevMonDly 45 08 is the maximum allowed time within Mot1FldCurRel 1 29 and the internal motor flux doesn t correspond to each other during field reversal During this time F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 is disabled Flux reversal The sign of Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 is used to generate the field reversal ee acknowledge To avoid signal noise problems a small hysteresis defined by y means of FldRevHyst
574. with voltage The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 1 0V 10V Uni OVto10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto10V 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N FilterAl4 filter time analog input 4 Analog input 4 filter time The hardware filter time is lt 2 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 249 Signal Parameter name 13 17 TachoHighVal analog input tacho high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input tacho is scaled to the voltage in TachoHighVal 13 17 Note1 To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N TachoLowVal analog input tacho low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input tacho is scaled to the voltage in TachoLowVal TachoLowVal 13 18 is only valid if ConvModeTacho 13 19 10V Bi To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V I
575. x Examples If PID Resetindex 40 19 701 main control word and PID ResetBitNo 40 20 12 then the PID controller reset is active when bit 12 is high If PID Resetindex 40 19 701 main control word and PID ResetBitNo 40 20 12 then the PID controller reset is active when bit 12 is low Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N 40 20 PID ResetBitNo PID controller reset bit number ou od vu Bit number of the signal parameter selected with PID Resetindex 40 19 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N PID Reserved PID reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Brake control Brake Control is activated by means of M1BrakeCtrl 42 01 and controls a mechanical brake automatically with the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command The internal logic is designed to meet the requirements of holding brakes e g carriage drives or coilers as well as the requirements for hanging load e g cranes Overview brake control Run command 7 01 bit 3 Release speed TorgProvOK torque starting controller 7 03 bit 11 proving torque M1TorgProvTime 42 10 0 BrakeFaultFun StrtTorqRefSel 42 06 M1BrakeStopDljy_SJ BrakeEStopMode 42 13 42 09 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 Release speed reference M1BrakeRefDI 42 03 M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 Brake open lift command Ss QF 9 02 bit 7 Rar OI MotSpeed DCS800 Brake Control simply_a vsd ZeroSpeedLim M1ZeroSpeedDI
576. xciter master OnOff1 StartStop and Reset Only available when OperModeSel 43 01 FieldExciter Local I O Local I O Note1 Local control mode has higher priority than the selection made with CommandSel 10 01 Note2 The commands Off2 10 08 E Stop 10 09 and Reset 10 03 are always active in case they are assigned regardless of CommandSel 10 01 setting Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Direction direction of rotation Binary signal for Direction Direction 10 02 allows to change the direction of rotation by negating the speed reference in remote operation 0 NotUsed default 1 DiH 1 Reverse 0 Forward 2 DI2 1 Reverse 0 Forward 3 DI3 1 Reverse 0 Forward 4 DI4 1 Reverse 0 Forward 5 DI5 1 Reverse 0 Forward 6 DI6 1 Reverse 0 Forward 7 DI7 1 Reverse 0 Forward 8 DI8 1 Reverse 0 Forward 9 DI9 1 Reverse 0 Forward only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 Reverse 0 Forward only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 Reverse 0 Forward only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 Rev
577. xt We VE PJ YDIO FOE S xenpaadsiw f JPuypaadsxny ELEZ Loezieypeeds oraz CRUZ wen Ire e ege TD SCH Iet et et pieupeeds modwey zieupeeds d Sot SC geg peers a E etang JelOonu00 Olel 10 U09 MOPUIM Tau areosjaypaads deys 980 94 o deeg areydooig i x EE i ES SS MOWN DS Teror zbor FE Je sw Ce sa 0NU09 paadg ZF 01 Dor sw g du paeds joued sw el uonoajas 9u 1 4 1 paeds TOYLNOOD a adS NIVHO 3ON3 3434 Q3JdS Appendix A Firmware structure diagram 3ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 452 ep EB aax weabetp eanqonz3s maz 008590 Busojpeyoyny GU Banuonoeiqeauq p Lg ue wiCunesy erg peeds4Wa 2 ug psadsoieZ Lg mobo opg Suwun eg pwoeyeg gig povexey LG Dy Log 949 Appui sug ear pg Leen ella yseogdoys 3 omg mopuIMJOINO Hid Apeaybo7ereq old Pensesal Lg Pansesal plug p m s EL g Pensesal ZL NG p m s LLG Tur OLE aow y 649 quiodjesiy 849 wely Lud PeiouuuO og SNEISNEHO SUG SMRISNZHO FI p ddu mg JOHAPH Za unyApy Lg uo Apy 049 Dua du Jeyeeiq 90 GIG pwo din Jeyeesq O0 pL uano 019z SLg uano snonunuoo zg s s nd Bumy 4g p m s 04g Bulyesouab nup eg pwo UO IO gug pwo UOJOJORJUOQUIEW 11q Buryesg oiweudp gig PWO UOPI9 4 SUA Voteup Dau pg Buneay Jojow gg p m s ZG p m s Lg pwo uosuey Og syne4 I SIE
578. y The position counter synchronization is fixed assigned to input DI7 if Ref1Mux 11 02 Ref2Mux 11 12 MotPotUp 11 13 MotPotDown 11 14 MotPotMin 11 15 Ramp2Select 22 11 Par2Select 24 29 TorqMux 26 05 ResCurDetectSel 30 05 ExtFaultSel 30 31 ExtAlarmSel 30 32 M1KlixonSel 31 08 M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 FldBoostSel 44 17 M2kKlixonSel 49 38 ZeroCurDetect 97 18 ResetAhCounter 97 21 JO configuration 38ADW000193R0601 DCS800 Firmware Manual e f 71 activated via SyncCommand 10 04 DI12 to DI14 are only available in the DI StatWord 8 05 thus they can only be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control SDCS CON 4 or SDOS IOB 2 d X6 1 es Dit Invert 10 25 H Use of Dis only defaults default X6 2 Gs Di2invert 10 26 rs ConvFanAck 10 20 DH X6 3 gt Divert 10 27 MotFanAck 10 06 ae x64 Pg iginvert 10 28 a E X6 5 DIS 1 pisinvert 10 29 A MainContAck 10 21 DI3 X6 6 US piginvert 10 30 4 Off2 10 08 zp xe7 P e pizinvert 10 31 ven P8 Disnvert 10 32 4 E Stop 10 09 DI5 IO BoardContig 98 15 Inversion of Dis Reset 10 03 Die Dt m OnOff1 10 15 DI7 nb StartStop 10 16 Dis SE D A g

DCS800 Firmware Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents